1669628761
FANUC
Инструкция по эксплуатации станка ЧПУ на русском языке на базе системы Fanuc 16, 18i, 21i. Инструкции в редактируемом формате DOC для программы microsoft word
Прикрепленные файлы
1
05.doc
1.1 МБ
2
06.doc
719 КБ
3
07.doc
411.5 КБ
4
08.doc
370.5 КБ
5
09.doc
228.5 КБ
6
10.doc
633.5 КБ
Добавить
комментарийЧтобы добавить комментарий, необходимо авторизоваться
Последние добавленные макеты
Резной наличник
Меч «Оскверненный испепелитель»
Клинок «Ледяная скорбь»
Набор из 100 вариантов топперов на все случаи жизни
Копилка — джойстик
Макет ключницы с дверью под 4 мм
Смотреть все
FANUC Series 16*
ODEL B
FANUC Series 18*-MODEL B
FANUC Series 160*-MODEL B
FANUC Series 180*-MODEL B
FANUC Series 160*s-MODEL B
FANUC Series 180*s-MODEL B
PARAMETER MANUAL
B-63530EN/03
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the country
from where the product is exported.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by or in the main body.
B-63530EN/03 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and
preventing damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into
Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning,
Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being
injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if
the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment
being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary
information other than Warning and Caution.
— Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
B-63530EN/03 PREFACE
PREFACE
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations are :
Model name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 16i-TB 16i-TB
FANUC Series 16i-MB 16i-MB
FANUC Series 160i-TB 160i-TB
FANUC Series 160i-MB 160i-MB
FANUC Series 160is-TB 160is-TB
FANUC Series 160is-MB 160is-MB
FANUC Series 18i-TB 18i-TB
FANUC Series 18i-MB5 18i-MB5
FANUC Series 18i-MB 18i-MB
FANUC Series 180i-TB 180i-TB
FANUC Series 180i-MB5 180i-MB5
FANUC Series 180i-MB 180i-MB
FANUC Series 180is-TB 180is-TB
FANUC Series 180is-MB5 180is-MB5
FANUC Series 180is-MB 180is-MB
NOTE
1 For ease of explanation, the models may be
classified as follows:
T series:
16i-TB/160i-TB/160is-TB/18i-TB/180i-TB/180is-TB
M series:
16i-MB/160i-MB/160is-MB/18i-MB5/ 180i-MB5/
180is-MB5/18i-MB/180i-MB/180is-MB
2 In this manual, the 18i/180i/180is-MB indicates
both the 18i/180i/180is-MB5 and
18i/180i/180is-MB unless otherwise specified.
3 Some functions described in this manual may not
be applied to some products.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS
(B-63522EN).
Series 16i
Series 160i
Series 160is
Series 18i
Series 180i
Series 180is
p-1
PREFACE B-63530EN/03
Related manuals of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is-MODEL
B
The following table lists the manuals related to Series 16i, Series 18i,
Series 21i, Series 160i, Series 180i, Series 210i, Series 160is, Series
180is, Series 210is-MODEL B. This manual is indicated by an
asterisk(*).
Related manuals of Series 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/ 210is-MODEL B
Manual name
DESCRIPTIONS B-63522EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63523EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63523EN-1
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-TB
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Series 16i/160i/160is-MB, Series 18i/180i/180i-MB5,
Series 18i/180i/180is-MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Series 21i/210i/210is-TB OPERATOR’S MANUAL
Series 21i/210i/210is-MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63525EN
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MODEL B
PARAMETER MANUAL
Series 21i/210i/210is-MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Macro Compiler/Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-61803E-1
C Language Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-62443EN-3
FANUC MACRO COMPILER (For Personal Computer)
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
CAP (T series)
FANUC Super CAPi T OPERATOR’S MANUAL
FANUC Symbol CAPi T OPERATOR’S MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE For Lathe PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63343EN
MANUAL GUIDE For Lathe OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63344EN
CAP (M series)
FANUC Super CAPi M OPERATOR’S MANUAL
MANUAL GUIDE For Milling PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63423EN
MANUAL GUIDE For Milling OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63424EN
PMC
PMC Ladder Language PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-61863E
PMC C Language PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-61863E-1
Network
I/O Link-II OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-62924EN
Profibus-DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-62924EN
Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63354EN
FAST Ethernet Board/FAST DATA SERVER
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
DeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63404EN
PC function
Screen Display Function OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63164EN
Specification
number
B-63524EN
B-63534EN
B-63604EN
B-63614EN
B-63530EN *
B-63610EN
B-66102E
B-63284EN
B-63304EN
B-63294EN
B-63644EN
p-2
B-63530EN/03 PREFACE
Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR αi series
The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR αi
series
Manual name Specification number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC LINEAR MOTOR series
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αis series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR αi series
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR βis series
PARAMETER MANUAL
B-65262EN
B-65272EN
B-65222EN
B-65282EN
B-65285EN
B-65270EN
B-65280EN
B-65270EN
Related manuals of SERVO MOTOR α series
The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR α
series
Manual name Specification number
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series
DESCRIPTIONS
FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series
PARAMETER MANUAL
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series
PARAMETER MANUAL
Either of the following servo motors and the corresponding spindle
can be connected to the CNC covered in this manual.
• FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series
• FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi
series of servo motor is used. For servo motor and spindle information,
refer to the manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually
connected.
B-65142E
B-65152E
B-65162E
B-65165E
B-65150E
B-65160E
p-3
B-63530EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ……………………………s-1
PREFACE……………………………………………………………………………………….p-1
1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS……………………………………………………….. 1
2 SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI ……………………………………………. 2
3 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH
THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE …………………………………………. 4
3.1 OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE ……………………………………………………………………………………..5
3.2 INPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER
INTERFACE ……………………………………………………………………………………..6
4 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS ………………………………………………..7
4.1 PARAMETERS OF SETTING……………………………………………………………… 9
4.2 PARAMETERS OF READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE OR REMOTE
BUFFER ………………………………………………………………………………………… 14
4.2.1 Parameters Common to all Channels…………………………………………………………….15
4.2.2 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0) ……………………………………………….16
4.2.3 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1) ……………………………………………….18
4.2.4 Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2) ……………………………………………….18
4.2.5 Parameters of Channel 3 (I/O CHANNEL=3) ……………………………………………….19
4.3 PARAMETERS OF DNC1/DNC2 INTERFACE …………………………………….23
4.4 PARAMETERS OF M-NET INTERFACE…………………………………………….. 27
4.5 PARAMETERS OF REMOTE DIAGNOSIS…………………………………………. 30
4.6 PARAMETERS OF DNC1 INTERFACE #2 ………………………………………….34
4.7 PARAMETERS OF MEMORY CARD INTERFACE………………………………. 36
4.8 PARAMETERS OF FACTOLINK ……………………………………………………….. 37
4.9 PARAMETERS OF DATA SERVER…………………………………………………… 39
4.10 PARAMETERS OF ETHERNET………………………………………………………… 40
4.11 PARAMETERS OF POWER MATE CNC MANAGER…………………………… 41
4.12 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL/INCREMENT SYSTEM………………… 42
4.13 PARAMETERS OF COORDINATES………………………………………………….. 58
4.14 PARAMETERS OF STORED STROKE CHECK ………………………………….. 68
4.15 PARAMETERS OF CHUCK AND TAILSTOCK BARRIER (T SERIES)……. 74
4.16 PARAMETERS OF FEEDRATE ………………………………………………………… 78
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63530EN/03
4.17 PARAMETERS OF ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL …….. 100
4.18 PARAMETERS OF SERVO (1 OF 2) ………………………………………………..133
4.19 PARAMETERS OF DI/DO ………………………………………………………………. 188
4.20 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (1 OF 2) ……………………………… 194
4.21 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS ……………………………………………………..236
4.22 PARAMETERS OF PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ………………………. 249
4.23 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE CONTROL ………………………………………….262
4.24 PARAMETERS OF TOOL COMPENSATION ……………………………………. 315
4.25 PARAMETERS OF WHEEL WEAR COMPENSATION……………………….. 337
4.26 PARAMETERS OF CANNED CYCLES…………………………………………….. 338
4.26.1 Parameters of Canned Cycle for Drilling …………………………………………………….338
4.26.2 Parameters of Threading Cycle ………………………………………………………………….346
4.26.3 Parameters of Multiple Repetitive Canned Cycle …………………………………………346
4.26.4 Parameters of Small-hole Peck Drilling Cycle……………………………………………..350
4.27 PARAMETERS OF RIGID TAPPING ………………………………………………..355
4.28 PARAMETERS OF SCALING AND COORDINATE SYSTEM
ROTATION …………………………………………………………………………………… 384
4.29 PARAMETERS OF SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING……………………. 388
4.30 PARAMETERS OF POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION …………….389
4.31 PARAMETERS OF NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL……………………….. 392
4.32 PARAMETERS OF INDEX TABLE INDEXING…………………………………… 396
4.33 PARAMETERS OF INVOLUTE INTERPOLATION ……………………………..398
4.34 PARAMETERS OF EXPONENTIAL INTERPOLATION ………………………. 401
4.35 PARAMETERS OF FLEXIBLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL………………. 402
4.36 PARAMETERS OF STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION (1 OF 2) ……….. 406
4.37 PARAMETERS OF INCLINATION COMPENSATION ………………………… 410
4.38 PARAMETERS OF CUSTOM MACROS…………………………………………… 411
4.39 PARAMETERS OF ONE TOUCH MACRO ……………………………………….. 420
4.40 PARAMETERS OF PATTERN DATA INPUT ……………………………………..421
4.41 PARAMETERS OF POSITIONING BY OPTIMAL ACCELERATION ……..422
4.42 PARAMETERS OF SKIP FUNCTION ………………………………………………. 428
4.43 PARAMETERS OF AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) AND
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) ……………… 436
4.44 PARAMETERS OF EXTERNAL DATA INPUT …………………………………… 439
4.45 PARAMETERS OF FINE TORQUE SENSING…………………………………… 440
4.46 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE…………………………….. 442
4.47 PARAMETERS OF GRAPHIC DISPLAY…………………………………………… 450
c-2
B-63530EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.47.1 Parameters of Graphic Display / Dynamic Graphic Display…………………………..450
4.47.2 Parameters of Graphic Color……………………………………………………………………..455
4.48 PARAMETERS OF RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY…………. 457
4.49 PARAMETERS OF TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ……………………………….. 461
4.50 PARAMETERS OF POSITION SWITCH FUNCTIONS ……………………….. 468
4.51 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL OPERATION AND AUTOMATIC
OPERATION…………………………………………………………………………………. 472
4.52 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE FEED, MANUAL HANDLE
INTERRUPTION AND TOOL DIRECTION HANDLE FEED …………………. 480
4.53 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL LINEAR/CIRCULAR FUNCTION……………. 487
4.54 PARAMETERS OF REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH
MECHANICAL STOPPER ………………………………………………………………. 488
4.55 PARAMETERS OF SOFTWARE OPERATOR’S PANEL …………………….. 490
4.56 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAM RESTART……………………………………….. 495
4.57 PARAMETERS OF HIGH-SPEED MACHINING (HIGH-SPEED CYCLE
MACHINING / HIGH-SPEED REMOTE BUFFER) ………………………………496
4.58 PARAMETERS OF ROTARY TABLE DYNAMIC FIXTURE OFFSET ……. 504
4.59 PARAMETERS OF POLYGON TURNING ………………………………………… 506
4.60 PARAMETERS OF EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT…………………………………. 513
4.61 PARAMETERS OF HOBBING MACHINE AND SIMPLE ELECTRIC
GEAR BOX (EGB) …………………………………………………………………………. 514
4.62 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC…………………………………… 527
4.63 PARAMETERS OF TWO-PATH CONTROL………………………………………. 536
4.64 PARAMETERS OF INTERFERENCE CHECK BETWEEN TWO TOOL
POSTS (TWO-PATH) (FOR TWO-PATH CONTROL)…………………………. 538
4.65 PARAMETERS OF SYNCHRONOUS/COMPOSITE CONTROL AND
SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL ………………………………………………………….541
4.66 PARAMETERS OF ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ………………………………..561
4.67 PARAMETERS OF B-AXIS CONTROL…………………………………………….. 564
4.68 PARAMETERS OF SIMPLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ………………….571
4.69 PARAMETERS OF SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP .. 581
4.70 PARAMETERS OF CHOPPING ………………………………………………………. 582
4.71 PARAMETERS OF HIGH-SPEED AND HIGH-PRECISION CONTOUR
CONTROL BY RISC (M SERIES) …………………………………………………….585
4.71.1 Parameters of Acceleration/Deceleration before Interpolation ……………………….585
4.71.2 Parameters of Automatic Speed Control ……………………………………………………..589
4.72 PARAMETERS OF HIGH-SPEED POSITION SWITCH (1 OF 2) ………….602
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63530EN/03
4.73 OTHER PARAMETERS …………………………………………………………………. 608
4.74 PARAMETERS OF TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ……………………………………… 618
4.75 PARAMETERS OF MAINTENANCE ………………………………………………… 619
4.76 PARAMETERS OF EMBEDDED MACRO…………………………………………. 621
4.77 PARAMETERS OF HIGH-SPEED POSITION SWITCH (2 OF 2) ………….628
4.78 PARAMETERS OF SUPERIMPOSED COMMAND FUNCTION IN
BINARY OPERATION ……………………………………………………………………. 631
4.79 PARAMETERS OF SERVO SPEED CHECK …………………………………….. 632
4.80 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE FUNCTIONS…………………………. 633
4.81 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE FOR 5-AXIS MACHINING ………. 634
4.82 PARAMETERS OF MANUAL HANDLE FEED ……………………………………637
4.83 PARAMETERS OF MULTI-PATH CONTROL …………………………………….639
4.84 PARAMETERS OF ACCELERATIOON CONTROL ……………………………. 648
4.85 PARAMETERS OF EXTERNAL DECELERATION POSITIONS
EXPANSION…………………………………………………………………………………. 650
4.86 PARAMETERS OF OPERATION HISTORY ……………………………………… 652
4.87 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAY AND EDIT (2 OF 2) ……………………………… 656
4.88 PARAMETERS OF TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTIONS……………………. 660
4.89 PARAMETERS OF STRAIGHTNESS COMPENSATION (2 OF 2) ……….. 665
4.90 PARAMETERS OF INTERPOLATION TYPE STRAIGHTNESS
COMPENSATION………………………………………………………………………….. 667
4.91 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING CONDITION SELECTING SCREEN …. 669
4.92 PARAMETERS OF DUAL CHECK SAFETY ………………………………………681
4.93 PARAMETERS OF SERVO (2 OF 2) ………………………………………………..689
4.94 PARAMETERS OF SERVO GUIDE Mate …………………………………………. 690
4.95 PARAMETERS OF INTERFERENCE CHECK FOR ROTARY AREA……. 691
4.96 PARAMETERS OF SLIDE AXIS CONTROL FOR LINK-TYPE
PRESSES…………………………………………………………………………………….. 708
4.97 PARAMETERS OF AI/AI-NANO HIGH-PRECISION CONTOUR
CONTROL AND FUNCTIONS RELATED FOR RISC PROCESSOR
OPERATION…………………………………………………………………………………. 710
4.98 PARAMETERS OF 5-AXIS MACHINING ………………………………………….. 726
APPENDIX
A. CHARACTER CODE LIST …………………………………………………………763
c-4
B-63530EN/03 1.DISPLAYING PARAMETERS
1 DISPLAYING PARAMETERS
Follow the procedure below to display parameters.
SYSTEM
(1) Press the
required, or alternatively, press the
then the [PARAM] section display soft key. The parameter
screen is then selected.
function key on the MDI as many times as
SYSTEM
function key once,
(2) The parameter screen consists of multiple pages. Use step (a) or
(b) to display the page that contains the parameter you want to
display.
(a) Use the page select key or the cursor move keys to display
the desired page.
(b) Enter the data number of the parameter you want to display
from the keyboard, then press the [NO.SRH] soft key. The
parameter page containing the specified data number
appears with the cursor positioned at the data number. (The
NOTE
If key entry is started with the section select soft
data is displayed in reverse video.)
keys displayed, they are replaced automatically by
operation select soft keys including [NO.SRH].
Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key can also cause the
operation select keys to be displayed.
— 1 —
2.SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI B-63530EN/03
2 SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI
Follow the procedure below to set parameters.
(1) Place the NC in the MDI mode or the emergency stop state.
(2) Follow the substeps below to enable writing of parameters.
OFFSET
SETTING
1. To display the setting screen, press the
as many times as required, or alternatively press the
function key once, then the [SETTING] section select soft
key. The first page of the setting screen appears.
2. Position the cursor on «PARAMETER WRITE» using the
cursor move keys.
function key
OFFSET
SETTING
3. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft
keys.
4. To set «PARAMETER WRITE=» to 1, press the [ON:1]
soft key, or alternatively enter 1 and press the [INPUT] soft
key. From now on, the parameters can be set. At the same
time an alarm condition (P/S100 PARAMETER WRITE
ENABLE) occurs in the CNC.
SYSTEM
(3) To display the parameter screen, press the
many times as required, or alternatively press the
key once, then the [PARAM] section select soft key.
(See Chapter 1 «DISPLAYING PARAMETERS.»)
(4) Display the page containing the parameter you want to set, and
position the cursor on the parameter. (See Chapter 1
«DISPLAYING PARAMETERS.»)
function key as
SYSTEM
function
— 2 —
B-63530EN/03 2.SETTING PARAMETERS FROM MDI
(5) Enter data, then press the [INPUT] soft key. The parameter
indicated by the cursor is set to the entered data.
[Example] 12000 [INPUT]
Data can be entered continuously for parameters, starting at
the selected parameter, by separating each data item with a
semicolon (;).
[Example]
Entering 10;20;30;40 and pressing the [INPUT] key assigns
values 10, 20, 30, and 40 to parameters in order starting at
the parameter indicatedby the cursor.
(6) Repeat steps (4) and (5) as required.
(7) If parameter setting is complete, set «PARAMETER WRITE=»
to 0 on the setting screen to disable further parameter setting.
(8) Reset the NC to release the alarm condition (P/S100).
If an alarm condition (P/S000 PLEASE TURN OFF POWER)
occurs in the NC, turn it off before continuing operation.
— 3 —
3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE B-63530EN/03
3 INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING
PARAMETERS THROUGH THE
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
This section explains the parameter input/output procedures for
input/output devices connected to the reader/puncher interface.
The following description assumes the input/output devices are ready
for input/output. It also assumes parameters peculiar to the
input/output devices, such as the baud rate and the number of stop bits,
have been set in advance. (See Section 4.2.)
— 4 —
B-63530EN/03 3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
3.1 OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
(1) Select the EDIT mode or set to Emergency stop.
SYSTEM
(2) To select the parameter screen, press the
many times as required, or alternatively press the
key once, then the [PARAM] section select soft key.
(3) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft keys,
then press the forward menu key located at the right-hand side of
the soft keys to display another set of operation select keys
including [PUNCH].
function key as
SYSTEM
function
(4) Pressing the [ALL] or [NON-0]soft key changes the soft key
display as shown below:
(5) Pressing the [PUNCH] soft key changes the soft key display as
shown below:
(6) Press the [EXEC] soft key to start parameter output. When
parameters are being output, «OUTPUT» blinks in the state
display field on the lower part of the screen.
(7) When parameter output terminates, «OUTPUT» stops blinking.
Press the
RESET
key to interrupt parameter output.
— 5 —
3.INPUTTING AND OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE B-63530EN/03
3.2 INPUTTING PARAMETERS THROUGH THE
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE
(1) Place the NC in the emergency stop state.
(2) Enable parameter writing.
OFFSET
SETTING
1. To display the setting screen, press the
as many times as required, or alternatively press the
function key once, then the [SETTING] section select soft
key. The first page of the setting screen appears.
2. Position the cursor on «PARAMETER WRITE» using the
cursor move keys.
3. Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select soft
keys.
4. To set «PARAMETER WRITE=» to 1, press the ON:1 soft
key, or alternatively enter 1, then press the [INPUT] soft
key. From now on, parameters can be set. At the same time
an alarm condition (P/S100 PARAMETER WRITE
ENABLE) occurs in the NC.
(3) To select the parameter screen, press the
SYSTEM
function key
OFFSET
SETTING
function key as
SYSTEM
many times as required, or alternatively press the
key once,
then [PARAM] soft key.
(4) Press the [(OPRT)] soft key to display operation select keys, then
press the forward menu key located at the right-hand side of the
soft keys to display another set of operation select soft keys
including [READ].
(5) Pressing the [READ] soft key changes the soft key display as
shown below:
(6) Press the [EXEC] soft key to start inputting parameters from the
input/output device. When parameters are being input, «INPUT»
blinks in the state display field on the lower part of the screen.
(7) When parameter input terminates, «INPUT» stops blinking. Press
RESET
the
key to interrupt parameter input.
(8) When parameter read terminates, «INPUT» stops blinking, and
an alarm condition (P/S000) occurs in the NC. Turn it off before
continuing operation.
— 6 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
4 DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Parameters are classified by data type as follows:
Table 4 Data Types and Valid Data Ranges of Parameters
Data type Valid data range Remarks
Bit
Bit axis
Byte
Byte axis
Word
Word axis
2-word
2-word axis
NOTE
1 For the bit type and bit axis type parameters, a
single data number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit
has a different meaning.
2 The axis type allows data to be set separately for
each control axis.
3 The valid data range for each data type indicates a
general range. The range varies according to the
parameters. For the valid data range of a specific
parameter, see the explanation of the parameter.
(1) Notation of bit type and bit axis type parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC
Data No. Data #0 to #7 are bit positions.
1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis
Data No. Data.
(2) Notation of parameters other than bit type and bit axis type
0 or 1
-128 to 127
0 to 255
-32768 to 32767
0 to 65535
-99999999 to 99999999
In some parameters, signs are
ignored.
In some parameters, signs are
ignored.
— 7 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
NOTE
1 The bits left blank in Chapter 4 “DESCRIPTION OF
PARAMETERS” and parameter numbers that appear on
the display but are not found in the parameter list are
reserved for future expansion. They must always be 0.
2 Parameters having different meanings between the T
series and M series and parameters that are valid only for
the T or M series are indicated in two levels as shown
below. Parameters left blank are unavailable.
[Example1]
Parameter No. 5010 has different meanings for the T
series and M series.
5010
Tool nose radius compensation …
Tool compensation C …
T series
M series
[Example2]
DPI is a parameter common to the M and T series, but
GSB and GSC are parameters valid only for the T
series.
#7 #6 #0
3401
GSC GSB DPI
DPI
T series
M series
[Example3]
The following parameter is provided only for the M
series.
1450
F1 digit feed …
T series
M series
— 8 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
4.1 PARAMETERS OF SETTING
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC
At least one of these parameters can also be set on the “Setting
screen”.
[Data type] Bit
TVC TV check
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
ISO Code used for data output
0 : EIA code
1 : ISO code
INI Unit of input
0 : In mm
1 : In inches
SEQ Automatic insertion of sequence numbers
0 : Not performed
1 : Performed
When a program is prepared by using MDI keys in the part program
storage and edit mode, a sequence number can automatically be
assigned to each block in set increments. Set the increment to
parameter No. 3216.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 FCV
At least one of these parameters can also be set on the “Setting
screen”.
[Data type] Bit
FCV Tape format
0 : Series 16 standard format
1 : Series 15 format
NOTE
1 Programs created in the Series 15 tape format can
be used for operation on the following functions:
(1) Subprogram call M98
(2) Threading with equal leads G32 (T series)
(3) Canned cycle G90, G92, G94 (T series)
(4) Multiple repetitive canned cycle G71 to G76 (T
series)
(5) Drilling canned cycle G73, G74, G76, G80 to
G89 (M series)
(6) Cutter compensation C (M series)
2 When the tape format used in the Series 15 is used
for this CNC, some limits may add. Refer to the
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MODEL B
OPERATOR’S MANUAL.
— 9 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0002 SJZ RDG
At least one of these parameters can also be set on the “Setting
screen”.
[Data type] Bit
RDG Remote diagnosis is
0 : Not performed.
1 : Performed.
To use an RS-232C serial port for performing remote diagnosis,
connect and setup the modem, cable, and the like, then set 1 in this
parameter. When using a modem card, the setting is not necessary.
SJZ Manual reference position is performed as follows:
0 : When no reference position has been set, reference position
return is performed using deceleration dogs. When a reference
position is already set, reference position return is performed
using rapid traverse and deceleration dogs are ignored.
1 : Reference position return is performed using deceleration dogs at
all times.
NOTE
SJZ is enabled when bit 3 (HJZ) of parameter
No.1005 is set to 1. When a reference position is
set without a dog, (i.e. when bit 1 (DLZ) of
parameter No.1002 is set to 1 or bit 1 (DLZx) of
parameter No.1005 is set to 1) reference position
return after reference position setting is performed
using rapid traverse at all times, regardless of the
setting of SJZ.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012
RMVx AICx MIRx
RMVx MIRx
At least one of these parameters can also be set on the “Setting
screen”.
[Data type] Bit axis
MIRx Mirror image for each axis
0 : Mirror image is off.
1 : Mirror image is on.
AICx The travel distance of an axis command is:
0 : Determined by the value specified with the address.
1 : Always handled as an incremental value.
RMVx Releasing the assignment of the control axis for each axis
0 : Not released
1 : Released
NOTE
RMVx is valid when bit 7 (RMBx) of parameter No.
1005 is 1.
— 10 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
0020
I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device or selection of input
device in the foreground
This parameter can also be set on the “Setting screen”.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 35
The CNC provides the following interfaces for data transfer to and
from the host computer and external input/output devices:
• Input/output device interface (RS-232C serial port 1 or 2)
• Remote buffer interface (RS-232C/RS-422)
• DNC1/DNC2 interface
In addition, data can be transferred to and from the power mate CNC
via the FANUC I/O Link.
This parameter selects the interface used to transfer data to and from
an input/output device.
Setting Description
0 or 1 RS-232C serial port 1
2 RS-232C serial port 2
3 Remote buffer interface
4 Memory card interface (NC side)
5 Data server interface
6
7 Memory card interface (touch panel side)
10 DNC1/DNC2 interface, OSI-Ethernet
12 DNC1 interface #2
15
16
20
21
22
to
34
35
The DNC operation is performed or M198 is specified by
FOCAS1/Ethernet or DNC1/Ethernet.
M198 is specified by FOCAS1/HSSB. (Bit 1 (NWD) of
parameter No. 8706) must also be specified.)
The DNC operation is performed or M198 is specified by
FOCAS1/ HSSB (port 2).
Group 0
Group 1
Group 2
to
Group 14
Group 15
Data is transferred between the CNC and a
power mate CNC in group n (n: 0 to 15) via the
FANUC I/O Link.
Supplemental remark 1
If the DNC operation is performed with FOCAS1/HSSB, the
setting of parameter No. 20 does not matter. The DMMC signal
<G042.7> is used.
Supplemental remark 2
If bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 110 is set to control the I/O
channels separately, the I/O channels can be divided into four
types: input and output in the foreground and input and output in
the background. If so, parameter No. 20 becomes a parameter for
selecting the input device in the foreground.
— 11 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
NOTE
1 An input/output device can also be selected using the setting screen. Usually, the
setting screen is used.
2 The specifications (such as the baud rate and the number of stop bits) of the
input/output devices to be connected must be set in the corresponding parameters
for each interface beforehand. (See Section 4.2.) I/O CHANNEL = 0 and I/O
CHANNEL = 1 represent input/output devices connected to RS-232C serial port 1.
Separate parameters for the baud rate, stop bits, and other specifications are
provided for each channel.
Motherboard
RS-232C serial port 1
R232-1(JD36A)
RS-232C serial port 2
Serial communication board
Remote buffer board
DNC1 board
DNC2 board
JD36B
R232-2
R232-3(JD28A)
R422-1(JD6A)
I/O CHANNEL=0, 1
(Channel 1)
I/O CHANNEL=2
(Channel 2)
I/O CHANNEL=3
(Channel 3)
I/O CHANNEL=3
(Channel 3)
RS-232-C I/O device
RS-232-C I/O device
RS-232-C I/O device
(when a remote buffer or DNC2 board is used)
RS-422 I/O device
(when a remote buffer or DNC1 board is used)
3 The input/output device interface may be referred to as the reader/puncher
interface.
RS-232C serial port 1 and RS-232C serial port 2 are also referred to as channel 1
and channel 2, respectively. The remote buffer interface is also referred to as
channel 3.
— 12 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
0021 Setting of the output device in the foreground
0022 Setting of the input device in the background
0023 Setting of the output device in the background
These parameters can also be set on the “Setting screen”.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0 to 3, 5, 10
These parameters are valid only when bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No.
110 is set to control the I/O channels separately.
The parameters set individual input/output devices if the I/O channels
are divided into these four types: input and output in the foreground
and input and output in the background. The input device in the
foreground is set in parameter No. 20. For the details of the settings,
see the table provided with the description of parameter No. 20.
NOTE
If different input/output devices are simultaneously
used in the foreground and background, just a
value from 0 to 3 can be specified for the
background device.
If an attempt is made to use a busy input/output
device, an alarm (P/S233 or BP/S233) will be
raised. Note that the settings 0 and 1 indicate the
same input/output device.
— 13 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
4.2 PARAMETERS OF READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE OR
REMOTE BUFFER
To exchange data (such as programs and parameters) with an external
input/output device by using the input/output device interface
(RS-232C serial port) or remote buffer interface, the parameters
described below need to be set.
In the setting parameter I/O CHANNEL, specify which of the
input/output devices connected to the three channels (RS-232C serial
port 1, RS-232C serial port 2, and remote buffer interface) is to be
used.
Furthermore, set the specifications (specification number, baud rate,
the number of stop bits, and so forth) of the input/output device
connected to each channel in the parameters corresponding to each
channel beforehand.
For setting of the specifications of channel 1, two sets of parameters
are available.
Fig. 4.2 shows the input/output device interface parameters
corresponding to each channel.
Input/output channel number (parameter No.0020)
↓
No. 0020
Specify a channel for an
input/output device.
I/O CHANNEL
=0 : Channel 1
=1 : Channel 1
=2 : Channel 2
=3 : Channel 3
I/O CHANNEL
I/O CHANNEL=0
(channel 1)
I/O CHANNEL=1
(channel 1)
I/O CHANNEL=2
(channel 2)
I/O CHANNEL=3
(channel 3)
No. 0101
No. 0102
No. 0103
No. 0111
No. 0112
No. 0113
No. 0121
No. 0122
No. 0123
No. 0131
No. 0132
No. 0133
No. 0134
No. 0135
Stop bit and other data
Number specified for the input/output
Baud rate
Stop bit and other data
Number specified for the input/output
Baud rate
Stop bit and other data
Number specified for the input/output
Baud rate
Stop bit and other data
Number specified for the input/output
Baud rate
Selection of protocol
Selection of RS-422 or RS-232C, and
other data
— 14 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
4.2.1 Parameters Common to all Channels
0024
[Data type] Byte
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 ENS IOP ND3 NCR CRF CTV
[Data type] Bit
CTV: Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a
CRF EOB (end of block) to be output in the ISO code:
NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code
Port for communication with the PMC ladder development tool (FANUC
LADDER-III)
This parameter can also be set on the “Setting screen”.
This parameter sets the port to be used for communication with the
PMC ladder development tool (FANUC LADDER-III).
0 : According to the setting on the PMC online screen
1 : RS-232C serial port 1 (JD36A)
2 : RS-232C serial port 2 (JD36B)
10 : High-speed interface (HSSB (COP7) or Ethernet)
11 : High-speed interface or RS-232C serial port 1
12 : High-speed interface or RS-232C serial port 2
program.
0 : Performed
1 : Not performed
0 : Depends on the setting of bit 3 (NCR) of parameter No. 100.
1 : is «CR»»LF».
NOTE
The EOB output patterns are as shown below:
NCR CRF EOB output format
0 0 «LF» «CR» «CR»
0 1 «CR» «LF»
1 0 «LF»
1 1 «CR» «LF»
0 : LF, CR, CR are output.
1 : Only LF is output.
— 15 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
ND3 In DNC operation, a program is:
0 : Read block by block. (A DC3 code is output for each block.)
1 : Read continuously until the buffer becomes full. (A DC3 code is
output when the buffer becomes full.)
NOTE
In general, reading is performed more efficiently
when ND3 set to 1. This specification reduces the
number of buffering interruptions caused by
reading of a series of blocks specifying short
movements. This in turn reduces the effective cycle
time.
IOP Specifies how to stop program input/output operations.
0 : An NC reset can stop program input/output operations.
1 : Only the [STOP] soft key can stop program input/output
operations. (A reset cannot stop program input/output
operations.)
ENS Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code
0 : An alarm is generated.
1 : The NULL code is ignored.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0110 IO4
[Data type] Bit
IO4 Separate control of I/O channel numbers is:
0 : Not performed.
1 : Performed.
If the I/O channels are not separately controlled, set the input/output
device in parameter No. 20.
If the I/O channels are separately controlled, set the input device and
output device in the foreground and the input device and output device
in the background in parameters No. 20 to No. 23 respectively.
Separate control of I/O channels makes it possible to perform
background editing, program input/output, and the like during the
DNC operation.
4.2.2 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101
[Data type] Bit
SB2 The number of stop bits
NFD ASI SB2
NFD ASI HAD SB2
0 : 1
1 : 2
— 16 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
HAD An alarm raised for the internal handy file is:
0 : Not displayed in detail on the NC screen. (PS alarm 86 is
displayed.)
1 : Displayed in detail on the NC screen.
ASI Code used at data input/output
0 : EIA or ISO code (Input: Automatic determination/Output:
Setting of bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000)
1 : ASCII code for both input and output
NOTE
When using ASCII code for data input/output (when
setting ASI to 1), set also bit 1 (ISO) of parameter
No. 0000 to 1.
NFD Feed before and after the data at data output
0 : Output
1 : Not output
NOTE
When input/output devices other than the FANUC
PPR are used, set NFD to 1.
0102
[Data type] Byte
Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set
to 0)
Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the
I/O CHANNEL is set to 0, with one of the set values listed in Table
4.2.2 (a).
Table 4.2.2 (a)
Set value Input/output device
0 RS-232C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
1
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3
4 RS-232C (Not used control codes DC1 to DC4)
5 Portable tape reader
6
FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/
B2)
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adaptor
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
— 17 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
0103 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
[Data type] Byte
Set baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O
CHANNEL is set to 0, with a set value in Table 4.2.2 (b).
Table 4.2.2 (b)
Set value Baud rate (bps) Set value Baud rate (bps)
1 50 9 2400
2 100 10 4800
3 110 11 9600
4 150 12 19200
5 200 13 38400
6 300 14 57600
7 600 15 76800
8 1200
16 115200
4.2.3 Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0111 NFD ASI SB2
[Data type] Bit
These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The
meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter No. 0101.
0112 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)
[Data type] Byte
Set the number specified for the input/output device used when
the I/O CHANNEL is set to 1, with one of the set values listed in
Table 4.2.2 (a).
0113 Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 1)
[Data type] Byte
Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O
CHANNEL is set to 1, with a value in Table 4.2.2 (b).
4.2.4 Parameters of Channel 2 (I/O CHANNEL=2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0121 NFD ASI SB2
[Data type] Bit
These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2. The
meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter No. 0101.
— 18 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
0122 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)
[Data type] Byte
Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/O
CHANNEL is set to 2, with a value in Table 4.2.2 (a).
0123 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 2)
[Data type] Byte
Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O
CHANNEL is set to 2, with a value in Table 4.2.2 (b).
4.2.5 Parameters of Channel 3 (I/O CHANNEL=3)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0131 NFD ASI SB2
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the
power must be turned off before operation is
continued.
[Data type] Bit
These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 3. The
meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter No. 0101.
0132 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 3)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
Set the number specified for the input/output device used when I/O
CHANNEL is set to 3, with a number in Table 4.2.2 (a).
— 19 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
0133 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 3)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O
CHANNEL is set to 3 according to the table 4.2.5.
Valid data range: 1 to 15 (up to a baud rate of 86400 bps) for the
RS-422 interface or 1 to 12 (up to a baud rate of 19200 bps) for the
RS-232C interface.
Table 4.2.5
Set value Baud rate (bps) Set value Baud rate (bps)
1 50 9 2400
2 100 10 4800
3 110 11 9600
4 150 12 19200
5 200 13 38400
6 300 14 76800
7 600 15 86400
8 1200
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0134 CLK NCD SYN PRY
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the
power must be turned off before operation is
continued.
[Data type] Bit
PRY Parity bit
0 : Not used
1 : Used
SYN Reset/alarm in protocol B
0 : Not reported to the host
1 : Reported to the host with SYN and NAK codes
NCD CD (signal quality detection) of the RS-232C interface
0 : Checked
1 : Not checked
CLK Baud rate clock when the RS-422 interface is used
0 : Internal clock
1 : External clock
NOTE
When the RS-232C interface is used, set this bit to
0.
— 20 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0135 RMS R42 PRA ETX ASC
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the
power must be turned off before operation is
continued.
[Data type] Bit
ASC Communication code except NC data
0 : ISO code
1 : ASCII code
ETX End code for protocol A or extended protocol A
0 : CR code in ASCII/ISO
1 : ETX code in ASCII/ISO
NOTE
Use of ASCII/ISO is specified by bit 0 (ASC) of
parameter No. 135.
PRA Communication protocol
0 : Protocol B
1 : Protocol A
R42 Interface
0 : RS-232C interface
1 : RS-422 interface
RMS State of remote/tape operation when protocol A is used
0 : Always 0 is returned.
1 : Contents of the change request of the remote/tape operation in
the SET command from the host is returned.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0138
[Data type] Bit
MDP In data output by a memory card, the series information is:
FNL In data output by RS-232C of the loader control function, the series
BIO In multi-path control, NC data input/output via the memory card
OWM When NC data or NC programs are punched to the memory card, a
MDN OWN BIO FNL MDP
MDN OWN FNL MDP
0 : Not added to the output file name.
1 : Added to the output file name.
information is:
0 : Not added to the output file name.
1 : Added to the output file name.
interface is:
0 : Controlled on a path-by-path basis.
1 : Controlled in a batch for all paths.
file overwrite confirmation message is:
0 : Displayed.
1 : Not displayed.
— 21 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
MDN The DNC operation function by a memory card is:
0 : Disabled.
1 : Enabled. (A PCMCIA card attachment is required.)
NOTE
Use a PCMCIA card attachment suited to the CNC
to secure the memory card in the CNC.
— 22 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
4.3 PARAMETERS OF DNC1/DNC2 INTERFACE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0140 ECD NCE BCC
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the
power must be turned off before operation is
continued.
[Data type] Bit
BCC The BCC value (block check characters) is:
0 : Checked.
1 : Not checked.
This parameter is dedicated to the DNC2 interface.
Even if the BCC value is not checked, the BCC value itself must be
specified.
NCE The ER (RS-232C) and TR (RS422) signals are:
0 : Checked.
1 : Not checked.
This parameter is dedicated to the DNC2 interface.
ECD Error code of negative acknowledgment
0 : A four-digit hexadecimal error code is added to a negative
acknowledgment.
1 : No error code is added to a negative acknowledgment.
This parameter is dedicated to the DNC2 interface.
NOTE
To use FANUC DNC2 communications library for
the host computer, set this parameter to 1.
0141 System for connection between the CNC and host (DNC1 interface)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 or 2
This parameter specifies the system for connection (DNC1 interface)
between the CNC and host.
Set value
1 : Point-to-point connection
2 : Multipoint connection
— 23 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
0142 Station address of the CNC (DNC1 interface)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 2 to 52
This parameter specifies the station address of the CNC when the
CNC is connected via the DNC1 interface using multipoint
connection.
0143 Time limit specified for the timer monitoring a response (DNC2 interface)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] sec
[Valid data range] 1 to 60 (The standard setting is 3.)
0144 Time limit specified for the timer monitoring the EOT signal (DNC2 interface)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] sec
[Valid data range] 1 to 60 (The standard setting is 5.)
0145 Time required for switching RECV and SEND (DNC2 interface)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] sec
[Valid data range] 1 to 60 (The standard setting is 1.)
— 24 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
0146 Number of times the system retries holding communication (DNC2 interface)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Number of times
[Valid data range] 1 to 10 (The standard setting is 3.)
Set the maximum number of times the system retries holding
communication with the remote device if the remote device uses an
invalid protocol in the data-link layer or the remote device does not
respond to the request.
0147
Number of times the system sends the message in response to the NAK
signal (DNC2 interface)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Number of times
[Valid data range] 1 to 10 (The standard setting is 2.)
Set the maximum number of times the system retries sending the
message in response to the NAK signal.
0148 Number of characters in overrun (DNC2 interface)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 10 to 225 (The standard setting is 10.)
Set the number of characters the system can receive after transmission
is stopped (CS off).
— 25 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
0149
Number of characters in the data section of the communication packet
(DNC2 interface)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Word
[Valid range] 80 to 256 (The standard setting is 256.)
If the specified value is out of range, a value of 80 or 256 is used.
The standard setting is 256.
This parameter determines the maximum length of the packet used in
transmission over the DNC2 interface. Including the two characters at
the start of the packet, the four characters used for a command, and the
three characters at the end, the maximum number of characters in the
packet is nine plus the number specified in parameter No.0149.
Length of the packet
DLE
STX
2 bytes 4 bytes 80 to 256 bytes 3 bytes
Command Data section DEL ETX BCC
— 26 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
4.4 PARAMETERS OF M-NET INTERFACE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0161 SRS PEO SRP SRL
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the
power must be turned off before operation is
continued.
[Data type] Bit
SRL Number of characters used in the serial interface
0 : Seven bits
1 : Eight bits
SRP Vertical parity in the serial interface
0 : Vertical parity is not checked.
1 : Vertical parity is checked.
PEO Either odd or even parity is used for vertical parity in the serial
interface
0 : Odd parity is used.
1 : Even parity is used.
NOTE
This bit is effective when bit SRP is set to 1.
SRS Stop bit in the serial interface
0 : One stop bit is used.
1 : Two stop bits are used.
0171 Length of DI data in bytes in M-NET
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid range] 1 to 32
Specify the length of DI data in bytes (number of byte of data actually
transferred from the PLC unit to the CNC unit) in the serial interface.
— 27 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
0172 Length of DO data in bytes in M-NET
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid range] 1 to 32
Specify the length of DO data in bytes (number of bytes of data
actually transferred from the CNC unit to the PLC unit) in the serial
interface.
NOTE
When a self-loop test is performed, specify the
same value in parameters No.0171 and No.0172.
0173 Station address in M-NET
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid range] 1 to 15
Specify a station address in the serial interface.
0174 Baud rate in M-NET
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid range] 0 to 6 (The standard setting is 3.)
Specify a baud rate for the serial interface.
Set value Baud rate (bps)
1 2400
2 4800
3 9600
4 19200
5 38400
6 57600
7 76800
— 28 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
0175 Time required for connecting two stations in M-NET
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid range] 1 to 32767 (The standard setting is 10000.)
Specify a time limit from when the connection sequence is completed
for the self-station to when the normal transfer sequence starts in the
serial interface.
0176 Time required for polling in M-NET
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767 (The standard setting is 500.)
Specify a time limit for polling in the normal sequence at the
self-station in the serial interface.
0177 Time required from SAI to BCC in M-NET
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767 (The standard setting is 50.)
Specify a time limit from when the SAI signal starts to be transferred
to when the BCC signal has been sent.
0178 Time between a reception and the next transmission in M-NET
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 1 to 32767 (The standard setting is 1.)
Specify the time from when data has been received to when the next
data starts to be transmitted.
— 29 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
4.5 PARAMETERS OF REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0002 RDG
[Data type] Bit
RDG Remote diagnosis is:
0 : Not performed.
1 : Performed.
If an RS-232C serial port is used to carry out remote diagnosis,
connect and set up the modem, cable, and the like, then set 1 in this
parameter. When using a modem card, the setting is not necessary.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0201 MCB NCR ASC SB2
[Data type] Bit
SB2 The number of stop bits is
0 : 1.
1 : 2.
To carry out remote diagnosis, set 0.
ASC The code to be used for data output is:
0 : ISO code.
1 : ASCII code.
To carry out remote diagnosis, set 1.
NCR EOB (end of block) is output as:
0 : «LF»»CR»»CR».
1 : Just as «LF».
To carry out remote diagnosis, set 1.
MCB The baud rate setting for data input/output between the modem card
and CNC is:
0 : 9600 bps (fixed).
1 : Determined by the setting of parameter No. 203.
For the detailed setting while MCB is set to 1, see parameter No. 203.
— 30 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
0203 Baud rate (for remote diagnosis)
[Data type] Byte
Set the baud rate of data input/output by remote diagnosis, with
reference to the tables given below.
When using an RS-232C serial port
Set value Baud rate (bps) Set value Baud rate (bps)
1 50 7 600
2 100 8 1200
3 110 9 2400
4 150 10 4800
5 200 11 9600
6 300
12 19200
When using a modem card (when bit 6 (MCB) of parameter No. 201
is set to 1)
Set value Baud rate (bps) Set value Baud rate (bps)
1 28800 7 600
2 38400 8 1200
3 57600 9 2400
4 — 10 4800
5 — 11 9600
6 300
12 19200
NOTE
The tables above indicate the baud rates of
communication between the CNC and modem. The
actual communication baud rate may be lowered,
depending on the modem and communication line.
0204 Remote diagnosis channel
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 0, 1, 2
The interface to be used for remote diagnosis is:
0,1 : RS-232C serial port 1 (channel 1).
2 : RS-232C serial port 2 (channel 2).
To carry out remote diagnosis using RS-232C, the reader/puncher
interface is required.
— 31 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
0211 Password 1 for remote diagnosis
0212 Password 2 for remote diagnosis
0213 Password 3 for remote diagnosis
[Data type] 2-word
[Valid data range] 1 to 99999999
Specify a password for using the remote diagnosis function.
The remote diagnosis function has the following password settings.
Data can be protected by preventing a third party from accessing any
system parameter or machining program without permission.
Password 1:
Set a password for the whole service of the remote diagnosis
function. (The whole remote diagnosis service is available only
when this password is input on the host side (PC, for instance).)
Password 2:
Set a password of a part program. (The input/output, verification,
and the like of a program are possible only when this password is
input on the host side (PC, for instance).)
Password 3:
Set a password of a parameter. (The input/output or the like of a
parameter is possible only when this password is input on the
host side (PC, for instance).)
NOTE
Once any value other than 0 is specified as a
password, the password can be changed only
when the same value is specified in the
corresponding keyword (parameters No. 221 to No.
223). If any value other than 0 is specified as a
password, the password setting is not displayed on
the parameter screen (blank display is provided).
Take great care when setting the password.
— 32 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
0221 Keyword 1 for remote diagnosis
0222 Keyword 2 for remote diagnosis
0223 Keyword 3 for remote diagnosis
[Data type] 2-word
[Valid range] 1 to 99999999
Set a keyword corresponding to a password of the remote diagnosis
function.
Keyword 1: Keyword for password 1 (parameter No. 211)
Keyword 2: Keyword for password 2 (parameter No. 212)
Keyword 3: Keyword for password 3 (parameter No. 213)
If any value other than 0 is specified as a password (parameters No.
211 to No. 213), the password can be changed only when the same
value is specified as the corresponding keyword.
NOTE
The keyword value is reset to 0 at power-up. On
the parameter screen, the keyword setting is not
displayed (blank display is provided).
— 33 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
4.6 PARAMETERS OF DNC1 INTERFACE #2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0231 NFD ASI SB2
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the
power must be turned off before operation is
continued.
[Data type] Bit
SB2 Number of stop bits
0 : 1 bit
1 : 2 bits
ASI Data input code
0 : IEA or ISO (automatic recognition)
1 : ASCII Code
NFD When data is out, feed holes are
0 : Output before and after data section
1 : Not output
0233 Baud rate (DNC1 interface #2)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 to 15
Specify a baud rate.
Set value Baud rate (bps) Set value Baud rate (bps)
1 50 9 2400
2 100 10 4800
3 110 11 9600
4 150 12 19200
5 200 13 38400
6 300 14 76800
7 600 15 86400
8 1200
— 34 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
0241 Mode of connection between the host and CNC (DNC1 interface #2)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 1 or 2
This parameter sets the mode of connection between the host and
CNC.
Setting Mode
1 Point-to-point mode
2 Multipoint mode
0242 CNC station address (DNC 1 interface #2)
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 2 to 52
This parameter sets a CNC station address when the CNC is to be
connected in the multipoint mode.
— 35 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
4.7 PARAMETERS OF MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0300 PCM
[Data type] Bit
PCM If the CNC screen display function is enabled, when a memory card
interface is provided on the NC side,
0 : The memory card interface on the NC side is used.
1 : The memory card interface on the PC side is used.
This parameter is valid when 4 (memory card interface) is set in
parameter No. 20. This parameter is valid only while the CNC screen
display function is active.
— 36 —
B-63530EN/03 4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
4.8 PARAMETERS OF FACTOLINK
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0801 SB2
[Data type] Bit
SB2 The number of stop bits is:
0 : 1 bit.
1 : 2 bits.
(Set the number of stop bits when an RS-232C port is specified as the
FACTOLINK communication port.)
0802 Communication channel for the FACTOLINK
[Data type] Byte
Set the communication port for use with the FACTOLINK.
1 : RS-232C serial port 1
2 : RS-232C serial port 2
11 : Ethernet board port 1
12 : Ethernet board port 2
13 : Ethernet board port 3
21 : Embedded Ethernet
0803 Communication baud rate for the FACTOLINK
[Data type] Byte
Set the communication baud rate when an RS-232C port is specified
as the FACTOLINK communication port.
10 : 4800 bps
11 : 9600 bps
12 : 19200 bps (Recommendation value)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0810 FMN FTM FYR FCL FAS BGS
[Data type] Bit
BGS When the FACTOLINK screen is not displayed, FACTOLINK alarm
task communication is:
0 : Not activated.
1 : Activated.
FAS If FACTOLINK uses the Answer or AnswerEx command, the answer
number A01. is:
0 : Displayed in the answer field.
1 : Not displayed in the answer field.
FCL The FACTOLINK clock is:
0 : Not displayed in reverse video.
1 : Displayed in reverse video.
— 37 —
4.DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS B-63530EN/03
FYR In the FACTOLINK clock display, years in the 99/01/23 00:00 format
(bit 4 (FTM) of parameter No. 0810 set to 1) are represented:
0 : By a two-digit number.
1 : By a four-digit number.
FTM The FACTOLINK clock is displayed in this format:
0 : Wed Nov 12 00:00:00
1 : 97/11/12 00:00:00
FMN The FACTOLINK screen is displayed:
0 : In color.
1 : With two levels of gray.
0811 Logging type for the FACTOLINK
[Data type] Byte
0812 PMC address of logging data for the FACTOLINK
[Data type] Word
0813 Logging data length for the FACTOLINK
[Data type] Word
0814 Logging wait address for the FACTOLINK
[Data type] Word
0815 FACTOLINK logging data transmission interval
[Data type] 2-word
0820 FACTOLINK device address (1)
0821 FACTOLINK device address (2)
0822 FACTOLINK device address (3)
0823 FACTOLINK device address (4)
0824 FACTOLINK device address (5)
0825 FACTOLINK device address (6)
0826 FACTOLINK device address (7)
0827 FACTOLINK device address (8)
0828 FACTOLINK device address (9)
[Data type] Byte
See following manuals for the parameters related to the FACTOLINK.
• FANUC Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board OPARATOR’S
MANUAL (B-63354EN)
• FANUC FACTOLINK SCRIPT FUNCTION OPERATOR’S
MANUAL (B-75054EN)
— 38 —
Loading…
FANUC Series 16*/160*/160*s-MODEL B
FANUC Series 18*/180*/180*s-MODEL B
FANUC Series 21*/210*/210*s-MODEL B
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE)
B-63523EN/03
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. • All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The export of this product is subject to the authorization of the government of the countryfrom where the product is exported.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot bedone, because there are so many possibilities.Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should beregarded as ”impossible”.
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some ofwhich are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are notfollowed by or in the main body.
B–63523EN/03 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
s–1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to themachine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Notethoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the userbeing injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is notobserved.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
B–63523EN/03 PREFACE
p–1
PREFACE
This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications requiredfor connecting the CNC control unit to a machine tool. The manualoutlines the components commonly used for FANUC CNC control units,as shown in the configuration diagram in Chapter 2, and suppliesadditional information on using these components. The manual outlinesthe I/O unit, servo, spindle, and other components common to FANUCCNC control units, and supplies additional information on using thesecomponents in this CNC control unit. For detailed specifications, referto the manuals of these components.
For options not covered in this manual, also refer to the manuals of thesecomponents.
The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are :
Product Name Abbreviations
FANUC Series 16i–TB 16i–TB
FANUC Series 16i–MB 16i–MBSeries 16i
FANUC Series 18i–TB 18i–TB
FANUC Series 18i–MB5 18i–MB5 Series 18i
FANUC Series 18i–MB 18i–MB
FANUC Series 21i–TB 21i–TB
FANUC Series 21i–MB 21i–MBSeries 21i
FANUC Series 160i–TB 160i–TB
FANUC Series 160i–MB 160i–MBSeries 160i
FANUC Series 180i–TB 180i–TB
FANUC Series 180i–MB5 180i–MB5 Series 180i
FANUC Series 180i–MB 180i–MB
FANUC Series 210i–TB 210i–TB
FANUC Series 210i–MB 210i–MBSeries 210i
FANUC Series 160is–TB 160is–TB
FANUC Series 160is–MB 160is–MBSeries 160is
FANUC Series 180is–TB 180is–TB
FANUC Series 180is–MB5 180is–MB5 Series 180is
FANUC Series 180is–MB 180is–MB
FANUC Series 210is–TB 210is–TB
FANUC Series 210is–MB 210is–MBSeries 210is
Applicable models
PREFACE B–63523EN/03
p–2
This manual consists of chapters 1 to 15 and appendixes at the end of thebook.
Chapter and title Contents
Chapter 1CONFIGURATION
Provides general information related to the connection of the i Series CNC, as well as anintroduction to detailed information.
Chapter 2TOTAL CONNECTION DAIGRAMS
Describes how to connect peripheral units to the i Series CNC.
Chapter 3INSTALLATION
Describes the installation requirements for using the i Series CNC.1) Required power supply capacity2) Heat output3) Locations of connectors on the control unit4) Action against noise
Chapter 4POWER SUPPLAY CONNECTION
Describes how to make connections related to the power supply of the i Series CNC.
Chapter 5CONNECTION TO CNC PERIOHERALS
Describes how to connect the following peripheral devices to the i Series CNC:1) MDI unit2) I/O device (RS–232–C)3) High–speed skip (HDI)4) Built–in ethernet
Chapter 6SPINDLE CONNECTION
Describes how to connect spindle–related units to the i Series CNC.
Chapter 7SERVO INTERFACE
Describes how to connect servo–related units to the i Series CNC.
Chapter 8CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PCFUNCTIONS
Describes how to connect a CNC display unit with PC functions to the i Series CNC.
Chapter 9CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
Describes how to connect machine interface I/O with the FANUC I/O Link.
Chapter 10EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
Describes how to handle the emergency stop signal.Be sure to read this chapter.
Chapter 11REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
Describes the remote buffer, DNC1, and DNC2 interfaces that can be used with the i Series CNC.
Chapter 12HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
Describes the high–speed serial bus (HSSB) that can be used with the i Series CNC.
Chapter 13CONNECTION TO OTHERNET–WORKS
Describes how to connect the i Series CNC to networks.
Chapter 14CONNECTION FOR Series160is/180is/210is
Describes connection for Series 160is/180is/210is
APPENDIX A) EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNITB) 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLESC) CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)D) OPTICAL FIBER CABLEE) LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)F) MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
Organization of thismanuals
B–63523EN/03 PREFACE
p–3
The following table lists the manuals related to Series 16i, Series 18i,Series 21i, Series 160i, Series 180i, Series 210i, Series 160is, Series180is, Series 210is–MODEL B. This manual is indicated by anasterisk(*).
Manual name Specificationnumber
DESCRIPTIONS B–63522EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B–63523EN *
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B–63523EN–1
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–TBOPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63524EN
Series 16i/160i/160is–MB, Series 18i/180i/180is–MB5,Series 18i/180i/180is–MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63534EN
Series 21i/210i/210is–TB OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63604EN
Series 21i/210i/210is–MB OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63614EN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–63525EN
Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is–MODEL BPARAMETER MANUAL
B–63530EN
Series 21i/210i/210is–MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL B–63610EN
PROGRAMMING MANUAL
Macro Compiler/Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL
B–61803E–1
FANUC MACRO COMPILER (For Personal Computer)PROGRAMMING MANUAL
B–66102E
C Language Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–62443EN–3
CAP (T series)
FANUC Super CAPi T OPERATORS MANUAL B–63284EN
FANUC Symbol CAPi T OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63304EN
MANUAL GUIDE For Lathe PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–63343EN
MANUAL GUIDE For Lathe OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63344EN
CAP (M series)
FANUC Super CAPi M OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63294EN
MANUAL GUIDE For Milling PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–63423EN
MANUAL GUIDE For Milling OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63424EN
PMC
PMC Ladder Language PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–61863E
PMC C Language PROGRAMMING MANUAL B–61863E–1
Related manuals ofSeries 16i/18i/21i/160i/180i/210i/160is/ 180is/210is–MODEL B
PREFACE B–63523EN/03
p–4
Manual nameSpecification
number
Network
FANUC I/O Link–II CONNECTION MANUAL B–62714EN
Profibus–DP Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62924EN
Ethernet Board/DATA SERVER Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63354EN
FAST Ethernet Board/FAST DATA SERVER OPERATOR’S MANUAL
B–63644EN
DeviceNet Board OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63404EN
PC function
Screen Display Function OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–63164EN
The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR i series
Manual name Specificationnumber
AC SERVO MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS B–65262EN
AC SERVO MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL B–65270EN
AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series DESCRIPTIONS B–65272EN
AC SPINDLE MOTOR αi series PARAMETER MANUAL B–65280EN
SERVO AMPLIFIER αi series DESCRIPTIONS B–65282EN
SERVO MOTOR αi series MAINTENANCE MANUAL B–65285EN
The following table lists the manuals related to SERVO MOTOR series
Manual name Specificationnumber
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65142
FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR α series PARAMETER MANUAL
B–65150
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65152
FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR α series PARAMETER MANUAL
B–65160
FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65162
FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B–65165
Either of the following servo motors and the corresponding spindle canbe connected to the CNC covered in this manual.
FANUC SERVO MOTOR i series FANUC SERVO MOTOR series
This manual mainly assumes that the FANUC SERVO MOTOR i seriesof servo motor is used. For servo motor and spindle information, refer tothe manuals for the servo motor and spindle that are actually connected.
Related manuals ofSERVO MOTOR αi series
Related manuals ofSERVO MOTOR α series
B–63523EN/03 Table of Contents
c–1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE s–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREFACE p–1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. CONFIGURATION 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION AND COMPONENT NAMES 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1 Configurations of LCD–mounted Type Control Units 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1.2 Configurations of Stand–alone Type Control Units 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. INSTALLATION 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE CABINET 29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 POWER SUPPLY CAPACITY 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 Power Supply Capacities of CNC–related Units 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC CABINET 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Temperature Rise within the Cabinet 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Heat Output of Each Unit 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 Thermal Design of Operator’s Panel 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 ACTION AGAINST NOISE 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 Separating Signal Lines 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.2 Ground 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.3 Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the Control Unit 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.4 Noise Suppressor 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.6 Measures Against Surges due to Lightning 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 CONTROL UNIT 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.1 Installation of the Control Unit 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6.2 Installing the Stand–alone Type Control Unit 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.7 CABLING DIAGRAM 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8 DUSTPROOF MEASURES FOR CABINETS AND PENDANT BOXES 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 GENERAL 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 TURNING ON AND OFF THE POWER TO THE CONTROL UNIT 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Power Supply for the Control Unit 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.2 +24V Input Power Specifications 60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.3 Power–on Sequence 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.4 Power–off Sequence 64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 CABLE FOR POWER SUPPLY TO CONTROL UNIT 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 BATTERIES 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.1 Battery for Memory Backup (3VDC) 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.2 Batteries for CNC Display Unit with PC Functions (3VDC) 71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.3 Battery for Separate Absolute Pulse Coders (6VDC) 72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4.4 Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor (6VDC) 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS 74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63523EN/03Table of Contents
c–2
5.1 CONNECTION OF MDI UNIT (LCD–MOUNTED TYPE) 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.1 General 75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.2 Connection to the MDI Unit (LCD–mounted Type) 76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.3 Connection with the Standard MDI Unit 77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.4 Key Layout of Separate–type MDI 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1.5 61–Key MDI Unit 82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 CONNECTION WITH THE DISPLAY/MDI UNITS (FOR THE STAND–ALONE TYPE i SERIES CNC) 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.1 Overview 83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Connection with the 10.4/9.5 LCD Unit 84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Connection with the 7.2 LCD Unit Via the Display Link 87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.4 Connecting to the 7.2 LCD Unit by the Display Link (Multiple Connection) 91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.5 Connection of the Detachable 7.2 LCD/MDI Unit Via the Display Link 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.6 Connection with an CNC Display Unit with PC Functions 102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 CONNECTION WITH INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.1 Overview 104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.2 Connecting I/O Devices 106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.3 RS–232–C Serial Port 107. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.4 RS–232–C Interface Specification 109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3.5 FANUC Handy File Connection 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 CONNECTING THE HIGH–SPEED SKIP (HDI) 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.1 General 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.2 Connection to the High–speed Skip (HDI) 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4.3 Input Signal Rules for the High–speed Skip (HDI) 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 LINKING THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET INTERFACE 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.1 Connection to the Ethernet Interface 123. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.2 Specification of Twisted–Pair Cable 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.3 Anti–Noise Measure 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5.4 Network Installation 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 SERIAL SPINDLE 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1.1 Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1.2 Connecting One to Four Serial Spindles 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 ANALOG SPINDLE INTERFACE 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 POSITION CODER INTERFACE 145. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. SERVO INTERFACE 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 CONNECTION TO THE SERVO AMPLIFIERS 147. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.1 General 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.2 Interface to the Servo Amplifiers 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2.1 Interface to the servo amplifiers 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2.2 Interfacing with servo amplifiers (for high–speed HRV function) 148. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3 Separate Detector Interface 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.4 Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.5 Connection of Power Supply 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.6 Linear Scale Interface 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.7 Stand–alone Type Pulse Coder Interface 154. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.8 Input Signal Requirements 157. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.9 Connection of Battery for Separate Absolute Detector 159. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.10 Connection Between the Basic Unit and Expansion Unit 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.11 Connector Locations 162. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.12 Installation 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63523EN/03
c–3
7.1.13 Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1.14 Connecting the Servo Check Adapter 166. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 OVERVIEW 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 CAUTIONS 169. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 CONNECTION 170. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.4 GENERAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.1 CNC Display Unit with PC Functions Having Neither Soft Keys nor a Touch Panel 171. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.2 CNC Display Unit with PC Functions Having Soft Keys but No Touch Panel 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.3 CNC Display Unit with PC Functions Having a Touch Panel but No Soft Key 174. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4.4 CNC Display Unit with PC Functions Having a Touch Panel and Soft Key 175. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.5 SPECIFICATIONS 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.1 Installation Environmental Conditions 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.2 Power Supply Specification 177. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5.3 Shutdown 178. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.6 INSTALLATION SPACE 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.1 Basic Unit 10.4 LCD Type 179. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.2 Basic Unit 12.1 LCD Type 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.3 Basic Unit 15.0 LCD Type 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6.4 HDD Unit 181. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7 PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND CONNECTION 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.1 Connector Layout Diagram 182. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.2 Main Power Supply Input 183. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.3 Floppy Disk Drive (Signal and Power Supply) 184. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.3.1 Operating environment 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.3.2 Handling precautions 186. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.7.4 High–speed Serial Bus (HSSB) 187. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.5 Typewriter–style Keyboard 188. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.6 Mouse 190. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.7 Centronics Parallel Port 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.8 Serial Port 2 + USB 192. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.9 Serial Port 1 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.10 Soft Keys 195. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.11 PCMCIA Card 196. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7.12 Hard Disk Unit 197. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.8 PCI EXPANSION BOARD 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8.1 Installation Method 198. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link 200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 GENERAL 201. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 CONNECTION 202. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.1 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable 204. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Fiber Cable 205. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.3 Connection when Two Channels of FANUC I/O Links are Used 209. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 UNITS THAT CAN BE CONNECTED USING FANUC I/O LINK 213. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4 CONNECTION OF CONNECTOR PANEL I/O MODULE 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.1 Configuration 214. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.2 Connection Diagram 215. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.3 Module Specifications 216. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.4 DI/DO Connector Pin Assignment 218. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.5 DI (Input Signal) Connection 219. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63523EN/03Table of Contents
c–4
9.4.6 DO (Output Signal) Connection 221. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.7 DI/DO Signal Specifications 222. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.8 2A Output Connector Pin Allocation 224. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.9 2A DO (Output Signal) Connection 225. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.10 2A Output DO Signal Specifications 226. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.11 Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation 227. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.12 Analog Input Signal Connections 228. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.13 Analog Input Signal Specifications 230. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.14 Analog Input Specifications 231. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.15 Manual Pulse Generator Connection 233. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.16 Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator 234. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.17 Connection of Basic and Extension Modules 235. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.18 Module Installation 236. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.19 Other Notes 241. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4.20 Distribution I/O Setting 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O MODULE (FOR MATRIX INPUT) 247. . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.1 Overall Connection Diagram 247. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.2 Power Connection 248. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.3 DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement 249. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.4 DI (General–purpose Input Signal) Connection 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.5 DI (Matrix Input Signal) Connection 252. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.6 DO (Output Signal) Connection 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.7 Manual Pulse Generator Connection 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.8 External View 257. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.9 Specifications 258. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5.10 Other Notes 261. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL I/O MODULE AND POWER MAGNETICS CABINET I/O MODULE 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6.1 Overall Connection Diagram 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.2 Power Connection 267. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.3 DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement 268. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.4 DI (General–purpose Input Signal) Connection 269. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.5 DO (Output Signal) Connection 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.6 Manual Pulse Generator Connection 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.7 External View 275. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.8 Specifications 276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6.9 Other Notes 278. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.7 CONNECTION OF MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL INTERFACE UNIT 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.1 Function Overview 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.2 System Configuration 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.3 Signal Assignment 285. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.4 Interface 287. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.5 PMC Addresses 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.6 Major Connection Precautions 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.7 State of the LEDs on the Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.8 Connector (on the Cable Side) Specifications 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.9 Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit Dimension Diagram (Including Connector Locations) 301. . . . . 9.7.10 Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit Mounting Dimension Diagram 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7.11 Fuse Mounting Position 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.8 CONNECTION OF OPERATOR’S PANEL CONNECTION UNIT 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.1 Input Signal Regulations for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit 306. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.2 Output Signal Regulations for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.3 Connector Layout for Operator’s Panel Connection Unit 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8.4 External View of Operator’s Panel Connection Unit 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.9 CONNECTION OF SOURCE OUTPUT TYPE CONNECTION UNIT 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9.1 Input Signal Specifications for Source Output Type Connection Unit 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63523EN/03
c–5
9.9.2 Output Signal Specifications for Source Output Type Connection Unit 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9.3 Connector Pin Layout for Source Output Type Connection Unit 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9.4 Dimensions of Source Output Type Connection Unit 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.10 FANUC I/O LINK CONNECTION UNIT 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10.1 Overview 322. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10.2 Specification 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.10.3 Connection 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.10.3.1 I/O Link interface 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.11 CONNECTING THE FANUC SERVO UNIT SERIES WITH I/O LINK 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11.1 Overview 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11.2 Connection 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11.3 Maximum Number of Units that can be Connected 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.11.4 Address Assignment by Ladder 331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.12 CONNECTION OF THE DISTRIBUTION I/O MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL 332. . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.1 Differences between the FS0 Standard Machine Operator’s Panel and
Distribution I/O Machine Operator Panel 332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.2 Overall Connection Diagram 334. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.3 Connector Mounting Diagram 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.4 Power Supply Connection 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.5 Emergency Stop Signal Connection 337. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.6 General–purpose DI Signal Connection 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.7 General–purpose DO Signal Connection 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.8 Manual Pulse Generator Connection 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.9 Relay Terminal Connection 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.10 Keyboard Addresses 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.11 Other Signal Addresses 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.12 Allocation 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.13 Specifications 349. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.14 Other Notes 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.12.15 Operator’s Panel 355. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13 CONNECTION TO MACHINE OPERATOR’S PANEL 364. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13.1 Overview 364. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13.2 Total Connection Diagram 366. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13.3 Each Connections 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.3.1 Pin assignment 367. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.3.2 Power supply connection 369. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.3.3 MDI connection 370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.3.4 I/O link connection 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.3.5 Emergency stop signal connection 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.3.6 Power ON/OFF control signal connection 372. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.3.7 DI (input signal) connection 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.3.8 DO (output signal) connection 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.3.9 Manual pulse generator connection 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.3.10Connector (on the cable side) specifications. 380. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.4 DI/DO Address 381. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.4.1 Keyboard of main panel 381. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.4.2 Override signals 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.5 DI/DO Mapping 383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13.6 Outline 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.6.1 Outline of main panel A 385. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.6.2 Outline of main panel B 387. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.6.3 Outline of sub panel A 388. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63523EN/03Table of Contents
c–6
9.13.6.4 Outline of sub panel B 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.6.5 Outline of sub panel C 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.6.6 Connector locations of main panel A/A1 391. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.6.7 Connector locations of main panel B/B1 392. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.6.8 Outline of sub panel B1 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.6.9 Outline of main panel A1 394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.6.10Outline of main panel B1 395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.6.11Outline of sub panel C1 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.7 Specifications 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.7.1 Environmental requirement 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.7.2 Order specification 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.7.3 Main panel A/B/A1/B1 specification 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.7.4 Sub panel A/B/B1/C/C1 specification 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.7.5 Power supply specification 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.7.6 General–purpose DI signal definition 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.7.7 General–purpose DO signal definition 399. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.8 Key Symbol Indication on Machine Operators Panel 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.8.1 Meaning of key symbols 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.8.2 Detachable key top 402. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.13.9 Others 403. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.13.10 Maintenance Parts 406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL 407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2) 410. . . . 11.1 GENERAL 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–232–C) 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3 REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS–422) 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4 DNC2 INTERFACE (RS–232–C) 417. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5 DNC1 INTERFACE 418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.1 Multipoint Connection 418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5.2 Point–to–point Connection 419. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1 OVERVIEW 421. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 CAUTIONS 421. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4 PERSONAL COMPUTER SPECIFICATION 423. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4.1 Specification of Personal Computer in Case that the Interface Board of ISA Type are Used 423. . . . . . . . . 12.4.2 Specification of Personal Computer in Case that the Interface Board of PCI Type are Used 423. . . . . . . . .
12.5 INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT 424. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6 PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING PERSONAL COMPUTER INTERFACE BOARDS 425. . . . . . . .
12.7 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS 427. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8 RECOMMENDED CABLES 428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63523EN/03
c–7
14.CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is 430. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS 431. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.1.1 LCD–Mounted Type Series 160is/180is/210is Control Unit 431. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1.2 CNC Display Unit for Windows (Stand–Alone Type) 432. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2 INSTALLATION 433. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.1 Connector Names and Connector Layout 433. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2.1.1 LCD–mounted Series 160is/180is/210is 433. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2.1.2 CNC display unit for Windows 435. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2.2 External Dimensions of the Units 436. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.3 Environmental Conditions for Control Units 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2.4 Power Supply Capacity 437. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS 438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.1 Main Power Input 438. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.2 Backup Unit 439. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.3 Ethernet Interface (10BASE–T/100BASE–TX) 442. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.4 Serial Port/USB Port 450. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.4.1 Serial port 450. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.4.2 USB port 452. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.5 FA Full–Keyboard 453. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.6 High–Speed Serial Bus (HSSB) (HSSB) [For Stand–Alone Type] 455. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT 459. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES 531. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1 OVERVIEW 532. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2 ADDITIONAL TARGET MODEL 532. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3 BOARD–MOUNTED CONNECTORS 532. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.1 Vertical–type Connectors 532. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3.2 Straight and Right–angled Connectors (for Spring and Screw–fixing Connector Housings) 532. . . . . . . .
B.4 CABLE CONNECTORS 533. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.5 RECOMMENDED CONNECTORS, APPLICABLE HOUSINGS, AND CABLES 536. . . . . . . . . . . .
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) 547. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE 551. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) 563. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE 566. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B–63523EN/03 1. CONFIGURATION
1
1
1. CONFIGURATION B–63523EN/03
2
The i series control units are divided into two types: the LCD–mountedtype and stand–alone type.
LCD–mounted type control units have a built–in display. Stand–alonetype control units have a separate display unit. In the following sections,the LCD–mounted type is also referred to as the LCD–mounted type, andthe stand–alone type is also referred to as the stand–alone type.
The configuration and component names of each type are shown in thefigures given below. This manual explains how to attach the connectorsshown in these figures to devices. The numbers in parentheses () in thefigures are keyed to the item numbers of the descriptions in this manual.The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
Series 16i/18i/21i LCD–mounted type control units (A circle in the tabledenotes that a unit is available.)
Display Expansionslot Soft key 16i 18i 21i
8.4″ TFT color None 5+2
LCD2 5+2
3 5+2
4 5+2
10.4″ TFT color None 10+2
LCD2 10+2
3 10+2
4 10+2
10.4″ TFT color None None
LCD (with touchpanel) 2 None
3 None
4 None
7.2″ STN None 5+2
monochrome LCD2 5+2
3 5+2
4 5+2
9.5″ STN None 10+2
monochrome LCD2 10+2
3 10+2
4 10+2
1.1CONTROL UNITCONFIGURATIONAND COMPONENTNAMES
1.1.1Configurations ofLCD–mounted TypeControl Units
B–63523EN/03 1. CONFIGURATION
3
Series 160is/180is/210is LCD–mounted type control units (A circle inthe table denotes that a unit is available.)
Display Expan-sion slot Soft key Touch
panel 160is 180is 210is
10+2 None
None None Provided
10+2 Provided
10+2 None
2 None Provided
10.4″ TFT10+2 Provided
10.4 TFTcolor LCD 10+2 None
3 None Provided
10+2 Provided
10+2 None
4 None Provided
10+2 Provided
1. CONFIGURATION B–63523EN/03
4
LCD–mounted type control unit
Liquid–crystaldisplay
Memory cardinterface
Soft key switch
NOTEThis figure is a front view of the Series 16i/18i/21iLCD–mounted type control unit with an 8.4″ TFT colorliquid–crystal display. The configurations of other controlunits are basically the same as that shown above.The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed tothe item numbers of the descriptions in this manual. Thenumbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
B–63523EN/03 1. CONFIGURATION
5
Fan unit
Battery
Fuse
Power supply connector [CP1]
Serial spindle or position coder connector
[JA41] (6)
I/O–Link connector [JD44A]
Unit rear panel
Soft key
Power supply module
Analog spindle or high–speed skip
connector [JA40] (6.2, 5.4)
I/O unit interface connector (5.3) [JD36A (left)
and JD36B (right)]
Servo check board connector
[CA69]
MDI connector [CA55] (5.1)
Servo unit connector[COP10A–1] (left) (7)
[COP10A–2] (right) (7)
Ethernet connector[CD38A] (5.5)
LCD–mounted type control unit
NOTEThis figure is a rear view of the Series 16i/18i/21i LCD–mounted type control unit without optionslots. The configurations of the other control units of the Series 16i/18i/21i are basically thesame as that shown above.The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed to the item numbers of the descriptionsin this manual. The numbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
1. CONFIGURATION B–63523EN/03
6
LCD–mounted type control unit
Rear of unitOption boardFor remote buffer, DNC1, or DNC2
RS–422 connector (11)[JD6A]
RS–232C connector (11)[JD28A]
Rear of unitOption boardFor HSSB board
HSSB opticalconnector (12)[COP7]
B–63523EN/03 1. CONFIGURATION
7
NOTE1 The above figures are rear views of a LCD–mounted type
control unit with option slots. The configurations of theoption slot portions of other LCD–mounted type controlunits are the same as in the above figures.
2 When a loader control board is used, refer to the loadercontrol connection manual.
3 The optional functions shown below use option boards.These option boards do not have connectors for connectingexternal devices. C language Symbol CAPi T RISCThe numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed tothe item numbers of the descriptions in this manual. Thenumbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
1. CONFIGURATION B–63523EN/03
8
Rear side of unitOption boardFor sub–CPU card
Analog output connector (6)
[JA40]
Connector for serial spindle/
position coder (6)[JA41]
Rear side of unitOption boardFor data server board
Ethernet (5)[CD33]
LCD–mounted type control unit
Servo unit connector (FSSB) (7) [CP10A–1] (left)[CP10A–2] (right)
Servo check board connector
(7) [CA54](Near side) (Far side)
ATA card
NOTEThe above figures are rear views of a LCD–mounted typecontrol unit with option slots. The configurations of theoption slot portions of other LCD–mounted type controlunits are the same as in the above figures.The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed tothe item numbers of the descriptions in this manual. Thenumbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
B–63523EN/03 1. CONFIGURATION
9
Connector for master board
[JN1]
Rear side of unitOption boardI/O Link–II interface board
I/O LINK–IIterminal unit
[TB1]
LCD–mounted type control unit
Connector for slave board
[JN2]
NOTEThe above figures are rear views of a LCD–mounted typecontrol unit with option slots. The configurations of theoption slot portions of other LCD–mounted type controlunits are the same as in the above figures.The numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed tothe item numbers of the descriptions in this manual. Thenumbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
1. CONFIGURATION B–63523EN/03
10
Series 16i/18i/21i stand–alone type control units (A circle in the tabledenotes that a unit is available.)
Slot rack name Expansionslot
Minislot 16i 18i 21i
Re-marks
Single–slot rack None 2 (*NOTE)
3–slot rack 2 4 (*NOTE)
Series 16i/18i/21i display units (A circle in the table denotes that a unitis available.)
Display Softkey
Graphicdisplay 160i 180i 210i
Re-marks
10.4″ TFT color LCD 10+2 Provided
10.4″ TFT color LCD(with touch panel)
None Provided
9.5″ STN10+2 Provided
9.5 STNmonochrome LCD 10+2 None
Series 160i/180i/210i display units (CNC display unit with PC functions)(A circle denotes that a unit is available.)
Display Softkey
Touchpanel 160i 180i 210i
Re-marks
None None
″10+2 Provided
10.4″ TFT color LCDNone Provided
10+2 Provided
None None
″10+2 None
12.1″ TFT color LCDNone Provided
10+2 Provided
None None
″10+2 None
15.0″ TFT color LCDNone Provided
10+2 Provided
1.1.2Configurations ofStand–alone TypeControl Units
B–63523EN/03 1. CONFIGURATION
11
Series 160is/180is/210is display units (CNC display unit with PCfunctions) (A circle denotes that a unit is available.)
Display Softkey
Touchpanel 160is 180is 210is Re-
marks
10+2 None
10.4″ TFT color LCD None Provided
10+2 Provided
1. CONFIGURATION B–63523EN/03
12
Stand–alone type control unit
Battery (4.4)
Memory card interface
LCD connector (5) [COP20A]
Mini slot Slot 12
Mini slot Slot 11
Mini slot Slot 10
Mini slot Slot 9
Servo unit (FSSB)connector (7)
[COP10A–1(lower)][COP10A–2(upper)]
Slot 3 Slot 2
Battery (4.4)
Status display LED
I/O unit interface connector (5.2) [JD5A, JD5B]
I/O Link connector (9)
[JD44A]
Connector for analog spindle or high–speed
skip (6) (5.3) [JA40]
Connector for serial spindle or position
coder (6) [JA41]
Connector for CRT link and MDI (5)
[JD45]
LED for maintenance
Servo check board connector (7) [CA69A]
Power supply connector (4) [CP1(right)][CP2(left)]
Rotary switch for maintenance (upper),
Push switch for maintenance (lower)
GND connection terminal
Connector for ethernet[CD38A]
NOTEThe numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed tothe item numbers of the descriptions in this manual. Thenumbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
B–63523EN/03 1. CONFIGURATION
13
Stand–alone type control unit
Sub–CPU board
Connector for analog spindle or high–speed
skip (6) (5.3) [JA40]
Connector for serial spindle or position
coder (6) [JA41]
Mini slot
Servo unit (FSSB) connector (7) [COP10A–1(lower)][COP10A–2(upper)]
Servo check board connector (7) [CA69B]
NOTEThe numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed tothe item numbers of the descriptions in this manual. Thenumbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
1. CONFIGURATION B–63523EN/03
14
Stand–alone type control unit (mini slots)
HSSB board
C board
Remote buffer, DNC2 board
Remote buffer, DNC2 board
DNC1 board
HSSB optical connector (12)
The C board has no connector.
RS–232–C connector (11)
RS–422 connector (11)
RS–485 connector (11)
NOTEThe numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed tothe item numbers of the descriptions in this manual. Thenumbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
B–63523EN/03 1. CONFIGURATION
15
Stand–alone type control unit (mini slots)
Ethernet board
DeviceNet board
PROFIBUS board
FL–net board
I/O Link–II board
Ethernet board connector (13)
DeviceNet board connector (13)
PROFIBUS board connector (13)
FL–net board connector (13)
I/O Link–II board connector (13)
NOTEThe numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed tothe item numbers of the descriptions in this manual. Thenumbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
1. CONFIGURATION B–63523EN/03
16
LCD unit for stand–alone type control unit
Liquid–crystal display
Memory card interface
Soft key switch
Connector for MDI connection (5)
[CA55]
I/O unit interface connector (5)
[JD36A]
LCD connector (5) [COP20B] Fuse
Power supply connector(5)[CPIA (right)][CPIB (left)]
GND connection terminal
NOTEThe numbers in parentheses () in the figures are keyed tothe item numbers of the descriptions in this manual. Thenumbers in brackets [] in the figures are connector numbers.
B–63523EN/03 1. CONFIGURATION
17
Mother board
CPU for controlling CNC· Power supply· 2–axis to 8–axis control · Spindle interface· LCD/MDI· I/O link· PMC–SB7· Analog output/high–speed DI
· RS–232C × 2· Memory card interface
Loader control board
Loader control function· 2–/4–axis control
Serial communication board
Remote buffer/DNC1/DNC2/HDLC
Basic system
C board
C functions for PMC
Sub–CPU board
Sub–CPU for 2–path control· 2–axis to 8–axis control· Spindle interface· Analog output
Symbol CAPi T
Conversationalautomaticprogrammingfunction
Data server board
Data server function
RISC board
High–precision contour controlfunction
HSSB interface board
High–speed serial bus interface
Options
On a unit with option slots, as many option boards as the number of option slots can be mounted. (However, theoption board must satisfy the mounting conditions. See the mounting conditions for additional options.)
The following types of units are available: Unit without option slots Unit having two option slots Unit having three option slots Unit having four option slots
Network board
· I/O Link–II board· Ethernet board· Profibus–DP board· DeviceNet board
Fig. 1.2 (a) Configuration of the LCD–mounted type control unit (Series 16i/160is)
1.2HARDWAREOVERVIEW
1. CONFIGURATION B–63523EN/03
18
Mother board
CPU for controlling CNC· Power supply· 2–axis to 6–axis control· Spindle interface· LCD/MDI· I/O link· PMC–SB7· Analog output/high–speed DI
· RS–232C × 2· Memory card interface
Basic system
On a unit with option slots, as many option boards as the number of option slots can be mounted. (However,the option board must satisfy the mounting conditions. See the mounting conditions for additional options.)
The following types of units are available: Unit without option slots Unit having two option slots Unit having three option slots Unit having four option slots
Loader control board
Loader control function· 2–/4–axis control
Serial communication board
Remote buffer/DNC1/DNC2/HDLC
C board
C functions for PMC
Sub–CPU board
Sub–CPU for 2–path control· 2–axis to 6–axis control· Spindle interface· Analog output
Symbol CAPi T
Conversationalautomaticprogrammingfunction
Data server board
Data server function
HSSB interface board
High–speed serial bus interface
Options
Network board
· I/O Link–II board· Ethernet board· Profibus–DP board· DeviceNet board
Fig. 1.2 (b) Configuration of the LCD–mounted type control unit (Series 18i/180is)
B–63523EN/03 1. CONFIGURATION
19
Mother board
CPU for controlling CNC· Power supply· 2–axis to 4–axis control· Spindle interface· LCD/MDI· I/O link· PMC–SA1/SB7· Analog output/high–speed DI
· RS–232C × 2· Memory card interface
Loader control board(for T system only)
Loader control function· 2–/4–axis control
Serial communication board
Remote buffer/DNC1/DNC2/HDLC
Basic system
C board
C functions for PMC
HSSB interface board
High–speed serial bus interface
Options
On a unit with option slots, as many option boards as the number of option slots can be mounted.(However, the option board must satisfy the mounting conditions. See the mounting conditions for addi-tional options.)
A control unit without option slotsand a control unit having twoslots are available.
DATA SERVER function
DATA SERVER board
Network board
· I/O Link–II board· Ethernet board· Profibus–DP board· DeviceNet board
Symbol CAPi T
Conversationalautomaticprogrammingfunction
Fig. 1.2 (c) Configuration of the LCD–mounted type control unit (Series 21i/210is)
1. CONFIGURATION B–63523EN/03
20
Single–slot rackSlot 0
Option slot 1
Option slot 2
Mini slot 12
Three–slot rack
Basic system (slot 1)
Main board
CPU for controlling CNC
Sub–CPU board (for 16i/18i only)
RISC board (for 16i/18i only)
Options (mini slot)
HSSB interface boardHigh–speed serial bus interface
C boardC functions for PMC
Serial communication board
Remote buffer/DN1/DNC2
Mini slot 10
Mini slot 11 Mini slot 9
Mini slot 10
Mini slot 9
Options (slot 3) Options (slot 2)
High–precisioncontour controlfunction
Sub–CPU for 2–path control· Axis control· Spindle control · Analog output
· Power supply· Axis control· Spindle control· LCD/MDI control· I/O link control· PMC control· Analog output/high–speed DI control
· Serial communication control (RS–232–C)
· Memory card control
DATA SERVERboard
DATA SERVERfunction
Loader controlboard
Loader controlfunction
Symbol CAPi TConversationalautomaticprogrammingfunction
Network board· I/O Link–II board· Ethernet board· Profibus–DP board· DeviceNet board
NOTEIn the above description, the 16i/18i/21i include the160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is, respectively.
Fig. 1.2 (d) Configuration of the stand–alone type control unit
B–63523EN/03 1. CONFIGURATION
21
Conditions for installing options (LCD–mounted type)
Option Slot nearest to the LCD
Middle slot among the
option 3 slots
Option 4 slot farthest from
the LCD
Axis control Sub–CPU board
Axis control board– 2/4/6/8 axis
Loader control board
Axis control board– 2/4 axis
PMC C language
PMC C board
Main unit– A/B
Communication HSSB board
PC sideHSSB board
Serial communication board
Main unit– A/B + Communication function
– Remote buffer/DNC1/DNC2
CAP Symbol CAPi T board
RISC board
High–precision contour control function/High–precision contour control function dedicated to NURBSinterpolation
Data server Data server board (ATA flash card and 10BASE–T)
Ethernet and data server functions
Network Ethernet board
Ethernetfunction + Function
– FOCASI/DNC1/FACTOLINK
Ethernet and data server functions
DeviceNetfunction
+ DeviceNetapplication
+Master/slave
PROFIBUS board
PROFIBUSfunction + PROFIBUS
application + Master/slave
I/O Link–II interface board
Main unit– Slave/master
CAUTIONEach option listed above occupies one option slot. These option slots do not necessarily acceptall option types. When selecting option slots, therefore, pay attention to the number of optionslots. In this table, the symbol “” indicates the option slot that does not accept the indicatedoptions. Some combinations of options are unacceptable.
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS B–63523EN/03
22
2 TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
B–63523EN/03 2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
23
24V–IN(CP1A)
MDI(CA55)
R232(JD36A)
R232(JD36B)
A–OUT&HDI(JA40)
I/O Link(JD1A)
CK1
MDI UNIT
JA3
CPD1
CPD1
JD1A
JD1A
JD1B
JD1B
DC24V
DC24V
SPDL&POS(JA41)
FSSB(COP10A–1)
MCC
SVM
SVM
SVM
SVM
SPM
TB2 CX2A JX1A
TB1 CX2B JX1B
TB1 CX2B JX1B
CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A
CX1B TB1 JX1B
COP10B
JA7A
JA7B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
CP11A
COP10B
COP10A
JF1
JY2
TB2
TB2
CX4CX3CX1A TB2
DC24V JF101
JF102
JF103
JF104
JA4A
COP10B
COP10B
COP10A
COP10A
PSM
CNF1
CP11A JF101
JF102
JF103
JF104
SV–CHK(CA69)
LCD–mounted type control unit
Mother board
L
C
D Soft key cable
24 VDC power
RS–232C I/O unit
RS–232C I/O unit
Touch panel
Analog output for tool drive
High–speed skip input
Manual pulse generator
Operator’spanel
Powermagneticscabinet
Distributed I/Oboard
DistributedI/O board, I/Ounit, etc.
Position coder for analog spindle
Circuit breaker
Position coder
To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor
Axis 1 servo motor
Axis 2 servo motor
Axis 3 servo motor
Axis 4 servo motor
The maximum allowable number of controlled axes varies with the model. (In this figure, a 1–axisamplifier is used.) Separate detector interface unit 1
Linear scale, axis 1
Linear scale, axis 2
Linear scale, axis 3
Linear scale, axis 4
Linear scale, axis 1
Linear scale, axis 2
Linear scale, axis 3
Linear scale, axis 4
Absolute scale battery
(Required only when an absolute scale is used)
Separate detector interface unit 2 (cannot be used in 21i/210i)
Servo check board
Circuit breakerAC reactor
200VAC
200VAC
(CN2)
FSSB(COP10A–2)
Ethernet
Ethernet(CD38A)
See 7.1.2.2.
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS B–63523EN/03
24
R232–3(JD28A)
R422–1(JD6A)
SVM
SVM
SVM
SPM
PSM
COP10B
COP10A
A–OUT(JA40)
SPDL&POS(JA41)
FSSB(COP10A–1)
SV–CHK(CA69)
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
SVMCOP10B
COP10A
LCD–mounted type control unit (only when optional functions are provided)
Opt
ion
slot
Serial communication boardRemote buffer boardDNC1 boardDNC2 board
RS–232C I/O unit (when remote buffer boardor DNC2 board is used)
RS–422 I/O unit (when remote buffer board orDNC1 board is used)
Sub–CPU board (cannot be used in21i/210is)
Analog output for tool drive
Position coder
Position coder
Spindle motor
Sub axis 1 servo motor
Sub axis 2 servo motor
Sub axis 3 servo motor
Sub axis 4servo motor
To 2nd spindleServo card
Up to six or eight axes, depending on the model
Servo check board
B–63523EN/03 2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
25
MCC
PSMCX1B TB1 CX2B JX1B
FSSB(COP10A)
SV–CHK(CA54)
I/O L(JD1A)
CX4
CX3CX1A TB2
SVM
SVM
SVM
SVMTB2 CX2A JX1A
TB1 CX2B JX1B
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
JF1TB2
JA3
CPD1
CPD1
JD1A
JD1A
JD1B
JD1B
24VDC
24VDC
COP10B
COP10B
COP10A
COP10A
200VAC
200VAC
10BASE5(CD27) Ethernet
HSSB(COP7)
LCD–mounted type control unit (when optional functions are provided)
Opt
ion
slot Loader control board
Circuit breaker
Circuit breaker
Loader axis 1 servomotor
Loader axis 2 servomotor
Loader axis 3 servomotor
Loader axis 4 servomotor
(In this figure, a 1–axis amplifier is used.)
Loader control servo check board
Distributed I/O board
Operator’s panel for loader
Power magnetics cabinet
Distributed I/O board, I/O unit, etc.
Data server board
HSSB board
(When a PC or PANEL i is connected usingthe HSSB interface, the model name is still16i/18i/21i.)
Personal computer orPANEL i
ATAflash card
2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS B–63523EN/03
26
The soft key cable isattached to the LC controlprinted circuit board.
24V–IN(CP1)
24V–OUT(CP2)
LCD(COP20A)
R232–2(JD5B)
A–OUT&HDI(JD44A)
I/O Link(JD1A)
LCD UNIT
JA3
CPD1
CPD1
JD1A
JD1A
JD1B
JD1B
R232–1(JD5A)
JD1A
JD1B
LINK(JD45)
SPDL&POS(JA41)
FSSB(COP10A–1)
MCC
SVM
SVM
SVM
SVM
SPM
TB2 CX2A JX1A
TB1 CX2B JX1B
TB1 CX2B JX1B
CX1A TB1 CX2A JX1A
CX1B TB1 JX1B
COP10B
JA7A
JA7B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
CP11A
COP10B
COP10A
JF1
JY2
TB2
TB2
CX4CX3CX1A TB2
JF101
JF102
JF103
JF104
JA4A
COP10B
COP10B
COP10A
COP10A
PSM
CNF1
SV–CHK(CA69A)
Stand–alone type control unitS
lot 0
Main board
24 VDC power
To I/O unit
MDUNIT
CK2
CK1
COP20B
CA55CP1A
Memory card
CP1B
Optical fiber cable
(Touch panel)
RS–232C I/O unit
RS–232C I/O unit
Analog output for tool drive
High–speed skip input
DistributedI/O board
Manual pulse generator
Operator’spanel
Powermagneticscabinet
DistributedI/O board,I/O unit, etc.
β amplifierwith I/O link
Servo motor
Detachable LCD/MDI
MDI unit
Position coder
Circuit breaker
To 2nd spindle Serial spindle motor
Axis 1 servo motor
Position coder
Circuit breaker
Servo card
Axis 2 servo motor
Axis 3 servo motor
Axis 4 servo motor
Linear scale, axis 1
Up to six or eight axes, depending on the model (In this figure, a 1–axis amplifier is used.)
Separate detector interface unit 1
Linear scale, axis 2
Linear scale, axis 3
Linear scale, axis 4
Battery for absolute scale
(Required only when an absolute scale is used)Separate detector interface unit 2(cannot be used in 21i)
Servo check board
AC reactor
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
24VDC
200VAC
200VAC
FSSB(COP10A–2)
See 7.1.2.2.
Ethernet
ETHERNET(CD38A)
B–63523EN/03 2. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
27
Stand–alone type control unit
Hard disk unit
Data server board
Ethernet
Servo check board
Analog output for tool drive
SVM
SVM
SVM
SPM
PSM
Spindle motor
Sub axis 1servo motor
Up to six or eight axes, depending on the model.
To second spindle
Position coder
COP10B
COP10A
A–OUT(JA40)
SPDL&POS(JA41)
Servo card
FSSB(COP10A-1)
SV–CHK(CA69B)
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
SVMCOP10B
COP10A
Sub–CPU board (cannot be used in 21i)
Serial communicationboard
Remote buffer boardDNC1 boardDNC2 board
RS–232C I/O unit (when remote buffer board or DNC2 board is used)R232–3
RS–422 I/O unit (when remote buffer board or DNC1 board is used)R422–1
Optical fiber cable(*1)
*1 With the lathe system with complex machining function on the mainCPU board, this servo interface cannot be used. Only the servo interface of the main board can be used.
Ethernet
Ethernet
HSSB board
Personal Computer, PANEL i or CNC display unit with PC functionsHSSB(COP7)Optical fiber cable
slot
2sl
ot 3
Position coder
Sub axis 2servo motor
Sub axis 3servo motor
Sub axis 4servo motor
Min
i slo
tM
ini s
lot
Min
i slo
t
FSSB(COP10A-2)
(When a PC or PANEL i is connected using theHSSB interface, the model name is still 16i/18i/21i.The model name is changed to 160i/180i/210i onlywhen a CNC display unit with PC functions is con-nected.)
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
28
3 INSTALLATION
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
29
The peripheral units and the control unit have been designed on theassumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In this manual“cabinet” refers to the following:
Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing thecontrol unit or peripheral units;
Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, forhousing the control unit or operator’s panel.
Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shallconform to the following table. Section 3.3 describes the installation anddesign conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.
Condition
LCD–mounted
type controlunit and dis-
play unit(except unit
with dataserver
function)
Stand–alonetype control
unit
LCD–mountedtype controlunit with PC
and data serverfunctions
Ambient Operating 0°C to 58°C 0°C to 55°C 5°C to 53°CAmbientTempera-
tureStorage, Transport
–20°C to 60°C
Normal75%RH or less, no con-densation
10% to 75%RH,no condensation
Humidity Short period(less than 1month)
95%RH or less, no con-densation
10% to 90%RH,no condensation
Operating 0.5 G or less
Vibration Non–operat-ing
1.0 G or less
Meters Operating Up to 1000 m Up to 1000 mMetersabove sealevel
Non–operat-ing
Up to 12000 m Up to 12000 m
Environ-ment
Normal machine shop environment(The environment must be considered if the cabinets are in a loca-tion where the density of dust, coolant, and/or organic solvent isrelatively high.)
3.1ENVIRONMENTALREQUIREMENTSOUTSIDE THECABINET
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
30
The following CNC–related units require an input power supply thatsatisfies the indicated current capacities with a power supply voltage of24 VDC 10%. Here, note that momentary voltage changes and ripplesare also within 10% of the power supply voltage.
Table 3.2.1 (a) Power supply capacity (for LCD–mounted type control units)
Unit 16i 18i 21iPower supply
capacity Remarks
LCD–mounted Without option slots — 1.6A (*1)type control unit
With 2 option slots — 1.7A (*1)
With 3 option slots — 1.9A (*1)
With 4 option slots — 2.0A (*1)
Without option slots — — 1.5A (*1)
With 2 option slots — — 1.7A (*1)
HSSB board 0.2A
Sub–CPU board — 0.7A
Loader control board 0.5A
PMC C 0.3A
Serial communication board (remote buffer, DNC1, DNC2)
0.3A
Symbol CAPi T board — — 0.5A
RISC board — 0.5A
Data server board 0.5A
I/O Link–II board 0.5A
NOTE1 The liquid–crystal display and MDI unit are included. Option
boards are not included.2 For other peripheral units (such as I/O units), see Table
3.2.1 (c) and also refer to the relevant manuals.3 When you select the input DC power supply for the CNC
control section, consider the restrictions other than thepower supply capacity. Be sure to see also Subsection4.4.2.
3.2POWER SUPPLYCAPACITY
3.2.1Power SupplyCapacities ofCNC–related Units
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
31
Table 3.2.1 (b) Power supply capacity (for stand–alone type control units)
Unit 16i 18i 21i160i/160is
180i/180is
210i/210is
Powersupply
capacity
Re-marks
Stand–alonetype control unit
1–slot rack 1.6A (*1, *2,*3, *4)
(including mainCPU board) 3–slot rack 1.8A (*1, *2,
*3, *4)
HSSB board 0.2A
Sub–CPU board — — 0.8A
Loader control unit 0.5A+7.3mA×DI
PMC C 0.3A
Serial communication board(remote buffer, DNC1, DNC2)
0.3A
Symbol CAPi T board 0.3A
RISC board — — 0.5A
Ethernet board 0.5A
10.4″ LCD unit — — — 1.0A (*3)
9.5″ LCD unit — — — 0.8A (*3)
NOTE1 Boards in option slots and mini slots are not included.2 When an RS–232–C unit (with power supplied form the NC)
is connected to the RS–232–C port, +1 A is further required.3 Use memory cards that consume no more than 2 W.4 When adjusting the servo, use the FANUC i Tune. Use of
the servo check board requires +0.2 A.5 For the CNC display unit with PC functions, see Chapter 8.6 For the Series 160is/180is/210is, see Chapter 14.7 When you select the input DC power supply for the CNC
control section, consider the restrictions other than thepower supply capacity. Be sure to see also Subsection4.4.2.
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
32
Table 3.2.1 (c) Power supply rating
Unit 16i 18i 21i160i/160is
180i/180is
210i/210is
Power supplycapacity Remarks
MDI unit 0A
Operator’s panel I/Omodule
0.3A+7.3mA×DI
Connector panel I/Omodule (basic)
0.2A+7.3mA×DI
Connector panel I/Omodule (additional)
0.1A+7.3mA×DI
Separate detectorinterface unit
0.9A Basic 4–axis unitonly
Separate detectorinterface unit
— — 1.5A Basic 4 axes +additional 4 axes
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
33
When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditionsdescribed in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on thescreen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must beconsidered. The cabinet design must meet the following conditions :
The cabinet must be fully closed.
The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airbornedust,coolant,and organic solvent.
The cabinet must be designed so that the permissible temperature ofeach unit is not exceeded. For actual heat design, see Section 3.4.
A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the airwithin. (This is not necessary for a unit with fan.)The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along thesurface of each installed unit.
CAUTIONIf the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust easilyadheres to the unit. This may cause the unit to fail. (Thisis not necessary for a unit with fan.)
For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required betweeneach unit and the wall of the cabinet. (This is not necessary for a unitwith fan.)
Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door in orderto seal the cabinet.
The display unit must not be installed in such a place that coolantwould directly fall onto the unit. The control unit has a dust–prooffront panel, but the unit should not be placed in a location wherecoolant would directly fall onto it.
Noise must be minimized.As the machine and the CNC unit are reduced in size, the parts thatgenerate noise may be placed near noise–sensitive parts in themagnetics cabinet.The CNC unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet designto minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmittedto the CNC unit is necessary. See section 3.5 for details of noiseelimination/management.
When placing units in the cabinet, also consider ease of maintenance.The units should be placed so that they can be checked and replacedeasily when maintenance is performed.
The hard disk drive and floppy disk drive must not be installed nearthe source of a strong magnetic field.
3.3DESIGN ANDINSTALLATIONCONDITIONS OF THEMACHINE TOOLMAGNETIC CABINET
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
34
The installation conditions of the I/O unit and connector panel I/Omodule must be satisfied.To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit and connectorpanel I/O module must be installed in the direction shown in thefollowing figure. Clearances of 100 mm or more both above andbelow the I/O unit are required for wiring and ventilation.Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unitand connector panel I/O module.
Connector panel I/O module orI/O base unit(No screws or protrusions shallextend from the bottom of thisunit.)
Bottom
Top
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
35
The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units andparts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat isradiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in thecabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amountof heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, theless the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinetrefers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating thesurface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installingheat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method isdescribed in the following subsections.
The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/°Cper 1m2 surface area, that is, when the 6W heat source is contained in acabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in thecabinet rises by 1°C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers tothe area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the areaof the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited bythe fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almostconstant.The following expression must then be satisfied to limit thedifference in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside airto 13°C or less when the temperature in the cabinet rises: Internal heat loss P [W] 6[W/m2⋅°C] × surface area S[m2]×13[°C] of rise in temperature(A cooling capacity of 6 W/°C assumes the cabinet is so large thatagitation with the fan motor does not make the temperature distributionuniform. For a small cabinet like the operator’s panel, a cooling capacityof 8 W/°C, indicated in Subsection 3.4.4, may be used.)For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4m2 has a cooling capacityof 24W/°C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 13°C under theseconditions, the internal heat must not exceed 312W. If the actual internalheat is 360W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by 15°C ormore. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet must beimproved using the heat exchanger.For the power magnetic cabinet containing a stand–alone type controlunit, the internal temperature rise must be suppressed to 10°C or less,instead of 13°C.
3.4THERMAL DESIGNOF THE CABINET
3.4.1
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
36
Table 3.4.2 (a) Heat output (for LCD–mounted type control unit)
Unit 16i 18i 21iHeat output
(W) Remarks
LCD–mounted Without option slots 33W (*1)type control unit
With 2 option slots 37W (*1)
With 3 option slots — 39W (*1)
With 4 option slots — 40W (*1)
Option board (*5) HSSB board 3W
Sub–CPU board — 13W
Loader control board 10W
PMC C 5W
Serial communication board(remote buffer, DNC1, DNC2)
6W
Symbol CAPi T board — — 10W
RISC board — 9W
Data server board 9W
I/O Link–II board 9W
NOTE1 The liquid–crystal display and MDI unit are included. Option boards are not included.2 When option boards are used, the total heat output of the selected option boards must not
exceed the following value:
Rack type Total heat output
4–slot rack 38W
3–slot rack 38W
2–slot rack 26W
3.4.2Heat Output of EachUnit
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
37
Table 3.4.2 (b) Heat output (for stand–alone type control units)
Unit 16i 18i 21i160i/160is
180i/180is
210i/210is
Heatoutput
Re-marks
Stand–alone typecontrol unit
1–slot rack 30W (*1)
(including mainCPU board)
3–slot rack 43W (*1)
Option board HSSB board 4W
Loader control unit 15W
Sub–CPU board — — 14W
PMC C 7W
Serial communicationboard (remote buffer,DNC1, DNC2)
7W
Symbol CAPi T board 10W
RISC board — — 12W
Ethernet board 10W
10.4″ LCD unit — — — 18W
9.5″ LCD unit — — — 14W
NOTE1 The indicated heat output values are the maximum values,
including the heat outputs of the boards in the option slotsand mini slots.
2 The heat outputs of units connected to the CNC andmemory cards are not included.
3 For the CNC display unit with PC functions, see Chapter 8.4 See Chapter 14 for explanations about the CNC display unit
for the is series CNC.
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
38
Table 3.4.2 (c) Heat output (peripheral units)
Unit 16i 18i 21i160i/160is
180i/180is
210i/210is
Heat output(W) Remarks
MDI unit 0W
Operator’s panel I/Omodule
12W (*1)
Connector panel I/Omodule (basic)
8W (*1)
Connector panel I/Omodule (additional)
5W (*1)
Separate detectorinterface unit
9W Basic 4–axis unitonly(*2)
Separate detectorinterface unit
— — 14W Basic 4 axes +additional 4 axes(*2)
NOTE1 The indicated values are when 50% of the module input
signals are ON.2 Heat output generated within the separate detector is not
included.
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
39
With a small cabinet like the operator’s panel, the heat dissipatingcapacity of the cabinet is as shown below, assuming that there is sufficientmixing of the air inside the cabinet.Coated metal surfaces: 8 W/m2°CPlastic surfaces: 3.7 W/m2°CAn example of the thermal design for the cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.3 isshown below.
Air guidechamber
120–mm square fanmotor (for air mixing)
Machine operator’s panel
Fig. 3.4.3
Assume the following.Thermal exchange rates : Coated metal surfaces 8 W/m2°C
: Plastic surfaces 3.7 W/m2°C: Allowable temperature rise: 13°C higher than the exteriortemperature
Also, assume the following.Dimensions of pendant type cabinet shown in Fig. 3.4.3:
560(W) × 470(H) × 150(D) mmSurface area of metallic sections : 0.5722 m2
Surface area of plastic sections : 0.2632 m2
In this case, the allowable total heat dissipation for the cabinet is: 8 × 0.5722 × 13 + 3.7 × 0.2632 × 13 = 72 W.
In consequence, it can be concluded that the units shown in Table 3.4.3on the next page can be installed in this cabinet.
3.4.3Thermal Design ofOperator’s Panel
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
40
Table 3.4.3
LCD–mounted type control unit with option 2 slots 37 W
Option board (serial communication board) 6 W
Option board (loader control board) 10 W
Distributed operator’s panel I/O module 12 W
120–mm square fan motor for air mixing 8 W
Total heat dissipation of the above 73 W
NOTEThe 12 W quoted for the I/O module of the distribution–typeoperator ’s panel represents an example heat output valuewhen half of all the input signals are turned on. This valuevaries, depending on the mechanical configuration.
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
41
The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surface–mount andcustom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also isdesigned to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult tomeasure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise hasmany uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from beinggenerated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. Thisprecaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generatingnoise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into theCNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and groundloops.When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in themachine as described in the following section.
The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in thefollowing table:Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Group Signal line Action
Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A
Secondary AC power line separately (Note 1) from groups B
AAC/DC power lines (containing thepower lines for the servo andspindle motors)
and C, or cover group A with anelectromagnetic shield (Note 2).
See Section 3.5.4 and connect
AC/DC solenoidspark killers or diodes with thesolenoid and relay.
AC/DC relaysolenoid and relay.
DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC solenoid
DC relay (24VDC)and relay.
DI/DO cable between the CNC andpower magnetics cabinet
Bind the cables in group Bseparately from group A, or covergroup B with an electromagnetic
B DI/DO cable between the CNC andmachine
shield.
Separate group B as far from
24–VDC input power cablesconnected to the control unit andits peripherals
Group C as possible.
It is more desirable to cover groupB with the shield.
Cable between the CNC and I/OUnit
Bind the cables in group Cseparately from group A, or cover
Cable for position and velocityfeedback
group C with an electromagneticshield.
Cable between the CNC andspindle amplifier
Separate group C as far fromGroup B as possible.
Cable for the position coder Be sure to perform shield
CCable for the manual pulsegenerator
processing in Section 3.5.5.
Cable between the CNC and theMDI (Note 3)
RS–232C and RS–422 interfacecable
Cable for the battery
Other cables to be covered withthe shield
3.5ACTION AGAINSTNOISE
3.5.1Separating SignalLines
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
42
NOTE1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.3 The shield is not required when the cable between the CNC
and MDI is shorter than 30 cm.
Power magnetics cabinetOperator’s cabinet
24 VDCpowersupply
Spindleamplifier
Servoamplifier I/O unit
Cable of group A Cable of group B, C
CNC control unit
Ductto motor
Section of duct
Group A Group B, C
Cover
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
43
The CNC machine tool uses the following three types of grounding:
Signal groundingSignal grounding supplies a reference potential (0 V) for electricalsignals.
Grounding for protectionGrounding for protection is performed for safety reasons as well as toshield against external and internal noise. This type of groundingincludes, for example, the equipment frames, cases and panels ofunits, and the shielding on interface cables connecting the equipment.
Protective grounding (PE)Protective grounding (PE) is performed to connect protection groundsprovided for equipment or between units to ground together at onepoint as a grounding system.
3.5.2Ground
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
44
CNC
LCD–mounted type i series CNC
Stand–alone type i series CNC
DistributedI/O
αi amplifier
AC powersupply
24–V powersupply
AC input
PE (ground plate of cabinet)
Pendant box
Frame
Operator’spanel
Pendant box
Cabinet on machine side
Display
DistributedI/O
αi amplifier
AC powersupply
24–V powersupply
AC input
PE (ground plate of cabinet)
CNC
AC powersupply
Cabinet on machine side
Frame
Frame
Operator’spanel
Path for grounding
Path for protective grounding (PE)
Pendant box
The ground resistance in protective grounding (PE) must be 100 Ω orless (type D grounding).
The cable used for protective grounding (PE) must be of a sufficientcross section to allow current to flow safely into protective ground(PE) if an accident such as a short–circuit occurs. (Generally, a crosssection equal to or greater than that of the AC power cable is required.)
The cable connected to protective ground (PE) must be incorporatedinto the AC power wire such that power cannot be supplied with theground wire disconnected.
Notes on grounding
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
45
M4 stud
Grounding cable, wire 2 mm2 or more
Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with theground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal.For the locations of the grounding terminals of other units, see“EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT” in APPENDIX.
3.5.3Connecting the SignalGround (SG) of theControl Unit
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
46
Stand–alone type control unit
PE
Single–slot rack Three–slot rack
Signal ground terminal(Faston terminal)
Signal ground terminal
M4 (threaded hole)
M3 (threaded hole)
Ground cable2 mm2 or more
Grounding plate of the cabinet
Connect the 0–V lines of the electronic circuits in the control unit to theground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground terminal.
Note that the grounding method differs depending on whether option slotsare present.
Use the Faston terminal (FANUC specification: A02B–0166–K330).
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
47
The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices areturned on or off.This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuitsto be disturbed.
Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. Thistype of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under AC)(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUCtherefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shallconform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DCresistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R) : Equivalent DC resistance of the coil
2) Capacitance (C) :20
I2(µF)to
I2
10
I : Current at stationary state of the coil
Equivalent circuit of the spark killerR C
Spark killer
Spark killer
Motor
ACrelay
Mount the noise eliminator near a motor or a relay coil.
Note) Use a CR–type noise eliminator. Varistor–type noise eliminatorsclamp the peak pulse voltage but cannot suppress a sharp rising edge.
Use a diode which can withstand avoltage up to two times the appliedvoltage and a current up to two timesthe applied current.
Diode
DC relay
Diode (used for direct–current circuits)
– +
3.5.4Noise Suppressor
Notes on selecting thespark killer
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
48
If a cable connected to the CNC, servo amplifier, spindle amplifier, orother device requires shielding, clamp the cable as shown below. Theclamp both supports and shields the cable. Use this clamp to ensure stableoperation of the system.Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp bythe plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must bemade by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :
40 to
80
mm
Cable
Metal fittings for clamp
Ground plate
Fig. 3.5.5 (a) Cable clamp (1)
3.5.5Cable Clamp andShield Processing
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
49
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
Control unit
Ground plate
Metal fittings for clamp
Shield cover
Machine sideinstallationboard
Fig. 3.5.5 (b) Cable clamp (2)
Prepare ground plate like the following figure.
Mount screw hole
Hole for securing metal fitting clamp
Ground terminal(grounded)
Fig. 3.5.5 (c) Ground plate
For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surfaceis plated with nickel.
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
50
12mm
20mm
8mmGroundplate
Fig. 3.5.5 (d) Ground plate holes
(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.
17mm
28mm
6mm
Max. 55mm
Fig. 3.5.5 (e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp
Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp A02B–0124–K001 (8 pieces)
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
51
To protect the devices from surge voltages due to lightening, it isrecommended to install surge–absorbing elements between the lines ofthe input power and between one line and ground. This does not,however, assure protection from all surges due to lightening.The recommended items are as follows. (Items made by Okaya DenkiSangyo Co.)
For the 200–V system
Between lines R A V–781BYZ–2
Between line and ground R A V–781BXZ–4
For the 400–V system
Between lines R A V–152BYZ–2A
Between line and ground R A V–801BXZ–4
The surge–absorbing elements used for measures against surges due tolightening must be installed in the input power unit as shown in the figurebelow. The figure below shows an example in which an insulatingtransformer, shown by dotted lines, is not installed. If an insulatingtransformer is installed, surge–absorbing element 2 (between line andground) is not required.
R
S
T
PE
a
b
ACinput
Insulatingtrans-former
Nonfusebreaker
Nonfusebreaker
To CNC
ACreac-tor
Servo unitpowersupplymodule
MCC
5ANonfusebreaker
To other electric partson the machine
Surge–absorbing element 1(between lines)
Surge–absorbing element 2(between line and ground)
Inputbreak-er
3.5.6Measures AgainstSurges due toLightning
Installation procedure
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
52
(1)For a better surge absorbing effect, the wiring shown by heavy linemust be as short as possible.
Wire Size: The wire diameter must be 2 mm2 or greater.
Wire length: The sum of the length (a) of the wire for theconnection of surge–absorbing element 1 andthat (b) of surge–absorbing element 2 must be 2m or less.
(2) If conducting dielectric strength tests by applying overvoltages (1000VAC and 1500 VAC) to the power line, remove surge–absorbingelement 2. Otherwise, the overvoltages would activate the element.
(3)The nonfuse breaker (5A) is required to protect the line when a surgevoltage exceeding the capacity of the surge–absorbing elements isapplied and the surge–absorbing elements are short–circuited.
(4)Because no current flows through surge–absorbing elements 1 and 2during normal operation, the nonfuse breaker (5A) can be shared byother electric devices on the machine. It can be used with the controlpower supply of the servo unit power supply module or with the powersupply for the fan motor of the spindle motor.
Notes
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
53
The control unit has a built–in fan motor.Air enters the control unit through the bottom and is drawn through thefan motor which is located on the top of the control unit.
Space (A), shown in Fig. 3.6.1, must be provided to ensure unrestrictedair flow. Also, space (B) should be provided whenever possible. Whenspace (B) cannot be provided, ensure that nothing is placed in theimmediate vicinity which could obstruct the air flow.
B B B
AAA
50mm
50mm
AIR FLOW AIR FLOW
Unit rear panel
Fig. 3.6.1
3.6CONTROL UNIT
3.6.1Installation of theControl Unit
3. INSTALLATION B–63523EN/03
54
The control unit is equipped with a fan motor.
Air is fed into the bottom of the unit and output from the fan motormounted on the top of the unit.
The spaces shown in Fig. 3.6.2 (areas (A) and (B)) are always required toensure smooth air flow.
Also, adequate service access space is required in front of and at the topof the unit so that printed circuit boards and the fan motor can be replacedeasily if necessary.
There is a spare connector located at the far end (at middle height) on theright side of the control unit. This connector is used for controller testingand other purposes. Therefore, space (area (C)) for handling theconnector is required.
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
A A
B B
C
Space for air flow, and access area for fan replacement
Single–slot rack: Approx. 65Three–slot rack: Approx. 180
Access space for spareconnector
Approx. 180
Spare connector
Unit: mmSufficient space forreplacing a printed circuitboard is required.
305038
0
50
80
Fig. 3.6.2
3.6.2Installing theStand–alone TypeControl Unit
B–63523EN/03 3. INSTALLATION
55
For the cabling diagram, see the control unit configuration andcomponent names in Section 1.1.
The cabinet and pendant box that house a display and a operator’s panelthat are to be designed and manufactured by the machine tool builder aresusceptible to dust, cutting debris, oil mist, etc. Note the following andmake sure that they are structured to prevent their entry.
1) The cabinet and pendant box must be of a hermetically sealedstructure.
2) Apply packing to the panel mounting surface to which a display andoperator’s panel are to be mounted.
3) Make sure that the door packing of the cabinet and pendant box issealed firmly.
4) For a cabinet or pendant box with a rear cover, apply packing to themounting surface.
5) Make sure that the cable entrance is sealed with packing, connectorsfor conduits, etc.
6) Make sure that all other openings are blocked, if any.
7) Make sure that the display and operator’s panel do not receive cuttingdebris and coolant directly.
Oil can easily stay on the top of the cabinet and pendant box, possiblydripping down the display and operator’s panel. Make sure that thecabinet and pendant box is of such a structure that oil do not collector that oil do not drip down the display or panel.
Panel (display/operator’s panel)
Cabinet/pendant boxPanel (rear cover)
If the frame is weak, reinforce it.
Apply packing.
Cable entrance (example)Hardware
CablePacking Cable
Connector for conduitBeware of collection of oil.Oil must not collect or drip.
Display/operator’spanel
3.7CABLING DIAGRAM
3.8DUSTPROOFMEASURES FORCABINETS ANDPENDANT BOXES
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
56
4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
B–63523EN/03 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
57
This section explains the connection of power supply for i Series controlunit.
4.1GENERAL
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
58
Supply power (24VDC) to the control uint of i series CNC from anexternal sources.
Provide ON/OFF circuit A for turning the AC power on and off orON/OFF circuit B for turning 24 VDC on and off outside the unit asshown in Fig. 4.2.1 (a). It is recommended that the AC power be turnedon and off (ON/OFF circuit A).
When the i series CNC with PC functions is used, apply countermeasuresto guard against the possible destruction of hard disk storage due tomomentary power failure or power outage, by installing anuninterruptible power supply, etc.
See Section 3.2 for power capacity.
ON OFF COM
200 V AC
Main circuitbreaker
Magneticcontractor
AC line filter
Servo converter Servo inverter
3–phase 200 VAC for powerline
Single–phase200 V AC forcontrol line
CNC control unit
24 V DCinput
External 24 VDC power
ON/OFF circuit I/O units, etc.
Fig. 4.2.1 (a)
4.2TURNING ON ANDOFF THE POWER TOTHE CONTROL UNIT
4.2.1Power Supply for theControl Unit
B–63523EN/03 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
59
For example, “ON/OFF circuit” is as follows : (Fig.4.2.1 (b) ) Select the circuit devices, in consideration of its capacity.
+24V+24V
0V0V
RY1ry1
ry1
ONCOMOFF
DC INPUT24 V
OUTPUT 24 VDCThe power rating is thesum of power requirementson the load side.
POWER ON/OFF SWITCH
DIODERELAY COIL RELAY CONTACT
B CONTACT
A CONTACT
Fig. 4.2.1 (b)
ON/OFF circuit (example)
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
60
Specifications of recommended external 24 VDC power supply(regulated power supply): (The power supply must satisfy UL1950.)
Output voltage: +24 V (10% (21.6 V to 26.4 V)(including ripple voltage and noise. See the figurebelow.)
Output current: The continuous load current must be larger than thecurrent consumption of the CNC.(At the maximum temperature inside the powermagnetics cabinet in which the power supply islocated)
Load fluctuations (including rush current):The output voltage must not go out of the above rangedue to load fluctuations by external DO and otherfactors.
Instantaneous input interruption retention time: 10 mS (for –100%)20 mS (for –50%)
AC input voltage
Instantaneousinterruption(–100%)
Instantaneousinterruption(–50%)
Output voltage
Abruptloadchange
Output current
Fig. Example of ripple voltage and noise due to switching power supply
Noise
Noise
Ripplevoltage
0A
21.6V
26.4V
10mS 20mS
Fig 4.2.2 (a) Timing chart
4.2.2+24V Input PowerSpecifications
B–63523EN/03 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
61
When the vertical axis exists, select the DC power supply that has a long voltagehold time to decrease the amount of vertical axis falling during power–off(including a power failure).If the operating voltage drops to less than or equal to 21.6V, the CNC releasesservo activation. Therefore, when the hold time for 24 VDC during ACpower–off is too short, servo activation is released before the breaks are appliedbecause some peripheral circuit detects power–off. This may increase theamount of vertical axis falling.Generally, a power supply with sufficient power capacity tends to increase thehold time during power–off.
The following circuit configurations are not recommended.
1 Circuit examples that cannot retain the output voltage at aninstantaneous interruption (the voltage reduces to 21.6 V or below)
Example 1
AC input Rectifiercircuit CNC unit
Example 2
AC input Rectifiercircuit
CNC unit
NOTEThe rectifier circuit means a circuit using diodes forfull–wave rectification.
2 Circuit examples that exceed the output voltage specifications (21.6V to 26.4 V) due to an abrupt load change
Example 1
AC inputRegulatedpowersupply
CNC unit
Device withremarkableload fluc-tuations
Notes to take when thevertical axis exists
Circuit configurations
Forbidden
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
62
Example 2
AC inputRegulatedpowersupply
CNC unit
Device withlarge rushcurrent
For a circuit configuration in 2, connect another regulated power supplyto be specifically used for the device with remarkable load fluctuationsso that the CNC and other units are not affected.
If you find instructions to ”turn the power on simultaneously when orbefore turning the power to the CNC on” for a unit such as a 24 VDCpower supply, turn the power to the unit simultaneously when turning onthe power to the CNC on from now on. To turn the power to such a unitsimultaneously when turning the power to the CNC on, connecting theunit on the same line as for the CNC as shown in Fig. 4.2.2 (b) isrecommended. (For a separate detector (scale), see Subsection 4.2.3,”Power–on Sequence,” however.)Turning the power to units on simultaneously when turning the power tothe CNC:When the following power–on timing condition is satisfied, the power tounits is assumed to be turned on simultaneously when the power to theCNC is turned on.
Power to the CNCOn
Power to units (including thePower Mate)
t1 t2Off
On
Off
t1 : 200 ms Means that the power to units (including the PowerMate) is turned on within 200 ms before the power tothe CNC is turned on.
t2 : 500 ms Means that the power to units (including the PowerMate) is turned on within 500 ms after the power to theCNC is turned on.
For instructions to ”turn the power off simultaneously when or afterturning the power to the CNC off” for a unit such as a 24 VDC powersupply, the power–off sequence is not changed unlike the abovepower–on sequence. (Turning the power off simultaneously whenturning the power to the CNC on means that the power may be turned offwithin 500 ms before the power to the CNC is turned off.)
Recommended
B–63523EN/03 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
63
The following circuit configuration is recommended.The power to the CNC and other units (FANUC I/O Unit MODEL A (I/OUnit–A), FANUC Servo Unit (Series with an I/O link (β amplifier withan I/O link), and so on in the sample configuration below) is assumed tobe turned on at the same time. (The power to any unit is not assumed tobe turned on during operation or before the power to the CNC is turnedon. No unit is assumed to be connected between the 24 VDC output ofthe regulated power supply and input of on/off circuit B.)
Either on/off circuit isconnected.
AC input On/off circuit A
I/O Unit–A
CNCRegulated
power supply
Units
β amplifier with an I/O link
When on/off circuit B is connected, thepower must not be supplied to units be-tween the 24 VDC output of the regu-lated power supply and input of on/offcircuit B. (This is because the conditionthat the power to the units is turned onwithin 200 ms before the power to theCNC is turned on.)
On/off circuit B
Fig 4.2.2 (b)
Turn on the power to all the units at the same time, or in the followingsequence:
1 Power to the overall machine (200 VAC), power to theseparate detector (scale)
2 Power to slave I/O units connected via the I/O link, separatedetector interface unit, and stand–alone type LCD unit (24VDC), servo amplifier control power supply (200 VAC)
3 Power to the CNC (24 VDC)
“Turning on the power to all the units at the same time” means completingthe power–on operations in 1 and 2 above within 500 ms of performingpower–on in 3.
As for a stand–alone LCD unit for a display link, no specific powerturn–on sequence is required.
4.2.3Power–on Sequence
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
64
As for a CNC display unit with PC functions, no specific power turn–onsequence for the CNC control unit is required.
If the power only to the control unit of the CNC is turned on withoutturning the power to the CNC display unit with PC functions on, thecontrol unit of the CNC does not start up normally.
If the power only to the CNC display unit with PC functions is turnedon without turning the power to the control unit of the CNC onconversely, the units do not start up normally.
Turn off the power to all the units at the same time, or in the followingsequence:
1 Power to the CNC (24 VDC)2 Power to the slave I/O units connected via the I/O link,
separate detector interface unit, and stand–alone type LCDunit (24 VDC), servo amplifier control power supply (200VAC), and power to any separate detector (scale)
3 Power to the overall machine (200 VAC)
“Turning off the power to all units at the same time” means completingthe power–off operations in 2 and 3 above within 500 ms before thepower–off operation described in 1 above. If the power to the unitsindicated in 2 or 3 is turned off other than within 500 ms of the power in1 being turned off, alarm information is left in the NC.
The power–off sequence for a stand–alone type LCD unit supporting thedisplay link and an CNC display unit with PC functions is undefined.
CAUTIONWhen the CNC display unit with PC functions is used, theOS must be shut down before the power to the control unitis turned off. Be careful not to turn off the power while thehard disk is being accessed or before the OS hasterminated; otherwise, the hardware contents may bedestroyed.
When the power is turned off or when the power is momentarilydisconnected, motor control is disabled. Problems that may be generatedfrom the motor control disabled state should be handled from themachine, as necessary.
For example, when movement along a vertical axis is controlled, a brakeshould be applied to prevent falling. Usually, the brake clamps the motorwhen the servo is not activated or when the motor is not turning. Theclamp is released only when the motor is turning. When servo axis controlis disabled by power–off or momentary power disconnection, the brakeusually clamps the servo motor. In this case, before the relay for clampingoperates, the controlled axis may fall. So, also consider whether thedistance the axis is likely to fall will cause a problem.
4.2.4Power–off Sequence
B–63523EN/03 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
65
Supply power to the control unit from external resouce.The brackets in the figures are the stand–alone type connector name.
+24V (1)0V (2)
CP1
Cable
i series control unit External power
0V1
3
+24V2
24VDC stabilizedpower 24VDC 10%
AMP Japan1–178288–3 (housing)1–175218–5 (Contact)
Select a source that meets the external power terminal.
Recommended cable : A02B–0124–K830 (5m)(Crimp terminal of size M3 is available on the external power side)
External power
CP1A (CP1)
As for an stand–alone type control unit, part of the 24 VDC power inputto CP1 can be taken out from CP2 by branching. CP2 should be connectedas shown below. In this case, the rating of the external 24 VDC powersupplied to CP1 must be the sum of the power consumed within thecontrol unit and that supplied to external equipment via CP2. Up to 1.0A can be supplied to the external equipment.
CP2
+24V (1)0V (2)
0V1
3
+24V2
Series 21i/210i control unit External device
Cable
CP2AMP JAPAN2–178288–3 (Housing)1–175218–5 (Contact) External device
Select a connector thatmatches the pin layout ofthe external device.
4.3CABLE FOR POWERSUPPLY TOCONTROL UNIT
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
66
In a system using the i Series CNC, batteries are used as follows:
Use Component connected tobattery
Memory backup in the CNC control unit CNC control unit
BIOS data backup in the CNC display unit withPC functions
CNC display unit with PCfunctions
Preservation of the current position indicatedby the separate absolute pulse coder
Separate detector interfaceunit
Preservation of the current position indicatedby the absolute pulse coder built into the motor
Servo amplifier
Used batteries must be discarded according to appropriate localordinances or rules. When discarding batteries, insulate them by usingtape and so forth to prevent the battery terminals from short–circuiting.
Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in CMOSmemory in the control unit. The power to the CMOS memory is backedup by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit. Theabove data is not lost even when the main battery goes dead. The backupbattery is mounted on the control unit at shipping. This battery canmaintain the contents of memory for about a year.When the voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message “BAT”blinks on the display and the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC.When this alarm is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible. Ingeneral, the battery can be replaced within two or three weeks, however,this depends on the system configuration.If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no longerbe backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this state causessystem alarm 910 (SRAM parity alarm) to occur because the contents ofmemory are lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacingthe battery. The following two kinds of batteries can be used.
Lithium battery built into the CNC control unit.
Two alkaline dry cells (size D) in the external battery case.
NOTEA lithium battery is installed as standard at the factory.
4.4BATTERIES
4.4.1Battery for MemoryBackup (3VDC)
B–63523EN/03 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
67
(1)Prepare a new lithium battery (ordering drawing number:A02B–0200–K102).
(2)Turn the i Series on for about 30 seconds.
(3)Turn the i Series off.
(4) (LCD–mounted type i Series CNC)Remove the old battery from the top of the CNC control unit.First unplug the battery connector then take the battery out of its case.The battery case of a control unit without option slots is located at thetop right end of the unit. That of a control unit with 2 slots is locatedin the central area of the top of the unit (between fans).(Stand–alone type i Series CNC)Remove the old battery from the front panel of the CNC control unit.First unplug the battery connector then take the battery out of its case.
(5) Insert a new battery and reconnect the connector.
NOTESteps (3) to (5) should be completed within the periodindicated below. Do not leave the control unit without abattery for any longer than the period shown, as this willresult in the contents of memory being lost.Series 16i/18i/21i: Within 30 minutes
Lithium batteryA02B–0236–K102
Batterycase
Connector
(LCD–mounted type i Series CNC)
WARNINGIncorrect battery replacement may cause an explosion. Donot use a battery other than that specified (specification:A02B–0200–K102).
Replacing the lithiumbattery
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
68
Claw holding the battery
Lithium battery
Battery connector
(Stand–alone type i Series CNC)
WARNINGIncorrect battery replacement may cause an explosion. Donot use a battery other than that specified (specification:A02B–0200–K102).
B–63523EN/03 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
69
(1)Prepare two new alkaline dry cells (size D).
(2)Leave the power to the i Series CNC turned on for 30 seconds or so.
(3)Turn the i Series 16i/18i/160i/180i off.
(4)Remove the battery case cover.
(5)Replace the batteries, paying careful attention to their orientation.
(6)Replace the battery case cover.
NOTEWhen replacing the dry cells, use the same procedure asthat for lithium battery replacement procedure, describedabove.
Dry cell × 2
Cover
Connection terminalon the rear
Battery case
Mounting hole × 4
Replacing the alkalinedry cells (size D)
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
70
Power from the external batteries is supplied through the connector towhich the lithium battery is connected. The lithium battery, provided asstandard, can be replaced with external batteries in the battery case(A02B–0236–C281) according to the battery replacement proceduresdescribed above.
NOTE1 Install the battery case (A02B–0236–C281) in a location where the batteries can be replaced
even when the control unit power is on.2 The battery cable connector is attached to the control unit by means of a simple lock system.
To prevent the connector from being disconnected due to the weight of the cable or tensionwithin the cable, fix the cable section within 50 cm of the connector.
Use of alkaline dry cells(size D)
Connection
B–63523EN/03 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
71
If the voltage of a battery drops, the screen on the LCD flashes. (If a fanalarm is issued, the screen on the LCD also flashes.) If this status occurs,replace the battery as soon as possible (within 1 week). FANUCrecommends that each battery be replaced periodically (once a year)regardless of whether a battery alarm is issued.
The BIOS settings are usually preserved as long as the battery is replacedaccording to the following procedure. If they are lost, the followingmessage is displayed when the power is turned on:
251: System CMOS checksum bad – Default configuration used.After this, the default BIOS settings are loaded, and the unit restartsautomatically. Before starting machining, check that the current BIOSsettings of the CNC display unit with PC functions in use have beenchanged from the default BIOS settings, and resume your settings asrequired.
(1)After keeping the CNC display unit with PC functions powered for atleast 5 seconds, turn it off, and enable work to be done from the rear,for example, by removing the battery section from the panel.
(2)Remove the connector from the lithium battery, and take the batteryout from the battery holder.
(3)Attach the connector (BAT1) to a new battery within 5 minutes, andput the battery in the battery holder.
(4)Put the CNC display unit with PC functions back into the previousplace.
(5)Turn the power on, and check that no BIOS parameter is lost (no erroris detected at start–up).
NOTEBe sure to install a new battery within 5 minutes after the oldone is removed from the connector.
4.4.2Batteries for CNCDisplay Unit with PCFunctions (3VDC)
4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
72
Lithium batteryA02B–0200–K102
Connector(BAT1)
Battery holder
Fig.4.4.2 Battery replacement
One battery unit can maintain current position data for six absolute pulsecoders for a year.When the voltage of the battery becomes low, APC alarms 3n6 to 3n8 (n:axis number) are displayed on the LCD display. When APC alarm 3n7is displayed, replace the battery as soon as possible. In general, the batteryshould be replaced within one or two weeks, however, this depends on thenumber of pulse coders used.If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, the current positions forthe pulse coders can no longer be maintained. Turning on the power tothe control unit in this state causes APC alarm 3n0 (reference positionreturn request alarm) to occur. Return the tool to the reference positionafter replacing the battery. Therefore, FANUC recommends that the battery be replaced once a yearregardless of whether APC alarms are generated.See Section 7.1.3 for details of connecting the battery to separate absolutepulse coders.
4.4.3Battery for SeparateAbsolute Pulse Coders(6VDC)
B–63523EN/03 4. POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
73
Obtain four commercially available alkaline batteries (size D).
(1)Turn on the power to the machine (i Series CNC).
(2)Loosen the screws of the battery case, and remove the cover.
(3)Replace the dry batteries in the case.Note the polarity of the batteries as shown in the figure below (orienttwo batteries one way and the other two in the opposite direction).
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Â
Â
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÂ
 Â
Screws
Cover
(4)After installing the new batteries, replace the cover.
(5)Turn off the power to the machine (i Series CNC).
WARNINGIf the batteries are installed incorrectly, an explosion mayoccur. Never use batteries other than the specified type(Size D alkaline batteries).
CAUTIONReplace batteries while the power to the i Series CNC is on.Note that, if batteries are replaced while no power issupplied to the CNC, the recorded absolute position is lost.
The battery for the absolute pulse coder built into the motor is installedin the servo amplifier. For how to connect and replace the battery, referto the following manuals:
FANUC SERVO MOTOR αi series Maintenance Manual
FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series Maintenance Manual
FANUC SERVO MOTOR β series (I/O Link Option) MaintenanceManual
Replacing batteries
4.4.4Battery for AbsolutePulse Coder Built intothe Motor (6VDC)
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
74
5 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
75
“MDI unit” is the generic name used to refer to a manual data input device.It has a keyboard and is used to input CNC data such as programs andparameters into the CNC.A standard MDI unit is available for each of the i Series models withpersonal computer function according to the specifications.
5.1CONNECTION OFMDI UNIT(LCD–MOUNTEDTYPE)
5.1.1General
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
76
CK1
MDICA55
MDI cable
MDI unit
Soft key flexible cableIncluded in the main unit
CN2
5.1.2Connection to the MDIUnit (LCD–mountedType)
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
77
Japan Aviation ElectronicsLY10–DC20 (Housing)LY10–C2–3 (Contact)A02B–0236–K303
*COM1120
CNC
JAE LY20–20P–DTI–P
P
CA55
CA55
*KEY04
*KEY02*KEY00
*KEY03*KEY01
3
2
1
BA
*KEY05
*KEY06
4 *KEY07
*COM005
*COM01
*COM02
6 *COM03
*COM047 *COM06
8 *COM05 *COM07*COM089
*COM09
*COM10
10 *COM11
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A
CK1
CK1
*KEY04
*KEY02
*KEY00
*KEY03
*KEY01
3
2
1
*KEY05
*KEY064 *KEY07
*COM005 *COM01
*COM026 *COM03
*COM047
*COM068
*COM05
*COM07
*COM089 *COM09
*COM1010
13
12
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
1
211
12
3
4
13
14
5
615
16
7
8
17
18
9
10
19
20
A1
B1A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4A5
B5A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10B10
*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY04
*KEY06
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM00
*COM02
*COM01
*COM03*COM04
*COM06
*COM05
*COM07
*COM08
*COM10*COM09
*COM11
*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY04
*KEY06
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM00
*COM02
*COM01
*COM03*COM04
*COM06
*COM05
*COM07
*COM08
*COM10*COM09
*COM11
MDI unit
SHIELD
GROUNDING PLATE
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0236–K812 (25 cm)A02B–0236–K813 (45 cm)Recommended wire specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTEFor MDI cable connector mating on the CA55 side, a simple lock mechanism is employed.Ensure that a load greater than 1 kg is not applied to the connectors. Moreover, clamp the cableso that excessive force is not applied due to vibration. However, shielding and clamping arenot required for a cable of up to 50 cm.
5.1.3Connection with theStandard MDI Unit
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
78
English display
Symbol display
5.1.4Key Layout ofSeparate–type MDI
Compact keys for latheseries (T series)
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
79
English display
Symbol display
Compact keys formachine center series (M series)
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
80
English display
Symbol display
Standard keys for latheseries (T series)
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
81
English display
Symbol display
Compact keys formachining center series(M series)
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
82
The 61–key MDI unit can be used, in addition to the conventional MDIunits (small MDI unit and standard MDI unit). On this 61–key MDI unit,the alphabetic keys are each assigned to a single letter, and are arrangedin alphabetical order.
(1)Connection
The 61–key MDI unit can be connected in the same way as the smalland standard MDI units. See Subsection 5.1.3.The 61–key MDI unit cannot, however, be detached. The CNC controlunit automatically determines whether a 61–key MDI unit or aconventional MDI unit is attached when the control unit is turned on.If a 61–key MDI unit is connected after the control unit is turned on,therefore, the keys cannot be recognized correctly.
(2)Outline drawing
An outline drawing is given in Appendix A.
5.1.561–Key MDI Unit
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
83
With the stand–alone type i Series CNC (except CNC with the PCfunctions), the following display/MDI units can be connected:
24VDC
LCD Unit MDI UnitControl
unit
Connection with a 10.4″ LCD unit or 9.5″ LCD unit
24VDC
VIDEO
24VDC
LCD UnitMDI UnitControl
unit
Connection with a 7.2″ LCD unit via the display link
Soft key cable
When an LCD/MDI integration unit is used, the connections within the dotted box ( )are completed inside the unit.
24VDC
Connection with a detachable 7.2″ LCD unit via the display link
Controlunit
Branchconnector Detachable LCD/
MDI unit
5.2CONNECTION WITHTHE DISPLAY/MDIUNITS (FOR THESTAND–ALONE TYPEi SERIES CNC)
5.2.1Overview
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
84
24VDC
MDI Unit
Controlunit
Connection with an CNC display unit with PC functions
CNC displayunit with PC
functions
FA full keyboard
External powersupply24 VDC ±10%
COP20A COP20B
CP1A
CP1B
CA55
CK1
LCD Unit
MDI Unit
Control unit
Optical fiber cable
5.2.2Connection with the10.4″/9.5″ LCD Unit
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
85
An optical fiber cable is used to make the connection between the CNCcontrol unit and 10.4″ unit or 9.5″ LCD unit. For details of the opticalfiber cable, see Appendix D.
Feed power to the LCD unit from an external 24 VDC power supply.
CP1A
CP1AAMP Japan1–178288–3 (housing)1–175218–5 (contact)
+24V (1)0V (2)
0V1
3
+24V2
24 VDC regulatedpower supply24 VDC ±10%
LCD unit External power supply
Cable
External power supply
Select a cable thatmatches the pins of theexternal power supply.
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0124–K830 (5 m)(On the external power supply side, an M3 crimp terminal is provided.)
Part of the 24 VDC power input to CP1A can be taken out from CP1B bybranching. CP1B should be connected as shown below. In this case, therating of the external 24 VDC power supplied to CP1A must be the sumof the power consumed within the control unit and that supplied toexternal equipment via CP1B. Up to 1.0 A can be supplied to the externalequipment.
CP1B
+24V (1)0V (2)
0V1
3
+24V2
LCD unit External device
Cable
CP1BAMP Japan2–178288–3 (housing)1–175218–5 (contact)
External power supply
Select a cable thatmatches the pins of theexternal power supply.
Connection between theCNC control unit andLCD unit
Connection of a powersupply to the LCD unit
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
86
For the connection between the connector (CA55) of the LCD unit andthat (CK1) of the MDI unit, see Section 5.1.3. With the LCD–mountedtype i Series CNC, the connector (CA55) is located on the CNC controlunit at the back of the LCD. With the stand–alone type i Series CNC, theconnector (CA55) is located on the back of the LCD unit. With thestand–alone type i Series CNC, a soft key cable connection is made insidethe unit, so that the machine tool builder need not make a soft key cableconnection.
Connection between theLCD unit and MDI unit
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
87
JD45 JD13
CPD1
CPD2
JA1
CK2
JA1
CP5
External powersupply24 VDC ±10%
Control unit
Flat cable for the soft keys.Included in the LCD unit.Cable length: About 50 cm
LCD unit
LCD video cable
Power cable
With an LCD/MDI integration unit, the wiring of the flat cable for the soft keys,LCD video cable, and power cable enclosed in the dotted box is made in theunit, so that the machine tool builder need not make any connections.
MDI unit
5.2.3Connection with the7.2″ LCD Unit Via theDisplay Link
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
88
1 RXD
2 *RXD
3 TXD
4 *TXD
11 0V
12 0V
13 RXTM1
14 RXTM2
5
6
7
8
15 TXTM1
16 TXTM2
17
18
9
10
19
20
i Series CNC
JD45
(PCR–EV20MDT)
JD13
(PCR–EV20MDT)
Recommended wire:A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)Recommended connector:PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FAHousing: PCR–V20LARecommended cable:A02B–0259–K811 (5 m)A02B–0259–K812 (10 m)
1
2
1
2RXD TXD
3
4
3
4
11
12
11
12
*RXD
TXD
*TXD
0V
0V
*TXD
RXD
*RXD
0V
0V
1 TXD
2 *TXD
3 RXD
4 *RXD
11 0V
12 0V
13
14
5
6
7
8
15
16
17
18
9
10
19
20
JD41 JD13
RXTM1
RXTM2
TXTM1
TXTM216
15
14
13
Shield
Cable connections
MDI unit
NOTE1 Connect JD45 (13) with JD45 (14), and connect JD45 (15)
with JD45 (16).2 Never make connections with those pins to which no signals
are assigned.3 Never make connections with pins 13 through 16 of JD13.
Connection between theCNC control unit and MDIunit
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
89
Feed power to the MDI unit from an external 24 VDC power supply.
1 +24V
2 0V
3
CPD1
(AMP)
1
2+24V ! ±»
0V 0V
CPD1
FG
MDI unit
External power supply
+24 VDC power supply(regulated power supply)+24 VDC ±10%
AMP Japan1–178288–3 (housing)1–175218–5 (contact)
FANUC purchase specification: A02B–0120–K324
Cable connections
Recommended wire: 30/0.18 (0.8 mm2) or moreRecommended cable specification: A02B–0124–K830 (5 m)(On the external power supply side, an M3 crimp terminal is provided.)
Power is fed from an external 24 VDC power supply to the LCD unitthrough the MDI unit.
With an LCD/MDI integration unit, the connection of a power supply tothe LCD unit is enclosed inside the unit, so that the machine tool builderneed not make any connections.
1 +24V
2 0V
3
CPD2
(AMP)
1
2+24V
0V 0V
CPD2
FG
1 +24V
2 0V
3
#
$
1
2
CP5
MDI Unit LCD UnitAMP Japan2–178288–3(housing)1–175218–5(contact)
AMP Japan1–178288–3 (housing)1–175218–5 (contact)
Cable connections
Recommended cable: A02B–0166–K880 (55 cm)
Connection of a powersupply to the MDI unit
Connection of a powersupply to the LCD unit
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
90
With an LCD/MDI integration unit, the video connection to the LCD unitis made inside the unit, so that the machine tool builder need not make anyconnections.
0V
1 VDR
2 0V
3 VDG
4 0V
11
12 VSYNC
13
14 0V
5 VDB
6 0V
7
8 (DTC)
15
16 0V
17
18 HSYNC
9
10 (+24V)
19 (+24V)
20
JA1
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1
2
1
2VDR VDR
3
4
3
4
5
6
5
6
18
16
18
16
12
14
12
14
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
HSYNC
0V
VSYNC
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
HSYNC
0V
VSYNC
0V0V
1 VDR
2 0V
3 VDG
4 0V
11
12 VSYNC
13
14 0V
5 VDB
6 0V
7
8
15
16 0V
17
18 HSYNC
9
10
19
20
JA1
(PCR–EV20MDT)
MDI Unit LCD Unit
Video cable
( ): Signal not used
Video cable connectionCable connector on JA1 side· Connector
FI40B–20S(Soldering type, 15–pin)
· Case FI–20–CV5These aremanufac-tured by Hirose Electric.
Cable connector on theJA1 side· Connector
FI40B–20S(Soldering type,15–pin)
· CaseFI–20–CV5These aremanufactured byHirose Electric.
Shield
Recommended wire:A66L–0001–0371: Coaxial cable (5–conductor, common shield)Recommended cable:A02B–0166–K870 (55 cm)
LCD video connection
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
91
Example where one FS18i and two Power Mate i’s are connected
FS18i–TA
#0
JD45
J45
JD41JD41B
JD41A24V
Power Mate i
#1
JD45
J45
JD41JD41B
JD41A24V
Power Mate i
#2
JD45
J45
JD41JD41B
JD41A24V
24V
#0 #2
#1
J45
J47JN1
Machine controlpanel selectorswitch
LCD/MDI UNITA02B–0166–C261#xx
JD13
CRT link adapterA02B–0259–C301
CRT link terminator unitA02B–0259–D001
1) When two Power Mates are connected to the FS18C, the CRT/MDIselector and CRT/MDI control for the Power Mate that were neededare no longer necessary.
2) The CRT link adapter and CRT link terminator unit are necessary.Also, specify an LCD/MDI unit that supports the CRT link. A separatetype MDI also is available.
3) In this connection, graphic display is not possible, and the memorycard interface on the side is not available.
5.2.4Connecting to the 7.2″LCD Unit by theDisplay Link (Multiple Connection)
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
92
1 RXD
2 *RXD
3 TXD
4 *TXD
11 0V
12 0V
13 (RXTM1)
14 (RXTM2)
5 (RXALM)
6 (*RXALM)
7 (TXALM)
8 (*TXALM)
15 (TXTM1)
16 (TXTM2)
17 (COMMA)
18 (*COMMA)
9 (ATCH1)
10
19
20 (ATCH2)
Power Mate, i series CNC
JD41 [JD45]
(PCR–EV20MDT)
JD41
(PCR–EV20MDT)
Cable wiring (J45)
Recommended wire material specifications:A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 pair)
1
2
1
2RXD RXD
3
4
3
4
11
12
11
12
Shield
*RXD
TXD
*TXD
0V
0V
*RXD
TXD
*TXD
0V
0V
1 RXD
2 *RXD
3 TXD
4 *TXD
11 0V
12 0V
13 (RXTM1)
14 (RXTM2)
5 (RXALM)
6 (*RXALM)
7 (TXALM)
8 (*TXALM)
15 (TXTM1)
16 (TXTM2)
17 (COMMA)
18 (*COMMA)
9 (ATCH1)
10
19
20 (ATCH2)
J45
JD41 JD41B
Recommended connector:PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FAHousing PCR–V20LA
Display link adapter
NOTEConnector names in brackets [ ] are for when an i seriesCNC is used.
NOTE1 The cable between the LCD/MDI unit (JD13) and the display
link adapter (JD41B) is the same as the above.2 The cable between the display link adapter (JD41A) and the
display link adapter (JD41B) is the same as the above.3 Place the display link adapter right next to (within 500 mm)
the Power Mate i or i series CNC to keep the cable betweenthe control unit and the display link adapter as short aspossible.
4 Signals in parentheses () are used on a separate interface.Take care not to connect to these signals.
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
93
Separate type MDI unit
%&’
( %&’
11 %&’
12
13 %&’#
14
# %&’
)
* %&'(
+
15 %&’)
16
17 %&’*
18
,
19
20
CRT/MDI unit
-.
& $!/
Unit No. selector switch-*
Machine control panel
Cable wiring (J47)
135711131517
*SEL0*SEL1*SEL2*SEL3*SEL4*SEL5*SEL6*SEL7
00)0+000)0+
-.
#0#2#4#6#8#10#12#14Common
Unit No. selector switch
#1#3#5#7#9#11#13#15
When the total length of the CRT link cable is between 50 to 100 m,connect *SEL5 to 0V. The overall line length is the total length of the CRTinterface cables in use. When the total length exceeds 50 mm, the cablescannot be used in a detachable configuration.
Unit selection withinterface
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
94
Recommended wire material specifications:A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 pair)
Recommended connector:PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FAHousing PCR–V20LAMax. line length 10m
Relationship between selector switch
: Switch open
: Switch closed
– : Either OK
Unit No. *SEL7 *SEL4 *SEL3 *SEL2 *SEL1 *SEL0
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
#10
#11
#12
#13
#14
#15
– – – – –Commonscreens
1) A terminating resistor connected to the display link is intended toshape the waveform on the display link (RS485). When a display linkis short or used in a noise–free environment, it may be able to operatenormally even if no terminating resistor is connected to it. However,a terminating resistor must always be factory–connected to the displaylink, because otherwise qualitative evaluation is impossible. If aterminating resistor is not connected to a display link, it may beimpossible to update the CRT screen and use the keyboard.
2) A terminating resistor must be connected to both ends of the displaylink. The CRT/MDI unit has a built–in terminating resistor. If thedisplay and control unit are connected on a one–to–one basis, aterminating resistor is connected using the cable (Section 5.2.3). Ifthere are n Power Mates in one display link, connect a display linkterminating unit to the display link adaptor to terminate the link.
A display link adapter is used to form a T–junction in the display link.Each T–junction is connected to the corresponding Power Mate or i seriesCNC and the next display link adapter.The display link must be terminated with the display link adapter at themost distant point from the CRT/MDI.
Terminating the DisplayLink
Display Link Adapter
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
95
60
85
45
JD41B JD41 JD41A
In mm
Fig. 5.2.4 (a) Display link adaptor
1) Mounting to the DIN rail
35
25
In mm
Fig. 5.2.4 (b) Recommended DIN rail
2) Mounting with screws
11.6
2–M4 70
In mm
Fig. 5.2.4 (c) Sheet metal hole drilling diagram
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
96
The detachable 7.2″ LCD/MDI unit is a 7.2″ LCD/MDI unit housed in aportable dustproof case. The unit can be connected/disconnected whilethe power is turned on.
Cabinet
Connectorpanel
Control unit
Connectionpanel
Detachable LCD/MDI unit
External power supply
24 VDC
(1)The detachable LCD/MDI unit is not provided with a cable.
(2)The machine tool builder is required to prepare a connector panel,external power supply, and connection panel.
(3)The machine tool builder is required to prepare all interconnectioncables.
1) Interconnection diagram
DC24V±10%1.0A
J132
J127 J128 J143CA50 JD45
DetachableLCD/MDIunit
Connectionpanel
Cabinet
Con-nectorpanel
Controlunit
24 VDCpower supply
5.2.5Connection of theDetachable 7.2″LCD/MDI Unit Via theDisplay Link
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
97
(a) The total length of the cables (J127, J128, and J143) between thedetachable LCD/MDI unit and control unit must not exceed 50 m.
(b)The cables J127, J128, and J132 also serve as the 24 VDC powerline for the detachable LCD/MDI unit. On the 24 VDC line, avoltage drop which corresponds to the resistances of the 24 V and0 V lines of these cables occurs. Considering this voltage drop,determine the cable length so that 24 VDC ±10% is provided at theCA50 connector of the unit.
(c) While the power is turned on, only the connector (shaded in thefigure above) of the connection panel can be attached or detached.The other connectors (such as CA50 and JD41) must not beattached and detached while the power is turned on.
CA50 (03)
CA50 (01)
CA50 (02)
CA50 (04)
CA50 (15)
CA50 (16)
CA50 (09, 10)
CA50 (19, 20)
CA50 (05)
+24V
RXD
+24V
TXD
ATCH1
*RXD
*TXD
ATCH2
0V
FG
RXD
TXD
0V
*RXD
*TXD
JD45 (03)
JD45 (01)
JD45 (02)
JD45 (04)
JD45 (11, 12)to DI
0V DC24V
Detachable LCD/MDI unit
(Cabinet) Shield
CabinetConnection panel Connector panel
Controlunit
(*1)
(*2)
+24 V external powersupply
NOTE1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit are not
used.2 To allow the detachable LCD/MDI unit to be connected or
disconnected while the power to the i Series CNC is on,ensure that the 0 V line of the i Series CNC is first connectedto the 0 V line of the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
98
2) Details of the cable J127
FG
CA50
04 03 02 01
*TXD TXD *RXD RXD J127
10 09 08 07 06 05
+24V +24V FG
16 15 14 13 12 11
ATCH2
20 19 18 17
0V 0V
*RXD
CA5001
03
02
04
09
10
15
16#24AWG
19
20
05
ATCH1
FG
TXD
*TXD
+24V
+24V
(*1) ATCH1
(*1) ATCH2
0V
0V
RXD
*RXD
TXD
*TXD
+24V
+24V
0V
0V
RXD
Detachable LCD/MDI unit
Connection panel
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
(1) Soldering typeHR22–12TPD–20S
(2) Crimp type· Housing
HR22–12TPD–20SC· Contact
HR22–SC–122· Automatic crimping
toolHR22–TA2428HC
Detachable LCD/MDI unit Connection panel
Drain wireShield
Recommended wire:A66L–0001–0298: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.(#24AWG pair × 2, #24AWG × 10, drain wire, outside cable diameter: 8.5 mm)
#24AWG pair
NOTE1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 are not used.2 FG
Connect CA50 (05) to the FG pin of the connection panel using a drain wire.Connect the FG pin of the connection panel to the frame ground.For grounding, use a twisted wire, 100 to 300 mm long, with a cross–sectional area of 2 mm2
or more.3 The outside cable diameter that matches the connector CA50 is 8.5 mm. When using a cable
whose outside diameter is smaller than 8.5 mm, increase the diameter of the cable at theconnector joint area to 8.5 mm by using a material such as a shrinkable tube or tape to maintaina dustproof seal.
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
99
3) Details of the cable J126
RXD
*RXD
TXD
*TXD
RXTM1
RXTM2
TXTM1
TXTM2
0V
0V
JD45 (PCR–EV20MDT)
01 RXD 11 0V
02 *RXD 12 0VJ143
03 TXD 13
04 *TXD 14
05 15
06 16
07 17
+ +
, ,
RXD
*RXD
TXD
*TXD
0V
0V
JD4101
02
i Series CNC
03
04
11
12
TXTM1
TXTM2
RXTM2
RXTM1
13
14
15
16
i .
FANUC specification· Soldering type
(with a case)A02B–0120–K301
· Crimp type (with a case)A02B–0120–K302
Honda Tsushin KogyoCo., Ltd.PCR–E20F
Connector panel
Pins 09 and 20 are used to check theconnection of a handy operator’s panel.
Cable connection (J143)
Connector panel
Shield
Cable clamp
Recommended wire:A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable Ltd.
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
100
4) Details of the cable J128
RXTP
*RXTP
TXTP
*TXTP
+24V
+24V
0V
0V
FG
RXTP
*RXTP
TXTP
*TXTP
+24V
+24V
0V
0V
Connection panel Connector panel
Pair
Pair
(*2)(*3)
Shield
Wire:wire A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable Ltd.wire Twisted wire with a cross–sectional area of 2 mm2 or more (FG)
NOTE1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 are not used.2 FG on the connection panel
Connect the FG of the connection panel to the frame ground.For grounding, use a twisted wire, 100 to 300 mm long, with a cross–sectional area of 2 mm2
or more.The FG is used to ground the shield of the J127 cable.
3 FG on the connector panelConnect the shield of the J128 cable on the connector panel to the frame ground.For grounding, use a twisted wire, 100 to 300 mm long, with a cross–sectional area of 2 mm2
or more.
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
101
5) Details of the J132 cable
J132
DC24V
0V
+24V
0V
External power supplyDC24V
Connector panel
Cable connection (J132)
External power supply Connector panel
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
102
This section describes the connection of an MDI unit with an CNC displayunit with PC functions. For other CNC display unit with PC functionsconnections, see Chapter 8.
24VDC
JD45 CK1
CK2
Connection with an CNC display unit with PC functions
This section describes the inside of the dotted box.Either an FA full keyboard or MDI unit is connected.
Controlunit
CNC displayunit with PC
functions
FA fullkeyboard
A flat cable about 50 cmlong for the soft keys isincluded with the CNCdisplay unit with PCfunctions.
MDI unit
5.2.6Connection with anCNC Display Unit withPC Functions
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
103
KEY03KEY01
KEY05
COM01KEY07
COM03COM05COM07
COM11COM09
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
KEY02KEY00
KEY04
COM00KEY06
COM02COM04COM06
COM10COM08
JD4501
0302
04
0605
0807
0910
(01) KEY00(02) KEY02(03) KEY04(04) KEY06(05) COM00(06) COM02(07) COM04(08) COM06(09) COM08(10) COM10(11) KEY01(12) KEY03(13) KEY05(14) KEY07(15) COM01(16) COM03(17) COM05(18) COM07(19) COM09(20) COM11
KEY00 (01)KEY02 (02)KEY04 (03)KEY06 (04)COM00 (05)COM02 (06)COM04 (07)COM06 (08)COM08 (09)COM10 (10)KEY01 (11)KEY03 (12)KEY05 (13)KEY07 (14)COM01 (15)COM03 (16)COM05 (17)COM07 (18)COM09 (19)COM11 (20)
CK1
KEY03KEY01
KEY05
COM01KEY07
COM03COM05COM07
COM11COM09
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
KEY02KEY00
KEY04
COM00KEY06
COM02COM04COM06
COM10COM08
01
0302
04
0605
0807
0910
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0120–K810 (5 m)Recommended wire specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)Recommended cable connector (JD45, CK1):PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)52622–2011 (Molex Japan)
CNC control unit MDI unit
Cable
JD45Honda PCR connector
CK1Honda PCR connector
Shield
Ground plate
Connection with an MDIunit
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
104
An input/output device is used to enter information such as CNCprograms and parameters from an external device to the CNC, or to outputinformation from the CNC to an external device.
The input/output devices usable with the i Series CNC include HandyFile. The interface of the input/output devices electrically conforms toRS–232–C, so that a connection can be made with a device that has anRS–232–C interface.
The tables below indicate the serial ports of the i Series CNC. For theserial ports on the remote buffer, see Chapter 12. For the serial ports onthe CNC display unit with PC functions, see Chapters 8 and 9.
(For 16i/18i/21i of LCD–mounted type)
Port name Interface location
First channel (JD36A) Main control unit
Second channel (JD36B) Main control unit (*1)
Third channel (JD28A) On the remote buffer optionprinted circuit board
(For 16i/18i/21i of stand–alone type)
Port name Interface location
First channel (JD5A) Main control unit
Second channel (JD5B) Main control unit
Third channel (JD28A) On the remote buffer optionprinted circuit board
Serial port dedicated to a touchpanel
On the 10.4″ LCD unit or 9.5″ LCDunit for a CNC with a touch panel
(*3)
(For 160i/180i/210i with an CNC display unit with PC functions)
Port name Interface location
First channel on the CNC side(JD36A)
Main control unit
Second channel on the CNC side(JD36B)
Main control unit
Third channel on the CNC side(JD28A)
On the remote buffer optionprinted circuit board
First channel on the CNC displayunit with PC functions side(JD33)
On the CNC display unit with PCfunctions
(*2)
5.3CONNECTION WITHINPUT/OUTPUTDEVICES
5.3.1Overview
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
105
Port name Interface location
Second channel on the CNCdisplay unit with PC functionsside (JD46)
On the CNC display unit with PCfunctions
Serial port dedicated to a touchpanel
On the 10.4″ LCD unit or 9.5″ LCDunit for a CNC with a touch panel
(*3)
NOTE1 When a touch panel is used, this serial port is used for touch
panel communication on the CNC side, so that this portcannot be used as a general–purpose port.
2 When a touch panel is used, this serial port is used for touchpanel communication on the PC side, so that this portcannot be used as a general–purpose port.
3 This serial port is dedicated to touch panel communication.Even if no touch panel is attached, this port cannot be usedas a general–purpose port.
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
106
R232–2JD36B
R232–1JD36A Punch panel
Handy File
(LCD–mounted type)
NOTEThis interface is the RS–232C interface on the CNC side. When using the CNC display unit withPC functions, usually use the RS–232C interface on the personal computer for parameter I/Os,program I/Os, and other similar operations.This RS–232C interface on the CNC side can be used on the 160i, 180i, or 210i only for thefollowing purposes:
Ladder uploading or downloading via RS–232–C using FANUC–LADDER or FANUC–LADDER II
Ladder monitoring from an external PC using FANUC–LADDER II
DNC operation via RS–232–C, external I/O device control
Input/output of parameters and programs by using the CNC screen display function
5.3.2Connecting I/O Devices
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
107
ER
+24V
14
1615
17
1918
20
2221
23
2524
SDFG
RD
CSRS
DRSGCD
1
32
4
65
7
98
10
1211
13
0VSD
ER
RS0V
0V
+24V
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
0VRD
DR
CS0V
0VCD0V
+24V
1
32
4
65
87
910
CNC
(+5V)
(+5V)
JD36A, JD36BPCR–E20MDK–SL–A(JD5A, JD5BPCR–EV20MDT)
RELAY CONNECTOR(DBM–25S)
NOTE1 +24 V can be used as the power supply for FANUC
RS–232–C equipment.2 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal
names are not indicated.3 Pins 18 and 20 (+5V) are provided for touch channel
connection.4 The upper connector name on the CNC side is for the
LCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connectorname, enclosed in parentheses, is for the stand–alone typei Series CNC.
5.3.3RS–232–C Serial Port
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
108
3
6
5
8
2
20
47
251
RD
DR
CS
CD
SD
ER
RSSG
+24V
RD0VDR0VCS0VCD0V
+24VSD0VER0VRS0V
+24V
GND
FG
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATIONA66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs)RECOMMENDED CABLE–SIDE CONNECTORS
(JD36A, JD36B, JD5A, JD5B)PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu, Ltd.)52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION (PUNCH PANEL)For JD36A and JD36B<Narrow width type>A02B–0236–C191 (1 m)A02B–0236–C192 (2 m)A02B–0236–C193 (5 m)
RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION (PUNCH PANEL)For JD5A and JD5B<Narrow width type>A02B–0120–C191 (1 m)A02B–0120–C192 (2 m)A02B–0120–C193 (5 m)
CABLE CONNECTION
GROUNDING PLATE
SHIELD
1011121314151617181920
12
3456789
NOTE1 Do not connect anything to those pins for which signal
names are not indicated.2 The recommended cable connector FI30–20S (manufactured
by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for connectors JD5A andJD5B of the stand–alone type i Series CNC.
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
109
Generally signals as follows are used in RS–232–C interface.
CNC
SD (Send data)
RD (Recieve data)
RS (Request to Send)
CS (Enable to send)
ER (Ready)
DR (Data set ready)
CD (Check data)
SG (Signal ground)
FG (Frame ground)
When CS is not usedshort CS and RS.
When DR is not used short DR and ER.
Always short ER and CD.
Output
Input
Fig. 5.3.4 (a) RS–232–C interface
5.3.4RS–232–C InterfaceSpecification
RS–232–C Interfacesignals
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
110
Signalname
RS–232Ccircuit number
I/O Description
SD 103 Output Sending data Start bit Stop bit
RD 104 Input Receiving
data
ONOFF
4
(When ISO code “0” is sent)
1 2 3 85 6 7
RS 105 Input Sending request
This signal is set to on when NC startssending data and is turned off whentransmission ends.
CS 106 Input Sending permitted
When both this signal and the DRsignal are set, the NC can send data. Ifexternal device processing is delayedby a punching operation, etc., NC datasending can be stopped by turning offthis signal after sending twocharacters, including the data beingsent currently. If this signal will not beused, make sure to strap this signalcircuit to the RS signal circuit.
DR 107 Input Data set ready
When external device is ready tooperate, this signal is set. This signalshould usually be connected to thesignal indicating external device powersupply being on. (ER signal of externaldevice). See Note below.The NC transfers data when this signalis set. If the signals turned off duringdata transfer, alarm 086 is issued. If theDR signal will not be used, make sureto strap this signal circuit to the ERsignal circuit.
ER 108.2 Output NC readyto operation
This signal is set when the NC is readyto operate. External device shouldregard the SD signal as beingsignificant when the ER signal is set.
CD 109 Input Signal qualitysignal
Since this signal is not used inconnections with external device, thesignal circuit must be strapped, insidethe connecting cable, to the ER signalcircuit.
SG 102 Signal grounding
FG 101 Frame grounding
NOTESignal on/off state is defined as follows;
–3V or lower
Signal Condition
+3V or higher
Function
Marking
OFF
Spacing
ON
Signal description of RS–232–C interface
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
111
Generally, two transmission methods are available at the serial interface.i Series CNC use the start–stop method. With this method, start and stopsignals are output before and after each data bit.
One character in start–stop
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8
Start bit
Data bit (8 bit including one parity bit)
Stop bits(2 bits)
Transmission codes are as follows:
(i) EIA code and Control codes DC1 to DC4.
(ii)ISO code and Control codes DC1 to DC4 (Optional ISO code input isnecessary.)
The connected external device must be able to recognize the followingcontrol codes, sent from NC.
Control code 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC1 Tape reader start
DC2 Tape punch designation
DC3 Tape reader stop
DC4 Tape punch release
NOTEThe listed control codes are used for both EIA and ISO.
In this interface, control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.
(a) NC can control external device by issuing codes DC1 to DC4.
(b)When external processing falls behind the pace of the NC signals(When NC issues data)
(i) External device can temporarily stop NC data output by using theNC’s CS signal. Data output stops within two characters includinga currently transmitting character when CS OFF signal is input toNC. When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission start.
(ii)If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within tencharacters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC startssending data again.
(c) When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA converter, theexternal device must satisfy the specification shown in Table 5.3.4.
Transmission Method ofRS–232–C interface
Start–stop
Codes
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
112
Table 5.3.4ISO code EIA code
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1Meaning
0 0 Numeral 0
1 1 Numeral 1
2 2 Numeral 2
3 3 Numeral 3
4 4 Numeral 4
5 5 Numeral 5
6 6 Numeral 6
7 7 Numeral 7
8 8 Numeral 8
9 9 Numeral 9
A a Address A
B b Address B
C c Address C
D d Address D
E e ? Address E
F f Address F
G g Address G
H h Address H
I i Address I
J j Address J
K k Address K
L l Address L
M m Address M
N n Address N
O o Not used at significant data zone in ISOcode.Assumed as address 0 at EIA code.
P p Address P
Q q Address Q
R r Address R
S s Address S
T t Address T
U u Address U
V v Address V
W w Address W
X x Address X
Y y Address Y
Z z Address Z
DEL Del Delete (cancel erroneous hole)
NUL Blank No holes. Not used at significant datazone is EIA code.
BS BS Back space
HT Tab Tabulator
LF or NL CR or EOB End of block
CR Carriage return
SP SP Space
% ER Absolute rewind stop
( ( 2–4–5 ) Control out (start of comment)
) ( 2–4–7 ) Control in (end of comment)
+ + Plus sign
– – – Minus sign
: Assumed as program number in ISO code.
/ / Optional block skip
. . Decimal point
# Sharp
$ Dollar symbol
& & Ampersand
’ Apostrophe
Asterisk
, , Comma
; Semicolon
< Left angle bracket
= Equal mark
> Right angle bracket
? Question mark
@ Commerical at mark
” Quotation mark
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
113
NOTE1 When the external device is equipped with an ISO/EIA
converter, the following items must be noted in Table 5.3.4(a).
ISO code (…………………..)
EIA code (…………………..)
Control out (Comment field start)
CR
LF
Control in (Comment field end)
Condition1 Condition1
Condition1
Left parenthesis “(”of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 5 when used in the EIA code.Right parenthesis “)”of the ISO code punches holes at bits 2, 4 and 7 when used in the EIA code.
Condition2
EIA code is in ISO code.
Condition3
EIA code O is : in ISO code.
Condition2 Condition3
CR LF
o ………………..
: ………………..
2 Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes outputfrom the NC. So they need not to be punched on the NCtape.
(iii) Transmission rate (Baud rate)The transmission rate (Baud rate) is the number of bits transferred persecond.The following baud rates are available depending on the systemparameter.
50, 100, 110, 150, 200, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600.(Example)
Baud rate : 110
When using one start bit and two stop bits (totalling 11 bitsper character):
Transmission characters/second= 110
11=10 characters/second
(Max.)
(iv) Cable lengthThe cable length depends on the external device type. Consult with thedevice manufacturers for actual connecting cable lengths.When cable A (A66L–0001–0041) is used, cable length is as followsby the specification of NC.
for RS–232C 100m or less … 4800 bauds or less
50m or less … 9600 bauds or less
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
114
(1)NC outputs DC1.
(2)The external device starts sending data upon receiving DC1.
(3)NC sends DC3 when NC processing is delayed.
(4)The external device stops sending data to NC after receiving DC3.The device may send up to 10 characters after receiving DC3. If itsends more than 10 characters, alarm 087 will occur.
(5)NC reissues DC1 upon completing delayed processing.
(6)The external device restarts data output upon receiving the DC1 code(the data must be the next data to the preceding.)
(7)NC sends DC3 upon completing data read.
(8)The external device stops sending data.
10ms or longer 10ms or longer
DC3
ER code
DC1 CD3 DC1
1ms or longer
Up to 10 characters
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
SD(Output)
RD(Input)
DR(Input)
CS(Input)
Time chart when the NCreceives data (Read into memory)
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
115
(1)NC output DC2.
(2)NC outputs punch data in succession.
(3)When data processing is delayed at the external device.
(a) Data output stops within two characters including a currentlytransmitting character when CS signal is turned off.When CS signal is turned on again, data transmission starts. (See Fig.5.3.4 (b))
(b) If control code DC3 is input to NC, NC stops data output within tencharacters. When control code DC1 is input to NC, NC starts sendingdata again. (See Fig. 5.3.4 (c))
(4)The NC starts sending the next data if the CS signal is turned on afterthe external device completes data processing.
(5)The NC issues DC4 upon completing data output.
10ms or longer 100ms or longer
DC4DC2
1ms or longer Within 2 characters
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
SD(Output)
RD(Input)
CS(Input)
Fig. 5.3.4 (b)
1ms or longer
10ms or longer 100ms or longer
DC4DC2
ER(Output)
RS(Output)
SD(Output)
Within 10 characters
RD(Input)
DR(Input)
CS(Input)
DC1DC3
Fig. 5.3.4 (c)
Time chart when the NCsend data (Punch out)
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
116
CNC External device sideSD
RD
RS
CS
ER
DR
CD
SG
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
ER
DR
CD
SG
FG
Connection betweenRS–232–C interface andexternal device
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
117
The cable for connecting the PG–Mate to the NC should be connectedas shown in the below diagram.
CNC External device sideSD
RD
RS
CS
ER
DR
CD
SG
FG
SD
RD
RS
CS
ER
DR
CD
SG
FG
Prepare the cable with I/O device as follows :
DR
Serial interface
Cable : twist 10 pairs 0.18mm2, with shield
SD
RD
RSCS
SG
ER
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
118
+24V
0VSD
ER
RS0V
0V
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
0VRD
DR
CS0V
0VCD0V
+24V
JD36A, JD36B(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)(JD5A, JD5B, PCR–EV20MDT)
1
32
4
65
87
910
Relaying connectorConnector: DBM–25S (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Lock metal: D20418–J9 (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Cable side connectorConnector: DBM–25P (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Cover: DB–C2–J9 (Japan Aviation Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
FG
CNC
Relayingcable
Accessory for HANDY FILE
FANUCHandy File
FG
1SD2
RD3
RS4
CS5
DR6
SG7
CD8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19ER20 21 22 23 24
+2425
RELAYING CONNECTORSIGNAL LAYOUT
NOTE1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector and relay cable.2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.4 Set suitable parameters on reader/puncher interface for FANUC Handy File. The baud rate is
4800 baud in standard.5 Connect the FANUC Handy File to either JD36 or JD36B. Do not use both pins; the power
capacity may exceed that of +24V and blow the fuse.6 Make no connections to pins 18 (+5V) and 20 (+5V). JD5A and JD5B have no +5V pins.7 The upper connector name on the CNC side is for the LCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The
lower connector name, enclosed in parentheses, is for the stand–alone type i Series CNC.
5.3.5FANUC Handy FileConnection
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
119
High–speed skip (HDI)JA40
Switch
This figure shows anexample of connecting aLCD–mounted type iSeries CNC.
5.4CONNECTING THEHIGH–SPEED SKIP(HDI)
5.4.1General
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
120
CNC
PCR–E20MDK–SL–A(PCR–EV20MDT)
JA40
0V
HDI0
3
21
4(ES)5
6(SVC)7(ENB1)8(ENB2)9
10
13
12
11
14
1516
17181920
Signals inside ( ) are used with the analog spindle.
NOTE1 The upper connector specification of JA40 is for the
LCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connectorspecification, enclosed in parentheses, is for thestand–alone type i Series CNC.
2 With 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is, eight DIs (HDI0 toHDI7) can be used in total. With 21i/210i/210is, only oneDI (HDI0) can be used.
5.4.2Connection to theHigh–speed Skip (HDI)
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
121
Recommended cable connector:PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)52622–2011 (Molex Japan)
HDI0
0V
HDI1
0V
HDI2
0V
HDI3
0V
HDI4
0V
HDI5
0V
HDI6
0V
HDI7
0V
1
2
11
12
3
4
13
14
6
5 or 10
15
16
17
18
19
20
7
8
9
10
JA40
The 0V signal of pin 5 functions as a common signal when analog output is used.
So, as the 0V signal paired with HDI4 when analog output is used together with a
high–speed DI, use the 0V signal of pin 10.
Shield
Ground plate
NOTEThe recommended cable connector FI30–20S(manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for thestand–alone type i Series CNC.
Cable connections
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
122
CNC
VH/VL
DRIVER
SHIELD
FILTERliL/liH RECEIVER
Absolute maximum ratingInput voltage range Vin: –3.6 to +13.6 VInput characteristics
Unit Symbol Specification Unit Remark
High level input voltage VH 3.6 to 11.6 V
Low level input voltage VL 0 to 1.0 V
High level input current liH 2 max mA Vin=5 V
11 max mA Vin = 10 V
Low level input current liL –8.0 max mA Vin = 0 V
Input signal pulse duration 20 min s
Input signal delay orvariations
0.02(max) ms
NOTE1 The plus (+) sign of IiH/IiL represents the direction of flow
into the receiver. The minus (–) sign of IiH/IiL represents thedirection of flow out of the receiver.
2 The high–speed skip signal is assumed to be 1 when theinput voltage is at the low level and 0 when it is at the highlevel.
3 The input level for the CNC receiver is high when the circuitis open. So, the input level for the external driver must below.
5.4.3Input Signal Rules forthe High–speed Skip(HDI)
Circuit configuration
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
123
CAUTIONBefore attaching or removing cables, power off the CNCmain unit, and confirm that the power is off.Ask the respective manufacturers for explanations abouthow to build a network and about conditions for using units(such as a media converter, hub, transceiver, and cable)other than the CNC unit. When installing network cables,exercise sufficient caution so that the network will not beaffected by any noise source. Electrically separate thenetwork wiring sufficiently from noise sources like motorsand their power lines. Also, ground each unit as required.If the grounding impedance is high, it may cause trouble incommunication. Once the equipment is installed, conductcommunication tests to verify normal operation beforestarting actual use of the equipment.FANUC is not liable to any damage related to trouble arisingfrom any unit other than the CNC unit.
The 10BASE–T and 100BASE–TX interfaces are available. A hub (lineconcentrator) is used to connect the CNC unit to a system. A typicalconnection example is shown below.
CNC unit Twisted–pair cable
HUB (line concentrator)
Max. 100m
Some of the units (hub, transceiver, etc.) required to build a network arenot dust–proof. Using them in an atmosphere with dust or oil mist maylead to a communication error or failure. They should be enclosed in adust–proof cabinet.
5.5LINKING THEEMBEDDEDETHERNETINTERFACE
5.5.1Connection to theEthernet Interface
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
124
An Ethernet cable should be fixed with a clamp or the like so that pullingit will not cause tension to be applied to the connector (RJ–45) at the endof the cable. The clamp not only fixes the cable but also grounds the shieldof the cable.
Control unit
Ethernet cable
Clamp
Grounding plate
CD38A
Pin No. Signal name Description
1 TX+ Transmit +
2 TX– Transmit –
3 RX+ Receive +
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 RX– Receive –
7 Not used
8 Not used
Leading in Ethernetcables
Pin arrangement of the10BASE–T/100BASE–TXconnector (CD38A)
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
125
The connectors of a cable for connecting between the 10BASE–T/100BASE–TX interface (CD38A) and the hub have the pin arrangementshown below.
CD38A
1 TX+
2 TX–
3 RX+
4
5
6 RX–
7
8
RJ–45 modular jack
Max. 100m
HUB
1 TX+
2 TX–
3 RX+
4
5
6 RX–
7
8
TX+
TX–
RX+
RX–
1
2
3
6
Shield
CD38A
TX+
TX–
RX+
RX–
1
2
3
6
NOTEThe cable can be up to 100 m long (for the FANUC–recommended cable for movable sections, up to 50 m). Donot make the cable longer than necessary.
5.5.2Specification ofTwisted–Pair Cable
Cable connection
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
126
Many cables without a shield (UTP cables) are commercially available astwisted pair cables conforming to 10BASE–T or 100BASE–TX. Toimprove noise immunity in factory automation environments, however,be sure to use twisted pair cables (STP cables) with a common shield incategory 5.
Recommended cables (for fixed parts)
Manufacturer Specification Remark
Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. DTS5087C–4P Twisted wires
Nissei Electric Co., Ltd. F–4PFWMF Single–wire cable
NOTENo cable recommended for use in fixed sections shall beused in movable sections. Be sure to use the followingmovable–section cables.
Recommended cable (for movable sections)
Manufacturer Specification Remark
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
AWG26 4P TPMC–C5–F(SB) Dedicated to FANUC products
Cable specification (FANUC original product, with no connector)
Drawing number: A66L–0001–0453
Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
Specification
– Electrical characteristic: Complying with EIA/TIA 568Acategories 3 and 5The length of the cable to the hub must be kept within 50 mbecause of its attenuation performance.
– Structure: Common–shield braided cable with drain wireThe conductors of the cable are AWG26 annealed–copperstrand wire, with a sheath 0.8 mm thick and an outer diameterof 6.70.3 mm
– Fire resistance: UL1581 VW–1
– Oil resistance: As per FANUC’s internal standard (Equivalentto conventional oil–resistant electrical cable)
– Flex resistance: Million or more bending cycles with a bendingradius of 50 mm (U–shaped bend test)
– UL style No.: AWM20276 (80C/30V/VW–1)
NOTEUse the TM21CP–88P(03) connector made by HiroseElectric Co., Ltd. to this cable.
Cable Wires
B–63523EN/03 5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
127
About cable assemblies
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. can offer a cable assembly that uses theTM21CP–88P(03) connector made by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. Toget this cable assembly, negotiate directly with the manufacturer on itsspecifications (cable length, shipping test, package, etc.).
An 8–pin modular connector called the RJ–45 is used with a twisted–paircable for Ethernet interfaces. Use the connector listed below orequivalent.
Manufacturer Specification Remark
Connector used with cableAWG26 4P TPMC–C5–F(SB) TM21CP–88P(03) Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. (*)
NOTEAbout TM21CP–88P(03)Connector (manufacturer’s standard product)Drawing number: A63L–0001–0823#PManufacturer: Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.Manufacturer ’s model number: TM21CP–88P(03)Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3 and 5Ask Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. for explanations about how toattach the connector to a cable.
(Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. offers the TM21CP–88P(03) Wiring ProcedureSpecification (Engineering Specification No. ATAD–E2367) to explainthe related technical information.)
Ethernet cable wires belong to group C. See descriptions elsewhere forexplanations about how to separate them from wires in group A or B.
If any cable led into the CNC requires shielding, clamp it as shown below.The same method is used also to shield Ethernet twisted–pair cables. Theclamp shown in the figure works not only for cable fixing but also forshield processing. Shield processing is very important to maintain thestable operation of the system. Do not forget attach this clamp. SeeSubsection 3.5.5, ”Cable Clamp and Shield Processing,” for details.
Even when the machine satisfies its grounding requirements, noise fromthe machine may get on communication lines depending on the way themachine is installed and its environment, resulting in a communicationerror. Separating and isolating the Ethernet backbone cable and PC fromthe machine can prevent noise from getting on the communication lines.An example of connection is shown below.
Connector specification
5.5.3Anti–Noise Measure
Separating signal lines
Cable clamp and shieldprocessing
5.5.4Network Installation
5. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS B–63523EN/03
128
[Large–scale network]
[Small–scale network]
(*1)
PC and backbone cable side
Power supply for the HUBHUB
Electrical separation byconnection with10BASE–T/100BASE–TX
Machine system side
STP cable STP cable
Machine
(*1) (*1) (*1)
PC
(*1)
STP cable
Power supply for the HUBHUB
Machine Machine
PC and backbone cable side
Electrical separation byconnection with10BASE–T/100BASE–TX
Machine system side
(*1)
Machine
NOTE1 Ground the PC and backbone cable separately from the machine system.
If this is impossible because there is only one grounding point, use separate grounding wiresfor the PC/backbone cable and the machine system up to the grounding point.The grounding resistance must not be higher than 100 Ω (class 3 grounding). The groundingwire must not be thinner than the AC power line conductor, and its cross–sectional area mustnot smaller than 5.5 mm2.
2 In some cases, the aforementioned isolation/separation method based on 10BASE–T/100BASE–TX cannot assure normal communication because of influence by noise. In suchworst environments, use optical fiber media to completely isolate the machine from the PC.
B–63523EN/03 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
129
6 SPINDLE CONNECTION
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
130
The figure below shows the spindle–related connections. Note that thenumber of connectable spindles depends on the model, the number of paths,and the configuration. So, see the tables that follow the figure below.
JA41
JA40
JA41
JA40
CNCmain board
CNC sub–CPUboard
JA7B
JA7A
SPM
TB2
SPM
TB2
SPM
TB2
SPM
TB2
SPM
TB2
SPM
TB2
SPM
TB2
SPM
TB2
JA7B
JA7A
JA7B
JA7A
JA7B
JA7A
JA7B
JA7A
JA7B
JA7A
JA7B
JA7A
JA7B
JA7A
First serial spindle
Second serial spindle
Third serial spindle
Fourth serial spindle
Inverter
Positioncoder
Positioncoder
Positioncoder
Positioncoder
Positioncoder
Positioncoder
Positioncoder
Positioncoder
Positioncoder
Positioncoder
Spindlemotor
Spindlemotor
Spindlemotor
Spindlemotor
Spindlemotor
Spindlemotor
Spindlemotor
Spindlemotor
Spindlemotor
Spindlemotor
First serial spindle
Second serial spindle
Third serial spindle
Fourth serial spindle
Inverter
B–63523EN/03 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
131
For one–path control with Series 16i
First serialspindle on main
board
Second serialspindle on main
board
Third serialspindle on main
board
Fourth serialspindle on main
board
Analog outputon main board
Position coder(for analog
spindle)
For two–path control using two CPUs with Series 16i(Path 1)
First serialspindle on main
board
Second serialspindle on main
board
Third serialspindle on main
board
Fourth serialspindle on main
board
Analog outputon main board
Position coder(for analog
spindle)
(Path 2)
First serialspindle on
sub–CPU board
Second serialspindle on
sub–CPU board
Third serialspindle on
sub–CPU board
Fourth serialspindle on
sub–CPU board
Analog outputon sub–CPU
board
Position coder(for analog
spindle)
For two–path control using one CPU with Series 16i(The interface on the main board is shared by path 1 and path 2.)
First serialspindle on main
board
Second serialspindle on main
board
Third serialspindle on main
board
Fourth serialspindle on main
board
Analog outputon main board
Position coder(for analog
spindle)
Path 1 Path 1 Path 1
Path 1 Path 1 Path 2
Path 2 Path 2 Path 1
Path 1 Path 1 Path 2 Path 2
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
132
For three–path control using two CPUs with Series 16i(The interface on the main board is used by path 1.)
First serialspindle on main
board
Second serialspindle on main
board
Third serialspindle on main
board
Fourth serialspindle on main
board
Analog outputon main board
Position coder(for analog
spindle)
Path 1 Path 1 Path 1
Path 1 Path 1 Path 1 Path 1
Path 1 Path 1
(The interface on the sub–CPU board is shared by path 2 and path 3.)
First serialspindle on
sub–CPU board
Second serialspindle on
sub–CPU board
Third serialspindle on
sub–CPU board
Fourth serialspindle on
sub–CPU board
Analog outputon sub–CPU
board
Position coder(for analog
spindle)
Path 2 Path 2 Path 2
Path 2 Path 2 Path 3
Path 3 Path 3 Path 2
Path 2 Path 2 Path 3 Path 3
For one–path control with Series 18i
First serialspindle on main
board
Second serialspindle on main
board
Third serialspindle on main
board
Fourth serialspindle on main
board
Analog outputon main board
Position coder(for analog
spindle)
For two–path control using two CPUs with Series 18i(Path 1)
First serialspindle on main
board
Second serialspindle on main
board
Third serialspindle on main
board
Fourth serialspindle on main
board
Analog outputon main board
Position coder(for analog
spindle)
B–63523EN/03 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
133
(Path 2)
First serialspindle on
sub–CPU board
Second serialspindle on
sub–CPU board
Third serialspindle on
sub–CPU board
Fourth serialspindle on
sub–CPU board
Analog outputon sub–CPU
board
Position coder(for analog
spindle)
For two–path control using one CPU with Series 18i(The interface on the main board is shared by path 1 and path 2.)
First serialspindle on main
board
Second serialspindle on main
board
Third serialspindle on main
board
Fourth serialspindle on main
board
Analog outputon main board
Position coder(for analog
spindle)
Path 1 Path 1 Path 1
Path 1 Path 1 Path 2
Path 2 Path 2 Path 1
Path 1 Path 1 Path 2
Path 2 Path 2 Path 1
For Series 21i
First serialspindle on main
board
Second serialspindle on main
board
Third serialspindle on main
board
Fourth serialspindle on main
board
Analog outputon main board
Position coder(for analog
spindle)
NOTE1 When the spindle function is used on the sub–CPU board,
the option for analog output or serial output is alwaysrequired on the main board.
2 For connection between a spindle amplifier and spindlemotor and connection between a spindle amplifier andposition coder, refer to the relevant manual for the SPINDLEMOTOR α Series.
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
134
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
14SOUT
11
1312
1615
1817
1920
*SIN
[ ]
JA7B(PCR–E20MDT)
0V
0V
0V
SIN
*SOUT
[ ]
1
32
4
65
87
910
CNC
JA41 (main board,sub–CPU board)PCR–E20MDK–SL–A(PCR–EV20MDT)
Spindle amplifier module
0V0V
0V
0V0V
0V
*SINSIN
*SOUT
1
32
4
65
87
910
SOUT
[ ][ ][ ][ ](+5V)
[ ](+5V)
(+5V)
[ ]
(+5V)(+5V)
(+5V)
NOTE1 When an optical I/O link cable is used for connection
between the NC and a spindle amplifier, the +5V signalsindicated in parentheses are used to feed power to theoptical I/O link adapter. Do not connect these signals whenan optical cable is not used. The signals in brackets ([ ])are used when a position coder is used with an analogspindle or when three or four serial spindles are used.
2 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used with theLCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connectorspecification (in parentheses) is used with the stand–alonetype i Series CNC.
3 The second serial spindle is connected as a branch from thespindle amplifier module.
6.1SERIAL SPINDLE
6.1.1Connection of One toTwo Serial Spindles
B–63523EN/03 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
135
1 3
4
12,14,16
1
Connector JA7B
SIN
*SIN
SOUT
*SOUT
Connector JA41
SOUT
*SOUT
SIN
*SIN
Cable connection
CNCSpindleamplifiermodule
3
4
2
12,14,16
2
Ground plate Ground plate
Recommended cable connector:PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)FI30–20S (manufactured by Hirose Electric)FCN–247J020–G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)52622–2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)
Recommended wire specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTE1 In any of the following cases, make a connection via an
optical fiber cable by using an optical I/O link adapter: When the cable is 20 m or longer When the power magnetics cabinet containing a spindle
amplifier cannot be connected with the operator’s panelcabinet containing a CNC control unit via a ground wirewith a cross–sectional area of 5.5 mm2 or more
When the cable is subject to significant noise. Forexample, when there is a strong electromagnetic noisesource such as a welding machine near the cable, orwhen the cable runs in parallel with a power line or powermagnetics cable that can generate noise.
2 The recommended cable connector FI30–20S(manufactured by Hirose Electric) cannot be used for thestand–alone type i Series CNC and JA7B.
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
136
With the Series 16i and 18i, three or four serial spindles can be connectedusing the serial spindle connector panel described below.Serial spindle connector panel specification: A13B–0180–B001
Outside dimensions of the serial spindle connector panel
The outside dimensions of the serial spindle connector panel are the sameas those for the optical I/O link adapter (A13B–0154–B001).
Connector for connection with aspindle amplifier JA7A–2 (second channel)
Connector for connection with aspindle amplifier JA7A–1 (first channel)
Connector for connection with the CNCJA48 4–M3
))
*
+
45
Conditions for installing the serial spindle connector panel
The serial spindle connector panel does not have an enclosed structure.So, install the serial spindle connector panel in an enclosed cabinet asused for the CNC.
Ground the case by using the case mounting screws of the serialspindle connector panel.
The serial spindle connector panel is light, so that it need not besecured with screws. However, ensure that the serial spindleconnector panel does not contact other electrical circuits and thuscause a short circuit. When securing the serial spindle connector panelto the cabinet, for example, attach an L–shaped metal fitting as shownbelow with a case mounting screw (M3) of the serial spindle connectorpanel.
L–shaped metal fitting
6.1.2Connecting One toFour Serial Spindles
B–63523EN/03 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
137
Connection diagram(Connection diagram when only electrical cables are used)
CNC
JA41
JA7A–1
JA48
JA7A–2
SPM
JA7B
JA7A
SPM
JA7B
JA7A
JA7B
JA7A
SPM
JA7B
JA7A
SPMInterconnection cable 1
Serial spindle connector panel
Interconnection cable 2 Interconnection cable 2
(Connection diagram when optical cables are used)
CNC
JA41
JA7A–1
JA48
JA7A–2
JD1COP1
SPM
JA7B
JA7A
SPM
JA7B
JA7A
JA7B
JA7A
SPM
JA7B
JA7A
SPM
JD1COP1
JD1COP1
JD1COP1
Optical linkadapter
Opticalcable
Interconnection cable 3
Serial spindle connector panel
Interconnection cable 4
Interconnection cable 4 Interconnection cable 2
Optical linkadapter
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
138
(Cable connections when only electrical cables are used)Cable connection between the CNC and serial spindle connector panel
(Interconnection cable 1)
15*SOUTA 14
(+5V)
0V
SINA*SINASOUTA
SOUTB
JA48(PCR–E20MDT)
0V
0V
0V
11
1312
16
1817
1920
SINA
*SOUTB
1
32
4
65
87
910
CNC (motherboard, sub–CPU board)
JA41PCR–E20MDK–SL–A(PCR–EV20MDT)
Serial spindle connector panel
0V
SOUTB0V*SOUTB
SINB
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
vSINA
vSOUTA
*SINB
1
32
4
65
87
910
SOUTA
[PCA][*PCA][PCB][*PCB](+5V)
*SINB(+5V)
(+5V)
SINB
(+5V)(+5V)
NOTE1 When an optical cable is used for the connection between
the CNC and a spindle, the +5V signals indicated inparentheses are used to feed power to the optical I/O linkadapter. Do not connect these signals when an opticalcable is not used. The signals in brackets ([ ]) are used whena position coder is used. These signals must not be usedtogether with the second channel of the serial spindleinterface.
2 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used with theLCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connectorspecification (in parentheses) is used with the stand–alonetype i Series CNC.
3 The second and fourth serial spindles are connected asbranches from the spindle amplifier module.
B–63523EN/03 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
139
123415171910121416
SOUTA*SOUTASINA*SINASOUTB*SOUTBSINB*SINB0V0V0V
SINA*SINA
SOUTA*SOUTA
SINB*SINB
SOUTB*SOUTB
0V0V0V
Ground plateShield
JA41
Cable connection
JA483412
15171910121416
Recommended cable connector:PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)FI30–20S (manufactured by Hirose Electric)FCN–247J020–G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)52622–2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0236–K845Recommended wire specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTE1 When this cable is installed close to other cables such as a
power line, a shielded wire must be connected to the groundplate. When the CNC is installed close to the serial spindleconnector panel, however, no connection to the groundplate is necessary.
2 The recommended cable connector FI30–20S (manufacturedby Hirose Electric) cannot be used for the stand–alone typei Series CNC and JA48.
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
140
Cable connection between the serial spindle connector panel and a spindleamplifier
(Interconnection cable 2)
SINSOUT
7
SINSOUT
JA7B(PCR–EV20MDT)
0V
0V
0V
1920
SIN
SOUT
1
32
4
65
87
910
Serial spindle connector panel
JA7A–1, 2(PCR–E20MD)
α spindle amplifier module
0V
0V
0V
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
SIN
SOUT
1
32
4
65
8910
(+5V)(+5V)
(+5V)(+5V)
(+5V)
(+5V)
1615
1817
11
1312
14
NOTEWhen an optical cable is used for the connection betweenthe CNC and a spindle, the +5V signals indicated inparentheses are used to feed power to the optical I/O linkadapter. Do not connect these signals when an opticalcable is not used.
1234121416
SOUT*SOUTSIN*SIN0V0V0V
SIN*SIN
SOUT*SOUT
0V0V0V
Ground plate
Shield
JA4A–1, 2
Cable connection
JA7B3412
121416
Recommended wire specification:A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTEWhen this cable is installed close to other cables such as apower line, a shielded wire needs to be connected to theground plate. When the serial spindle connector panel isinstalled close to the spindle amplifier module, a connectionto the ground plate is unnecessary.
B–63523EN/03 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
141
(Cable connections when optical cables are used)Cable connection between the CNC and serial spindle connector panel
(Interconnection cable 3)
0V
+5V
0V
SINASINASOUTA
SOUTB
JA48(PCR–E20MDT)
0V
0V
0V
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
SINA
SOUTA
SOUTB
1
32
4
65
87
910
CNC (motherboard, sub–CPU board)
JA41PCR–E20MDK–SL–A(PCR–EV20MDT)
Serial spindle connector panel
0V
SOUTB
*SOUTB
SINB
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
SINA
SOUTA
*SINB
1
32
4
65
87
910
SOUTA
[PCA][PCA][PCB][PCB]+5V
SINB+5V
+5V
SINB
+5V+5V
NOTE1 The signals in brackets ([ ]) are used when a position
coder is used. These signals must not be used together withthe second serial spindle interface.
2 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used with theLCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connectorspecification (in parentheses) is used with the stand–alonetype i Series CNC.
3 The second and fourth serial spindles are connected asbranches from the spindle amplifier module.
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
142
12341517191091820121416
SOUTA*SOUTASINA*SINASOUTB*SOUTBSINB*SINB+5V+5V+5V0V0V0V
SINA*SINA
SOUTA*SOUTA
SINB*SINB
SOUTB*SOUTB
+5V+5V+5V
0V0V0V
Ground plateShield
JA41
Cable connection
JA483412
15171910
91820121416
Recommended cable connector:PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)FI30–20S (manufactured by Hirose Electric)FCN–247J020–G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)52622–2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0236–K847Recommended wire specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG × 10 pairs)
NOTE1 When this cable is installed close to other cables such as a
power line, a shielded wire needs to be connected to theground plate. When the CNC is installed close to the serialspindle connector panel, however, a connection to theground plate is unnecessary.
2 The recommended cable connector FI30–20S (manufacturedby Hirose Electric) cannot be used for the stand–alone typei Series CNC and JA48.
B–63523EN/03 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
143
(Cable connection between the serial spindle connector panel and anoptical I/O link adapter)
(Interconnection cable 4)
SINSOUTSOUTSOUT
+5V
SINSOUT
JD1(PCR–E20LMDT)
0V
0V
0V
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
SIN1
32
4
65
87
910
Serial spindle connector panel
JA7A–1, 2(PCR–E20MD)
Optical I/O link adapter
0V
0V
0V
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
SIN1
32
4
65
87
910
+5V
+5V+5V
+5V
+5V
123491820111213141516
SOUT*SOUTSIN*SIN+5V+5V+5V0V0V0V0V0V0V
SIN*SIN
SOUT*SOUT
+5V+5V+5V
0V
0V
0V
Ground plateShield
JA7A–1, 2
Cable connection
JD143219
1820111213141516
Recommended cable connector:PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin Kogyo)FCN–247J020–G/E (manufactured by Fujitsu)52622–2011 (manufactured by Molex Japan)
Recommended wire specification: A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
6. SPINDLE CONNECTION B–63523EN/03
144
89
SVC, ES
ENB1, ENB2
Spindle command voltage and common line
Spindle enable signal (Note 1)
1
32
ES4
65
SVC87
ENB19 ENB210
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
CNC
JA40(Main board, Sub CPU board)PCR–E20MDK–SL–A(PCR–EV20MDT)
75
DA2E
SVCES
ENB1ENB2
Signal Name Description
CABLE CONNECTION ANALOG SPINDLESERVO UNIT ORINVERTER
SHIELD
GROUNDING PLATE
RECOMMENDED CABLE–SIDE CONNECTORPCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu, Ltd.)52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION:A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG × 10 pairs)
HDI0(0V)
NOTE1 Signals ENB1 and 2 turn on when the spindle command
voltage is effective. These signals are used when theFANUC Analog Spindle Servo Unit is used.
2 The analog output ratings are as follows:Output voltage: 10 VOutput current: 2 mA (maximum)Output impedance: 100 ohms
3 The parenthesized signals are used for the high–speed skipfunction (HDI).
4 The upper connector specification of JA40 is used with theLCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connectorspecification (in parentheses) is used with the stand–alonetype i Series CNC.
5 The recommended cable connector FI30–20S (manufacturedby Hirose Electric) cannot be used for the stand–alone typei Series CNC.
6.2ANALOG SPINDLEINTERFACE
B–63523EN/03 6. SPINDLE CONNECTION
145
2 ( )1
3
( )
( )
PA4
65
PAPB
87
PB9 +5V10
0V11
1312
14
16
0V15
0V
1817
+5V
+5V1920
CNC
JA41(Main board, Sub CPU board)(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
PA, PA
SOUT, SOUTSIN, SIN
5678
15179,18,2012,14,16
A (PA)N (PA)C (PB)R (PB)B (PZ)P (PZ)HK
PAPA
PBPB
SCSC+5V
0V
CNC
PB, PB
SC
SC
Signal Name Description
SC Position coder phase C signals
Position coder phase A signals
Position coder phase A signals
Serial spindle signals (Note)
POSITION CODER
SHIELD
GROUNDINGPLATE
RECOMMENDED CABLE–SIDE CONNECTORPCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu, Ltd.)52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)RECOMMENDED CABLE SPECIFICATION:A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3),MAX. LENGTH 20 m
( )
( )( )
NOTE1 Signals SIN, SIN, SOUT and SOUT are for a serial
spindle. These signals are not used for an analog spindle.2 As the connector on the cable side, the solder–type 15–pin
connector (FI40B–2015S, or conventional FI40–2015S)manufactured by Hirose Electric cannot be used.
3 The upper connector specification of JA41 is used with theLCD–mounted type i Series CNC. The lower connectorspecification (in parentheses) is used with the stand–alonetype i Series CNC.
4 The recommended cable connector FI30–20S (manufacturedby Hirose Electric) cannot be used for the stand–alone typei Series CNC.
6.3POSITION CODERINTERFACE
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
146
7 SERVO INTERFACE
B–63523EN/03 7. SERVO INTERFACE
147
Control unit
Connection of FSSBThis figure is an example of connectingto an i Series CNC with a LCD–mountedtype panel.
7.1CONNECTION TOTHE SERVOAMPLIFIERS
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
148
This chapter describes how to connect the servo units to the i series CNC.For details of the connection of the Servo amplifier αi series, refer to theServo Amplifier αi series descriptions (B–65282EN).
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
Control unit
Servo amplifier modules
Optical fiber cable
16i/160i/160is: Maximum 8 axes18i/180i/180is: Maximum 6 axes21i/210i/210is: Maximum 4 axes
Cable Length RestrictionWithin 100 m between unitsTotal length within 500 m
The connection between the CNC control unit and the servo amplifiersshould use only one optical fiber cable, regardless of the number ofcontrolled axes. See APPENDIX D for details on the optical fiber cable.
In the control unit, the COP10A connector is placed on the servo cardinstalled on the main board. When a sub–CPU card is used, COP10A isplaced on the servo card installed on the sub–CPU board as well.
The high–speed HRV function works not only for the set axes but also forall axes connected to the same FSSB line. It is necessary to considerconnections with the FSSB line depending on the axes to be used. Someservo amplifiers do not support the high–speed HRV function. Any ofsuch servo amplifiers cannot be connected to the FSSB line.Because it is necessary to use combinations of the first and second axes,the third and fourth axes, the fifth and six axes, and seventh and eighthaxes as paired axes, the axes in each combination must be connected tothe same FSSB line. To put another way, the first axis cannot beconnected to FSSB–1 if the second axis is connected to FSSB–2.
7.1.1General
7.1.2Interface to the ServoAmplifiers
7.1.2.1Interface to the servoamplifiers
7.1.2.2Interfacing with servoamplifiers (for high–speed HRVfunction)
B–63523EN/03 7. SERVO INTERFACE
149
Servo amplifier module
Up to 8 axes for the 16i/160i/160isUp to 6 axes for the 18i/180i/180isUp to 4 axes for the 21i/210i/210is
Control unit
Cable length limitWithin 100m between unitsWithin 500m in total
COP10A–1 COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
COP10B
COP10A
Servo amplifier module
Separate detector module
Four axes and one separate detec-tor can be connected to the FSSBline that uses the high–speed HRVfunction.In this case (with 5 slaves), the sep-arate detector must be placed atthe last stage.
COP10A–2
Separate detector module
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
150
CP11A
Servo amplifier module
Control unit or the previous–stage servoamplifier module
Separate detector in-terface unit
Linear scale
This figure is an example of connecting the I/O Link toan i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted type panel.
7.1.3Separate DetectorInterface
B–63523EN/03 7. SERVO INTERFACE
151
COP10B
COP10A
CP11A
CNF1
Servo amplifier module
Optical fiber cable
Optical fiber cable
Separate detector interface unit 1
DC24V
CNC
COP10B
COP10A
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
Linear scale axis 1
Battery for absoluteseparate detector
Servo card
COP10A
|
|
|
Linear scale axis 2
ÂÂÂÂ
COP10B
COP10A
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
COP10B
COP10A
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
Â
JF101
JF102
JF103
JF104
JA4A
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Linear scale axis 3
Linear scale axis 4
CNF2
Separate detector interface unit 2 (This can not be used in the Series 21i/210i/210is.)
ÂÂ
JF105
JF106
JF107
JF108
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Flat cable
Linear scale axis 5
Linear scale axis 6
Linear scale axis 7
Linear scale axis 8
Up to 8 axes with 16i/160i/160isUp to 6 axes with 18i/180i/180isUp to 4 axes with 21i/210i/210is
When a separate pulse coder or linear scale is used, a separate detectorinterface unit, as shown above, is required. The separate detectorinterface unit should be connected to the CNC control unit through anoptical fiber cable, as one of the units on the servo interface (FSSB).Although the above figure shows the separate detector interfaceconnected in the final stage of the FSSB line, it can also be connected, atthe nearest location, to the CNC control unit. Or, it can be installedbetween two servo amplifier modules.When the separate detector interface unit is connected to the FSSB linethat uses the high–speed HRV function, however, it must be at the laststage if five slaves are involved.
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
152
Usually, the separate detector corresponding to a servo motor for each ofthe first to eighth axes is connected to each of separate detector interfacesJF101 to JF108. If necessary, the controlled axis numbers correspondingto JF101 to JF108 can be changed. For example, when separate detectorsare to be used only for the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth controlled axesin the above figure, JF101 to JF104 of the basic interface unit can beassigned to these controlled axes, thus eliminating the need to use anexpansion unit. The interface unit can feed 0.35 A (5 V) to each separatedetector.
Item Specification
Power supply capacity Voltage 24 VDC ±10%Current 0.9 A (basic unit only)1.5 A (basic unit + expansion unit)
Ordering information A02B–0236–C203 (basic)A02B–0236–C204 (expansion)
Method of installation An interface unit can be installed by using screwsor a DIN rail.
Power to the separate detector interface unit should be supplied from anexternal 24 V DC power supply.
CP11A
+24V (1)0V (2)
0V1
3
+24V2
Separate detector interface unit External power supply
24 V DC regulatedpower supply24 V DC 10%
Cable
CP11AAMP JAPAN1–178288–3 (Housing)1–175218–5 (Contact)
External powersupply
Select a connector thatmatches the pin layoutof the external powersupply.
Recommended cable specification: A02B–0124–K830 (5 m)(The external power supply end of the cable is provided with M3 crimpterminals.)
The 24 V DC input to CP11A can be output at CP11B for use in branching.The connection of CP11B is identical to that of CP11A. In this case, thepower supplied to CP11A should be equal to the sum of the rating of theseparate detector interface unit and that of the units after CP11B.
7.1.4Separate DetectorInterface UnitSpecification
7.1.5Connection of PowerSupply
B–63523EN/03 7. SERVO INTERFACE
153
1 PCA
2 *PCA
3 PCB
4 *PCB
11
12 0V
13
14 0V
5 PCZ
6 *PCZ
7 (+6V)
8 (REQ)
15
16 0V
17
18 +5V
9 +5V 19
JF101 to JF108(PCR–EV20MDT)
10 20 +5V
Separate detector interface unit
SHIELDGROUNDING PLATE
Cable wiring
Linear scale
1
2PCA
*PCA
PCA
*PCA3
4PCB
*PCB
PCB
*PCB5
6PCZ
*PCZ
PCZ
*PCZ9
18+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V20
12+5V
0V
+5V
0V14
160V
0V
0V
0V
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL
A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG6 + #24AWG3–pair)
+6V and REQ are for separateabsolute pulse coders.
Recommended connectors:PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)52622–2011 (Molex)FI40B–2015S (Hirose Electric)
NOTEThe +5V signals above can be used to feed power to thelinear scales. The supply current per linear scale is 0.35 Amaximum.Minimum tolerance to 5 V: 4.95 V for main unit and 4.9 Vfor expanded section
7.1.6Linear Scale Interface
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
154
NOTEThe +5V signals above can be used to feed power to linearscales. The supply current per linear scale is 0.35 Amaximum.Minimum tolerance to 5 V: 4.95 V for main unit and 4.9 Vfor expanded section
7.1.7Stand–alone TypePulse Coder Interface For absolute detector 1 PCA
2 *PCA
3 PCB
4 *PCB
11
12 0V
13
14 0V
5 PCZ
6 *PCZ
7 +6V
8 REQ
15
16 0V
17
18 +5V
9 +5V 19
JF101 to JF108(PCR–EV20MDT)
10 20 +5V
Separate detector interface unit
SHIELDGROUNDING PLATE
Cable wiring
Stand–alone type detector
1
2PCA
*PCA
PCA
*PCA3
4PCB
*PCB
PCB
*PCB5
6PCZ
*PCZ
PCZ
*PCZ7
8
+5V
+5V
+6VA
REQ9
18
+5V
0V
+5V20
12
0V
0V
0V
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG6 + #24AWG3–pair)
A PCA B *PCA C PCB D *PCB
E PCZ F *PCZ G H
J K L +5V M 0V
N SHLD P R S REQ
T +6VA U 0VA V
A
B
C
D
E
F
T
S
L
M
U
N
+6V
REQ
14
160VA
SHLD(Shield)
Pulse coder
(MS3102A–22–14P)
MS3106B22–14S
Recommended connectors:PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)52622–2011 (Molex)FI40B–2015S (Hirose Electric)
B–63523EN/03 7. SERVO INTERFACE
155
NOTEThe +5V signals above can be used to feed power to linearscales. The supply current per linear scale is 0.35 Amaximum.Minimum tolerance to 5 V: 4.95 V for main unit and 4.9 Vfor expanded section
(Parallel interface)
For incremental detector
1 PCA
2 *PCA
3 PCB
4 *PCB
11
12 0V
13
14 0V
5 PCZ
6 *PCZ
7 +6V
8 REQ
15
16 0V
17
18 +5V
9 +5V 19
JF101 to JF108(PCR–EV20MDT)
10 20 +5V
SHIELDGROUNDING PLATE
Cable wiring
Stand–alone type detector
1
2PCA
*PCA
PCA
*PCA3
4PCB
*PCB
PCB
*PCB5
6PCZ
*PCZ
PCZ
*PCZ
+5V
+5V
9
18
+5V
0V
+5V
+5V20
12
0V
0V
0V
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIALA66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG6 + #24AWG3–pair)
A PCA B PCB C +5V D *PCA
E *PCB F PCZ G *PCZ H SHLD
J +5V K +5V L M
N 0V P 0V R S
T 0V
A
D
B
E
F
G
C
J
K
N
P
T
H
14
160V
SHLD(Shield)
Pulse coder(MS3102A–20–29P)
MS3106B20–29SWREQ is not used.
+5V
0V
Separate detector interface unit
Recommended connectors:PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)52622–2011 (Molex)FI40B–2015S (Hirose Electric)
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
156
NOTE1 The +5V signals above can be used to feed power to linear
scales. The supply current per linear scale is 0.35 Amaximum. Minimum tolerance to 5 V: 4.95 V for main unit and 4.9 Vfor expanded section
2 When the FS21i/FS210i is using the 9090 or 9096 seriesservo software, the serial interface cannot be used.
(Serial interface)
JF101AJF108(PCR–EV20MDT)
1 SD
2 SD
3
4
11
12 0V
13
14 0V
5 REQ
6 REQ
7 +6V
8
15
16 0V
17
18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V
Separate detector interface unit
(Shield)Ground plate
Cable connection
Separate detector
1
2SD
SD
SD
vSD
5
6REQ
REQ
REQ
REQ7
+5V
+6VA
18
+5V
0V
+5V20
12
0V
0V
0V
Recommended cable:A66L–0001–0266 (#20AWG × 6 + #24AWG × 3 pairs)
Recommended connector:PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)52622–2011 (Molex Japan)FI40B–2015S (Hirose Electric)
A SD B C D SD
E F REQ G REQ H SHLD
J +5V K +5V L M
N 0V P R +6VA S 0VA
T 0V
A
D
F
G
R
K
N
S
H
+6V
14
160VA
(Shield)
Pulse coder
MS3106B20–29SW
+5VJ
T0V
B–63523EN/03 7. SERVO INTERFACE
157
The standard of the feedback signal from the additional detector is asshown below.
(1)A and B phase signal input
This is a method to input position information by the mutual 90 degreephase slip of A and B phase signals.Detection of the position is performed with the state in which the B phaseis leading taken as a shift in the plus direction, and the state in which theA phase is leading as a shift in the minus direction.
Shift in plus direction
Shift in minus direction
A phase signal
B phase signal
A phase signal
B phase signal
(2)Phase difference and minimum repeat frequency
Td Td Td Td
0.5V
A
B
Tp
PCA/*PCA
*PCA/PCA
PCB/*PCB
*PCB/PCB0.5V
(3)Z phase signal input
For the Z phase signal (1 rotation signal), a signal width of more than 1/4frequency of the A phase or B phase signals is necessary.
Z phase signal
Tw
Tw 1/4 frequency of A phase or B phase
7.1.8Input SignalRequirements
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
158
Requirements for the signals at the input pins of input connectors JF101to JF104.
TD 0.15 µsec
The signals for these connectors are differential input signals with A andB phases. An important factor is time TD from point A, when thepotential difference between PCA and *PCA exceeds 0.5V, to point B,when the potential difference between PCB and *PCB becomes lowerthan 0.5V. The minimum value of TD is 0.15 µs. The period and pulsewidth of the signals must be long enough to satisfy the aboverequirements.
PCA
*PCA
110Ω
560Ω
5V
The same circuit is usedfor B–phase signals(PCB and *PCB) andone–rotation signals(PCZ and *PCZ).
A–phasesignal
If the separate pulse coder rotates in the opposite direction to that of theservo motor, reconnect the interface cable of the separate pulse coder asdescribed below.
(1)Exchange signal PCA with signal PCB.
(2)Exchange signal *PCA with signal *PCB.
Time requirements
Receiver circuit
Relationship betweenthe direction of rotationof the servo motor andthat of the separatepulse coder
B–63523EN/03 7. SERVO INTERFACE
159
Separate detector interface unit
Absolute pulse coder battery case
7.1.9Connection of Batteryfor Separate AbsoluteDetector
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
160
01
0302
04
0605
+6V0807
0910
11
1312
14
1615
1817
1920
JA4A(PCR–EV20MDT)
+6V 0V+ –
0V
Separate detector interface unit Battery case
(M3 terminal)
JA4A
+6V0V
+6V0V
+–
73
CABLE CONNECTION
RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL:0.2 mm2 (7/0.18)
Battery case
Recommended connectors:PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)52622–2011 (Molex)
NOTEThe battery for the separate absolute detector is requiredonly when the separate absolute detector is used. When anabsolute pulse coder with built–in motor is used, it ispowered by the built–in battery of the amplifier, such that thebattery for the separate absolute detector is not required.
B–63523EN/03 7. SERVO INTERFACE
161
A flat cable is used to make a connection between the basic unit andexpansion unit as shown below.
A flat cable not longer than 100 mm must be used.
CNF2CNF1
Units viewed from top
Basic unit Expansion unit
Marking
Mountingsurface
mark mark
Place an order on a flat cable together with separate detector interfaceunits.
7.1.10Connection Betweenthe Basic Unit andExpansion Unit
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
162
Connector locations on the basic unit
Connector locations on the expansion unit
For the outside dimensions, see Appendix A.
7.1.11Connector Locations
B–63523EN/03 7. SERVO INTERFACE
163
1) Notes on installation
(1)Use an interface unit in a completely enclosed cabinet.
(2) Install an interface unit on a vertical surface, and provide a spaceof 100 mm above and below the unit. Below an interface unit, donot place equipment that generates a large amount of heat.
(3)When using a basic unit and expansion unit, place the units asshown below so that the flat cable connecting the units does notblock the vent holes. A flat cable not longer than 100 mm must beused.
Vent holes Flat cable
Basic unit Expansion unit
2) Installation using screws
Basic unit Expansion unit
When using both a basic unit and expansion unit, install the units asshown above, with the mounting holes horizontally separated by 70to 80 mm.
7.1.12Installation
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
164
CAUTIONTo install/remove the unit, a screwdriver must be insertedobliquely. So, sufficient access clearances are required onboth sides of the unit. As a guideline, if the front of anadjacent unit appears flush with the unit or slightly set back,allow a clearance of about 20 mm between the unit and theadjacent unit. If the front of an adjacent unit protrudesbeyond the front of the unit, allow a clearance of about 70mm between the unit and the adjacent unit. Also, wheninstalling the unit near a side of the cabinet, allow aclearance of about 70 mm between the unit and the side ofthe cabinet.
Access clearance near a separate detector interface unit
7.1.13Notes on Installing aSeparate DetectorInterface Unit
B–63523EN/03 7. SERVO INTERFACE
165
Installing the unit on the DIN rail
Installing the uniton the DIN rail
Removingthe unit fromthe DIN rail
DIN rail
DIN rail
Installing the unit:
1. Hook the unit on the top of the DIN rail.
2. Push the unit in until it clicks.
Removing the unit:
1. Push down the lock by using a screwdriver.
2. Remove the unit by pulling the lower end of the unit towards you.
CAUTIONWhen removing the unit, be careful not to damage the lockby applying excessive force. When installing and removingthe unit, hold the upper and lower ends of the unit so thatstress is not applied to the side (that surface with the slits)of the unit.
7. SERVO INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
166
The servo check connectors used with the i Series (MODEL B) are notcompatible with the i Series (MODEL A). So, to connect the servo checkboard (board unit: A16B–1600–0320) or interface board for automaticadjustment (board unit: A16B–2300–0170 or A20B–2002–0810, Unit:A06B–6057–H620 or A06B–6057–H630) with the i Series, a new servocheck adapter (board unit: A20B–1007–0790) and special cable(A660–2042–T237#100R0) are required. (The ordering information forthe servo check adapter and cable is A02B–0281–K822.)
Examples of connection
When the servo check board is used
Connect TEST0–3 with CN2 of the servo check board via the currentlyused flat cable.
CA69
CNC
CN0
TESTn
CN2
Servo check adapter Servo check board
When the interface board for automatic adjustment is usedA) Connect TEST0–3 with CIN1/2 of the interface board for automatic
adjustment via a currently used flat cable.
CA69
CNC
CN0
TESTn
CIN1
Interface board for automatic adjustment
CIN2
Servo check adapter
B) Connect TESTA/B with CIN3 of the interface board for automaticadjustment via a straight cable (such as A660–2042–T007#*****).
CA69
CNC
CN0
TESTx
CIN3
Interface board for automatic adjustment
Servo check adapter
NOTEIn any case, use the special cable (A660–2042–T237) toconnect CN0 with CA69 on the mother board of the CNC.
7.1.14Connecting the ServoCheck Adapter
B–63523EN/03 7. SERVO INTERFACE
167
Axis signal output
TEST0 1/2
TEST1 3/4
TEST2 5/6
TEST3 7/8
TESTA 1/2/3/4
TESTB 5/6/7/8
Connector ConnectorControlled axisnumber(*1)
Controlled axisnumber(*1)
(*1) The correspondence between the controlled axis numbers and servoaxis numbers depends on the setting of parameter No. 1023.
Connector locations
TESTATESTB
TEST3
TEST2 TEST0
CN0
TEST1
Servo check adapter for the i SeriesA20B–1007–0790
NC side
Axis 5/6
Axis 7/8
Axes 5 to 8
Axis 1/2
Axis 3/4
Axes 1 to 4
Pin diagram
1
2
GND
CLKX0
3
4
GND
FSX0
5
6
DX2
DX0
7
8
CLKX2
FSX2
CN0
9
10
CLKX3
+24V
11
12
GND
CLKX1
13
14
GND
FSX1
15
16
DX3
DX1
17
18 FSX3
19
20
+24V
A1
A2
+5V
CLKXn
A3
A4
FSXn
DXn
A5
A6
A7
A8
TEST0–3
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5V
+15V
–15V
GND
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
1
2
GND
CLKX0/2
3
4
GND
FSX0/2
5
6
GND
DX0/2
7
8
TESTA/TESTB
9
10
11
12
GND
CLKX1/3
13
14
GND
FSX1/3
15
16
GND
DX1/3
17
18
–15V
+5V
19
20
+15V
+5V
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
168
8 CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
169
The CNC display unit with PC functions is on an IBM PC compatiblepanel computer. Connecting the CNC display unit with PC functions toan i Series CNC system via a high–speed optical fiber (high–speed serialbus) provides the system with personal computer functions.
The copyright of Windows 2000 and other software provided with theCNC display unit with PC functions is owned by MicrosoftCorporation (USA), NeoMagic Inc., Phoenix Technologies Ltd., PFUCo.,Ltd, and FANUC LTD.
No part of the software described above, or its manuals, may be usedor reproduced without permission.
No part of the software described above, or its manuals, may be soldindependently of the CNC display unit with PC functions.
The software described above, and its manual, must be used under theconditions described in the attached license agreement.
The use of the CNC incorporating the CNC display unit with PCfunctions shall imply that the user agrees to the conditions of thelicense agreement described above.
*Windows2000 is a registered trademark of Microsoft corporation, USA
*Company name and product name mentions in this manual are(registered) trademark of each company.
NOTE1 If an operation error or mishap occurs, the data on the hard
disk may be lost, even if all the installation conditions aresatisfied. Therefore, always maintain a backup copy of thedata on the hard disk in case the stored data is lost ordamaged.Especially, the power–off on accessing the hard disk mustnot be done because that possibility is very high. Pleaseconcern for the end–users.
2 Be sure to finish the OS and the applications through theproper operation of shutdown before turning the power off.Without the above–mentioned operation, there is noassurance of the following action. At worst, the command ofinitializing the HDD will not work.
8.1OVERVIEW
8.2CAUTIONS
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
170
Connection with the CNC display unit with PC functions
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
Controlunit
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
FAtypewriter–
stylekeyboard
Either an FA typewriter–style keyboard or an MDI unit can be connected.
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
24VDC
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
JD45
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂÂÂÂÂ
CK1
ÂÂÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
CK2
MDIUnit
A 50 cm (approximatelength) flat cable for softkeys is provided with theCNC display unit with PCfunctions.
CNC displayunit with PC
functions
8.3CONNECTION
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
171
8.4GENERALCONNECTIONDIAGRAMS
8.4.1CNC Display Unit withPC Functions HavingNeither Soft Keys nor aTouch Panel
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
172
*1 These devices can be used only during application development. These cannot be installed in the control unit.*2 A 3.5”HDD unit with a FAN unit must be mounted on the backside of a FA Full Keyboard.
!!
«
##$HDD FAN (CN7)
(CNH3)
HDD POWER (CN2B)
HSSB (COP7)
+24V INPUT (CP5)
KEY BOARD (CD32A)
MOUSE (CD32B)
232–1 (JD33)
232–2 (JD46)
CENTRO (JD9)
FDD (CD34)
FDD POWER (CN2)
PCI SLOT 1 (CNP1)
PCI SLOT 2 (CNP2)
CNC Control Unit
POWER SUPPLY
HSSB I/F BOARD HSSB(COP7)
THE OTHER PCB MDI(JA2)
CNC display unit with PC functions
PCMCIACARD
: Optical link Module & Cable
: AMP(Dynamic)
: AMP(mini–DIN6pins)
: HONDA TSUSHIN (PCR 20pins)
: HIROSE DENKI(Flat Cable34pins)
: HIROSE DENKI(Flat Cable40pins)
: AMP(EI Series 4pins)
: molex (5046–NA 3pin)
: Others
POWER SUPPLY (+24VDC)
FA FULLKEYBOARD
3.5” HDDUnit
FAN UNIT
MOUSE
FULL KEYBOARD
MOUSE
I/O
I/O
USB
PRINTER
POWERSUPPLY
POWERSUPPLY
POWERSUPPLY
POWERSUPPLY
FLOPPYDISK
DRIVE
PCI EXTENSION BOARD
PCI EXTENSION BOARD
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*2
PC
MC
IA C
AR
D S
LOT
CO
LOR
LC
D P
AN
EL
Serial port 1
Serial port 2
USB port 1, 2
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
173
%%%%%%%%&&&&
%%%%%%%%&&&&
’’’’((((
))))****
++
++
,,—
##
*1 These devices can be used only during application development. These cannot be installed in the control unit.*2 A 3.5”HDD unit with a FAN unit must be mounted on the backside of a MDI.
HDD FAN (CN7)
(CNH3)
HDD POWER (CN2B)
HSSB (COP7)
+24V INPUT (CP5)
KEY BOARD (CD32A)
MOUSE (CD32B)
232–1 (JD33)
232–2 (JD46)
CENTRO (JD9)
FDD (CD34)
FDD POWER (CN2)
PCI SLOT 1 (CNP1)
PCI SLOT 2 (CNP2)
CNC Control Unit
POWER SUPPLY
HSSB I/F BOARD HSSB(COP7)
THE OTHER PCB MDI(JA2)
. 12 34 5
PCMCIACARD
: Optical link Module & Cable
: AMP(Dynamic)
: AMP(mini–DIN6pins)
: HONDA TSUSHIN (PCR 20pins)
: HIROSE DENKI(Flat Cable34pins)
: HIROSE DENKI(Flat Cable40pins)
: AMP(EI Series 4pins)
: molex (5046–NA 3pin)
: Others
POWER SUPPLY (+24VDC)
3.5” HDDUnit
FAN UNIT
(CNK1)
FULL KEYBOARD
MOUSE
I/O
I/O
USB
PRINTER
POWERSUPPLY
POWERSUPPLY
POWERSUPPLY
POWERSUPPLY
FLOPPYDISK
DRIVE
PCI EXTENSION BOARD
PCI EXTENSION BOARD
*1
*1
*1
*1
*2
PC
MC
IA C
AR
D S
LOT
CO
LOR
LC
D P
AN
EL
(CNK2)
Serial port 1
Serial port 2
USB port 1, 2
Soft–Key
Separate MDI
8.4.2CNC Display Unit with PCFunctions Having SoftKeys but No Touch Panel
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
174
,,,,,,,,,,—-
,,,,—
..
..//
001
%%++
++22
)
’’
CNC Control
POWER SUPPLY
HSSB I/F BOARD HSSB(COP7)
THE OTHER PCB MDI(JA2)
: Optical link Module & Cable
: AMP(Dynamic)
: AMP(mini–DIN6pins)
: HONDA TSUSHIN (PCR 20pins)
: HIROSE DENKI(Flat Cable34pins)
: HIROSE DENKI(Flat Cable40pins)
: AMP(EI Series 4pins)
: molex (5046–NA 3pin)
: Others
POWER SUPPLY (+24VDC)
FA FULLKEYBOARD
3.5” HDDUnit
FAN UNIT
MOUSE
FULL KEYBOARD
MOUSE
I/O
USB
PRINTER
POWERSUPPLY
POWERSUPPLY
POWERSUPPLY
FLOPPYDISK
DRIVE
PCI EXTENSION BOARD
PCI EXTENSION BOARD
HDD FAN (CN7)
(CNH3)
HDD POWER (CN2B)
HSSB (COP7)
+24V INPUT (CP5)
KEY BOARD (CD32A)
MOUSE (CD32B)
232–1 (JD33)
232–2 (JD46)
CENTRO (JD9)
FDD (CD34)
FDD POWER (CN2)
PCI SLOT 1 (CNP1)
PCI SLOT 2 (CNP2)
. 12 34 5
PCMCIACARD
PC
MC
IA C
AR
D S
LOT
CO
LOR
LC
D P
AN
EL
Touc
h–P
anel
Serial port 1 (*3)
Serial port 2
USB port 1, 2
Separate MDI(*1)
(CNK1)
*2
*2
*2
*2
*2
*1
*1 Either Separate MDI or FA Full Keyboard is usable. Both cannot be used simultaneously. A 3.5”HDD unit with a FAN unitmust be mounted on the backside of a FA Full Keyboard or a MDI.
*2 These devices can be used only during application development. These cannot be installed in the control unit.*3 RS232–C channel 1 is not usable because it is used by the Touch–Panel.
8.4.3CNC Display Unit with PCFunctions Having a TouchPanel but No Soft Key
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
175
%%%%%%%%%%%%&&&&
%%%%%%%%&&&&
’’(())**
++
++
++++2222
))))
’’
CNC Control Unit
POWER SUPPLY
HSSB I/F BOARD HSSB(COP7)
THE OTHER PCB MDI(JA2)
: Optical link Module & Cable
: AMP(Dynamic)
: AMP(mini–DIN6pins)
: HONDA TSUSHIN (PCR 20pins)
: HIROSE DENKI(Flat Cable34pins)
: HIROSE DENKI(Flat Cable40pins)
: AMP(EI Series 4pins)
: molex (5046–NA 3pin)
: Others
POWER SUPPLY (+24VDC)
3.5” HDDUnit
FAN UNIT
(CNK1)
(CNK2)
Stand–alone MDI
*2
FULL KEYBOARD
MOUSE
I/O
USB
PRINTER
POWERSUPPLY
POWERSUPPLY
POWERSUPPLY
*1
*1
*1
*1
FLOPPYDISK
DRIVE
PCI EXTENSION BOARD
PCI EXTENSION BOARD
CNC display unit with PC functions
Soft–Key
PCMCIACARD
PC
MC
IA C
AR
D S
LOT
CO
LOR
LC
D P
AN
EL
Touc
h–P
anel
HDD FAN (CN7)
(CNH3)
HDD POWER (CN2B)
HSSB (COP7)
+24V INPUT (CP5)
KEY BOARD (CD32A)
MOUSE (CD32B)
232–1 (JD33)
232–2 (JD46)
CENTRO (JD9)
FDD (CD34)
FDD POWER (CN2)
PCI SLOT 1 (CNP1)
PCI SLOT 2 (CNP2)
Serial port 1 (*3)
Serial port 2
USB port 1, 2
*1 These devices can be used only during application development. These cannot be installed in the control unit.*2 A 3.5”HDD unit with a FAN unit must be mounted on the backside of a MDI.*3 RS232–C channel 1 is not usable because it is used by the Touch–Panel.
8.4.4CNC Display Unit with PCFunctions Having a TouchPanel and Soft Key
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
176
When CNC display unit with PC functions is used, the followingenvironmental conditions (as measured top of the CNC display unit withPC functions inside the cabinet) must be ensured for the CNC display unitwith PC functions unit installation.
Ambient temperature Operating : +5 to +45CNon–operating : – 20 to +60C
Change in temperature Up to 20 C/hour
Ambient relative humidity Standard : 10 to 75% (non–condensing)Short–term : 10 to 90% (non–condensing) (within one month)
Vibration Operating : Up to 0.5G Non–operating : Up to 1.0G
Environment Installed in a hermetically sealed cabinet
Altitude Operating : – 60m to 1000mNon–operating : – 60m to 12000m
*1 Ambient temperature during operation :The temperature sensor on the CNC display unit with PC functionsPCB monitors whether the temperature is within the specified range.
1) If the temperature at power–on is beyond the allowable range onlyCNC/PMC is started. After that if the temperature becomes towithin the allowable range, CNC display unit with PC functionsautomatically starts.This function is disable when Option for Non–Connecting withCNC is ordered. CNC display unit with PC functions starts upirrespective of the temperature. Therefore, the temperature aroundCNC display unit with PC functions should be watched by theother method.
2) If the temperature drifts out of the allowable range after normalactivation, an error occurs when the hard disk is next accessed.
*2 Vibration :The CNC display unit with PC functions unit and built–in hard diskdrive may suffer resonance at certain frequencies. Careful checking isrequired on the CNC display unit with PC functions unit has beenmounted on a machine.
CAUTIONIf an operation error or mishap occurs, the data on the hard diskmay be lost, even if all the installation conditions are satisfied.Therefore, always maintain a backup copy of the data on the harddisk in case the stored data is lost or damaged.Especially, the power–off on accessing the hard disk must not bedone because that possibility is very high. Please concern for theend–users.
8.5SPECIFICATIONS
8.5.1InstallationEnvironmentalConditions
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
177
Some development or maintenance options may not satisfy the abovespecifications.*3 Measure for Noise :
Please measure for noise sufficiently referring to Subsec 3.5.4.
(1) Input power
(a) SpecificationTo use the CNC display unit with PC functions, prepare a powersupply that satisfies the requirements listed below:
Input power supply voltage +24 VDC ±10%
Input power supply current Max: 7A (10.4”/12.1” LCD type)Max: 0A (15.0” LCD type)
NOTEUse of the FANUC I/O unit also requires +1 A.
(b)TimingInput power can be turned on/off without relation to CNC poweron/off.
(2)Supply powerThe CNC display unit with PC functions can supply power, as listedbelow, to peripheral equipment. Check the amount of current drawnby each unit you want to use.
Voltage Equipment Max. Current
+5V FDD, Keyboard, MouseHDD(secondary) or ATAPI devicePCI extension board
4000mA
USB device Max. 500mA/port
PCMCIA card Max. 500mA
+3.3V PCI extension board 1000mA
+12V PCI extension boardPCMCIA cardHDD(secondary) or ATAPI device
1700mA
–12V PCI extension board 140mA
(3)Power Consumption10.4”/12.1” LCD type : about 40W15.0” LCD type : about 52W
Above operating includes the following devices.
– CNC display unit with PC functions, HDD Unit, FAN for HDD,FDD Unit, Full Keyboard, and Mouse.
Above operating does not include the following devices.
– PCMCIA Card, PCI Extension board, and Devices to connectby Serial or Parallel Interface.
8.5.2Power SupplySpecification
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
178
NOTEAbove power consumption is reference. If peripherals areconnected or PCI extended boards are mounted, the powerconsumption will increase. Also, please consider thecabinet design and the cooling method which is mostsuitable to the total power consumption.
Before switching off the CNC display unit with PC functions, terminateall applications and the OS according to the normal shutdown procedure.If the CNC display unit with PC functions is switched off while anapplication or the OS is still running, the CNC display unit with PCfunctions may fail to operate normally next time it is switched on. In theworst case, the initialization command for the hard disk drive maybecome inoperable.
8.5.3Shutdown
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
179
The following three spaces are required around the CNC display unit withPC functions.
A: Space for connecting cables.Also, If you wish to exchange a battery or a fuse without removingCNC display unit with PC functions from the machine panel, thisspace A is required and it is necessary to be able to access to the batteryor the fuse from the rear side of the CNC display unit with PCfunctions.
B: If PCI extension board exists, this space B is required for cableconnection. The dimension X depends on cables connected to the PCIExtension board.
C: This space is required for airflow.CNC display unit with PC functions consumes the power described at“8.5.2. Power Specification” item 3) . Therefore, please install coolingsystem in the cabinet with keeping space C.
333333333333333333333333
333333333333333
Battery
Unit: mm
333333333333333333333333333333333333333333
C
333333333
BB
333333333
C
In case that PCI Extension Board FittingPlate is ordered.
50
33333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333
27
X
60
Refer to APPENDIX about outline dimensions of the basic unit.
AA
Fuse
8.6INSTALLATIONSPACE
8.6.1Basic Unit 10.4″ LCDType
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
180
BatteryFuse
333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333
333333333333
333333333333333333333333
333333333
20
333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333
333333333333333 57
X
60
C
A
B
C
B
A
Refer to APPENDIX about outline dimensions of the basic unit.Unit: mm
In case that PCI Extension Board FittingPlate is ordered.
Battery
Refer to APPENDIX about outline dimensions of the basic unit.
Fuse
333333333333333333333333333333333333333333
3333333333
3333333333333333333333333
B
333333333
C
333333333333333333333333333333333333333333
333333333
77
X
600
C
A
B
A
Unit: mm
In case that PCI Extension Board FittingPlate is ordered.
8.6.2Basic Unit 12.1″ LCDType
8.6.3Basic Unit 15.0″ LCDType
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
181
The HDD unit is mounted on the backside of the MDI or the FAFull–Keyboard.
Reserve space C in the above figure.
And reserve space for connecting cables of HDD signal, HDD power,FAN power , and MDI/FA full keyboard signal too.
The HDD unit itself also generates heat. Consider heat removal for boththe HDD unit and basic unit.
FA Full Keyboardor MDI UnitHDD UnitFAN
3333333333333333
33333333333
333333333333333333333333
333333333333
2030
333333333333333333333333333
C333333333333333333
C
333333
Refer to APPENDIX about outline dimensions of the FA fullkeyboard and the position of the HDD unit.
Unit: mm
8.6.4HDD Unit
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
182
Soft–key(Connector to sparateMDI)See 8.7.10.
PCMCIACard slot(Display side)
Number Connector Name Function
CP5 +24V INPUT Main Power InputJD33 232–1 Serial Port 1JD46 232–2 Serial Port 2 +USBJD9 CENTRO Parallel PortCOP7 HSSB HSSBCD32B MOUSE MouseCD32A KEY BOARD Full KeyboardCNH3 HDD HDD SignalCN2B HDD POWER HDD Power OutputCN7 HDD FAN FAN for HDDCD34 FDD FDD SignalCN2 FDD POWER FDD Power Output
PCMCIA CardCNP1 PCI SLOT1 PCI extension slot 1CNP2 PCI SLOT2 PCI extension slot 2
CP5
Show fromThe back side
CNH3CD34
COP7
CN7
CD32B CD32A
CN2CN2BJD9JD33 JD46
CNP1
CNP2
Connector
NOTEThe Soft–Key only exists in the CNC display unit with PCfunctions with Soft–Key.
8.7PERIPHERALEQUIPMENT ANDCONNECTION
8.7.1Connector LayoutDiagram
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
183
1
2
3
CNC display unit with PC functions
CP5
+24V
0V +24 VDC input
AMP2–178288–3 (CASE)1–175218–5 (CONTACT)
(1)Cable connection
1
2
+24V
0V
+24V
0V
(2)Recommended cable conductorUse a cable whose conductor is not smaller than A10G16 (1.3 mm2).
NOTEThis power supply cable should be routed away from thesignal lines of the CNC display unit with PC functions.
8.7.2Main Power SupplyInput
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
184
1 0V 2 DENSEL3 0V 45 0V 67 0V 8 INDEX9 0V 10 DS0
11 0V 12 DS113 0V 14 (RES)15 0V 16 MTR0N17 0V 18 DIR19 0V 20 STEP21 0V 22 WDATA23 0V 24 WE25 0V 26 TRK027 0V 28 WPRT29 0V 30 RDATA31 0V 32 HDSEL33 0V 34 DSKCH
1 0V 2 DENSEL3 0V 45 0V 67 0V 8 INDEX9 0V 10 MT0
11 0V 12 DS113 0V 14 DS015 0V 16 MT117 0V 18 DIR19 0V 20 STEP21 0V 22 WDATA23 0V 24 WE25 0V 26 TRK027 0V 28 WPRT29 0V 30 RDATA31 0V 32 HDSEL33 0V 34 DSKCH
CNC display unit with PC functions Panel–mount type 3.5″ floppydisk drive
CD34
AMP EI series 4–pin connectorHousing: 171822–4Contact: 170262 and 170263
1 +12V2 0V3 0V4 +5V
1 +5V2 0V3 (NC)4 (NC)
HIF3BA–34D–2.54Pproduced by HiroseElectric
CN2
1 2 3 4
AB
4 3 2 1J2
NOTE
1 This is a standard interface for the IBM PC compatible. Note the following: Only two floppy disk density modes (720 Kbytes and 1.44 Mbytes) are supported. The DENSEL signal level is fixed to low. Can not used floppy disk drive unit that needs 12V.
2 Commercial floppy disk drives are prone to compatibility problems with personal computers tosome degree. It is not guaranteed that the CNC display unit with PC functions can operate withevery commercial floppy disk drive. Machine tool builders are requested to check theoperability of the floppy disk drives they select. Keep in mind that commercial floppy disk drivesare neither dust–proof nor moisture–resistant.
3 The interface on the drive side shown above is only an example. Design an interface cableaccording to the specification of the drive with which it is used.
8.7.3Floppy Disk Drive(Signal and PowerSupply)
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
185
(1)Cable connection
0VDENSEL
0V(NC)
0V(NC)
0V*INDEX
0V*MT0
0V*DS1
0V*DS0
0V*MT1
0V*DIR
0V*STEP
0V*WDATA
0V*WE
0V*TRK0
0V*WPRT
0V*RDATA
0VHDSEL
0V*DSKCH
0VDENSEL0V(NC)0V(NC)0V*INDEX0V*0S00V*DS10V(RES)0V*MTRON0V*DIR0V*STEP0V*WDATA0V*WE0V*TRK00V*WPRT0V*RDATA0VHDSEL0V*DSKCH
12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334
12345678916151413121110171819202122232425262728293031323334
12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334
CNCCD34
Panel–mount type3.5″ floppy disk unit
J1
Pin assignment for connector Bon the previous page (see Note)
Pin assignment forconnector A on theprevious page (seeNote)
1234
1234
+5V0V0V
+12V
+5V0V(NC)(NC)
+5V 40V 30V 2
+12V 1
1 +5V2 0V3 (NC)4 (NC)
CN2 CN2 J2 J2
This is the standard interface for the IBM PC compatible.Commercially available cables are cross–connected between pins 10and 16 (between the CNC and drive A) as shown above. In this case,“drive No. setting pin” on drive A should be set to 1 (second drive).
(2)Specification of the recommended cableA02B–0207–K801: Signal cable and power supply cable (1.0 m long)
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
186
When using this unit on the machine, observe the following cautions:
(1)DustBecause the CNC display unit with PC functions is not covered withpanels, except for the front door section, it must be enclosed in a sealedcabinet. While the door is open, dust can enter the floppy disk unit andcabinet via the disk insertion slot. If the CNC display unit with PCfunctions is installed in a dusty environment, more floppy disk failuresthan normal may occur.
(2)Temperature+5°C to +45°C (operating)The operating temperature range for this unit is stricter than ordinaryunits because of the restrictions imposed by the floppy disk. So, payspecial attention to the way it is cooled. Avoid blowing air directly from a cooling fan, as dust in the air maystick to the components of the unit.
Do NOT switch on the power to CNC display unit with PC functionswhile a floppy disk is inserted, and especially when the floppy disk isbeing accessed (LED is on). Machine tool builders are requested toprovide this information to their end users.
8.7.3.1Operating environment
8.7.3.2Handling precautions
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
187
HSSB interface board (CNC side)
COP7
Optical fiber
COP7
CNC display unit with PC functions
1) Recommended cables (optical fiber cables)A66L–6001–0026#L1R003: Cable length = 1 mA66L–6001–0026#L3R003: Cable length = 3 mA66L–6001–0026#L5R003: Cable length = 5 mA66L–6001–0026#L7R003: Cable length = 7 mA66L–6001–0026#L10R03: Cable length = 10 mA66L–6001–0026#L15R03: Cable length = 15 mA66L–6001–0026#L20R03: Cable length = 20 mA66L–6001–0026#L30R03: Cable length = 30 mA66L–6001–0026#L50R03: Cable length = 50 mA66L–6001–0026#L100R3: Cable length = 100 m
2) Junction–only low–loss optical fiber cablesA66L–6001–0029#L1R003: Cable length = 1mA66L–6001–0029#L3R003: Cable length = 3mA66L–6001–0029#L5R003: Cable length = 5mA66L–6001–0029#L7R003: Cable length = 7mA66L–6001–0029#L10R003: Cable length = 10mA66L–6001–0029#L15R003: Cable length = 15mA66L–6001–0029#L20R003: Cable length = 20mA66L–6001–0029#L30R003: Cable length = 30mA66L–6001–0029#L40R003: Cable length = 40mA66L–6001–0029#L50R003: Cable length = 50m
3) Low–loss optical junction adapterA63L–0020–0004
8.7.4High–speed Serial Bus(HSSB)
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
188
NOTE1 The high–speed serial bus cannot use an optical fiber cable
designed for the FANUC I/O link, FSSB extension line, orserial spindle.
2 Machine tool builders cannot cut or extend optical fibercables. Select an appropriate type from the above list.
3 No FANUC I/O link junction adapter other than the low–lossoptical junction adapter can be used.
4 When using a low–loss optical junction adapter, be sure touse a junction–only low–loss optical fiber cable togetherwith it.
5 Keep the total length of the junction adapter andjunction–only low–loss optical fiber within 60 m.HSSB interfaceboard
Translationadapter
CNC display unit withPC functions
60m or less
CD32A (mini DIN6)
CNC display unit with PC functionsTypewriter–style keyboard(commercial model)
Alternatively, FA typewriter–style keyboard
1) Recommended full keyboardA86L–0001–0210 : 101 type (in the market) Only for application
development or maintenanceA86L–0001–0211 : 106 type (in the market) Only for application
development or maintenanceA02B–0236–C131#JC :
FA Full Keyboard (Japanese) for 10.4” LCD typeA02B–0236–C131#EC :
FA Full Keyboard (English) for 10.4” LCD typeA02B–0236–C132#JC :
FA Full Keyboard (Japanese) for 12.1” LCD type
8.7.5Typewriter–styleKeyboard
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
189
A02B–0236–C132#EC : FA Full Keyboard (English) for 12.1” LCD type
A08B–0082–C150#JC : FA Full Keyboard (Japanese) for 15.0” LCD type
A08B–0082–C150#EC : FA Full Keyboard (English) for 15.0” LCD type
A08B–0082–C151#JC : FA Full Keyboard (Japanese) for 15.0” LCD type (punch panelbuilt–in)
A08B–0082–C151#EC : FA Full Keyboard (English) for 15.0” LCD type (punch panelbuilt–in)
NOTE1 Commercial typewriter–style keyboards are prone to
compatibility problems with personal computers to somedegree. It is not guaranteed that the intelligent terminal type2 can operate with every commercial typewriter–stylekeyboard. Machine tool builders are requested to check theoperability of the typewriter–style keyboards they select.Keep in mind that general commercial typewriter–stylekeyboards are neither dust–proof nor moisture–resistant.
2 If an FA typewriter–style keyboard is incorporated into thesystem, clamp its cable at a point as close to it as possibleso that the weight of the cable is not applied directly to theconnector.
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
190
CNC display unit with PC functionsMouse (commercial model)
Alternatively, FA typewriter–style keyboard
Mouse (commercial model)
CD32B(mini DIN6)
1) Recommended mouse
A86L–0001–0212 Standard PS/2 mouse (commercial model). . . . . for development and maintenance use only. . . . . .
NOTE1 Commercial mice are prone to compatibility problems with
personal computers to some degree. It is not guaranteedthat the intelligent terminal type 2 can operate with everycommercial mouse. Machine tool builders are requested tocheck the operability of the mice they select. Keep in mindthat general commercial mice are neither dust–proof normoisture–resistant.
2 If an FA typewriter–style keyboard is incorporated into thesystem, clamp its cable at a point as close to it as possibleso that the weight of the cable is not applied directly to theconnector.
3 The Mouse and The Touch–Panel can not be usedsimultaneously.
8.7.6Mouse
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
191
1 STD0 11 STB
2 STD1 12 0V
3 STD2 13 AFD
4 STD3 14 0V
5 STD4 15 INIT
6 STD5 16 0V
7 STD6 17 SLIN
8 STD7 18 ACK
9 PE 19 ERROR
10 SLCT 20 BUSY
JD9(PCR–E20MD)
1 STB 19 0V
2 STD 20 0V
3 STD1 21 0V
4 STD2 22 0V
5 STD3 23 0V
7 STD5 25 0V
6 STD4 24 0V
8 STD6 26 0V
9 STD7 27 0V
10 ACK 28 0V
11 BUSY 29 0V
12 PE 30 0V
13 SLCT 31 INIT
14 AFD 32 ERROR
15 33 0V
16 0V 34
17 FG 35
18 36 SLIN
CNC display unit with PC functions Example) Printer
1) Recommended cable conductorA66L–0001–0284#10P: 10 pairs of 0.08 mm2 wires
2) Recommended cable–end connectors (JD9 side)PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Limited)52622–2011 (Molex Japan)
NOTE1 The interface on the printer side shown above is only an example. Design an interface cable
according to the specification of the printer with which it is used.2 Commercial printers are prone to compatibility problems with personal computers to some
degree. It is not guaranteed that intelligent terminal type 2 can operate with every commercialprinter. Machine tool builders are requested to check the operability of the printers they select.Keep in mind that general commercial printers are neither dust–proof nor moisture–resistant.
8.7.7Centronics ParallelPort
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
192
8 USB1– 18 USB2_5V
1 USB1_5V 4
1 RD 11 SD 1 FG
2 SD
3 RD
4 RS
5 CS
6 DR
7 SG
8 CD
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 ER
21
22 RI
23
24
25
2 USB1+ 3
3 USB1–2
4 USB1_0V1
1 USB2_5V
2 USB2+
3 USB2–
4 USB2_0V
JD46 (PCR–E20MD) (DBM–25S)
USB port 1
CNC display unit with PC functions ex.) Host Computer
( ) : Used with FANUCI/O device
* (Reserve) pins are not usable.
10 (+24V) 20 USB1_5V
9 RI 19 (+24V)
7 CD 17 USB2–
6 USB1+ 16 USB2+
5 CS 15 RS
4 0V 14 USB2_0V
3 DR 13 ER
2 0V 12 USB1_0V
ex.) Punch panel for USB port
USB port 2
4321
8.7.8Serial Port 2 + USB
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
193
NOTE1 The figure shows a sample host computer interface and
USB. Design the cable to suit the interface of the actualdevice to be connected.
2 The +24V pins of the interface for CNC display unit with PCfunctions shown above can be used only with the FANUCI/O unit. Do not use these pins for other purposes. Also, donot attempt to simultaneously connect two or more FANUCI/O units to one CNC display unit with PC functions.
3 Commercial USB devices cannot be guaranteed its properwork with CNC display unit with PC functions. Carefulchecking by the customer will be required. And please beaware that those devices in the market are not almostconsidered about waterproof and dustproof.
CAUTIONThe standard punch panel for CNC cannot be used in CNCdisplay unit with PC functions.
1) Recommended cable specificationsFor RS–232C signals : A66L–0001–0284#10P (0.08 mm2, 10 pairs)For USB ports : Use dedicated cables.
2) RECOMMENDED CONNECTOR FOR CABLE and HOUSING(JD46 side)
CONNECTOR HOUSING MAKER
PCR–E20FA PCR–V20LA/PCS–E20LA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)
FI30–20S FI–20–CV2/FI–20–CV7 (Hirose Electric)
FCN–247J020–G/E FCN–240C020–Y/S (Fujitsu)
52622–2011 52624–2015 (Molex Japan)
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
194
For an CNC display unit with PC functions having a touch panel, thetouch panel controller uses serial port 1. So this connector cannot be usedfor any other purpose. The touch panel controller is connected, using adedicated connector rather than JD33.
1 RD 11 SD
2 0V 12 0V
3 DR 13 ER
4 0V 14 0V
5 CS 15 RS
6 (RES) 16 (RES)
7 CD 17 (RES)
8 (RES) 18 (RES)
9 RI 19 (+24V)
10 (+24V) 20 (RES)
JD33(PCR–E20MD)
1 FG
2 SD
3 RD
4 RS
5 CS
6 DR
7 SG
8 CD
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 ER
21
22 RI
23
24
25
( ) : Used for a FANUCI/O unit
(DBM–25S)
CNC display unit with PC functions Example) Host computer
1) Recommended cable conductorA66L–0001–0284#10P: 10 pairs of 0.08 mm2 wires
2) Recommended cable–end connectors (JD36 side)PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Limited)52622–2011 (Molex Japan)
* (RES) pins are not usable.
8.7.9Serial Port 1
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
195
NOTE1 he interface on the host computer side shown above is only
an example. Design an interface cable according to thespecification of the host computer with which it is used.
2 The +24 V lines in the interface on the CNC display unit withPC functions interface connection unit side shown abovecan be used only for FANUC I/O units (such as the FANUCcassette and FANUC Handy File). Do not use these linesfor any other purpose. Also, do not connect more than oneof these units to one CNC control unit. Otherwise, the +24V power supply capacity may be exceeded.
3 Do not connect anything to those pins that are not labeled.4 The standard punch panel for CNC cannot be used in CNC
display unit with PC functions.
CNC display unit with PC functions
CNK2
50cm
Stand–alone type MDI unit
(1)Cable length: 50 cm
8.7.10Soft Keys
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
196
PCMCIA card(Type I, Type II)
PCMCIACard slot
Back side
Door
CNC display unit with PC functions
NOTE
1 Only Type I or Type II PCMCIA card is usable. The following card cannot be used.– Card–bus card– Dual mode card (Card–bus mode/PCMCIA mode) with Card–bus mode– Type III card
2 Care about the direction of the card, and insert certainly.3 No card designed for use on +3.3 V can be used in the basic units (A08B–0082–B001 to
–B023).
CAUTIONIf the door is opened, dust or coolant would enter and might cause any troubles. Please payattention.
8.7.11PCMCIA Card
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
197
1) Cable Connection
Connect HDD Signal cable to CNH3.
Connect HDD Power cable to CN2B.
Connect FAN cable to CN7.
Each cables are connected to HDD unit at exfactory.
2) Cable Length
HDD Power Cable: 50cm
HDD Signal Cable: 40cm
HDD FAN Cable: 65cm
CNH3 CN2B
CNC display unit withPC functions
HDD unit
Show from behind
CN7
FA full keyboard or MDIunit
HDD Signalcable
FAN cable
HDD Power cable
8.7.12Hard Disk Unit
8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS B–63523EN/03
198
(1)Usable boardsUp to two PCI expansion boards (shown below) can be used in CNCdisplay unit with PC functions.PCI Specification 2.1 compliant32 bits, 33 MHz, +5 VThe external dimensions of the card are shown below.
Parts height of back side : up to 3mm
Up to 176.41mm
Unit : mm
Up to 106.68mm
Fix by screw
Parts height of front side : up to 13mm
(2)Method of mounting PCI extension board
a) Release vibration–proof fittings by loosening the screw at point(B).
b) Push the board fully into the PCI connector.
c) Tighten the screw at point (A).
d) Press down vibration–proof fittings to the PCI extension board andtighten the screw at point (B).
* In the case of mounting two boards, the height of board mountedin slot 1 must be lower than the height of the board mounted in slot2 for holding both board with each vibration–proof fittings.
* If the fittings do not fit these extension boards, please change thescrew (B) positions.
8.8PCI EXPANSIONBOARD
8.8.1Installation Method
B–63523EN/03 8. CNC DISPLAY UNIT WITH PC FUNCTIONS
199
Vibration Proof Fittings
PCI Extension Board
Slot 1
Press Down
Screw Point (B)
Slot 2Screw Point (A)
(3)Method of mounting PCI extension board
Refer to the specifications of PCI extension board for theenvironmental conditions for installation of it. If the PCI extensionboard specifications impose harder environmental conditions than theconditions described in “I. CONNECTION – 8.5.1. Environment”, theseenvironmental conditions for the PCI extension board are givenpriority.
NOTEFanuc does not guarantee the proper workings ormaintenance of any PCI extension boards. And is not liableto any trouble or damage incurred by use of any PCIextended boards.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
200
9 CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
201
The FANUC I/O Link is a serial interface which connects the CNC, cellcontroller, I/O Unit–A, or Power Mate and transfers I/O signals (bit data)at high speeds between each device. The FANUC I/O Link regards onedevice as the master and other devices as slaves when more than onedevice is connected. Input signals from the slaves are sent to the masterat specified intervals. Output signals from the master are also sent to theslaves at specified intervals.
9.1GENERAL
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
202
On i Series, the interface connector JD1A (JD44A) for I/O Link isprovided on the main board.In the I/O there are the master station and its slave stations. The masteris the control unit of the CNC, and the slave is the I/O unit–A. The slavesare divided into groups, and up to 16 groups can be connected to one I/OLink. A maximum of two base I/O units can be connected as a group.The I/O Link is connected in different ways depending on the types ofunits actually used and the I/O points. To connect the I/O Link, theassignment and addresses of the I/O signals have been madeprogrammable with the PMC program. The maximum number of I/Opoints is 1024.The two connectors of the I/O Link are named JD1A (JD44A) and JD1B,and are common to all units (that have I/O Link function). A cable isalways connected from JD1A (JD44A) of a unit to JD1B of the next unit.Although JD1A of the last unit is not used and left open, it need not beconnected with a terminator.The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to allunits on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on Subsec. 9.2.1. Use the figureswhen connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.
……
Main boardJD1A(JD44A)
I/O256/256 or less per group
I/O1024/1024 or less in total I/O LinkFANUC I/O Link
FANUC I/O Unit– MODEL A2max
Base unit 1 Base unit 2
Series 21 control unit
Magneticcircuit
Max. 16 group
JD1B
JD1A
JD1B
JD1A
JD1B
JD1A
Fig. 9.2 I/O Link connection diagram
9.2CONNECTION
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
203
I/O UNIT–A
I/O LinkJD44A
I/O UNIT–A
JD1B
DC24V
Control unit
This figure is an example of connecting the I/O Link to an i SeriesCNC with a LCD–mounted type panel.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
204
SIN1
3
SIN2
SOUT4
6
SOUT5
87
9 (+5V)10
0V11
13
0V12
0V14
16
0V15
1817
(+5V)
(+5V)1920
JD1A(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
JD1B(PCR–E20LMD)
JD1B
JD1A(PCR–E20LMD)
Next slaveunit
SIN1
3
SIN2
SOUT4
6
SOUT5
87
9 (+5V)10
0V11
13
0V12
0V14
16
0V15
1817
(+5V)
(+5V)1920
Control unit or preceding slave unit I/O unit MODEL A
+5 V terminals are for an optical I/O Link adapter. They are not necessarywhen connecting with a metal cable.A line for the +5V terminal is not required when the Optical I/O LinkAdapter is not used.
Shield
SOUTSOUTSINSIN0V0V0V0V
SINSINSOUT
SOUT0V0V0V0V
123411121314
3412
11121314
Ground Plate
Cable wirinr
Recommended wire materialA66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG10pair)
Recommended cable connectorsPCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Ltd.)52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
The recommended cable–end connector F130–20S (Hirose Electric Co.,Ltd.) can be used only as connector JD1A for the i Series CNC with aLCD–mounted type panel.
9.2.1Connection of FANUCI/O Link by ElectricCable
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
205
The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 mwith optical fiber cables using an optical I/O Link adapter. The length ofthe electrical cable connected to the optical conversion adapter must notexceed 2 m.
In the following cases, use an optical fiber cable.
When the cable is more than 10 meters long. When the cable is morethan 15 meters long if it is laid within the same cabinet.
When the cable is run between different cabinets, and the cabinetscannot be connected with each other via a ground wire of 5.5 mm2 ormore.If the power magnetics cabinet includes an I/O Link slave unit, andcables are connected through a duct to the operator’s panel (as shownbelow), the control section I/O Link slave unit can be assumed to beincorporated in the same cabinet.
Operator’spanel I/O
CNCcontrolsection
Operator’s panel
Distribution I/O,etc.
Other units
Power magnetics cabinet
When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise; forexample :When there is a strong electromagnetic noise source beside the cablesuch as a welding machine.When a noise generating cable such as a power cable runs for a longdistance in parallel with the cable.
Optical connectorCOP1
connectorfor unitconnectingJD1
66.0
40.0
FANUC
4–M3
Unit : mm
45.0
7.0
18.0
9.2.2Connection of FANUCI/O Link Optical FiberCable
External dimension ofoptical link adapter
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
206
Main body: Approx. 100 g.
Unit
Connectingcable betweenunit
JD1A
Optical I/Olink adapter
Opticalcable
Unit
JD1B
COP1
JD1
COP1
JD1
Connectingcable betweenunitOptical I/O
link adapter
SIN01
03
SIN02
SOUT04
06
SOUT05
0807
09 +5V10
0V11
13
0V12
0V14
16
0V15
1817
+5V
+5V1920
0V0V
SIN(01)SIN(02)SOUT(03)
SOUT(04)+5V(09)+5V(18)+5V(20)
0V(11)0V(12)0V(13)0V(14)0V(15)0V(16)
(03)SOUT(04)SOUT(01)SIN(02)SIN(09)+5V(18)+5V(20)+5V(11)0V(12)0V(13)0V(14)0V(15)0V(16)0V
Unit sideJD1A,JD1B
Adapter sideJD1
1 Recommended cable connectorsPCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu Ltd.)52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
NOTEThe recommended cable–end connector FI30–20S (HiroseElectric Co., Ltd.) can be used only as connector JD1A forthe i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted type panel.
2 Recommended cable (wire material) : A66L–0001–0284#10P
3 Cable length : Max. 2 m (when the recommended cable is used)
Weight of optical linkadapter
Connection
Connection diagram
Interunit connecting cables
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
207
1 Specification:A66L–6001–0009# L5R003 5 m longA66L–6001–0009# L10R03 10 m longA66L–6001–0009# L15R03 15 m long
2 Cable lengthMaximum length: 200 m (standard type)Maximum length: 100 m (high–speed type)
NOTEBe careful not bend optical cables to a radius of 25 mm orless. Be extremely careful not to twist them.
Maximum number of connectable stagesUp to 16 high–speed type I/O link adapter stages can be connected inone I/O link, while only up to five conventional I/O link adapters(standard type) can be connected.
1) Standard type (A13B–0154–B001) … up to 5 adapter stages can beconnected in series
2) Standard type (A13B–0154–B002) … up to 16 adapter stages canbe connected in series
NC orI/O Unit
Optical I/Olink adapter
NC orI/O Unit
NC orI/O Unit
One stage
Optical I/Olink adapter
Optical I/Olink adapter
Optical I/Olink adapter
NOTEIt is impossible to use both high–speed and standard typeadapters on the same line.
Power supplyThe same power supply type can be used for both the standard type(A13B–0154–B001) and high–speed type (A13B–0154–B002).
(a) Power supply voltage: 4.75 to 5.25 V (at receiving end)
(b)Required current: 200 mA
Optical cable
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
208
(a) The optical link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install it withthe CNC control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.
(b)Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical link adapter.
(c) The optical link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary to mountit with screws. However, keep it from coming in contact with othercircuits to prevent possible short–circuits. When mounting the opticallink adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an L–type fitting using the casefixing screws (M3) of the optical link adapter.
L fitting
For making up an I/O Link using the optical link adapter, the followingparts are necessary:
1 Optical I/O Link adapter 2
2 Interunit connecting cable 2
3 Optical cable 1
Relay with an optical fiber connection adapterFor the outline drawing of the optical fiber connection adapter, seeAppendix D.
NOTEOptical fiber cables can be relayed only at are location.When a high–speed optical link adapter is used, no opticalfiber connection adapter can be used.
Maximum transmission distance with an optical fiber cable(s)The table below shows the maximum transmission distance with anoptical fiber cable(s), which varies depending on whether a connectionadapter is used for a relay.
Number of relay Maximum transmission distance
Standard type 0 200m
1 100m (total)
High–speed type 0 100m
1 N/A
Installation conditions
Required parts
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
209
Two channels of FANUC I/O Link interfaces are provided. Use of twochannels allows the number of usable I/Os to be increased to 2048 for bothinputs and outputs (previously, only 1024 inputs and 1024 outputs wereusable).
FANUC PMC Ladder Language Programming Manual (B–61863E) isavailable separately to let you know how to use this feature, PMCs thatcan take advantage of this feature, and the series and version of theirmanagement software as well as the series and version of the CNCmanagement software.
NOTEWhen this feature is to be used by the i Series CNCsdescribed above, PMC–SB6/SB7 needs to be specified.The PMC on the loader control board cannot use thisfeature.
Signals for two channels are assigned to the FANUC I/O Link connectoron the CNC. When using two channels, use the I/O Link branchingadapter to branch off the FANUC I/O Link.
JD44B
JD1A–1
JD1A–2
JD44A
CNC I/O Link branchingadapter
FANUC I/O Link channel 1
FANUC I/O Link channel 2
Connection after the I/O Link branching adapter is thesame as that for the FANUC I/O Link.
Part number of the I/O Link branching adapter: A20B–1007–0680 (60 g)
When two channels are used, a total of up to eight FANUC B I/O unitgroups can be connected to them.
9.2.3Connection when TwoChannels of FANUC I/OLinks are Used
Connection
Restrictions
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
210
CNCJD44A(such as PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
.
%.
( 6/ (
%6/
# . #
) %. )
* 6/ *
+ %6/ + #
, # ,
#
I/O Link branching adapterJD44B(PCR–E20MDT) .
%.
( 6/ (
%6/
# . #
) %. )
* 6/ *
+ %6/ + #
, # ,
#
The +5V pin is provided to use the optical I/O Link adapter for opticalfiber transmission. When not using the optical I/O Link adapter, leave the+5V pin unconnected.Do not connect anything to the +24V pin.
(
*
+
#
)
(
#
)
+
,
(
#
)
*
+
(
#
)
+
,
.
-!
.
%.
6/
%6/
.
%.
6/
%6/
#
#
#
I/O Link branching adapter
-!
6/
%6/
.
%.
6/
%6/
.
%.
#
#
#
Shield
h When not using the optical I/O Link adapter, leavethe +5V pin unconnected.
Recommended cable connectors: PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin KogyoCo., Ltd.)FI30–20S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)FCN–247J020–G/E (Fujitsu)52622–2011 (Molex Japan Co., Ltd.)
Recommended cable: A66L–0001–0284#10P
Connection between theCNC and I/O Linkbranching adapter
Cabling
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
211
The I/O Link branching adapter can be connected to I/O units in the sameway as for the conventional FANUC I/O Link. See 9.2.1.
lA
CNC
JD44A
I/O Link branchingadapter
JD44B
JD1A–1
JD1A–2
I/O unit
JD1BlB
The total of lA and lB must not exceed 10 m; where lA is the length ofthe cable between connector JD44A on the CNC and connector JD44Bon the I/O Link branching adapter, and lB is the length of the cablebetween connector JD1A–1 or JD1A–2 on the I/O Link branching adapterand connector JD1B on the I/O unit. When all cables are accommodatedin the same cabinet, however, a total cable length of up to 15 m is allowed.
Install the I/O Link branching adapter in a hermetically sealed cabinet likethe CNC.
Connection between theI/O Link branchingadapter and FANUC I/OLink I/O units
Cable length
Installation of the I/OLink branching adapter
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
212
33.9
0
22.9
0
JD1A–1JD44B JD1A–2
60
45
85
Unit : mm
Allow a clearance of about 10 cm above the adapter for connection androuting of cables.
1) Installation on the DIN rail
Unit: mm
25
35
Recommended DIN rail
2) Screwing
11.6
702–M4
Unit: mm
Drilling on the plate
External dimensions ofthe I/O Link branchingadapter
Installation of the I/OLink branching adapter
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
213
Basically, the i Series can be connected to any unit that has a FANUC I/OLink slave interface. The following table lists general units that can beconnected to the i Series. Detailed descriptions of each unit are given laterin this section. For details of other units, refer to the documentationprovided with the unit.
General units that can be connected to the i Series
Unit Description Reference
FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A
Modular I/O unit that supports acombination of the input/output signalsrequired by a power magnetics circuit.
Connection andmaintenancemanualB–61813E
FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL B
Distribution type I/O unit that supports acombination of input/output signalsrequired by a power magnetics circuit.
Connection andmaintenancemanualB–62163E
Connector panelI/O module
Distribution type I/O unit that handlesthe input/output signals required by thepower magnetics circuit; it has aninterface with a manual pulsegenerator.
Sec. 9.4
Operator’s panelI/O module (for matrix input)
Unit having an interface with a machineoperator’s panel; it has an interface witha manual pulse generator.
Sec. 9.5
Operator’s panelI/O module
Unit having an interface with a machineoperator’s panel that handles theinput/output signals required by thepower magnetics circuit; it has aninterface with a manual pulsegenerator.
Sec. 9.6
Power magneticspanel I/O module
Unit having an interface with a powermagnetics panel that handles theinput/output signals required by thepower magnetics circuit.
Sec. 9.6
Machine operator’spanel interface unit
Unit having an interface with a matrix ofkey switches and LEDs on the machineoperator’s panel as well as an interfacewith a manual pulse generator.
Sec. 9.7
Operator’s panelconnection unit
Unit having an interface with a machineoperator’s panel
Sec. 9.8
Source type outputoperator’s panelconnection unit
Unit having an interface with a machineoperator’s panel; a source type outputcircuit is used in the DO signal outputdriver.
Sec. 9.9
FANUC I/O Linkconnection unit
Unit connecting FANUC I/O Linkmasters to enable the transfer of DI/DOsignals
Sec. 9.10
FANUC servo unit βseries (with I/O Link)
Unit connected with the CNC via theFANUC I/O Link to control a servo motor
Sec. 9.11
9.3UNITS THAT CAN BECONNECTED USINGFANUC I/O Link
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
214
Flat cable for module connection
I/O Link cable
Manual pulse generator cable
Basic module
Extension module 3
Extension module 2
Extension module 1 (with manual pulse generator)
Direction to be used whenthe modules are connecteddirectly to the connectionprinted circuit board
Direction to beused when themodules aremounted usingDIN rails orscrews
JD1AJD1B
NOTEFor direction connection to the connection printed circuit board, expansion modules areinstalled to the right of the basic module on the installation plane. For installation using DINrails or screws, expansion modules are installed to the left of the basic module on the installationplane.
9.4CONNECTION OFCONNECTOR PANELI/O MODULE
9.4.1Configuration
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
215
CNCI/O UNIT
JD1BI/O Link
JD44A
CA52 CB150
CA52CB150
CA53
CA52CB154
CA53
CA52CB157
CA53
JD1B
JD1A
JA3
Basic module
+24 V power supply
Machine side DI/DO
Connector panel
Extension module(with MPG (Note))
Extension module 2
Extension module 3
MPG
MPG
MPG
DI/DOmodule
2A outputmodule
Analoginputmodule
9.4.2Connection Diagram
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
216
NOTE1 Ensure that the extension module with the MPG interface is located nearest to the basic
module, as shown in the figure. The MPG can be connected to the connector panel I/O moduleonly when the i series CNC is used. When the connector panel I/O module is used togetherwith a unit (such as an operator’s panel I/O module) connected to the I/O Link supportinganother MPG interface, only the MPG interface of the unit (module) closest to the CNCconnected to the I/O Link is effective.
2 The connection diagram above shows an example of using a DI/DO module, 2A output module,and analog input module as expansion modules. These expansion modules can be used inany combination.
Types of modules
Name Drawing No. Specifications Referenceitem
I/O module forconnection (basic module)
A03B–0815–C001 DI/DO : 24/16
I/O module forconnection(expansion module A)
A03B–0815–C002 DI/DO : 24/16With MPG interface
I/O module forconnection(expansion module B)
A03B–0815–C003 DI/DO : 24/16Without MPGinterface
I/O module forconnection(expansion module C)
A03B–0815–C004 DO : 162A output module
I/O module forconnection(expansion module D)
A03B–0815–C005 Analog input module
Fuse (accessory) A03B–0815–K002 1A(For basic module)
Inter–module flatcable
A03B–0815–K100 20 mm longSuitable for a moduleinterval of 32 mm
Module specifications (common items)
Item Specifications Remarks
Interface with CNC FANUC I/O Linkconnection
Expandable up to 16 units or1024/1024 points as CNC slaves
Interface betweenbasic module andexpansion modules
Bus connectionusing a flat cable
Up to three expansion modulesconnectable per basic module
For the specifications (such as signal input requirements) specific to eachmodule, see the relevant pages of each item.
9.4.3Module Specifications
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
217
Ambient temperaturefor the unit
Operation: 0°C to 55°CStorage and transportation: –20°C to 60°C
Temperature change 1.1°C/minute maximum
Humidity Normal condition: 75% (relative humidity)Short term (within one month): 95% (relative humidity)
Vibration Operation: 0.5 G or less
Atmosphere Normal machining factory environment (For use in anenvironment with relatively high levels of dust, coolant,organic solutions, and so forth, additional measures arerequired.)
Other conditions (1) Use each I/O module in a completely sealed cabinet.(2) For ventilation within each I/O module, each module
must be installed in the orientation shown below.Moreover, for ventilation and wiring, allow aclearance of 100 mm or more above and below eachmodule. Never place a device that generates a largeamount of heat below an I/O module.
(3) While referring to Section 9.4.17, ensure that the venthole of the basic module is not obstructed by the flatcable.
Upper side
I/O Link connectionMPG connection
Bas
ic m
odul
e
Exp
ansi
onm
odul
e 1
Exp
ansi
onm
odul
e 2
Exp
ansi
onm
odul
e 3
Lower side
Module Power supplyvoltage
Power supplyrating
Remarks
Basic module 24 VDC 10% is fed through the I/O
0.2A+7.3mADI Number of DI points with DI=ON
Expansion modules A and B
connector (CB150) of the basic module; 10% includes momentary variations
0.1A+7.3mADI Number of DI points with DI=ON
Expansion module C (2A module)
and ripples.0.1A
Expansion module D (analog inputmodule)
0.1A
As a guideline for the heat dissipation, assume [power supply capacity 24 (W)].
Installation conditions
Power supply rating
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
218
This section describes the DI/DO connector pin allocation of the basicmodule and expansion modules A and B.
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
DOCOMDOCOM 01
0V
0V
02
DICOM0
+24V
03
Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
04
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
05
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.5
06
Xm+2.6
Xm+2.7
07
08
09
10
11
Yn+1.0
Yn+1.1
12
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.3
13
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.5
14
Yn+1.6
Yn+1.7
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
0V
0V
0V
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.7
+24V
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7
Yn+0.0
Yn+0.1
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.3
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.5
Yn+0.6
Yn+0.7
CB150 (HONDA MR–50RMA)
50 male pins with fittings forfixing the connector covers
NOTE1 The DI and DO addresses for the basic and extension
modules run contiguously. These basic and extensionmodule DI and DO addresses are allocated to the I/O Linkas a group. For example, when the DI and DO topaddresses are X0004 and Y0000 (m = 4 and n = 0),respectively, then the addresses are allocated as shown inthe following table.
2 Pins 18 and 50 (+24V) of connector CB150 are used toapply 24 V externally to a module. Be sure to connect thesepins because the +24 V applied to the module is usedinternally.
DI DO
Basic module X4–X6 Y0–Y1
Extension module 1 X7–X9 Y2–Y3
Extension module 2 X10–X12 Y4–Y5
Extension module 3 X13–X15 Y6–Y7
9.4.4DI/DO Connector PinAssignment
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
219
This section describes the DI (input signal) connections of the basicmodule and expansion modules A and B.
A maximum of 96 points are provided (24 points per module; 1 basic module + 3 extension modules).
+24VCB150(18)
CB150(50)
CB150(42)
CB150(43)
CB150(44)
CB150(45)
CB150(46)
CB150(47)
CB150(48)
CB150(49)
DICOM0
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.7
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.1
CB150(32)
CB150 (19),(20),(21)(22),(23)
CB150(25)
CB150(26)
CB150(27)
CB150(28)
CB150(29)
CB150(30)
CB150(31)
CB150(24)
+24V 0VRV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
Address number
Bit number
Pin number
+24 V stabilized power supply
9.4.5DI (Input Signal)Connection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
220
RV
+24VCB150(18)
CB150(50)
CB150(10)
CB150(11)
CB150(12)
CB150(13)
CB150(14)
CB150(15)
CB150(16)
CB150(17)
Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.6
Xm+2.7
Address number
Bit number
CB150 (19),(20),(21)(22),(23)
+24 V stabilized power supply
+24V 0V
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
Pin number
NOTEXm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 are DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected. That is, byconnecting the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal can be input withits logical state reversed. If, however, a cable is connected to ground, it has the same effectas inputting an ON state DI signal. To prevent such accidents, the connection of the DICOM0CB150(24) pin to the 0 V power supply is recommended whereever possible.
For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal needs to be allocated to an appropriate bit ofthe addresses for which the common voltage is fixed, ranging from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 or fromXm+2.0 to Xm+2.7. See 9.4.19 for information about how to allocate the emergency stopsignal.
For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for which the common voltage is fixed (fromXm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and from Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7), the logic is fixed to “0”. For unused pinsallocated to Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, the logic is fixedto “0” when the DICOM0 CB150(24) pin is connected to the 0 V power supply. When theDICOM0 CB150(24) pin is connected to the +24 V power supply, the logic is fixed to “1”. Thelogic of the unused pins allocated to Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7 is variable when the contact of theDICOM0 CB150(24) pin is open.
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
221
This section describes the DO (output signal) connections of the basicmodule and expansion modules A and B.
A maximum of 64 points are provided (16 points per module; 1 basicmodule + 3 extension modules).
DOCOMCB150(01),(33)
CB150(34)
CB150(35)
CB150(36)
CB150(37)
CB150(38)
CB150(39)
CB150(40)
Yn+0.0
CB150(02)
CB150(03)
CB150(04)
CB150(05)
CB150(06)
CB150(07)
CB150(08)
Yn+0.1
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.3
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.5
Yn+0.6
Yn+0.7
Yn+1.0
Yn+1.1
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.3
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.5
Yn+1.6
Yn+1.7
CB150(41)
CB150(09)
+24V 0V
CB150 (19),(20),(21)(22),(23)
Address number
Bit number
Pin number
+24 V stabilized power supply
Relay
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
9.4.6DO (Output Signal)Connection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
222
This section describes the specifications of the DI/DO signals used withthe basic module and expansion modules A and B.
DI (input signal specifications)
Number of points 24 points (per module)
Contact rating 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Leakage current betweencontacts when opened
1 mA or less (26.4 V)
Voltage decrease betweencontacts when closed
2 V or less (including a cable voltage decrease)
Delay time The receiver delay time is 2 ms (maximum). Inaddition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC andI/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period(depending on CNC)] must be considered.
DO (output signal specifications)
Number of points 16 points (per module)
Maximum load currentwhen ON
200 mA or less including momentary variations
Saturation voltage whenON
1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
Leakage current whenOFF
20 µA or less
Delay time The driver delay time is 50 µs (maximum). Inaddition, [I/O Link transfer time between CNC andI/O module (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period(depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (outputsignals) By turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DOsignals (output signals), all the DO signals of each module can be turnedoff at the same time. At this time, the DO state is as shown below.
DOCOMON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
DO state whenDO is on in thesequence
DO state whenDO is off in thesequence
9.4.7DI/DO SignalSpecifications
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
223
NOTEWhen DO is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state ofDOCOM is directly reflected in the DO state as indicatedabove by the dashed box. The +24 V signal to be suppliedto the I/O module must not be turned off during operation.Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm is issued. Ensurethat +24 V is supplied either when or before the power to theCNC is turned on, and that +24 V is removed either whenor after the power to the CNC is turned off.
Parallel DO (output signal) connection A DO load current of twice the level can be obtained by connecting DOpoints in parallel and exercising ON/OFF control at the same time in thesequence. Namely, the maximum load current per DO point is 200 mA.By connecting two DO points in parallel and turning on the two DO pointsat the same time, 400 mA can be obtained. In this case, however, theleakage current is doubled up to 40 µA when the DO points are turned off.
DOCOM CB150(01),(33)
DV
+24V 0V
DV
+24 V regulated power supply
Relay
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
224
This section describes the 2A output connector pin allocation ofexpansion module C.
01
GNDA02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Yn+1.0
Yn+1.1
12
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.3
13
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.5
14
Yn+1.6
Yn+1.7
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
DOCOMA
35
36
37
38
DOCOMA
39
40
41
42
43
Yn+0.0
Yn+0.1
44
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.3
45
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.5
46
Yn+0.6
Yn+0.7
47
48
49
50
DOCOMA
CB154 (HONDA MR–50RMA)
GNDAGNDA
GNDA
GNDA
DOCOMA
DOCOMA
DOCOMA 50 pins, male, with a metal fitting for securingthe connector cover
NOTE1 The DI/DO addresses of an expansion module and the
DI/DO addresses of the basic module are contiguous.Addresses allocated to I/O Link are handled as a groupcovering the basic and expansion modules. That is, whenthe first addresses allocated are X0004 and Y0000 (m = 4,n = 0), the DI/DO addresses are as listed below.
2 When the 2A output module is used, the DI addresses of themodule cannot be used. (When the 2A output module isused as expansion module 3, X13 through X15 cannot beused.)
DI DO
Basic module X4 to X6 Y0 to Y1
Expansion module 1 X7 to X9 Y2 to Y3
Expansion module 2 X10 to X12 Y4 to Y5
Expansion module 3 X13 to X15 Y6 to Y7
9.4.82A Output ConnectorPin Allocation
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
225
This section describes the 2A output connector connections of expansionmodule C.
Address numberBit number
Solenoid,etc.
24VDC
9.4.92A DO (Output Signal)Connection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
226
This section describes the specifications of the 2A output DO signals usedwith expansion module C.
DO (output signal specifications)
Number of points 32 points (per module)
Maximum load currentwhen ON
2 A or less per point.12 A maximum for the entire module (DO: 16 points) (including momentary variations).
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less (including momentaryvariations)
Leakage current when OFF 100 µA or less
Delay time [I/O Link transfer time (2 ms maximum)] + [ladderscan period (depending on CNC)] must beconsidered.
ON/OFF of the power supply (DO common) for DO signals (outputsignals) By turning off (opening) the power supply pin (DOCOM) for the DOsignals (output signals), all the DO signals of each module can be turnedoff at one time. At this time, the DO state is as shown below.
DOCOMON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
DO state whenDO is on in thesequence
DO state whenDO is off in thesequence
NOTEWhen DO is on in the sequence, the ON/OFF state ofDOCOM is directly reflected in the DO state as indicatedabove by the dashed box. The +24 V signal to be suppliedto the I/O module must not be turned off during operation.Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm is issued. Ensurethat +24 V is supplied either when or before the power to theCNC is turned on, and that +24 V is removed either whenor after the power to the CNC is turned off.
Parallel DO (output signal) connection The 2A output module does not allow parallel DO connections includingparallel connections with the DO signals of other modules.
9.4.102A Output DO SignalSpecifications
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
227
This section describes the analog input connector pin allocation ofexpansion module D.
01
02
03
JMP2
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
COM1
FDND1
12
INP1
JMP1
13
INM2
COM2
14
FGND2
INP2
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
INM1
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
JMP4
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
COM3
FGND3
44
INP3
JMP3
45
INM4
COM4
46
FGND4
INP4
47
48
49
50
INM3
CB157 (HONDA MR–50RMA)
FGND
FGNDFGND
FGND
FGND
50 pins, male, with a metal fitting for securingthe connector cover
NOTE1 The DI/DO addresses of an expansion module and the
DI/DO addresses of the basic module are contiguous.Addresses allocated to I/O Link are handled as a groupcovering the basic and expansion modules. That is, whenthe first addresses allocated are X0004 and Y0000 (m = 4,n = 0), the DI/DO addresses are as listed below.
2 With the analog input module, the DO space is also used asan input channel selection area.
DI DO
Basic module X4 to X6 Y0 to Y1
Expansion module 1 X7 to X9 Y2 to Y3
Expansion module 2 X10 to X12 Y4 to Y5
Expansion module 3 X13 to X15 Y6 to Y7
9.4.11Analog InputConnector PinAllocation
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
228
This section provides a diagram of the analog input connectorconnections of expansion module D.
Analog input module
Analog input module
Pin number
Pin number
Not connected
For voltage input
Voltagesource
(Common to all channels)
(Common to all channels)
For current input
Currentsource
9.4.12Analog Input SignalConnections
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
229
NOTE1 In the diagram above, n represents each channel (n = 1, 2,
3, 4).2 Current input or voltage input can be selected on a
channel–by–channel basis. For current input, connectJMPn to INPn.
3 For the connection, use a shielded twisted pair.4 In the diagram above, the shield of each channel is
connected to FGNDn, and FGND is used for shieldprocessing of all channels. However, the shield of a channelmay be directly connected to frame ground with a cableclamp, instead of using FGNDn.
5 If the voltage (current) source has a GND pin, as shown inthe figure above, connect COMn to this pin. Otherwise,connect INMn and COMn together in the analog inputmodule.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
230
This section describes the specifications of the analog input signals usedwith expansion module D.
Item Specifications Remarks
Number of inputchannels (Note)
Four channels
Analog input DC –10 to +10 V (Input resistance: 4.7 ohms)DC –20 to +20 mA (Input resistance: 250 ohms)
Voltage input or currentinput can be selected onchannel–by–channelbasis.
Digital output (Note) 12 bits (binary) Represented as two’scomplement
Input/outputcorrespondence
Analog input Digital output
+10V +2000
+5V or +20mA
0V or 0mA
–5V or –20mA
–10V
+1000
0
–1000
–2000
Resolution 5 mV or 20 µA
Overall precision Voltage input: 0.5%Current input: 1%
With respect to full scale
Maximum inputvoltage/current
15V/30mA
Minimum conversiontime (Note)
Ladder scan period of CNCconnected
Number of occupiedinput/output points(Note)
DI = 3 bytes, DO = 2 bytes
NOTEThis analog input module has four input channels. Thedigital output section consists of a group of 12 bits within thethree–byte occupied input points. This means that thechannel to be used can be dynamically selected by theladder. The channel switching DO point for channelselection is included in the two–byte occupied output points.
9.4.13Analog Input SignalSpecifications
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
231
(Digital output)
This digital input module has four input channels. The digital outputsection consists of a group of 12 bits within the three–byte occupied inputpoints. The output format is indicated below.
7
D07Xm (even–numbered address)
0
6
D06
0
5
D05
CHB
4
D04
CHA
3
D03
D11
2
D02
D10
1
D01
D09
0
D00
D08Xm+1 (odd–numbered address)
Address in the module
D00 to D11 represent 12–bit digital output data. D00 and D11 correspondto weightings of 20 and 211, respectively.D11 is a sign bit expressed as a two’s complement. CHA and CHBrepresent analog input channels. This means that when the two bytes above are read with a PMC program,the A–D converted data of the CHA and CHB input channels can be readfrom D11 to D00. For CHA and CHB, see the description of channelselection, below.Section 6.3 provides notes on reading data with a PMC program.
(Channel selection)
With this analog input module, which of the four channels is to be outputto the digital output section must be determined with a PMC program.The DO points used for this selection are CHA and CHB (two–byteoccupied output points). These are mapped as indicated below.
7
XYn
X
6
X
X
5
X
X
4
X
X
3
X
X
2
X
X
1
X
CHB
0
X
CHAYn+1
Address in the module
By writing the values indicated below to CHA and CHB, thecorresponding channel is selected, and the A–D converted data of thechannel and the data of the selected channel can be read as DI data. Thecharacter X indicated above represents an unused bit, so that either 1 or0 may be written in place of X.
CHB CHA Channel selected
0 0 Channel 1
0 1 Channel 2
1 0 Channel 3
1 1 Channel 4
(Address)
The start address of X (DI) of the basic modules including the analog inputmodule must always be allocated at an even–numbered address. With thisallocation, the digital output addresses of the analog input module are asdescribed below, depending on where the analog input module isallocated
When the analog input module is allocated in the space for expansionmodule 1 (m represents the allocation start address.)
9.4.14Analog InputSpecifications
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
232
7
UndefinedXm+3 (odd–numbered address)
D07
6
D06
5
D05
4
D04
3
D03
2
D02
1
D01
0
D00Xm+4 (even–numbered address)
Address in the module
0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08Xm+5 (odd–numbered address)
When the analog input module is allocated in the space for expansionmodule 2 (m represents the allocation start address.)
7
UndefinedXm+8 (even–numbered address)
D07
6
D06
5
D05
4
D04
3
D03
2
D02
1
D01
0
D00Xm+6 (even–numbered address)
Address in the module
0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08Xm+7 (odd–numbered address)
When the analog input module is allocated in the space for expansionmodule 3 (m represents the allocation start address.)
7
UndefinedXm+9 (odd–numbered address)
D07
6
D06
5
D05
4
D04
3
D03
2
D02
1
D01
0
D00Xm+10 (even–numbered address)
Address in the module
0 0 CHB CHA D11 D10 D09 D08Xm+11 (odd–numbered address)
NOTEWhen two–byte digital output addresses are to bereferenced with a PMC program, a read must always beperformed word–by–word (16 bits).
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
233
An example in which three manual pulse generators are connected toextension module A is shown below. The manual pulse generator can beconnected only for the i series CNC.
18
+5V
17
10
30V
0V
+5V
1314
1615
1920
HA2
HA3HB2
HB3
+5V
4
65
87
9
HB1 0V1112
HA112
JA3 (PCR–E20LMDT)
+5V 0V HA1 HB13 4 5 6
+5V 0V HA3 HB33 4 5 6
+5V 0V HA2 HB23 4 5 6
Extension module Manual pulse generators
Manual pulse generator #1 (M3 screw terminal)
Manual pulse generator #2 (M3 screw terminal)
Manual pulse generator #3 (M3 screw terminal)
#1 HA1 HB1 +5V 0V#2 HA2 HB2 +5V 0V#3 HA3 HB3 +5V 0V
HA1HB1+5V
0V
HA2HB2+5V
0V
HA3HB3+5V
0V
12912
341814
562016
7Red
7White
5Red
2Black
8Red
8Black
4Red
3Black
9Black
9White
6Red
1Black
5634
5634
5634
HA1HB1+5V
0V
HA2HB2+5V
0V
HA3HB3+5V
0VShield
Cable connectionTerminal block
Manual pulsegenerators
Ground plateCable Wire
Recommended wire material: A66L–0001–0286 (#20 AWG × 6 + #24 AWG × 3 pairs)
Recommended connector: A02B–0120–K303 (including the following connector and case)(Connector: FI40–2015S (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))(Case: FI40–20–CV5 (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
Recommended cables: A02B–0120–K841 (7 m)
(for connecting three manual pulse generators)A02B–0120–K848 (7 m)
(for connecting two manual pulse generators)A02B–0120–K847 (7 m)
(for connecting one manual pulse generator)
9.4.15Manual PulseGenerator Connection
0.2
0.1 R 2Lm
L
mR
L
30.0394
76.75[m]
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
234
(These cables do not include the wire shown in the above figure.)
NOTEThe number of connectable manual pulse generatorsdepends on the type and option configuration.
Like a pulse coder, the manual pulse generator operates on 5 VDC. Thesupply voltage drop due to the cable resistance must be held below 0.2 V(when those of the 0–volt and 5–volt wires are combined), as expressedin the following expression:
Where0.1 = manual pulse generator supply current (0.1 A)R = resistance per unit cable length (/m)m = number of 0–volt and 5–volt wiresL = cable length (m).
Therefore, the cable length can be determined using the followingexpression.
In the case of the A66L–0001–0286 cable, for example, when three pairsof signal wires and six power supply wires (20/0.18, 0.0394 /m) areused (three power supply wires connected to 5 V and the other three to 0V), the cable length is:
However, the maximum pulse transmission distance for the manual pulsegenerator is 50 m. Taking this into consideration, the cable length maybe extended to:38.37 m (when two generators are used), or25.58 m (when three generators are used).
9.4.16Cable Length forManual PulseGenerator
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
235
Modules can be connected in the same way, regardless of whether you areconnecting the basic module to an extension module or connecting twoextension modules. Connect the modules by using 34–pin flat cableconnectors as shown in the figure below. Ensure that all 34 pins at oneend of the cable are connected to the corresponding pins at the other end;e.g., connect the A1 pin to the pin having the same designation (A1) atthe other end.
DI/DO interface side DI/DO interface side DI/DO interface side
A1 pin mark
34–p
in fl
at c
able
34–p
in fl
at c
able
34–p
in fl
at c
able
Basic module Extension module Extension module
CA
52
CA
52
CA
53
CA
52
Top view
Flat cable–side connector specification: HIF3BA–34DA–2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
Module connector–side specification: HIF3BA–34PA–2.54DS (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.) or FAP–3403–1202–0BS (Yamaichi Denki Co., Ltd.)
CA
55
Ventilationslot
DIN rail mounting side
DIN rail mounting side
DIN rail mounting side
NOTEModules need to be spaced at least 32 mm apart, in which case a flat cable of about 20 mmin length is required. To install modules further away from each other, the cable length will be20 mm plus the extra distance. Note that the maximum length of a flat cable is 300 mm. Toensure adequate ventilation, install the modules in such a way that the flat cables lie on top ofthem. The basic module has a vent at the top (as indicated by the dotted lines in the abovefigure). When connecting modules, install extension modules so that the flat cables do notcover the vent, as shown in the above figure.Therefore, for direct connection to the connection printed circuit board, expansion modules areinstalled to the right of the basic module on the installation plane. For installation using DINrails or screws, expansion modules are installed to the left of the basic module on the installationplane.
9.4.17Connection of Basicand Extension Modules
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
236
When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly(external module view and mounting diagram)
Dimensions of connector panel printed circuit board ±0.2
Board thickness 1.6 mm
Square hole
No. 1pin
I/O interface
Squarehole
I/O Linkinterface
MPG interface(for extensionmodule)
Connector panel printed circuit board connector specification: HONDA MRH–50FD (50–pin female straight connector without fitting)
NOTE1 A connector with a fitting (HONDA MRH–50RMA) is used for the module–side I/O interface.
Always use a connector having no fitting for the connector panel printed circuit board.2 Area where pattern printing is prohibited
: Prohibited area on component side
: Prohibited area on soldered side
9.4.18Module Installation
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
237
When connecting a connector panel printed circuit board directly(mounting and dismounting a module)
Mounting the module1. Insert the hook of the module into the square hole located at the upper part of the connector panel
printed circuit board.2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, push the module in the direction of B , and attach the module’s
connector to the connector on the printed circuit board.3. Push the stopper into the lower hole of the printed circuit board until it clicks into place.
Dismounting the module1. Press the stopper C upward.2. Using the hook as a fulcrum, pull the lower part of the module in the direction of A .
Hook
Connector panelprinted circuit board
Stopper
NOTEWhen mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and bottom surfaces.Avoid applying force to the sides where there are slits.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
238
When mounting a DIN rail (external module view and mounting diagram)
Mount the DIN rail here.
I/O interface
I/O Link interfaceMPG interface (for extension module)
Note
NOTERecommended connector: A02B–0098–K891 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: HONDA MR–50FH solder type) (Case: HONDA MR–50NSB angled type)
Recommended wire material: A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18, 50 pins)
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
239
When mounting a DIN rail (mounting and dismounting a module)
Hook
DIN rail
Slotted screwdriver
Mounting the module1. Hook the module at the upper end of the DIN rail.2. Push the stopper into the slit located at the lower
end of the rail until it clicks into place.Dismounting the module1. Insert the tip of the slotted screwdriver and push
out the stopper in the direction indicated by thearrow.
Stopper
NOTEWhen dismounting the module, take care not to damage the stopper by applying excessiveforce with the screwdriver.When mounting and dismounting a module, hold the module by its top and bottom surfaces.Avoid applying force to the sides where there are slits.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
240
When mounting a module using screws (external module view andmounting diagram)
Screwholes
I/O interface
I/O Link interface
MPG interface (for extension module)
Note
JD1A JD1B
NOTERecommended connector: A02B–0098–K891 (including the following connector and case)
(Connector: HONDA MR–50FH solder type) (Case: HONDA MR–50NSB angled type)
Recommended wire material: A66L–0001–0042 (7/0.18, 50 pins)
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
241
If a system alarm occurs in a CNC using the connector panel I/O module,or if I/O Link communication between the CNC and connector panel I/Omodule fails, all the DO signals of the I/O module are turned off.Therefore, due care must be taken when setting up the machine sequence.Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power to the CNC or the I/Omodule is turned off.
For the connector panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
Xm+15 (DO alarm detection)
Xm+1Xm+2
Xm
Xm+3Xm+4Xm+5Xm+6Xm+7Xm+8Xm+9Xm+10Xm+11Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG)Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
YnYn+1Yn+2Yn+3Yn+4Yn+5Yn+6Yn+7
DI space map
Basic module
Extensionmodule 1
Extensionmodule 2
Extensionmodule 3
Extensionmodule 1
Basic module
Extensionmodule 1
Extensionmodule 2Extensionmodule 3
DO space map
Basic module
The basic connector panel I/O module is allocated a group of DI addresses(16 bytes) and a group of DO addresses (8 bytes). Up to three hardwareextension modules can be added or removed as required. The reason forthis address allocation is explained below.The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies a DI space from Xm+12through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed regardless of whetherextension module 2 or 3 is used, and Xm+12 through Xm+14 must beallocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the MPG. Therefore, whenusing an MPG for the i series CNC, allocate DI addresses in units of 16bytes. Do not use the DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14 for Ladder;the CNC processes the MPG counter value directly.DI address Xm+15 is used for detecting overcurrent and overheatingalarms that occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, see thesection describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.] Thisaddress is fixed regardless of whether extension module 2 or 3 is used, andit must be allocated as a work area before it can be used. When using thisarea, therefore, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes.Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the connector panel I/Omodules freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider also theaddresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and keep the followingin mind.
9.4.19Other Notes
DO signal reaction to asystem alarm
Address allocation
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
242
Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for FS21i/210i)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X0004 SKIP ESKIPSKIP6
–MIT2SKIP5
+MIT2SKIP4
–MIT1SKIP3
+MIT1SKIP2
ZAESKIP8
XAESKIP7
SKIP ESKIPSKIP6
SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 ZAESKIP2
YAESKIP8
XAESKIP7
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008 *ESP
X0009 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
The upper row indicates those signals used for the T series. Those in thelower row are for the M series.
*DECn fixed signal
X0019 (DO alarm detection)
X0004 X0005 X0006 X0007 X0008 X0009 X0010 X0011 X0012 X0013 X0014 X0015 X0016 (for 1st MPG) X0017 (for 2nd MPG) X0018 (for 3rd MPG)
When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0004
Basic module
Extension module 1
Extension module 2
Extension module 3
Extension module 1
Basic module
SKIPn and other fixed signals
*ESP fixed signal
The minimum configuration consists of the basic module andextension module 1. Extension modules 2 and 3 may be addedas required. This allows fixed signals, such as SKIPn and*DECn, to always be used and the *ESP fixed signal to beallocated to an address for which the common voltage is fixed to24 V. Also, with the I series CNC, the MPG interface providedby extension module 1 can always be used.
X0007 X0008 X0009 X0010 X0011 X0012 X0013 X0014 X0015 X0016 X0017 X0018 X0019 (for 1st MPG)
X0020 (for 2nd MPG) X0021 (for 3rd MPG) X0022 (DO alarm detection)
When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0007
The minimum configuration consists of the basic module only.Extension modules 1, 2, and 3 may be added as required. Inthe minimum configuration, SKIP and other fixed signals and theMGP interface of extension module 1 cannot be used. In thiscase, however, the *DECn fixed signal can always be used andthe *ESP fixed signal can be allocated to an address for whichthe common voltage is fixed to 24 V in the minimumconfiguration.
*DECn fixed signal*ESP fixed signalBasic module
Extension module 1
Extension module 2
Extension module 3
Extension module 1
Basic module
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
243
The DO driver of the Basic and Extension module A/B is capable ofdetecting an overcurrent and measuring its own temperature. If anaccident, such as the connecting of the cable to ground, causes anabnormal increase in the load current or in the driver temperature, aprotection circuit, which is provided for each DO driver (1 byte), isactivated and keeps the DO signal for the relevant 1 byte in the OFF stateuntil the cause of the problem is eliminated. Even if this occurs, the CNCand I/O module continue operating. The DI address (Xm+15) identifiesthe DO driver which has detected the alarm. The following table showsthe correspondence between the DI address (Xm+15) bits and the DOaddresses. Bit value “1” indicates that the corresponding DO driver hasdetected an alarm. The contents of the Xm+15 area can be checked byusing the DGN screen of the CNC or by performing alarm processing forthe area in advance by using Ladder. This helps alarm detection andrecovery.
Alarm detectionaddress and bit
DO address Location
Xm+15.0 Yn+0 Basic module
Xm+15.1 Yn+1 Basic module
Xm+15.2 Yn+2 Extension module 1
Xm+15.3 Yn+3 Extension module 1
Xm+15.4 Yn+4 Extension module 2
Xm+15.5 Yn+5 Extension module 2
Xm+15.6 Yn+6 Extension module 3
Xm+15.7 Yn+7 Extension module 3
NOTEThis function is not supported by the 2A output module oranalog input module.
Allocation of the 2A output module and analog input module The 2A output module and analog input module can be allocated to anyof the spaces for expansion modules 1, 2, and 3. In addition, up to three2A output modules or analog input modules can be allocated to all thespaces for expansion modules 1, 2, and 3. When an MPG interface isrequired, the module occupies the space for expansion module 1; no 2Aoutput module or analog input module can be allocated in the space forexpansion module 1.The 2A output module does not involve DI points, so that the DI area ofthe space in which a 2A output module is allocated is unusable. When a2A output module is allocated to the space for expansion module 2, forexample, the areas from Xm+6 to Xm+8 cannot be used. (The spaces forthe other modules are not shifted. In this case, the DI space of expansionmodule 3 remains at Xm+9 through Xm+11.)
DO (output signal) alarmdetection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
244
By changing the setting (rotary switch) for the expansion modules,connections can be made by omitting some expansion modules as shownbelow.
Bas
ic m
odul
e
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 1
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 2
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 3
Bas
ic m
odul
e
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 1
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 2
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 3
Bas
ic m
odul
e
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 1
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 2
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 3
Expansion module 1is omitted.
Expansion module 2is omitted.
Expansion modules 1 and 2are omitted.
Method of setting (control and method of setting the control)As shown below, the control (rotary switch) is located on an expansionmodule. To change the setting, turn the switch with a flat–bladedscrewdriver with a tip width of about 2.5 mm.
9.4.20Distribution I/O Setting
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
245
The function of the rotary switch is as follows:
Settingposition
Actual indication
Meaning of setting
0 0 This is the standard setting. The rotary switch isfactory–set to this position. This setting is usedwhen no expansion module is omitted.
1 – Set the rotary switch on an expansion module tothis position when the preceding expansionmodule is omitted.
2 2 Set the rotary switch on an expansion module tothis position when the preceding two expansionmodules are omitted.
3 – This setting is prohibited.
4 to F 4, –, 6, –,8, –, A, –,C, –, E, –,
4, 8, or C has the same effect as 0.5, 9, or D has the same effect as 1.6, A, or E has the same effect as 2.7, B, or F has the same effect as 3. (This setting,however, is prohibited.)
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
246
Examples of setting
Bas
ic m
odul
e
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 1
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 2
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 3
Bas
ic m
odul
e
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 1
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 2
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 3
Bas
ic m
odul
e
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 1
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 2
Exp
ansi
on m
odul
e 3
(When expansion module 1 is omitted)On expansion module 2, set the rotaryswitch to setting position 1. On expan-sion module 3, keep the rotary switchset to setting position 0.
(When expansion module 2 is omitted)On expansion module 3, set the rotaryswitch to setting position 1. On expan-sion module 1, keep the rotary switchset to setting position 0.
(When expansion modules 1 and 2are omitted)On expansion module 3, set the rotaryswitch to setting position 2.
NOTE1 Expansion module A (DI/DO = 24/16, with manual pulse
interface) (A03B–0815–C002) is fitted with an additionalrotary switch as other types of modules are modified.However, expansion module A is always mounted at thelocation of expansion module 1, so that its factory settingneed not be changed.
2 This feature was added in the middle. The expansionmodules shipped before August 1998 are not provided withthis feature.
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
247
CNC
I/O UNIT
JD1BI/O Link
JD44A
MPG JA3
CPD1(IN)
CE53
CE54
CPD1(OUT)
MPG
MPG
JD1B
JD1A
+24 V power supply
+24 V power supply
Machine operator’s panel
NOTEThe MPG can be connected to this operator’s panel I/O module only when the i series CNCis used. When the operator’s panel I/O module is used together with a unit (connector panelI/O module) connected to the I/O Link supporting another MPG interface, only the MPGinterface of the unit (module) closest to the CNC connected to the I/O Link is enabled. Thefollowing screw type connectors, newly incorporated into the i series main board, cannot beused to connect the I/O Link or MPG.
9.5CONNECTION OFOPERATOR’S PANELI/O MODULE (FOR MATRIX INPUT)
9.5.1Overall ConnectionDiagram
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
248
Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side
Specification Manufacturer
Connector FI–20–CV7 Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Connector case and connector FI30–20S–CV7 Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the powernecessary for printed circuit board operation and that for DI operation.To facilitate power division, the power is output to CPD1 (OUT) exactlyas it is input from CPD1 (IN). When power division is required, useCPD1 (OUT).Up to 1.0 A can be supplied by branching.
01 +24V
02 0V
03
CPD1(IN)
01 +24V
02 0V
03
CPD1(OUT)
24 V power supply
24 V power supply
Recommended cable–side connector:A02B–0120–K324 (including the following connector housing and case)(Housing: Japan AMP 1–178288–3)(Contacts: Japan AMP 1–175218–5)
NOTEThe specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN)is the same as that for CPD1 (OUT). There are noindications on the printed circuit board to distinguishbetween the IN and OUT connectors. Do not turn off the+24 V supply to the connector during operation. Turning offthe +24 V supply will cause a CNC communication alarm.When turning on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/Omodule must be turned on before or at the same time as thepower supply to the CNC. When turning off the power, the+24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned off after orat the same time as the power supply to the CNC.
9.5.2Power Connection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
249
01 0V 0V
CE53
02 N.C. +24V
03 Xm+0.0 Xm+0.1
04 Xm+0.2 Xm+0.3
05 Xm+0.4 Xm+0.5
06 Xm+0.6 Xm+0.7
07 Yn+0.0 Yn+0.1
08 Yn+0.2 Yn+0.3
09 Yn+0.4 Yn+0.5
10 Yn+0.6 Yn+0.7
11 Yn+1.0 Yn+1.1
12 Yn+1.2 Yn+1.3
13 Yn+1.4 Yn+1.5
14 Yn+1.6 Yn+1.7
15 Yn+2.0 Yn+2.1
16 Yn+2.2 Yn+2.3
17 Yn+2.4 Yn+2.5
18 Yn+2.6 Yn+2.7
19 KYD0 KYD1
20 KYD2 KYD3
21 KYD4 KYD5
22 KYD6 KYD7
23 KCM1 KCM2
24 KCM3 KCM4
25 DOCOM DOCOM
01 0V 0V
CE54
02 COM1 +24V
03 Xm+1.0 Xm+1.1
04 Xm+1.2 Xm+1.3
05 Xm+1.4 Xm+1.5
06 Xm+1.6 Xm+1.7
07 Yn+3.0 Yn+3.1
08 Yn+3.2 Yn+3.3
09 Yn+3.4 Yn+3.5
10 Yn+3.6 Yn+3.7
11 Yn+4.0 Yn+4.1
12 Yn+4.2 Yn+4.3
13 Yn+4.4 Yn+4.5
14 Yn+4.6 Yn+4.7
15 Yn+5.0 Yn+5.1
16 Yn+5.2 Yn+5.3
17 Yn+5.4 Yn+5.5
18 Yn+5.6 Yn+5.7
19
20
21
22
23 KCM5 KCM6
24 KCM7 DOCOM
25 DOCOM DOCOM
Yn+6.0 Yn+6.1
Yn+6.2 Yn+6.3
Yn+6.4 Yn+6.5
Yn+6.6 Yn+6.7
A B A B
Flat cable–side connector specification: A02B–0120–K342 (HIFBB–50D–2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))50 contacts
Cable material specification: A02B–0120–K886 (61–meter, 50–pin cable (Hitachi Cable, Ltd. or Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.))
NOTEAn output DC voltage of +24 V at CD53 (B02) and CE54(B02) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these pinsfrom the outside.
9.5.3DI/DO Connector PinArrangement
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
250
+24VCE53(B02)CE54(B02)
CE53(A03)
CE53(B03)
CE53(A04)
CE53(B04)
CE53(A05)
CE53(B05)
CE53(A06)
CE53(B06)
COM1
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.7
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.1
CE54(B06)
CE53(A01),(B01),CE54(A01),(B01)
CE54(A03)
CE54(B03)
CE54(A04)
CE54(B04)
CE54(A05)
CE54(B05)
CE54(A06)
CE54(A02)
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
Address numberBit number
Pin number
9.5.4DI (General–purposeInput Signal)Connection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
251
NOTE1 Xm+1.0 through Xm+1.7 are DI pins for which a common
voltage can be selected. That is, by connecting the COM1CE54(A02) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal canbe input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cableis connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputtingan ON state DI signal. To prevent this from occurring, theconnection of the COM1 CE54(A02) pin to the 0 V powersupply is recommended whereever possible.For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal needs to beallocated to an appropriate bit of the addresses for whichthe common voltage is fixed, ranging from Xm+0.0 toXm+0.7. See “Address allocation” in Section 9.5.10 fordetails of how to allocate the emergency stop signal.For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for which thecommon voltage is fixed (from Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7), the logicis fixed to “0”. For unused pins allocated to Xm+1.0 toXm+1.7 for which the common voltage can be selected, thelogic is fixed to “0” when the COM1 CE54(A02) pin isconnected to the 0 V power supply. When the COM1CE54(A02) pin is connected to the +24 V power supply, thelogic is fixed to “1”. The logic of the unused pins allocatedto Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 is variable when the contact of theCOM1 CE54(A02) pin is open.
2 An output DC voltage of +24 V at CD53 (B02) and CE54(B02) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these pinsfrom the outside.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
252
A maximum of 56 points are provided.
Xn+10.0 Xn+10.1 Xn+10.2 Xn+10.3 Xn+10.4 Xn+10.5 Xn+10.6 Xn+10.7
Xn+9.0 Xn+9.1 Xn+9.2 Xn+9.3 Xn+9.4 Xn+9.5 Xn+9.6 Xn+9.7
Xn+8.0 Xn+8.1 Xn+8.2 Xn+8.3 Xn+8.4 Xn+8.5 Xn+8.6 Xn+8.7
Xn+7.0 Xn+7.1 Xn+7.2 Xn+7.3 Xn+7.4 Xn+7.5 Xn+7.6 Xn+7.7
Xn+6.0 Xn+6.1 Xn+6.2 Xn+6.3 Xn+6.4 Xn+6.5 Xn+6.6 Xn+6.7
Xn+5.0 Xn+5.1 Xn+5.2 Xn+5.3 Xn+5.4 Xn+5.5 Xn+5.6 Xn+5.7
Xn+4.0 Xn+4.1 Xn+4.2 Xn+4.3 Xn+4.4 Xn+4.5 Xn+4.6 Xn+4.7CE53(A23)*KCM1
CE53(B23)*KCM2
CE53(A24)*KCM3
CE53(B24)*KCM4
CE54(A23)*KCM5
CE54(B23)*KCM6
CE54(A24)*KCM7
CE53(A19)*KYD0
CE53(B19)*KYD1
CE53(A20)*KYD2
CE53(B20)*KYD3
CE53(A21)*KYD4
CE53(B21)*KYD5
CE53(A22)*KYD6
CE53(B22)*KYD7
NOTEDetour prevention diodes must be incorporated for matrixsignal input, as shown in the following figure. Otherwise,only two signals can be input at the same time. Inputtingthree or more signals simultaneously without using detourprevention diodes may result in data input errors.
*KCMn
*KYDn
9.5.5DI (Matrix Input Signal)Connection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
253
A maximum of 56 points are provided.
DOCOMCE53(A25,B25)CE54(A25,B24,B25)
CE53(A07)
CE53(B07)
CE53(A08)
CE53(B08)
CE53(A09)
CE53(B09)
CE53(A10)
Yn+0.0
CE53(A11)
CE53(B11)
CE53(A12)
CE53(B12)
CE53(A13)
CE53(B13)
CE53(A14)
+24V 0V
Yn+0.1
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.3
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.5
Yn+0.6
Yn+0.7
Yn+1.0
Yn+1.1
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.3
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.5
Yn+1.6
Yn+1.7
CE53(B10)
CE53(B14)
CE53(A01,B01)CE54(A01,B01)
Address number
Bit number
Pin number
+24 V stabilized power supply
RelayDV
DVDV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DVDV
DV
DV
DV
9.5.6DO (Output Signal)Connection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
254
DOCOMCE53(A25,B25)CE54(A25,B24,B25)
CE53(A15)
CE53(B15)
CE53(A16)
CE53(B16)
CE53(A17)
CE53(B17)
CE53(A18)
Yn+2.0
CE54(A07)
CE54(B07)
CE54(A08)
CE54(B08)
CE54(A09)
CE54(B09)
CE54(A10)
+24V 0V
Yn+2.1
Yn+2.2
Yn+2.3
Yn+2.4
Yn+2.5
Yn+2.6
Yn+2.7
Yn+3.0
Yn+3.1
Yn+3.2
Yn+3.3
Yn+3.4
Yn+3.5
Yn+3.6
Yn+3.7
CE53(B18)
CE54(B10)
CE53(A01,B01)CE54(A01,B01)
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DVDV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
+24 V stabilized power supply
Bit number
Address number
Relay
Pin number
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
255
DOCOMCE53(A25,B25)CE54(A25,B24,B25)
CE54(A11)
CE54(B11)
CE54(A12)
CE54(B12)
CE54(A13)
CE54(B13)
CE54(A14)
Yn+4.0
CE54(A15)
CE54(B15)
CE54(A16)
CE54(B16)
CE54(A17)
CE54(B17)
CE54(A18)
+24V 0V
Yn+4.1
Yn+4.2
Yn+4.3
Yn+4.4
Yn+4.5
Yn+4.6
Yn+4.7
Yn+5.0
Yn+5.1
Yn+5.2
Yn+5.3
Yn+5.4
Yn+5.5
Yn+5.6
Yn+5.7
CE54(B14)
CE54(B18)
CE53(A01,B01)CE54(A01,B01)
+24 V stabilized power supply
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DVDV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
Address numberBit number
Pin number
Relay
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
256
DOCOMCE53(A25,B25)CE54(A25,B24,B25)
CE54(A19)
CE54(B19)
CE54(A20)
CE54(B20)
CE54(A21)
CE54(B21)
CE54(A22)
Yn+6.0
+24V 0V
Yn+6.1
Yn+6.2
Yn+6.3
Yn+6.4
Yn+6.5
Yn+6.6
Yn+6.7 CE54(B22)
CE53(A01,B01)CE54(A01,B01)
+24 V stabilized power supply
Relay
Pin number
Address numberBit number
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
For details of the connection of the manual pulse generator, see Section9.4.15.
9.5.7Manual PulseGenerator Connection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
257
NoteNote) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear
face of the printed circuit board. Ensure that printed circuitboards are spaced 5 mm or more from one another to preventinterference.
24 V power supply connectionManual pulse generator connection
I/O Link signal connectionMachine operator’s panel DI/DO interface
Rear mounting area (Perspective drawingviewed from the front)
: Polarity guide
: A1 pin mark
9.5.8External View
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
258
Installation specifications
Ambient temperature During operation 0°C to 58°CDuring storage and transportation –20°C to 60°C
Temperature change Max. 1.1°C/min.
Relative humidity Normal : 75% or lessShort term (1 month or less) : 95% or less
Vibration During operation : 0.5 G or less
Environment Ordinary machining factory environment (Special consideration is required when installing themodule in a dusty location or where highly concen-trated cutting lubricant or organic solvent is used.)
Other requirements (1) Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
Ordering specifications
Item Specification Remarks
Operator’s panel I/Omodule
A20B–2002–0470 General–purpose DI: 16 pointsMatrix DI: 56 pointsDO: 56 pointsMPG interface is supported.
Fuse (replacement part)
A03B–0815–K001 1 A
Module specifications
Item Specification Remarks
General–purpose DI 16 points 24–V input
Matrix DI 56 points (87) 5–V input
DO points 56 points 24 V source type output
CNC interface FANUC I/O Link connection
Up to 16 modules can be connected as CNC slaves. Or, amaximum of 1024 points can besupported on both the input andoutput sides.
MPG interface Max. 3 units MPG interface can be used onlyfor the i series CNC.
9.5.9Specifications
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
259
Power supply rating
Module Supply voltage Current rating Remarks
Operator’s panelI/O module
24 VDC 10% suppliedfrom the power supplyconnector CPD1. The allowance of 10% should include instantaneous voltage and ripple voltage.
0.35A The total powerconsumption of DI points is included. (This is true when all generalDI points are turned on.)The power consumption of DO points is notincluded.
DI (input signal) specifications(General–purpose input signal)
Contact rating 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Open circuit intercontact leakage current
1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)
Closed circuit intercontact voltage drop
2 V or less (including cable voltage drop)
Delay Receiver delay: Max. 2 ms
The time required for I/O Link transmission between the CNC and I/O module (max. 2 ms + CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be taken into account.
(Matrix input signal)
Contact rating 6 VDC, 2 mA or more
Open circuit intercontact leakage current
0.2 mA or less (at 26 V)
Closed circuit intercontact voltage drop
0.9 V or less (with a current of 1 mA)
Delay The maximum matrix period of 16 ms, the maximum time of I/O Link transfer between CNC and I/O module of 2 ms, and the ladder scanningperiod (by CNC) must be considered.
NOTEWhen detour prevention diodes are used, the voltage dropacross closed contacts indicated above must bemaintained, including the diode voltage drop.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
260
DO (output signal) specifications
Maximum load current in ON state 200 mA or less (including momentary current)
Saturation voltage in ON state Max. 1 V (when load current is 200 mA)
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less (including momentary values)
Leakage current in OFF state 20 A or less
Delay Driver delay: Max. 50 sThe time required for I/O Link transmissionbetween the CNC and I/O module (max. 2ms + CNC ladder scan cycle) must also betaken into account.
NOTEEnsure that the maximum current per DOCOM pin (DOpower supply pin) does not exceed 0.7 A.
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
261
If a system alarm occurs in the CNC using the operator’s panel I/Omodule, or if I/O Link communication between the CNC and operator’spanel I/O module fails, all the DO signals of the I/O module are turnedoff. Therefore, sufficient care is necessary when setting up the machinesequence. Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power to the CNCor the I/O module is turned off.
For the operator’s panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
Xm
Xm+1
Xm+2 Xm+3
Xm+4
Xm+5
Xm+6
Xm+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
MPG
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG) Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15 (DO alarm detection)
Yn
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3
Yn+4
Yn+5
Yn+6
Yn+7
DI space map
General–purpose input signal
Reserved
Matrix inputsignal
Reserved
DO alarm detection
DO space map
Output signal
Reserved
The operator’s panel I/O module is allocated a group of DI addresses (16bytes) and a group of DO addresses (8 bytes). This address allocation isexplained below.
The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies DI space from Xm+12through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed, and Xm+12 through Xm+14must be allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the MPG.Therefore, when using an MPG for the I series CNC, allocate DI addressesin units of 16 bytes. Do not use the DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14for Ladder; the CNC processes the MPG counter value directly.
DI address Xm+15 is used for detecting overcurrent and overheatingalarms that may occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, seethe section describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.] Thisaddress is fixed, and must be allocated as a work area before it can be used.Therefore, when using this area, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes.
Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the operator’s panel I/Omodule freely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider also thefixed addresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and keep thefollowing in mind.
9.5.10Other Notes
DO signal reaction to asystem alarm
Address allocation
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
262
Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for FS21i/210i)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SKIP ESKIP –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE
X0004 SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
SKIP ESKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 ZAE YAE XAE
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008 *ESP
X0009 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
The upper row indicates those signals used for the T series. Those in thelower row are for the M series.
X0008 X0009 X0010 X0011 X0012 X0013 X0014 X0015 X0016 X0017 X0018 X0019 X0020(for 1st MPG) X0021(for 2nd MPG) X0022(for 3rd MPG) X0023(DO alarm detection)
MPG
When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0008
General–purpose input signal
Reserved
Matrix inputsignal
Reserved
DO alarm detection
Although fixed signals such as SKIP cannot be used,allocating DI addresses starting from X0008 allows the *DECnsignal to be used and the *ESP fixed signal to be allocated toan address for which the common voltage is fixed to 24 V.(Fixed signals cannot be allocated to the for the matrix inputsignals.)
*ESP fixed signal
*DECn fixed signal
All the DO signals can be turned off simultaneously by turning off(opening) the DO (output signal) power supply pin “DOCOM”. Doingso causes the DO signal status to change as shown below.
DOCOMONOFF
ONOFF
ONOFF
When DO is ON inthe sequence
When DO is OFFin the sequence
Turning the DO (outputsignal) power on and off(DOCOM)
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
263
NOTEWhen the DO signal is in the ON state in the sequence, theON or OFF state of the DOCOM pin determines the state ofthe signal, as indicated by the dotted lines in the abovefigure. Do not turn off the +24 V supply, provided by theCPD1 to the I/O module, during the operation. Turning offthe +24 V supply would cause a CNC communication alarm.When turning on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/Omodule must be turned on before or at the same time as thepower supply to the CNC. When turning off the power, the+24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned off after orat the same time as the power supply to the CNC.
The DO load current can be doubled by connecting two DO points inparallel and turning them on and off simultaneously in sequence, asshown in the figure below. The maximum load current per DI point is 200mA. Connecting two DO points in parallel and turning them on at thesame time produces a current of 400 mA. Note that, however, when twoDO points are connected in parallel, the leakage current also doubleswhile they are off (max. 40 A).
DOCOMCE53(A25), (B25)CE54(B24), (A25), (B25)
+24V 0V+24 stabilized power supply
Relay
DV
DV
Parallel DO (outputsignal) connection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
264
The DO driver of the I/O module is capable of detecting an overcurrentand measuring its own temperature. If an accident, such as connecting thecable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in the load current or in thedriver temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided for each DOdriver (1 byte), is activated which keeps the DO signal for the relevant 1byte in the OFF state until the cause of the problem is eliminated. Evenif this occurs, the CNC and the I/O module continue operating. The DIaddress (Xm+15) identifies which DO driver has detected an alarm. Thefollowing table shows the correspondence between the DI address(Xm+15) bits and the DO addresses. Bit value “1” indicates that thecorresponding DO driver has detected an alarm. The contents of theXm+15 area can be checked by using the DGN screen of the CNC or byperforming the alarm processing for the area in advance by using Ladder.This helps alarm detection and recovery.
Alarm detection addressand bit DO address Remarks
Xm+15.0 Yn+0
Xm+15.1 Yn+1
Xm+15.2 Yn+2
Xm+15.3 Yn+3
Xm+15.4 Yn+4
Xm+15.5 Yn+5
Xm+15.6 Yn+6
Xm+15.7 Yn+7 Reserved
DO (output signal) alarmdetection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
265
The difference between the operator’s panel I/O module and the powermagnetics cabinet I/O module lies in whether an interface to a manualpulse generator is provided. The power magnetics cabinet does notprovide an interface to a manual pulse generator.
CNC
I/O UNIT
JD1BI/O LINK
JD44A
JA3
CPD1(IN)
CE56
+24V
CE57
CPD1(OUT)+24V
Powersupply
Powersupply
JD1B
JD1A
Machine operator’s panel
MPG
MPG
MPG
9.6CONNECTION OFOPERATOR’S PANELI/O MODULE ANDPOWER MAGNETICSCABINET I/OMODULE
9.6.1Overall ConnectionDiagram
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
266
NOTEThe MPG can be connected to this operator’s panel I/Omodule only when the i series CNC is used. When theoperator ’s panel I/O module is used together with a unit(connector panel I/O module) connected to the I/O Linksupporting another MPG interface, only the MPG interfaceof the unit (module) closest to the CNC connected to the I/OLink is enabled. The following screw type connectors, newlyincorporated into the i series main board, cannot be usedto connect the I/O Link or MPG.
Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side
Specification Manufacturer
Connector FI–20–CV7 Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
Connector case and connector FI30–20S–CV7 Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
267
Provide the CPD1 (IN) connector, shown below, with the powernecessary for the printed circuit board operation and that for DI operation.To facilitate power division, the power is output to CPD1 (OUT) exactlyas it is input from CPD1 (IN). When power division is required, useCPD1 (OUT).Up to 1.0 A can be supplied by branching.
01 +24V02 0V03
CPD1(IN)
01 +24V02 0V03
CPD1(OUT)
24 V powersupply
24 V powersupply
Recommended cable–side connector: A02B–0120–K324 (including the following connector housing and case)(Housing: Japan AMP 1–178288–3)(Contacts: Japan AMP 1–175218–5)
NOTEThe specification of the power supply connector CPD1 (IN)is the same as that for CPD1 (OUT). There are noindications on the printed circuit board to distinguishbetween the IN and OUT connectors. Do not turn off the +24V supply to the connector during operation. Turning off the+24 V supply will cause a CNC communication alarm.When turning on the power, the +24 V supply to the I/Omodule must be turned on before or at the same time as thepower supply to the CNC. When turning off the power, the+24 V supply to the I/O module must be turned off after orat the same time as the power supply to the CNC.
9.6.2Power Connection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
268
01 0V +24V
02 Xm+0.0 Xm+0.1
03 Xm+0.2 Xm+0.3
04 Xm+0.4 Xm+0.5
05 Xm+0.6 Xm+0.7
06 Xm+1.0 Xm+1.1
07 Xm+1.2 Xm+1.3
08 Xm+1.4 Xm+1.5
09 Xm+1.6 Xm+1.7
10 Xm+2.0 Xm+2.1
11 Xm+2.2 Xm+2.3
12 Xm+2.4 Xm+2.5
13 Xm+2.6 Xm+2.7
14 DICOM0
15
16 Yn+0.0 Yn+0.1
17 Yn+0.2 Yn+0.3
18 Yn+0.4 Yn+0.5
19 Yn+0.6 Yn+0.7
20 Yn+1.0 Yn+1.1
21 Yn+1.2 Yn+1.3
22 Yn+1.4 Yn+1.5
23 Yn+1.6 Yn+1.7
24 DOCOM DOCOM
25 DOCOM DOCOM
01 0V +24V
02 Xm+3.0 Xm+3.1
03 Xm+3.2 Xm+3.3
04 Xm+3.4 Xm+3.5
05 Xm+3.6 Xm+3.7
06 Xm+4.0 Xm+4.1
07 Xm+4.2 Xm+4.3
08 Xm+4.4 Xm+4.5
09 Xm+4.6 Xm+4.7
10 Xm+5.0 Xm+5.1
11 Xm+5.2 Xm+5.3
12 Xm+5.4 Xm+5.5
13 Xm+5.6 Xm+5.7
14 DICOM5
15
16 Yn+2.0 Yn+2.1
17 Yn+2.2 Yn+2.3
18 Yn+2.4 Yn+2.5
19
20
21
22
23 Yn+3.6 Yn+3.7
24 DOCOM DOCOM
25 DOCOM DOCOM
Yn+2.6 Yn+2.7
Yn+3.0 Yn+3.1
Yn+3.2 Yn+3.3
Yn+3.4 Yn+3.5
Flat cable–side connector specification: A02B–0120–K342 (HIF3BB–50D–2.54R (Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))50 contacts
Cable material specification: A02B–0120–K886 (61–meter, 50–pin cable (Hitachi Cable, Ltd. or Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.))
A AB B
CE56 CE57
NOTEAn output DC voltage of +24 V at CD56 (B01) and CE57(B01) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these pinsfrom the outside.
9.6.3DI/DO Connector PinArrangement
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
269
+24VCE56(B01)CE57(B01)
CE56(A02)
CE56(B02)
CE56(A03)
CE56(B03)
CE56(A04)
CE56(B04)
CE56(A05)
CE56(B05)
DICOM0
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.7
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.1
CE56(B09)
CE56(A01)CE57(A01)
CE56(A06)
CE56(B06)
CE56(A07)
CE56(B07)
CE56(A08)
CE56(B08)
CE56(A09)
CE56(A14)
Address numberBit number
Pin number
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
9.6.4DI (General–purposeInput Signal)Connection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
270
+24VCE56(B01)CE57(B01)
CE56(A10)
CE56(B10)
CE56(A11)
CE56(B11)
CE56(A12)
CE56(B12)
CE56(A13)
CE56(B13)
Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.6
Xm+2.7
Xm+3.0
Xm+3.7
Xm+3.6
Xm+3.5
Xm+3.4
Xm+3.3
Xm+3.2
Xm+3.1
CE57(B05)
CE57(A02)
CE57(B02)
CE57(A03)
CE57(B03)
CE57(A04)
CE57(B04)
CE57(A05)
Address numberBit number
Pin number
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
271
+24VCE56(B01)CE57(B01)
CE57(A06)
CE57(B06)
CE57(A07)
CE57(B07)
CE57(A08)
CE57(B08)
CE57(A09)
CE57(B09)
DICOM5
Xm+4.0
Xm+4.1
Xm+4.2
Xm+4.3
Xm+4.4
Xm+4.5
Xm+4.6
Xm+4.7
Xm+5.0
Xm+5.7
Xm+5.6
Xm+5.5
Xm+5.4
Xm+5.3
Xm+5.2
Xm+5.1
CE57(B13)
CE56(A01)CE57(A01)
CE57(A10)
CE57(B10)
CE57(A11)
CE57(B11)
CE57(A12)
CE57(B12)
CE57(A13)
CE57(B14)
Address numberBit number
Pin number
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
272
NOTE1 Xm+0.0 through Xm+0.7 and Xm+5.0 through Xm+5.7 are
DI pins for which a common voltage can be selected. Thatis, by connecting the DICOM0 CE56(A14) or DICOM5CE57(B14) pin to the +24 V power supply, a DI signal canbe input with its logical state reversed. If, however, a cableis connected to ground, it has the same effect as inputtingan ON state DI signal. To prevent this from occurring, theconnection of the DICOM0 CE56(A14) and DICOM5CE57(B14) pins to the 0 V power supply is recommendedwhereever possible.For safety reasons, the emergency stop signal needs to beallocated to an appropriate bit of the addresses for whichthe common voltage is fixed. See “Address allocation” inSection 9.6.9 for details of how to allocate the emergencystop signal.For unused DI pins allocated to the addresses for which thecommon voltage is fixed, the logic is fixed to “0”. For unusedpins allocated to the addresses for which the commonvoltage can be selected, the logic is fixed to “0” when theDICOM0 CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin isconnected to the 0 V power supply. When the DICOM0CE56(A14) or DICOM5 CE57(B14) pin is connected to the+24 V power supply, the logic is fixed to “1”. The logic of theunused pins is variable when the contacts of the DICOM0CE56(A14) and DICOM5 CE57(B14) pins are open.
2 An output DC voltage of +24 V at CD56 (B01) and CE57(B01) is for DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these pinsfrom the outside.
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
273
Address numberBit number
DOCOMCE56(A24,B24,A25,B25)CE57(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CE56(A16)
CE56(B16)
CE56(A17)
CE56(B17)
CE56(A18)
CE56(B18)
CE56(A19)
Yn+0.0
CE56(A20)
CE56(B20)
CE56(A21)
CE56(B21)
CE56(A22)
CE56(B22)
CE56(A23)
+24V 0V
Yn+0.1
Yn+0.2
Yn+0.3
Yn+0.4
Yn+0.5
Yn+0.6
Yn+0.7
Yn+1.0
Yn+1.1
Yn+1.2
Yn+1.3
Yn+1.4
Yn+1.5
Yn+1.6
Yn+1.7
CE56(B19)
CE56(B23)
CE56(A01)CE57(A01)
Pin number
+24 V stabilized power supply
Relay
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
9.6.5DO (Output Signal)Connection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
274
DOCOMCE56(A24,B24,A25,B25)CE57(A24,B24,A25,B25)
CE57(A16)
CE57(B16)
CE57(A17)
CE57(B17)
CE57(A18)
CE57(B18)
CE57(A19)
Yn+2.0
CE57(A20)
CE57(B20)
CE57(A21)
CE57(B21)
CE57(A22)
CE57(B22)
CE57(A23)
+24V 0V
Yn+2.1
Yn+2.2
Yn+2.3
Yn+2.4
Yn+2.5
Yn+2.6
Yn+2.7
Yn+3.0
Yn+3.1
Yn+3.2
Yn+3.3
Yn+3.4
Yn+3.5
Yn+3.6
Yn+3.7
CE57(B19)
CE57(B23)
CE56(A01)CE57(A01)
Pin number
+24 V stabilized power supply
Relay
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
Address numberBit number
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
275
For details of the connection of the manual pulse generator, see Section9.4.15.
NoteNote) Lead wires and other components are mounted on the rear
face of the printed circuit board. Ensure that the printed circuitboards are spaced 5 mm or more from one another to preventinterference.
24 V power supply connectionManual pulse generator connection
I/O Link signal connection
Machine operator’s panel DI/DO interface
Rear mounting area (Perspective drawingviewed from the front)
: Polarity guide
: A1 pin mark
95
95
9.6.6Manual PulseGenerator Connection
9.6.7External View
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
276
Installation specifications
Ambient temperature During operation 0° to 58°CDuring storage and transportation –20°C to 60°C
Temperature change Max. 1.1°C/min.
Relative humidity Normal: 75% or lessShort term (1 month or less): 95% or less
Vibration During operation: 0.5 G or less
Environment Ordinary machining factory environment (Specialconsideration is required when installing the module ina dusty place or where highly concentrated cuttinglubricant or organic solvent is used.)
Other requirements (1) Install the I/O module in a fully enclosed cabinet.
Ordering specifications
Item Specification Remarks
Operator’s panel I/O module (with MPG interface)
A20B–2002–0520 DI: 48 pointsDO: 32 pointsMPG interface is supported.
Power magnetics panelI/O module (without MPG interface)
A20B–2002–0521 DI: 48 pointsDO: 32 pointsMPG interface is not supported.
Fuse (replacement part) A03B–0815–K001 1 A
Module specifications
Item Specification Remarks
DI points 48 points 24 V input
DO points 32 points 24 V source type output
CNC interface FANUC I/O Linkconnection
Up to 16 modules can be connected as CNC slaves. Or, a maximum of 1024 pointscan be supported on both theinput and output sides.
MPG interface Max. 3 units MPG interface can be used only for the i series CNC.
9.6.8Specifications
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
277
Power supply rating
Module Supply voltage Power supplyrating Remarks
Operator’s panel I/O module
24 VDC ±10% is supplied from power supply connector CPD1. The tolerance of ±10% includes momentary and ripple currents.
0.3 A+7.3 mA×DI DI = number of DI points in the ON state
DI (input signal) specifications(general–purpose input signal)
Contact rating 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Open circuit intercontact leakage current
1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)
Closed circuit intercontact voltage drop
2 V or less (including cable voltage drop)
Delay Receiver delay: Max. 2 msThe time required for I/O Link transmission between the CNC and I/O module (max. 2 ms + CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be taken into account.
DO (output signal) specifications
Maximum load current in ON state 200 mA or less (including momentary current)
Saturation voltage in ON state Max. 1 V (when load current is 200 mA)
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less (including momentary values)
Leakage current in OFF state 20 A or less
Delay Driver delay: Max. 50 sThe time for I/O Link transmission between the CNC and I/O module (max.2 ms + CNC ladder scan cycle) must also be taken into account.
NOTEEnsure that the maximum current per DOCOM pin (DOpower supply pin) does not exceed 0.7 A.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
278
If a system alarm occurs in a CNC using this 48/32–point I/O module, orif I/O Link communication between the CNC and operator’s panel I/Omodule fails, all the DO signals of the I/O module are turned off.Therefore, due care must be taken when setting up the machine sequence.Also, the same phenomenon occurs if the power of the CNC or the I/Omodule is turned off.
For the operator’s panel I/O module, I/O addresses are mapped as follows.
Xm
Xm+1
Xm+2
Xm+3
Xm+4
Xm+5
Xm+6
Xm+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
MPG
Xm+12 (for 1st MPG)
Xm+13 (for 2nd MPG)
Xm+14 (for 3rd MPG)
Xm+15 (DO alarm detection)
Yn
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3
DI space map DO space map
Output signal
DO alarm detection
Not used
Input signal
Basically, this 48/32–point I/O module is allocated a group of DIaddresses (16 bytes) and a group of DO addresses (4 bytes). This addressallocation is explained below.
The MPG interface (MPG counter) occupies DI space from Xm+12through Xm+14. These addresses are fixed, and Xm+12 through Xm+14must be allocated as a DI work area to enable the use of the MPG.Therefore, when using an MPG for the i series CNC, allocate DI addressesin units of 16 bytes. Do not use the DI space from Xm+12 through Xm+14for Ladder; the CNC processes the MPG counter value directly.
DI address Xm+15 is used for detecting overcurrent and overheatingalarms that occur in the IC used in the DO driver. [For details, see thesection describing the detection of DO (output signal) alarms.] Thisaddress is fixed, and must be allocated as a work area before it can be used.When using this area, therefore, allocate DI addresses in units of 16 bytes.
Basically, I/O addresses can be allocated to the 48/32–point I/O modulefreely. When allocating DI addresses, however, consider also the fixedaddresses that are directly supervised by the CNC, and keep the followingin mind.
9.6.9Other Notes
DO signal reaction to asystem alarm
Address allocation
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
279
Fixed addresses directly supervised by the CNC (for FS21i/210i)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SKIP ESKIP –MIT2 +MIT2 –MIT1 +MIT1 ZAE XAE
X0004 SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
SKIP ESKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 ZAE YAE XAE
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008 *ESP
X0009 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
The upper row indicates those signals used for the T series. Those in thelower row are for the M series.
X0018 (for 3rd MPG)
X0019 (DO alarm detection)
X0004
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008
X0009
X0010
X0011
X0012
X0013
X0014
X0015
X0016 (for 1st MPG)
X0017 (for 2nd MPG)
When DI addresses are allocated in units of 16 bytes, starting at X0004
*ESP fixed signal
*DECn fixed signal
Allocating DI addresses from X0004 allows the fixed signals,such as SKIP and *DECn, to be used and the *ESP fixedsignal to be allocated to an address for which the commonvoltage in fixed to 24 V.
Input signal
Not used
DO alarm detection
MPG
All the DO signals can be turned off simultaneously by turning off(opening) the DO (output signal) power supply pin “DOCOM”. Doingso causes the DO signal status to change as shown below.
DOCOMONOFF
ONOFF
ONOFF
When DO is ON inthe sequence
When DO is OFFin the sequence
Turning the DO (outputsignal) power on and off(DOCOM)
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
280
NOTEWhen the DO signal is in the ON state in the sequence, theON or OFF state of the DOCOM pin determines the state ofthe signal, as shown within dotted lines in the above figure.Do not turn off the +24 V supply provided by the CPD1 to theI/O module during the operation. Turning off the +24 Vsupply causes a CNC communication alarm. When turningon the power, the +24 V supply to the I/O module must beturned on before or at the same time as the power supplyto the CNC. When turning off the power, the +24 V supplyto the I/O module must be turned off after or at the same timeas the power supply to the CNC.
The DO load current can be doubled by connecting two DO points inparallel and turning them on and off simultaneously in sequence, asshown in the figure below. The maximum load current per DI point is 200mA. Connecting two DO points in parallel and turning them on at thesame time produces a current of 400 mA. Note that, however, when twoDO points are connected in parallel, the leakage current also doubleswhen they are off (max. 40 A).
DOCOMCE56(A24, B24, A25, B25)CE57(A24, B24, A25, B25)
+24V 0V+24 stabilized power supply
RelayDV
DV
Parallel DO (outputsignal) connection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
281
The DO driver of the I/O module is capable of detecting an overcurrentand measuring its own temperature. If an accident, such as the connectingof the cable to ground, causes an abnormal increase in the load current orin the driver temperature, a protection circuit, which is provided for eachDO driver (1 byte), is activated and keeps the DO signal for the relevant1 byte in the OFF state until the cause of the problem is eliminated. Evenif this occurs, the CNC and I/O module continue operating. The DIaddress (Xm+15) identifies the DO driver which has detected the alarm.The following table shows the correspondence between the DI address(Xm+15) bits and the DO addresses. Bit value “1” indicates that thecorresponding DO driver has detected an alarm. The contents of theXm+15 area can be checked by using the DGN screen of the CNC or byperforming alarm processing for the area in advance by using Ladder.This helps alarm detection and recovery.
Alarm detection addressand bit DO address Remarks
Xm+15.0 Yn+0
Xm+15.1 Yn+1
Xm+15.2 Yn+2
Xm+15.3 Yn+3
Xm+15.4 Yn+4 Reserved
Xm+15.5 Yn+5 Reserved
Xm+15.6 Yn+6 Reserved
Xm+15.7 Yn+7 Reserved
DO (output signal) alarmdetection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
282
The machine operator’s panel interface unit (A16B–2201–0110) isconnected to the control unit through the I/O Link and is used forinterfacing with the machine operator’s panel.It features interfaces with matrix key switches, LEDs and manual pulsegenerators.
Machine operator’s panel I/F unit FANUC I/O Link
Control unit
Machine operator’s panel(supplied by a machine toolbuilder)
Operator’s panel control PCBallocation to the I/O Link DI/DO = 128/128 DI/DO = 256/256
DI/DO (module name)
DI or DO
DI
(OC02I)
DO
(OC02O)
DI
(OC03I)
DO
(OC03O)
Number of matrix key switch inputs 64 96
Number of matrix LED data outputs 64 64
Number of general–purpose switchinputs
32 32
Number of general–purpose LED dataoutputs
32 32
Number of total DI/DO points 96 96 128 96
Matrix key switch inputs (matrix DI)Ninety–six DI points are provided by a matrix of twelve commonsignals times eight data signals. Note that I/O Link allocation maylimit the number of usable key switch inputs.
Matrix LED data outputs (matrix DO)Sixty–four DO points are provided by a matrix of eight commonsignals times eight data signals.
General–purpose switch inputs (general–purpose DI)Each general–purpose DI point has an individual interface.
General–purpose LED data outputs (general–purpose DO)Each general–purpose DO point has an individual interface.
9.7CONNECTION OFMACHINEOPERATOR’S PANELINTERFACE UNIT
9.7.1Function Overview
Number of DI/DO points
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
283
Two inputs (input voltage: 0 to +10 V)
Input voltages are converted from analog to digital. The resulting fivebits of data are sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.
The analog signal input function can be used regardless of whether I/OLink allocation is 128/128 or 256/256.
Emergency stop and OT release signals are forwarded without changeto the power magnetics cabinet.
Power ON/OFF control signals are forwarded without change to aninput unit.
Analog signal inputs described in item “Analog signal inputs” can besent out without being changed.
Pulse information from the manual pulse generator is transferred via anI/O Link.
When this unit is used together with a unit (connector panel I/O module)connected to the I/O Link supporting another MPG interface, only theMPG interface of the unit (module) closest to the CNC connected to theI/O Link is valid.
Analog signal inputs
Terminal for signalforwarding
First manual pulsegenerator
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
284
Note 1
CNC
Power supply unit
JD1A
General–purposeDI/DO
CPD1(24V)
CNA1
FANUC
I/O Link
Machine operator’s panel interface unit
JD1B
(I/O Link)
Other machineinterface
Machine operator’spanel
Matrix DI/DO
*ESP, OTR, andgeneral–purposeDI/DO
CM26
CM15
CM16
CM17 General–purposeDI/DO
LM/SM
Power ON/OFF
(*)
CNB1
Power magneticscabinet
*ESP , OTR
Input unit powerON/OFF
Spindle amp LM/SM
CRT/MDI
(*)
+
general–purposeDI/DO
CA40
*ESP : Emergency stop signal
OTR : OT release signal
ON/OFF : Power ON/OFF control signal
LM/SM: Load meter or speed meter signal
* : Manual pulse generator
Note 2
NOTE1 Power requirements
When 60% of the DI/DO points are on, this interface unitrequires “1.0 A”
2 The cable connected to CM26 must not be longer than 30cm.
9.7.2System Configuration
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
285
ÇÇÇÇDI30
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
HA1HB1
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
DI36
ÇÇÇÇDI34ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
DI33
ÇÇÇÇDI31
ÇÇÇDO37
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
DI37
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
+5E
0V
0V
19
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
HA1
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
01 +5E DI0602 0V DO0603 +5E DI0704 0V DO0705 +5E DI1606 0V DO1607 +5E DI1708 0V DO1709 *ESP ECM110 OTR ECM211 DI00 D10212 DI04 +5E13 DI03 DI0114 DI05 DI1015 DI12 DI1416 +5E DI1317 DI11 DI15
A B01 DI20 DI2202 DI24 +5E03 DI23 DI2104 DI25 DI2605 DI27 +5E06 DO00 0V07 DI05 +5E08 DO01 0V09 DI15 +5E10 DO02 0V11 DO03 DO0412 DO05 0V13 0V 0V14 DO10 DO1115 DO12 DO1316 DO14 DO1517 +5E +5E
A B01 0V 0V02 DO20 DO2103 DO22 DO2304 DO24 DO2505 DO26 DO2706 0V 0V07 DO30 DO3108 DO32 DO3309 DO34 DO3510 DO36 DO3711 0V 0V12 +5E +5E13 DI30 DI3114 DI32 DI3315 DI34 DI3516 DI36 DI3717 +5E +5E
A B
14151617
20 +5E
080910
13
01020304
07
+5V+5V
97531
0MDO36
0MLM
108642
ECM2ECM1
0MLM
1917151311
OTR*ESPCOMEOFEON
2018161412
SMSM
01020304
LMSM0M0M
05060708
EONEOFCOM0V
09101112
HB1+5V0V
3 2 10V +24V
0V +24V6 5 4
CM15 (General DI/DO) CM16 (General DI/DO) CM17 (General DI/DO)
CNA1 (Connector on the machine side)
CNB1 (Connector on the operator’s panel side) CPD1 (Power supply)
CA40 (Connector on the manual pulse generator)
Pins shaded by are those for forwarding signals. Pins with the samename are connected directly to one another.
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
181112 DI35
0506
DI32
9.7.3Signal Assignment
Connector pin signalassignment
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
286
NOTE1 LM and SM also function as input terminals to the A/D
converter.2 0M is connected to 0 V on the PCB.
Input/output pins shaded by are in pairs. Only one ineach pair is usable.
3 Do not connect a cable longer than 30 cm to CM15, CM16,or CM17.
ÇÇ
97531
+5V
TXBRXB
108642
*TXB*RXB
1917151311
0V0V0V
2018161412
+5V
0V0V0V
JD1A (FANUC I/O Link : NEXT SLAVE)
+5V
97531
+5V
TXARXA
108642
*TXA*RXA
1917151311
0V0V0V
2018161412
+5V
0V0V0V
JD1B (FANUC I/O Link : BEFORE SLAVE)
+5V
0102
0V
03*KYD0
0405060708091011121314151617
A BCM26 (Matrix DI/DO)
*MND1*KYD1
*KYD2 *KYD3*KYD4 *KYD5*KYD6 *KYD7*KYC0 *KYC1*KYC2 *KYC3*KYC4 *KYC5*KYC6 *KYC7*KYC8 *KYC9
18192021
*KYCA *KYCB*BZMD 0V
*LD0 *LD8*LD1 *LD9*LD2 *LD10*LD3 *LD11*LD4 *LD12*LD5 *LD13*LD6 *LD14*LD7 *LD15
22232425
LC1L LC1HLC2L LC2HLC3L LC3HLC4L LC4H
0V 0V
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
287
DInx General–purpose DI LM Load meter voltage
DOnx General–purpose DO SM Speed meter voltage
*ESP Emergency stop 0M LM/SM reference voltage (0V)
ECM1 *ESP common signal *KYDx Matrix DI data signal
OTR OT release *KYCx Matrix DI common signal
ECM2 OTR common signal *LDx Matrix DO data signal
EON/OF Power ON/OFF control signal LCnL/H Matrix DO common signal
COM EON/EOF common signal *MNDI Three DI points acceptable
HAI Input from manual pulse generator *BZMD Buzzer off
HBI Input from manual pulse generator
See Subsec. 9.7.4 for details of connection and signal meanings.
+5E
RVDI00 to DI37
0V
Input signal specifications
Contact rating 5VDC, 3.2mA or higher
Leakage current between open contacts 0.2mA or lower (5 VDC)
Voltage drop across closed contacts 0.75V or lower
9.7.4Interface
General–purpose DI
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
288
Photocoupler + FET
DO00 to DO37
0V
+24V
Output signal specifications
Maximum load current 0.03A
Maximum open–circuit leakage current 0.1mA
Maximum closed–circuit voltage drop 0.1V
NOTEWhen using an LED at the DO point, connect an externalresistor that meets the requirements of the LED.
General–purpose DO
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
289
See Subsec. 9.7.5 for the corresponding PMC addresses.
CM26–A06 KY07 KY06 KY05 KY04 KY03 KY02 KY01 KY00 BZ0
CM26–B06 KY17 KY16 KY15 KY14 KY13 KY12 KY11 KY10 BZ1
CM26–A07 KY27 KY26 KY25 KY24 KY23 KY22 KY21 KY20 BZ2
CM26–B07 KY37 KY36 KY35 KY34 KY33 KY32 KY31 KY30 BZ3
CM26–A08 KY47 KY46 KY45 KY44 KY43 KY42 KY41 KY40 BZ4
CM26–B08 KY57 KY56 KY55 KY54 KY53 KY52 KY51 KY50 BZ5
CM26–A09 KY67 KY66 KY65 KY64 KY63 KY62 KY61 KY60 BZ6
CM26–B09 KY77 KY76 KY75 KY74 KY73 KY72 KY71 KY70 BZ7
CM26–A10 KY87 KY86 KY85 KY84 KY83 KY82 KY81 KY80 BZ8
CM26–B10 KY97 KY96 KY95 KY94 KY93 KY92 KY91 KY90 BZ9
CM26–A11 KYA7 KYA6 KYA5 KYA4 KYA3 KYA2 KYA1 KYA0 BZA
CM26–B11 KYB7 KYB6 KYB5 KYB4 KYB3 KYB2 KYB1 KYB0 BZB
CM26–B05
CM26–A05
CM26–B04
CM26–A04
CM26–B03
CM26–A03
CM26–B02
CM26–A02
CM26–A12
CM26–B01
CM26–A01
*KYC0
*KYC1
*KYC2
*KYC3
*KYC4
*KYC5
*KYC6
*KYC7
*KYC8
*KYC9
*KYCA
*KYCB
*KYD7
*KYD6
*KYD5
*KYD4
*KYD3
*KYD2
*KYD1
*KYD0
*BZMD
*MNDI
0V
When *MNDI = 0, it enables three or more simultaneous inputs.
When *MNDI = 1, it inhibits three or more simultaneous inputs.
Matrix DI
Key switch addresses
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
290
Preventing malfunctions that may be caused by detouring currentWhen there are three or more matrix DI points, detouring current cancause a nonexistent DI input to be falsely detected as existing.As shown below, if KY01, KY03, and KY21 are closedsimultaneously, current detours through the path indicated witharrows, thus causing a false input of *KY23 to be detected because ofa current path formed by a combination of common signal *KYC2 anddata signal *KYD3.
KY03 KY01
KY23 KY21
*KYC0
*KYC1
*KYC2
*KYC3
*KYD3
*KYD2*KYD1*KYD0
Two modes are available to prevent this malfunction. One should beselected according to the user applications.[Method 1] Ignoring all occurrences of three or more simultaneous inputs
Action : Make the *MNDI signal open (see item “ Key switchaddresses”)
NOTEIf there are two inputs and a third is added, all three areignored. When one of the three inputs is removed, two areaccepted.
[Method 2] Attaching detour prevention diodes to enable three simultaneous
inputsAction : Connect the *MNDI signal (see item “ Key switch
addresses”) to 0V.
A diode must be connected in series with a switch, as shown below.
Detour prevention diode
*KYCn
*KYDn
Mode selection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
291
This PCB can raise a confirmation sound when a key is pressed. Thecondition to raise an audible alarm is set in 8–bit units, or in *KYCnunits. If *BZMD and common *KYCn are disconnected, a KYnxinput causes a sound to generate. If they are connected, a KYnx inputdoes not generate the sound.To generate a confirmation sound for key input, the DO (PMC addressDO + 00.7) “MD07” must have been turned to “1” (see Subsec. 9.7.5).
1 A diode is necessary to connect *BZMD and *KYCn, asshown below.
2 This setting cannot be changed when power is supplied.3 The sound is generated when the circuit closes between
common signal *KYCn and data signal *KYDx. It does notsound when the circuit is disconnected. If key switches areused, the sound is heard at the moment a key is pressed.It does not sound when a key is released or when a key isheld pressed.
*KYCn
*BZMD
(Example)If *BZMD is connected to *KYC0 and *KYC2, but disconnected from*KYC1 and *KYC3, as shown below, closing a switch at keyaddresses KY10 to KY17 and KY30 to KY37 causes a confirmationsound for key input to be heard, but closing a switch at key addressesKY00 to KY07 and KY20 to KY27 does not.See item “ Key switch addresses”.
*KYC0
*KYC1
*KYC2
*KYC3
*BZMD
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
292
Contact rating 6VDC, 2mA or higher
Leakage current between open contacts 0.2mA or lower (6VDC)
Voltage drop across closed contacts 0.9V or lower (1 mA) Note )
NOTEThis voltage must be maintained even when detourprevention diodes are used.
Signal specification
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
293
See Subsec. 9.7.5 for the corresponding PMC addresses.
CM26–A24
CM26–A23
CM26–A22
CM26–A21
CM26–A13
CM26–A14
CM26–A15
CM26–A16
CM26–A17
CM26–A18
CM26–A19
CM26–A20
LC4L
LC3L
LC2L
LC1L
*LD0
*LD1
*LD2
*LD3
*LD4
*LD5
*LD6
*LD7
L1L0
L1L1
L1L2
L1L3
L1L4
L1L5
L1L6
L1L7
L2L0
L2L1
L2L2
L2L3
L2L4
L2L5
L2L6
L2L7
L3L0
L3L1
L3L2
L3L3
L3L4
L3L5
L3L6
L3L7
L4L0
L4L1
L4L2
L4L3
L4L4
L4L5
L4L6
L4L7
NOTEThe timing for the common signals are shown below. Theirduty cycle is 2 ms for LEDs being on and 6 ms for LEDsbeing off.LC4L (H)
8ms
LC3L (H)
LC1L (H)LC2L (H)
Matrix DO
LED addresses
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
294
CM26–B24
CM26–B23
CM26–B22
CM26–B21
CM26–B13
CM26–B14
CM26–B15
CM26–B16
CM26–B17
CM26–B18
CM26–B19
CM26–B20
LC4H
LC3H
LC2H
LC1H
*LD8
*LD9
*LD10
*LD11
*LD12
*LD13
*LD14
*LD15
L1H0
L1H1
L1H2
L1H3
L1H4
L1H5
L1H6
L1H7
L2H0
L2H1
L2H2
L2H3
L2H4
L2H5
L2H6
L2H7
L3H0
L3H1
L3H2
L3H3
L3H4
L3H5
L3H6
L3H7
L4H0
L4H1
L4H2
L4H3
L4H4
L4H5
L4H6
L4H7
The circuit contains a 100–ohm resistor, as shown below.Connecting an LED does not require an external resistor.
LnL(H)x
+5V
100 Ω
*LDx
LCnL (H)CM26
CM26
Internal circuit
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
295
The LEDs must have the following rating
Forward voltage 2.4V max (If=5mA)(Typical value)
Forward current 30mA max
Reverse voltage 3V max
One interface is provided on connector CNB1.
9
CNB1
10
11
12
HA1
HB1
+5V
0V
Control PCB
HA1
HB1
+5V
0V
Manual pulse generator
When only themanual pulse generator is directlyconnected
Pendant–type manual pulse generator with axis selection and multipliersetting functions can be connected to connector CA40.
16
3
CA40
4
1, 2
17,18
HA1
HB1
+5V
0V
HA1
HB1
+5V
0V
When a pendant–typemanual pulsegeneratorwith includingaxis selectionand multipliersetting functions isconnected 15
7 to 14
0V
DI30 to DI37
DO37
0V
DI
DO
Multipliersetting
Pendant–type manualpulse generator
Control PCB
Axisselection
NOTE1 When DI30 to DI37 of connector CA40 are allocated as the
DIs used for the axis selection and multiplier setting, DI30to DI37 of connector CM17 cannot be used.
2 One DO is available for the manual pulse generator side atthe user’s discretion. When this is used, DO37 of CM17cannot be used, as in the case for DIs above.
Signal specifications
Interface for manualpulse generator
Connection of connectorCNB1
Connection of connectorCA40
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
296
Analog inputs received from the outside are forwarded without change tooutput terminals.
Analog inputs from the spindle amp being output for load meter and speedmeter indications.
Spindleamp
LM
SM
0M
0M
Loadmeter
1, 2
5, 6
3
4
1
2
3
4
Machine operator’spanel interface unit
CNA1 CNB1
LM
0M
0M
SM
Speedmeter
(Operator’spanel)
Analog inputs received on the Machine operator’s panel interface unit areconverted to five–bit digital values, which are sent to the CNC though theI/O Link.See Subsec. 9.7.5 for PMC addresses.LM conversion data : “LM03 to LM07”SM conversion data : “SM03 to SM07”
Acceptable input voltage 0V to +15V
Voltage that can be converted to digital 0V to +10V Note)
NOTEAny voltage higher than +10V is converted to the samedigital value as +10V is.
Conversion error 5% (max)
Resolution 5 bit (min)
Analog signal inputs
Sent to the CNC
Analog signalspecifications
A/D conversionspecifications
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
297
A signal generated by the emergency stop switch on the machineoperator’s panel can be sent to the power magnetics cabinet. (This signalcannot be sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
A09
B09
17
8
Machine operator’spanel interface unit
CM15 CNA1
Emergency stopsignal
*ESP
ECM1
*ESP
24V
Power magneticscabinet
ECM1
*ESP
A signal generated by the OT release switch on the machine operator’spanel can be sent to the power magnetics cabinet.(This signal cannot be sent to the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
A10
B10
19
10
Machine operator’spanel interface unit
CM15 CNA1
OT release switch
OTR
ECM2
OTR
ECM
Power magnetics cabinet
OTR
ECM2
Signals generated by the power ON/OFF control switches on the machineoperator’s panel can be sent to an input unit. (These signals cannot be sentto the CNC through the FANUC I/O Link.)
5
6
11
13
Machine operator’spanel interface unit
CM15 CNA1
EON
Input unit
ECF
7 15 COM
EON
ECF
COM
ON switch
OFF switch
NOTEThe LM, 0M, SM, D036, ECM, EON, EOF, COM, ESP, andOTR signals are all assigned to the pins of one connector(CNA1).They can be connected to the machine using only one cable.
Emergency stop
OT release
Power ON/OFF controlsignal
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
298
DI+00 FUSEDI+01 KY07 KY06 KY05 KY04 KY03 KY02 KY01 KY00DI+02 KY17 KY16 KY15 KY14 KY13 KY12 KY11 KY10DI+03 KY27 KY26 KY25 KY24 KY23 KY22 KY21 KY20DI+04 KY37 KY36 KY35 KY34 KY33 KY32 KY31 KY30DI+05 KY47 KY46 KY45 KY44 KY43 KY42 KY41 KY40DI+06 KY57 KY56 KY55 KY54 KY53 KY52 KY51 KY50DI+07 KY67 KY66 KY65 KY64 KY63 KY62 KY61 KY60DI+08 KY77 KY76 KY75 KY74 KY73 KY72 KY71 KY70DI+09 DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00DI+10 DI17 DI16 DI15 DI14 DI13 DI12 DI11 DI10DI+11 DI27 DI26 DI25 DI24 DI23 DI22 DI21 DI20DI+12 DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI31 DI30DI+13 LM07 LM06 LM05 LM04 LM03DI+14 SM07 SM06 SM05 SM04 SM03DI+15 MP17 MP16 MP15 MP14 MP13 MP12 MP11 MP10DI+16 Reserved for use by FANUCDI+17DI+18 KY87 KY86 KY85 KY84 KY83 KY82 KY81 KY80DI+19 KY97 KY96 KY95 KY94 KY93 KY92 KY91 KY90DI+20 KYA7 KYA6 KYA5 KYA4 KYA3 KYA2 KYA1 KYA0DI+21 KYB7 KYB6 KYB5 KYB4 KYB3 KYB2 KYB1 KYB0
PMC
ADDRESS
BIT NUMBER
128/128 256/2567 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DO+00 MD07 MD06 FUSEDO+01 L1L7 L1L6 L1L5 L1L4 L1L3 L1L2 L1L1 L1L0DO+02 L2L7 L2L6 L2L5 L2L4 L2L3 L2L2 L2L1 L2L0DO+03 L3L7 L3L6 L3L5 L3L4 L3L3 L3L2 L3L1 L3L0DO+04 L4L7 L4L6 L4L5 L4L4 L4L3 L4L2 L4L1 L4L0DO+05 L1H7 L1H6 L1H5 L1H4 L1H3 L1H2 L1H1 L1H0DO+06 L2H7 L2H6 L2H5 L2H4 L2H3 L2H2 L2H1 L2H0DO+07 L3H7 L3H6 L3H5 L3H4 L3H3 L3H2 L3H1 L3H0DO+08 L4H7 L4H6 L4H5 L4H4 L4H3 L4H2 L4H1 L4H0DO+09 DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00DO+10 DO17 DO16 DO15 DO14 DO13 DO12 DO11 DO10DO+11 DO27 DO26 DO25 DO24 DO23 DO22 DO21 DO20DO+12 DO37 DO36 DO35 DO34 DO33 DO32 DO31 DO30
I/O Link allocation
Scope in which PMCaddresses can be used
FUSE : When 1, it indicates the +5E fuse has blown.Shorting of the general–purpose DI input is considered as a possible cause. Turn off the power atonce, check the general–purpose DI input and its vicinity, replace the fuse and turn the power on.
DInx : General–purpose DILM0x : Load meter indicationSM0x : Speed meter indicationKYnx : Ky signal (matrix)LnL (H) x : LED signal (matrix)DOnx : General–purpose DOMD07 : Buzzer mode selection (It is possible to sound the key entry confirmation tone at the matrix DI input by
turning this to “1”.)MD06 : Buzzer ON/OFF setting (The buzzer sounds as this is turned to “1” and stops as it is turned to “0”. This
operation is performed irrespective of MD07.)MP1X : First manual pulse generator
9.7.5PMC Addresses
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
299
Use flat cables for connectors CM15, CM16, CM17, and CM26.When splitting and connecting flat cables to the machine operator’spanel or other equipment, be careful not to break or short theconductors.
All signals with the same name described in Subsec. 9.7.3 areconnected to one another.
One of the holes for mounting the PCB is also used for grounding.Before mounting the PCB, check the location of that hole with thediagram in Subsec. 9.7.10.
L1 (green) :Monitors +5E. When on, it indicates that the fuse is intact (+5E: 5V forconnector output).When off, it indicates that the fuse has blown.L2 (green) :Monitors key scanning. When blinking, it indicates that the keys arebeing scanned normally. When on or off, it indicates key scanning is athalt.L3 (red) :When on, it indicates that an alarm condition has occurred. When off, itindicates that there is no alarm condition.
9.7.6Major ConnectionPrecautions
9.7.7State of the LEDs onthe Machine Operator’sPanel Interface Unit
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
300
Connector Major use Specification
CM15,CM16,CM17
General–purposeDI/DO
HIF3BA–34D–2.54R :Manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRICCO., LTD.
CNA1 Relay terminal (to the machine)
PCR–E20FS :Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KO-GYO CO., LTD.
CNB1 Relay terminal (to the machineoperator’s panel)
MVSTBR2.5/12–ST–5.08 :Manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACTGmbH & Co.
JD1A,JD1B
FANUC I/O Link PCR–E20FS :Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KO-GYO CO., LTD.
CPD1 Power supply Dynamic D3100 (three pins) :Manufactured by AMP JAPAN, LTD.
1–178288–3 : Connector
1–175218–5 : Contact
CM26 Matrix DI/DO HIF3BB–50D–2.54R :Manufactured by HIROSE ELECTRICCO., LTD.
CA40 Manual pulsegenerator
MR–20LFH (solder type) :Manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN KO-GYO CO., LTD.
NOTE1 Several types of connectors are available for use at the
other end of the cable leading to connector CNB1. Refer tobrochures of PHOENIX CONTACT GmbH & Co..The connector used on the machine operator’s panelinterface unit side is MSTBVA2.5/12–G–5.08.
2 Crimped type cable connector is available for CA40. Forpurchase from FANUC, please specify as below.A02B–0029–K890 : Solder typeA02B–0029–K892 : Crimped type
9.7.8Connector (on the Cable Side)Specifications
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
301
CM26 A1
A1 A1CM16
89
1 CA40 CM15
B17 B17
40
20
124 89
310
26
17 10
B25
22
11
CPD1
CNA1
CND1
JD1AJD2B
CA40
Approx. 100mm 10mm
1.6mm
Unit : mm
Tolerance : 5 (mm)
CM
17B
17
A1
150
75
15
16
CN
A1
JD1A
CP
D1
CN
B1
JD1B
2241
960
9.7.9Machine Operator’sPanel Interface UnitDimension Diagram(Including ConnectorLocations)
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
302
CM26
CM16 CM15
296
310
4.5
Fasten the PCB with four M4 screws. Unit : mm
Hole for connecting to a ground
CM
17
150
110
20
114
1818
20
9.7.10Machine Operator’sPanel Interface UnitMounting DimensionDiagram
Mounting hole position
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
303
It is possible to fix the sheet, spacer, etc. only in the area shown in thediagram below.
CM26
CM16 CM15
15
12
7
3
7
5
14
12
CM
17
1010
1010
2025
130
1418
1010
88
130
NOTEApplied to the PCB version number “03A” and beyond.
It is possible to fix the sheet, spacer, etc. only in the area shown in thediagram below.
CM26
CM16 CM15
13
14
3
7
12
14
CM
17
1312
413
77 17
21
126
1214
88
1010
NOTEApplied to the PCB version number “03A” and beyond.
Sheet fixing area (mounting face side)
Sheet fixing area (Soldering face side)
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
304
CM26
CM16 CM15
FU1 : +24V fuse (general–purpose DO, this supplies printed board power protection)
FU2 : +5V fuse (IC power, manual pulse generator protection)
FU3 : +5E fuse (general–purpose DI protection)
CM
17
JD1A
FU
3
FU
2
FU
1
CP
D1
JD1B
NOTEFU2 is not mounted on Revision 05A or later.
9.7.11Fuse MountingPosition
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
305
The operator’s panel connection unit (A16B–2200–0660, 0661) isconnected to the control unit through the FANUC I/O Link and is used forinterfacing with the machine operator’s panel.The electric interface and pin layout of the connectors CM1 to CM4 arefully compatible with those for Series 15. There are two units availabledepending on the number of I/O points.
Specification Input Output
A16B–2200–0660 96 points 64 points
A16B–2200–0661 64 points 32 points
Machine operator’spanel
24V DC power
Control unit
or I/O unit
JD1B To next device
Operator’s panel connection unit
A16B–2200–0660,0661
BURNDY JAPAN, LTD.3P CONNECTOR(Brown)
Housing : SMS3PNS–5
Contact : RC16M–SCT3
If there is no equipmentbeyond this connectionunit, JD1A can remainopen.
JDIA
CM1
CM2
CM3
CM4
CP61
Power supply input specification
Voltage : 24 VDC 10%
Capacity : 500 + 7.3 n mAn : number of inputs that turn on simultaneously
1 +24V
2 GND
3
JD1A
CAUTIONFor a power cable, use a cable of 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) orthicker.
9.8CONNECTION OFOPERATOR’S PANELCONNECTION UNIT
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
306
The input signal of the operator’s panel connection unit is 0V commonnon–insulation type interface as shown below.
+24V
Filter and levelconverter circuit
Receiveroutputsignal
Receiver circuit
Directcurrentinputsignal
Operator’s panel connection unitMachinetool
Fig. 9.8.1 (a) Receiver circuit
5 to 22ms 5 to 22ms
Logi 0(more than 18V)
Direct currentinput signalOFF (High)ON (Low)
(Signal)
Chattering of 5msor less is ignored
Receiver outputsignal
(Signal)
Logi 1(less than 6V)
Fig. 9.8.1 (b) Width of input signals and delay time
In the above figure, it is logic 0 when the contact is open and logic 1 whenclosed.Connect the common line of the input signal of the operator’s panelconnection unit as shown below.
Machine tool ConnectorCM1
ConnectorCM2
DI00 to DI57
COM1Operator’s panel connection unit
DI60 to DIB7
COM2
Fig. 9.8.1 (c) Connection of common lines
9.8.1Input SignalRegulations forOperator’s PanelConnection Unit
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
307
WARNINGAll signals input to this operator’s panel connection unit areof source type.When a source interface is used, a ground fault in an inputsignal has the same effect as closing the contacts. From theviewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not recommendthe use of such an interface for input signals. In particular,input signals X008.0 to X008.7 must be connected in a sinklayout, because these signals include the emergency stopsignal.Do not use this operator’s panel connection unit forsafety–critical input signals (such as an emergency stopsignal).
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
308
Output signals DO00 to DO77 of the operator’s panel connection unitdrive indicators and LEDs on the machine operator’s panel and use NPNtransistor for drivers.Prepare 24VDC for power supply of indicators and LEDs and connect 0Vto COM3 and COM4. For LEDs, however, 5VDC 300mA output fromthe terminal +5N of the connector CM3 can be used. There is no +5N inthe connector CM4; use +5N in connector CM3 as shown below:
Output regulation Load voltage : 24V +20% or lessLoad current : 40mA
Transistor outputConnector CM3 Indicator
Connector CM4 Indicator
+5VDC300mAmax
DO00 to 57
Operator’s panelconnectIon unit
R
+5N
COM3
LED
COM4
DO60 to 77
+
–
Transistor output
R
R
LED
R
24Vstabilized power
WARNINGWhen a sink output interface is used, a ground fault in anoutput signal causes the output signal to remain on. Fromthe viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does notrecommend the use of such an interface for output signals.
9.8.2Output SignalRegulations forOperator’s PanelConnection Unit
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
309
1 DI002 DI033 DI064 DI115 DI146 DI177 DI228 DI259 DI2710 DI3211 DI3512 DI4013 DI4314 DI4615 DI5116 DI5417 DI5618 COM1
19 DI0120 DI0421 DI0722 DI1223 DI1524 DI2025 DI2326 DI3027 DI3328 DI3629 DI4130 DI4431 DI4732 DI52
3334 DI0235 DI0536
DI1037 DI1338 DI1639 DI2140 DI2441 DI2642 DI3143 DI3444 DI3745 DI4246 DI4547 DI5048 DI539 DI5550 DI57
DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00
Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xn
DI17 DI16 DI15 DI14 DI13 DI12 DI11
DI10
DI27 DI26 DI25 DI24 DI23 DI22 DI21 DI20
DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI31 DI30
DI47 DI46 DI45 DI44 DI43 DI42 DI41 DI40
DI57 DI56 DI55 DI54 DI53 DI52 DI51 DI50
Xn+1
Xn+2
Xn+3
Xn+4
Xn+5
CM1
1 DI602 DI633 DI664 DI715 DI746 DI777 DI828 DI859 DI8710 DI9211 DI9512 DIA013 DIA314 DIA615 DIB116 DIB417 DIB618 COM2
19 DI6120 DI6421 DI6722 DI7223 DI7524 DI8025 DI8326 DI9027 DI9328 DI9629 DIA130 DIA431 DIA732 DIB2
3334 DI6235 DI653637 DI7338 DI7639 DI8140 DI8441 DI8642 DI9143 DI9444 DI9745 DIA246 DIA547 DIB048 DIB39 DIB550 DIB7
DI70
CM2
DI70
DI67 DI66 DI65 DI64 DI63 DI62 DI61 DI60
Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xn+6
DI77 DI76 DI75 DI74 DI73 DI72 DI71
DI87 DI86 DI85 DI84 DI83 DI82 DI81 DI80
DI97 DI96 DI95 DI94 DI93 DI92 DI91 DI90
DIA7 DIA6 DIA5 DIA4 DIA3 DIA2 DIA1 DIA0
DIB7 DIB6 DIB5 DIB4 DIB3 DIB2 DIB1 DIB0
Xn+7
Xn+8
Xn+9
Xn+10
Xn+11
NOTEn in addresses can be 0 to 127.64 points (DI00 to DI77) can be used for theA16B–2200–0661.
9.8.3Connector Layout forOperator’s PanelConnection Unit
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
310
1 DO002 DO033 DO064 DO115 DO146 DO177 DO228 DO259 DO2710 DO3211 DO3512 DO4013 DO4314 DO4615 DO5116 DO5417 DO5618 COM3
19 DO0120 DO0421 DO0722 DO1223 DO1524 DO2025 DO2326 DO3027 DO3328 DO3629 DO4130 DO4431 DO4732 DO52
33 +5N34 DO0235 DO0536
DO1037 DO1338 DO1639 DO2140 DO2441 DO2642 DO3143 DO3444 DO3745 DO4246 DO4547 DO5048 DO539 DO5550 DO57
DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00
Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Yn
DO17 DO16 DO15 DO14 DO13 DO12 DO11
DO10
DO27 DO26 DO25 DO24 DO23 DO22 DO21 DO20
DO37 DO36 DO35 DO34 DO33 DO32 DO31 DO30
DO47 DO46 DO45 DO44 DO43 DO42 DO41 DO40
DO57 DO56 DO55 DO54 DO53 DO52 DO51 DO50
Yn+1
Yn+2
Yn+3
Yn+4
Yn+5
CM3
1 DO602 DO643 DO674 DO725 DO7567 COM4
8 DO629 DO6510 DO7011 DO7312 DO7613
14 DO6015 DO6316 DO6617 DO7118 DO7419 DO7720
CM4
DO70
DO67 DO66 DO65 DO64 DO63 DO62 DO61 DO60
Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Yn+6
DO77 DO76 DO75 DO74 DO73 DO72 DO71Yn+7
NOTEn in addresses can be 0 to 127.32 points (DO00 to DO37) can be used for theA16B–2200–0661.
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
311
11.8mm
Approx.100mm
Weight : 1.2 kg
Fig. 9.8.4 External view of operator’s panel connection unit
9.8.4External View ofOperator’s PanelConnection Unit
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
312
The operator’s panel connection unit (A16B–2202–0730, 0731), whichconnects to the control unit via the FANUC I/O Link, acts as an interfacewith the machine operator’s panel.Connectors CM51, CM52, CMB3, and CMB4, used to interface with theoperator’s panel, feature an electrical interface and pin assignment whichare fully compatible with those of the source type output operator’s panelconnection unit for the Series 15. The following two units are availablewith different numbers of I/O points:
Specifications No. of input points No. of output points
A16B–2202–0730 96 64
A16B–2202–0731 64 32
JD1B To next device
When no other device isconnected to the connec-tion unit, leave JD1A open.
24VDC power
BURNDY 3P CONNECTOR (Brown)Housing: SMS3PNS–5Contact: RC16M–SCT3
Control unit
or I/O unit
Power input regulationsVoltage : 24VDC10%Capacity : 500+7. 3n (mA) n: Number of input points which are simultaneously turned on
Operator’s Panel Connection UnitA16B–2202–0730, 0731
JD1A(JD44A)
1 +24V
2 GND
3
Machineoperation’s
panel
JD1A
CM51
CM52
CMB3
CMB4
CAUTIONUse 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) or heavier wire as the power cable.
9.9CONNECTION OFSOURCE OUTPUTTYPE CONNECTIONUNIT
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
313
Most input signals for the source output type connection unit support asink type non–isolated interface. For some input signals, however, eithersink or source type can be selected. (European safety standards demandthe use of sink types.)
The machine’s contacts shall conform to the following specifications:
Capacity: 30 VDC, 16 mA or higherIntercontact leakage current in closed circuit:
1 mA or less (at 26.4 V)Intercontact voltage drop in closed circuit:
2 V or less (including the voltage drop in the cables)
Contact
Input signal Filter and levelconversion cir-cuit
Receiveroutput signal
R
Operator’s panel connection unit
Circuit of sink type input receiver
+24V
+24V
Machine
Contact
Input signal Filter and levelconversion cir-cuit
Receiveroutput signal
R
Circuit of input receiver for which common voltage can be selected
DICMN1orDICMN2
Machine Operator’s panel connection unit
+24V+24V
0V
Contact
Input signal Filter and levelconversion cir-cuit
Receiveroutput signal
R
+24V+24V
0V
DICMN1orDICMN2
Fig. 9.9.1 (a) Receiver circuit
Always connect both DICMN1 and DICMN2 to 24 V or 0 V. Do not leavethem open.
9.9.1Input SignalSpecifications forSource Output TypeConnection Unit
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
314
5 to 22ms 5 to 22ms
Logical 0(18 V orhigher)Logical 1(6V orlower)
DC input signal OFF (High) ON (Low)
(Signal)
Chattering of 5ms or less is ig-nored.
Receiver outputsignal
(Signal)
Fig. 9.9.1 (b) Signal width and delay of input signal
In the above figure, logical 0 corresponds to open contacts, while logical1 corresponds to closed contacts.
WARNINGWhen a source interface is used, a ground fault in an inputsignal has the same effect as closing the contacts. From theviewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC does not recommendthe use of such an interface for input signals.
The output signals shall satisfy the following:
Maximum load current when driver is on:200 mA (including momentary values)
Saturation voltage when driver is on:1.0 V max.
Withstand voltage: 24 V +20% (including momentary values)Leakage current when driver is off:
100 A
Prepare the following external power supply for the output signals:
Supply voltage: +24 V 10%Supply current (per board):
At least total maximum load current (including momentary values) + 100 mA
Power–on timing: At the same time as or before turning onthe power to the control unit
Power–off timing: At the same time as or after turning on thepower to the control unit
9.9.2Output SignalSpecifications forSource Output TypeConnection Unit
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
315
CAUTIONA power supply which satisfies the above specificationsshall be connected to the DOCOM and 0V power supplyterminals for the output signals. The maximum current thatcan be carried by the DOCOM pin is 2.0 A. The total loadcurrent must not exceed this value, therefore.
The output signal driver used with the operator’s panel connection unitcan output up to eight signals.
The driver element monitors the current of each output signal. If anovercurrent is detected, the output of that signal is turned off. Once asignal has been turned off, the overcurrent will no longer exist, such thatthe driver turns the signal on again. Therefore, in the case of a ground faultor overload, the output of a signal will be repeatedly turned on and off.This also occurs when a load which causes a high surge current isconnected.
The driver element contains an overheat detector, which turns off all eightoutput signals if the temperature in the device exceeds the set value as aresult of an overcurrent caused by a ground fault or some other failure.This off state is held. To restore signal output, logically turn the outputoff then back on again, for each signal, after the temperature falls belowthe set value. Signal output can also be restored by turning the systempower off then back on again.
On the PCB, a red LED beside the driver element lights once the overheatdetection circuit operates.
NOTEThe overheat detection circuit also causes a system alarmto be issued to the CNC. (When setting pins CP1 on thePCB are closed (jumpered), this alarm is not issued to theCNC.)
Red LED name DO signals Remarks
DAL1 Y q + 0.0 to Y q + 0.7
DAL2 Y q + 1.0 to Y q + 1.7
DAL3 Y q + 2.0 to Y q + 2.7
DAL4 Y q + 3.0 to Y q + 3.7
DAL5 Y q + 4.0 to Y q + 4.7
DAL6 Y q + 5.0 to Y q + 5.7
DAL7 Y q + 6.0 to Y q + 6.7
DAL8 Y q + 7.0 to Y q + 7.7
Output signal driver
Correspondencebetween red LEDs andDO signals
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
316
NOTEThe above red LED and alarm transfer to the CNC aresupported by PCBs of version 03B and later.
If the output of a signal cannot be turned on even though the CNCdiagnostic indicates that the signal is on, that signal or another signalbeing handled by the same element may be overloaded, thus causing theeight output signals to be turned off. In such a case, turn the system poweroff and eliminate the cause of the overload.
CONTROLLOGIC
OHDDOCOM
IN#0
OCD
OUT#0
CONTROLLOGICIN#1
OCD
OUT#1
CONTROLLOGICIN#7
OCD
OUT#7
OHD: Overheat detection circuitOCD: Overcurrent detection circuit
The power for operating this driver element is supplied from DOCOM (24 VDC).
Driver element blockdiagram
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
317
CAUTIONObserve the following precautions when connecting outputsignals:Output pins shall not be connected in parallel, as shownbelow.
DV
+24V 0V
DOCOM
0V
DV
Relay
CAUTIONWhen using a dimming resistor, connect a diode to preventleakage.
DV
+24V 0V
DOCOM
Dimmingresistor
Lamp
Leakage prevention diode0V
Notes on output signals
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
318
19 DI01
20 DI04
21 DI07
22 DI12
23 DI15
24 DI20
25 DI23
26 DI30
27 DI33
28 DI36
29 DI41
30 DI44
31 DI47
32 DI52
1 DI00
2 DI03
3 DI06
4 DI11
5 DI14
6 DI17
7 DI22
8 DI25
9 DI27
10 DI32
11 DI35
12 DI40
13 DI43
14 DI46
15 DI51
16 DI54
17 DI56
18 +24V
CM51
33 DICMN1
34 DI02
35 DI05
36 DI10
37 DI13
38 DI16
39 DI21
40 DI24
41 DI26
42 DI31
43 DI34
44 DI37
45 DI42
46 DI45
47 DI50
48 DI53
49 DI55
50 DI57
19 DI61
20 DI64
21 DI67
22 DI72
23 DI75
24 DI80
25 DI83
26 DI90
27 DI93
28 DI96
29 DIA1
30 DIA4
31 DIA7
32 DIB2
1 DI60
2 DI63
3 DI66
4 DI71
5 DI74
6 DI77
7 DI82
8 DI85
9 DI87
10 DI92
11 DI95
12 DIA0
13 DIA3
14 DIA6
15 DIB1
16 DIB4
17 DIB6
18 +24V
CM52
33 0V
34 DI62
35 DI65
36 DI70
37 DI73
38 DI76
39 DI81
40 DI84
41 DI86
42 DI91
43 DI94
44 DI97
45 DIA2
46 DIA5
47 DIB0
48 DIB3
49 DIB5
50 DIB7
19 DO01
20 DO04
21 DO07
22 DO12
23 DO15
24 DO20
25 DO23
26 DO30
27 DO33
28 DO36
29 DO41
30 DO44
31 DO47
32 DO52
1 DO00
2 DO03
3 DO06
4 DO11
5 DO14
6 DO17
7 DO22
8 DO25
9 DO27
10 DO32
11 DO35
12 DO40
13 DO43
14 DO46
15 DO51
16 DO54
17 DOCOM
18 DICMN2
CMB3
33 0V
34 DO02
35 DO05
36 DO10
37 DO13
38 DO16
39 DO21
40 DO24
41 DO26
42 DO31
43 DO34
44 DO37
45 DO42
46 DO45
47 DO50
48 DO53
49 DO55
50 DOCOM
8 DO62
9 DO65
10 DO70
11 DO73
12 DO76
13 DO57
1 DO61
2 DO64
3 DO67
4 DO72
5 DO75
6 DO56
7 0V
CMB4
14 DO60
15 DO63
16 DO66
17 DO71
18 DO74
19 DO77
20 DOCOM
9.9.3Connector Pin Layoutfor Source Output TypeConnection Unit
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
319
NOTEWhen the operator’s panel connection unit having 64 DIsand 32 DOs is selected, connector CMB4 is not mounted onthe PCB.
DICMN1, DICMN2: Pins used to switch the DI common. Usually,jumper these pins with 0V. (input)
+24V: +24 VDC output pin. This pin shall be used onlyfor DI signals input to the operator’s panelconnection unit. (output)
DOCOM: Power supply for the DO driver. All DOCOM pinsare connected in the unit. (input)
The following PMC addresses are assigned to the operator’s panelconnection unit, depending on the number of I/O points (DI/DO = 96/64or 64/32):
[DI address] 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00
DI17 DI16 DI15 DI14 DI13 DI12 DI11 DI10
DI27 DI26 DI25 DI24 DI23 DI22 DI21 DI20
DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI331 DI30
DI47 DI46 DI45 DI44 DI43 DI42 DI41 DI40
DI57 DI56 DI55 DI54 DI53 DI52 DI51 DI50
DI67 DI66 DI65 DI64 DI63 DI62 DI61 DI60
DI77 DI76 DI75 DI74 DI73 DI72 DI71 DI70
DI87 DI86 DI85 DI84 DI83 DI82 DI81 DI80
DI97 DI96 DI95 DI94 DI93 DI92 DI91 DI90
DIA7 DIA6 DIA5 DIA4 DIA3 DIA2 DIA1 DIA0
DIB7 DIB6 DIB5 DIB4 DIB3 DIB2 DIB1 DIB0
X p
X p+1
X p+2
X p+3
X p+4
X p+5
X p+6
X p+7
X p+8
X p+9
X p+10
X p+11
DI:64points
DI: 96points
Address p is determined by the machine tool builder.
The common voltage can be selected for the DIs assigned to thefollowing 20 addresses:
Address Common signal to correspond
Xp+0.0, Xp+0.1, Xp+0.2, Xp+0.7Xp+1.0, Xp+1.1, Xp+1.2, Xp+1.7
DICMN1
Xp+4.0 to Xp+4.7 DICMN2
Xp+11.4, Xp+11.5, Xp+11.6, Xp+11.7 DICMN1
I/O addresses
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
320
[DO address] 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00
DO17 DO16 DO15 DO14 DO13 DO12 DO11 DO10
DO27 DO26 DO25 DO24 DO23 DO22 DO21 DO20
DO37 DO36 DO35 DO34 DO33 DO32 DO31 DO30
DO47 DO46 DO45 DO44 DO43 DO42 DO41 DO40
DO57 DO56 DO55 DO54 DO53 DO52 DO51 DO50
DO67 DO66 DO65 DO64 DO63 DO62 DO61 DO60
DO77 DO76 DO75 DO74 DO73 DO72 DO71 DO70
Y q
Y q+1
Y q+2
Y q+3
Y q+4
Y q+5
Y q+6
Y q+7
DO: 32 points
DO: 64 points
Address q is determined by the machine tool builder.
For details of address assignment, refer to the FANUC PMCProgramming Manual (Ladder Language) (B–61863E).
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
321
4–5mm CP1336mm
JD1BJD1A
35155
50mm 10mm
31.05mm 46.99mm 88.9mm 88.9mm 66.16mm7mm 322mm
CP61
20 50 50 50
CMB4CMB3 CM52 CM51
MR20RMMR50RM MR50RM MR50RM
1212 43 1 2 3
Approx.100 mm
15 m
m
154
mm
120
mm
11.7
2m
m17
.78
mm
CP
1
The following LEDs, fuses, variable resistors, and setting pins aremounted on the PCB:
[LEDs]
DB1 (green, pilot) : Lights while the power to the PCB is on.DB2 (red, alarm) : Lights if an error occurs in the PCB or CNC.DAL1 to DAL8 : See Subsec. 9.9.2
[Variable resistors]
VR1 and VR2 : Factory–set by FANUC. The machine tool builderneed not adjust these resistors.
[Setting pin]
CP1 : Used to specify whether the CNC will be notified ofa DO signal error as a system alarm (see Subsec.9.9.2).
9.9.4Dimensions of SourceOutput TypeConnection Unit
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
322
This unit connects FANUC I/O Link master devices’ such as the CNC,via an I/O Link to enable the transfer of DI/DO signals.
System A System B
CNC orF–D Mate +24 V power
supply
I/O Link Slave
CNC orF–D Mate+24 V power
supply
I/O Link Slave
FANUC I/O Linkconnection unit
DI
DO
DO
DI
I/O Link Master : Series 21i/210i etc.I/O Link Slave : I/O unit, Power Mate, Series 0–C, etc.
: FANUC I/O Link
Fig. 9.10.1 System which uses FANUC I/O Link connection units
NOTEThis system enables I/O data transfer between two independent FANUC I/O Link masterdevices. When the system is adjusted and maintained, the FANUC I/O Link can be operatedwith the system power for one of the FANUC I/O Link lines switched off, that is, the link operationis stopped. In this case, DI data sent from a system at rest consists entirely of zeros. If oneof the links is stopped, either abnormally or normally, it takes up to several hundred millisecondsfor this function to take effect. During this period, that data which exists immediately before thelink stops is sent out. Take this into account when designing your system.
9.10FANUC I/O LINKCONNECTION UNIT
9.10.1Overview
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
323
Item Specification
I/O Link function Provided with two slave mode I/O Link interface channels,between which DI/DO data can be transferred.
[Interface types]One of the following combinations is selected:
Electrical – opticalElectrical – electricalOptical – optical
Number of DI/DOdata items
DI: Up to 256, DO: Up to 256(The number of data items actually used varies dependingon the amount of data assigned in the host.)
Power supply Each I/O Link interface must be independently supplied with+24 VDC.
Voltage: +24 VDC +10%, –15%Current: 0.2 A (excluding surge)
If a master unit does not have sufficient capacity to supplypower to each unit (0.2 A per slot), use an external powersupply unit. The power supply must be switched on, eithersimultaneously with or before, the I/O Link master.The two systems can be switched on and off independentlyof each other. Data from a system to which no power issupplied appears as zeros when viewed from the othersystem. The data becomes 0 within 200 ms of the powerbeing switched off.
External dimensions
180 mm (wide) 150 mm (high) about 50 mm (deep)Fig. 9.10.2 (b) is an outline drawing of the unit.
Installation The unit, which is a stand–alone type, is installed in thepower magnetics cabinet. Fig. 9.10.2 (c) shows how tomount the unit.
Operating environment
Temperature : 0 to 60°CHumidity : 5 to 75% RH (non–condensing)Vibration : 0.5 G or less
Ordering information
Interface type Specification
Electrical–optical interface A20B–2000–0410
Electrical–electrical interface A20B–2000–0411
Optical–optical interface A20B–2000–0412
9.10.2Specification
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
324
LED indications
LED5(GREEN)
LED3(RED)
LED4(GREEN)
LED2(RED)
DC–DCCONVERT-
ER
CP2 CP1
+5V
LED1(RED)
0V
: Check pin
Fig. 9.10.2 (a) LED locations
LED status Description
LED1
Normal
1LED1
A RAM parity error occurred because of a hardwarefailure.
LED4 LED2
CP1 is supplied with the specified voltage.(Pilot lamp)
2LED4 LED2
CP1 is supplied with a voltage that is lower thanspecified or zero.
LED4 LED2
A communication error occurred in a channel of CP1.
LED5 LED3
CP2 is supplied with the specified voltage.(Pilot lamp)
3LED5 LED3
CP2 is supplied with a voltage that is lower thanspecified or zero.
LED5 LED3
A communication error occurred in a channel of CP2.
: On : Off
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
325
Unit: mm180
16010
30
5
90 150Printed–circuit board
Cable
50 or less
Cable Mounted components
Fig. 9.10.2 (b) Outline drawing
160
90
Unit: mm4–M4
Fig. 9.10.2 (c) Mounting location
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
326
(1)Connection diagram (example)
Externalpower (+24 V)
AC power input
Externalpower (+24 V)
AC power input
I/O Linkmaster
I/O Linkmaster
Optical I/OLink adapter
Electricalinterface
Optical interface
FANUC I/O Link connection unit(for electrical–optical interface)
(*) 1 or 2 (channel No.)
CP(*) CP(*)
: Signal cable (electrical)
: Signal cable (optical)
: Power supply cable
Additionally, the FANUC I/O Link connection unitframe must be grounded.
[Name of I/O Link connection unit connectors]
Electrical–electrical
Channel 1
Connector nameI/O Link interface
Channel 2
JD1A1
JD1B1
CP1 CP2
Electrical–optical
Channel 1
Connector nameI/O Link interface
Channel 2
JD1A1 COPA2
JD1B1 COPB2
CP1 CP2
Optical–optical
Channel 1
Connector nameI/O Link interface
Channel 2
COPA2
COPB2
CP1 CP2
JD1A2
JD1B2
COPA1
COPB1
JD1A(JD44A)
JD1A(JD44A)
JD1A(*)
JD1B(*)
COPA(*)
COPB(*)
9.10.3Connection
9.10.3.1I/O Link interface
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
327
(2)Signal cable (electrical)
0V RXB11 1
0V RXB12 2
0V TXB13 3
0V TXB14 4
0V15 5
0V16 6
17 7
–18 8
–19 9
–20 10
JD1A1/JD1A2
0V RXA11 1
0V RXA12 2
0V TXA13 3
0V TXA14 4
0V15 5
0V16 6
17 7
–18 8
–19 9
–20 10
JD1B1/JD1B2
This unit (JD1A1/JD1A2) Another device (JD1B)
Another device (JD1A) This unit (JD1B1/JD1B2)or
RXB (01)RXB (02)TXB (03)TXB (04)
(09)(18)(20)
0V (11)0V (12)0V (13)0V (14)0V (15)0V (16)
(03) TXA(04) TXA(01) RXA(02) RXA(09)(18)(20)(11) 0V(12) 0V(13) 0V(14) 0V(15) 0V(16) 0V
* * An optical I/O Link adapter can-not be connected to this unit,because the electrical interfacefor this unit cannot supply +5 V.To use an optical interface, pre-pare a appropriate unit.These wires can, therefore, beomitted.
Indicates a twisted pair.
ShieldingFrame ground (the shielding must be grounded at either end of the cable)
Cable–side connector specification : PCR–E20FA (manufactured by Honda Tsushin)
Cable specification : A66L–0001–0284#10P or equivalent
Cable length : 10 m (maximum)
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
328
(3)Signal cable (optical)
Optical cable specification : A66L–6001–0009#XXXX(where XXXX is a cable lengthspecification)Cable specification examples10 m – L10R03100 m – L100R3
Cable length : 200 m (maximum)
(4)Power supply cable
Y
X
+24V 0V
1 2 3
+24V 0V
CP1/CP2 connector
(Input)
(Output)
24 VDC is supplied via a Y–connector. Provided the power supplyhas sufficient capacity, power can be supplied to another devicewith the X–side as output.
Power must be supplied to both CP1 and CP2.
Cable–side connector specification
Y–connector: A63L–0001–0460#3LKY(AMP Japan, 2–178288–3)
X–connector: A63L–0001–0460#3LKX(AMP Japan, 1–178288–3)
Contact : A63L–0001–0456#BS (AMP Japan, 175218–5)
Ordering information : Y + 3 contacts : A02B–0120–K323X + 3 contacts : A02B–0120–K324
Cable material : Vinyl–insulated electrical wire AWG20–16
Cable length : Determine the length of the cable such that thesupplied voltage at the receiving end satisfiesthe requirements, because the voltage mayfluctuate and drop as a result of the resistanceof the cable conductor.
(5)Frame grounding
Ground the frame of the unit using a wire having a cross section of atleast 5.5 m2 (class 3 or higher). An M4 frame ground terminal isprovided.
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
329
The FANUC servo unit β series with I/O Link (called the β amplifier withI/O Link) is a power motion control servo unit that can be easily connectedto a CNC control unit via the FANUC I/O Link.The β amplifier with I/O Link can be connected to the i Series using theFANUC I/O Link.
NOTEUsing the β amplifier requires that the power mate CNCmanager software function be installed in the i Series. Thisfunction is included as one of the i Series option functions.Note that this function is not supported by the i Series withpersonal computer functions also requires an optional CNCscreen display function.
9.11CONNECTING THEFANUC SERVO UNITβ SERIES WITH I/OLINK
9.11.1Overview
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
330
The β amplifier with I/O Link is connected to the i Series using the usualFANUC I/O Link connection.
Control unit
IOLINKJD1A
JD1AI/OLINK
JD1BI/OLINK
I/O Link cable
I/O Linkcable
JD1BI/OLINK
FANUC SERVO UNIT β serieswith I/O Link
Connection to β series amplifier
This figure is an example of connecting toan i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted typepanel.
9.11.2Connection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
331
The maximum number of β amplifiers with I/O Link that can beconnected to a control unit depends on the maximum number of FANUCI/O Link points provided by that control unit, as well as their assignments.For the i Series, the maximum number of FANUC I/O Link DI and DOpoints are 1024 and 1024, respectively. One β amplifier with I/O Linkoccupies 128 DI/DO points in the FANUC I/O Link. If no units other thanthe β amplifiers with I/O Link are connected to the control unit, up to eightβ amplifiers can be connected.
If the β amplifier with I/O Link is used as an I/O Link slave, I/O addressesare assigned in the PMC in the CNC. Because data output from the slaveis made in 16–byte units, the number of input/output points must be setto 128.
The module names are OC02I (input) and OC02O (output).The BASE is always 0, and the SLOT is 1.
9.11.3Maximum Number ofUnits that can beConnected
9.11.4Address Assignmentby Ladder
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
332
The distribution I/O machine operator’s panel is of distribution I/O typethat is connected via I/O Link to the CNC. Its panel is the same as thatof the FS0 standard machine operator’s panel. The distribution I/Omachine operator’s panel has features both common to and different fromthose of the FS0 standard machine operator’s panel, as indicated below.
(Small machine operator’s panel)
Item FS0 standard machine operator’s panel
Distribution I/O machineoperator’s panel
Panel No design modificationOverriderotaryswitch
Emergencystop button
Programprotect key
Keyboard (key switch/LED)
Depth
Override 150% maximum, binary code output
200% maximum, gray code output
Key sheet The key sheet is compatible, so that a machine tool builder’scustom key sheet, designed for the FS0 standard machineoperator’s panel, can be used as is. When a new unit is to bebuilt using the existing key sheet and distribution I/O machineoperator’s panel, however, redesign is required for thiscombination.
Connection withCNC
DI/DO connection I/O Link connection
Emergency stop Already wired Not wired. Perform wiring forthe system as described inSection 9.12.5.
MPG interface None Up to three units can beconnected. However, only i series CNCscan be connected.
9.12CONNECTION OFTHE DISTRIBUTIONI/O MACHINEOPERATOR’S PANEL
9.12.1Differences betweenthe FS0 StandardMachine Operator’sPanel and DistributionI/O Machine OperatorPanel
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
333
(Standard–size machine operator’s panel)
Item FS0 standard machine operator’s panel
Distribution I/O machineoperator’s panel
Panel No design modificationProgram protect key
Overriderotaryswitch
Emergencystop button
Manual pulse generator Keyboard (key switch/LED)
Depth
Override 150% maximum, binary code output
200% maximum, gray code output
Key sheet The key sheet is compatible, so that a machine tool builder’scustom key sheet designed for the FS0 standard machineoperator’s panel, can be used as is. When a new unit is to bebuilt using the existing key sheet and distribution I/O machineoperator’s panel, however, redesign is required for thiscombination.
Connection withCNC
DI/DO connection I/O Link connection
Emergency stop Already wired Not wired. Perform wiringsuitable for the system asdescribed in Section 9.12.5.
Manual pulsegenerator
One unit is available. No wiring is performed.
One unit is available. No wiring is performed.
MPG interface None Up to three units can beconnected. However, only i series CNCscan be connected.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
334
CNC
Distribution I/O machineoperator’s panel
Emergency stop switch
General–purpose DI
General–purpose DO
+24 V power supply
+24 V power supply
I/O unit
NOTECNCs of the i series only allow the distribution I/O machineoperator ’s panel to be used with connected MPG units.When other units (such as I/O modules for connection) thathave an MPG interface and which are connected via I/OLink are used together with this machine operator’s panel,only the MPG interface of the unit (module) closest to theCNC on the I/O Link connection is valid. For I/O Linkconnection and manual pulse generator connection, thescrew connector indicated below, which has been newlyadded to the main board of the i series, cannot be used.
Connectors that cannot be used on the cable side
Specification Manufacturer
Connector case FI–20–CV7 Hirose Electric
Connector case + connector FI30–20S–CV7 Hirose Electric
9.12.2Overall ConnectionDiagram
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
335
(1)Small machine operator’s panel
Specification of the printed circuit board: A20B–8001–0721 (with general–purpose DO)
Viewed from behind
Printed circuit board
(2)Standard–size machine operator’s panel
Specification of the printed circuit board: A20B–8001–0721 (with general–purpose DO)
Viewed from behind
Printed circuit board
NOTEMachine operator’s panels shipped in April, 1998 and lateruse the A20B–8001–0721 printed circuit board. TheA20B–8001–0721 printed circuit board features ageneral–purpose DO, and has connector CE59 dedicatedto general–purpose DO. Machine operator’s panelsshipped before April, 1998, used the printed circuit boardslisted below.
9.12.3Connector MountingDiagram
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
336
Specification ofprinted circuit board
Description
A20B–8001–0210 Without general–purpose DO The other input/output interface specifications are
the same as those of the A20B–8001–0721printed circuit board.
The outer shape of the printed circuit board isrectangular.
A20B–8001–0720 Without general–purpose DO The other input/output interface specifications and
outer shape of the printed circuit board are thesame as those of the A20B–8001–0721 printedcircuit board.
To connector CPD1(IN) shown below, supply the power required for theoperator’s panel and general–purpose DI. To facilitate powerdistribution, the power applied to CPD1(IN) is directly output toCPD1(OUT). Use CPD1(OUT) if power distribution is required.Up to 1.0 A can be supplied by branching.
CPD1(IN)
CPD1(OUT)
(Connector table)
24 V powersupply
24 V powersupply
Connector recommended for use on the cable side: A02B–0120–K324(The following connector housing and case are provided:)
(Housing: 1–178288–3 (AMP Japan))(Contact: 1–175218–5 (AMP Japan))
NOTE1 Power connectors CPD1(IN) and CPD1(OUT) have the
same specification. On the actual printed circuit board, (IN)and (OUT) are not distinguished from each other.
2 During operation, never turn off the +24 V power supply tothe connector. Otherwise, a CNC communication alarm isissued. Ensure that +24 V is supplied either when or beforethe power to the CNC is turned on, and that the +24 V supplyis removed either when or after the power to the CNC isturned off.
9.12.4Power SupplyConnection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
337
The emergency stop switch is not wired when the unit leaves the factory.Perform wiring suitable for the system.For an emergency stop signal, a common pin and emergency stop signalpin are available with connectors CN1 and CM58 on the machineoperator’s panel. So, the wiring described below is recommended.
(1)When the emergency stop switch on the machine is not used, and onlythe emergency stop switch on the operator’s panel is usedConnect contact B of the emergency stop switch to pins 2 and 3 ofCN1.
Machine operator’s panel
Printed circuit board
Receiver
Connector recommended for use on the CN1 cable sideHousing: 2–178288–3 (AMP Japan), Contact: 1–175218–5 (AMP Japan)
(2)When the emergency stop switch on the machine and that on theoperator’s panel are usedConnect contact B of the emergency stop switch to pins 1 and 3 of CN1and to pins A9 and B16 of CM58.
Machine operator’s panel Machine
Printed circuit board
Receiver
Connector recommended for use on the CN1 cable side Housing: 2–178288–3 (AMP Japan), Contact: 1–175218–5 (AMP Japan)
Connector recommended for use on the CM58 cable sideHIF3BA–34DA–2.54R (Hirose Electric)
9.12.5Emergency Stop SignalConnection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
338
(3)When an emergency stop signal is output to other I/O
Other I/O Machine operator’s panel
Printed circuit board
Receiver
Receiver
NOTEIn the examples (1) and (2) above, an emergency stopsignal is applied to the DI address (Xm+2.4) tied to the 24Vcommon signal. So, allocate DI addresses as described inSection 9.12.12. For details of the wiring used to apply anemergency stop signal to a DI address other than Xm+2.4,see Sections 9.12.6 and 9.12.12. In the example of (3),Xm+2.4 can be used as a general–purpose DI address.
The machine operator’s panel has 24 general–purpose DI points. Theinterface is as follows:
Connector recommended for use on the CM58 cable side: HIF3BA–34D–2.54R (Hirose Electric)
9.12.6General–purpose DISignal Connection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
339
Pin number
Address numberBit number
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
340
Pin number
Address numberBit number
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
341
NOTE1 Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and Xm+3.0 to Xm+3.7 are DI points that
allows common selection. This means that by connectingthe DICOM1 pin (CM58–A02) and DICOM3 pin(CM58–B02) to +24 V, the DI signal whose logic is invertedcan be applied. In this case, however, if the cable is struckby lightning, it has the effect of turning on the DI signal. Forsafety reasons, therefore, the connection of the DICOM1and DICOM3 pins to 0 V is recommended wheneverpossible.
2 From the viewpoint of safety, an emergency stop signalneeds to assigned to the corresponding bit of addressesXm+2.0 to Xm+2.7 tied to the common signal. Determinethe location of an emergency stop signal as described inSection 9.12.12.
3 The unused DI points of addresses Xm+2.0 to Xm+2.7 tiedto the common signal are used as inputs tied to 0. Theunused DI points of addresses Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 andXm+3.0 to Xm+3.7 that allow common selection are inputsignals tied to 0 when the DICOM1 pin (CM58–A02) andDICOM3 pin (CM58–B02) are connected to 0 V; the unusedDI points are input signals tied to 1 when the DICOM1 pin(CM58–A02) and DICOM3 pin (CM58–B02) are connectedto +24 V. When the DICOM1 pin (CM58–A02) and DICOM3pin (CM58–B02) are open, the logic of the unused DI pointsat addresses Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.7 and Xm+3.0 to Xm+3.7 isundefined.
4 An output DC voltage of +24 V at CD58 (A17) and (B17) isfor DI signals. Do not supply 24 VDC to these pins from theoutside.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
342
(Note)
Pin number
Bit numberPin number
+24 V powersupply
Relay
Cable recommended for use on the CE59 cable side: HIF3BA–20D–2.54R (Hirose Electric)
NOTEWith the small machine operator’s panel, all of the eightgeneral–purpose DO points indicated above can be used.With the standard–size machine operator’s panel, only thefive general–purpose DO points enclosed in the boldrectangle can be used.
9.12.7General–purpose DOSignal Connection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
343
See Section 9.4.15.
A relay terminal is used to relay signals on the machine operator’s panel.Relayed signals are not output to the CNC via I/O Link. An example ofusing a relay terminal to relay a power ON/OFF control signal is providedhere.
Machine operator’s panel
Printed circuit board Input unitON switch
OFF switch
Connector recommended for use on the CN2 cable side:Housing: 2–178288–3 (AMP Japan), Contact: 1–175218–5 (AMP Japan)
Connector recommended for use on the CM58 cable side:Housing: HIF3BA–34DA–2.54R (Hirose Electric)
9.12.8Manual PulseGenerator Connection
9.12.9Relay TerminalConnection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
344
(Small machine operator’s panel)The relationship of the keyboard key switches and LED I/O addresses isas follows:
Key/LED
Key switch/LED arrangement
Address
NOTET series: 42 keysM series: 46 keysOn the machine operator’s panel of the T series, the keysenclosed in the bold rectangles are not available.
9.12.10Keyboard Addresses
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
345
(Standard–size machine operator’s panel)The relationship between the keyboard key switches and LED I/Oaddresses is as follows:
Key/LED
Key switch/LED arrangement
Address
NOTE53 keys for both the T series and M series
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
346
DI address Signal Name
Xm+0.0 *OVA Override signal
Xm+0.1 *OVB(Note)
Xm+0.2 *OVC
Xm+0.3 *OVD
Xm+0.4 *OVE
Xm+0.5 KEY Program protect signal
NOTEOverride signal (*OVA to *OVE)
Gray codes are output according to the table below.
% 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200
*OVA 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
*OVB 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
*OVC 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
*OVD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
*OVE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
9.12.11Other SignalAddresses
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
347
The I/O address maps of the distribution I/O machine operator’s panel areas follows:
DI space map DO space map
Xm Override, etc. Yn
Xm+1 Yn+1
Xm+2 General–purposeDI signals
Yn+2
Xm+3DI signals
Yn+3 Keyboard (LED)
Xm+4 Yn+4General–purposeDO signals
Xm+5 Yn+5
Xm+6 Yn+6
Xm+7 Keyboard Yn+7
Xm+8
Keyboard (key switch)
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (first MPG)
Xm+13 (second MPG) MPG
Xm+14 (third MPG)
Xm+15 Not used
With the distribution I/O machine operator’s panel, basically allocate agroup of 16 bytes as a DI area, and allocate a group of 8 bytes as a DO area.The reason for this is described below. The MPG interface (MPG counter)uses Xm+12 through Xm+14 of the DI space. These addresses are fixed.Xm+12 through Xm+14 must be allocated before the MPG interfaces canbe used. So, when using MPG interfaces with the i series, allocate a groupof 16 bytes as a DI area. The value of an MPG counter is directlyprocessed by the CNC, so the ladder must not use this area.When MPG interfaces are not used, the DI area may be allocated to otherI/O groups.
9.12.12Allocation
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
348
Basically, arbitrary I/O addresses can be allocated on the distribution I/Omachine operator’s panel. For connection with the fixed addressesdirectly monitored by the CNC, however, DI addresses must be allocatedas indicated below.Fixed addresses directly monitored by the CNC (with FS21i/210i)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X0004 SKIP ESKIPSKIP6
–MIT2SKIP5
+MIT2SKIP4
–MIT1SKIP3
+MIT1SKIP2
ZAESKIP8
XAESKIP7
SKIP ESKIPSKIP6
SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 ZAESKIP2
YAESKIP8
XAESKIP7
X0005
X0006
X0007
X0008 *ESP
X0009 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
The upper row is for the T series, while the lower row is for the M series.
Example) When 16 bytes, starting from X0006, are allocated as DI addresses
X0006 Override, etc.
X0007
X0008General–purpose
input signals
X0009
input signals
X0010
X0012
X0013
X0014Keyboard
(key switch input
X0015signals)
X0016
X0017
X0018 (first MPG)
X0019 (second MPG) MPG
X0020 (third MPG)
X0021 Not used
Fixed signal of *DECn#2
Fixed signal of *ESP
Fixed signal of *DECn#1
When addresses startingfrom X0006 are allocated, thefixed signals of *DECn#1 andDECn#2 can be used, andthe fixed signal of *ESP canbe used after allocation at anaddress tied to the 24 V com-mon signal. However, fixed signals suchas SKIP cannot be used. Al-locate addresses accordingto this example when employ-ing the wiring shown in Sec-tion 9.12.5. (No fixed signal can be allo-cated to the key switch inputsection.)
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
349
Ambient temperature Operation: 0°C to 58°C Storage and transportation: –20°C to 60°C
Temperature change 1.1°C/minute maximum
Humidity Normal condition: 75% (relative humidity)Short term (no more than one month): 95% (relativehumidity)
Vibration Operation: 0.5 G or less
Atmosphere Normal machining factory environment (For use in anenvironment with relatively high levels of dust, coolant,organic solutions, and so forth, special consideration isrequired.)
Name Ordering code Remarks
Distribution A02B–0236–C141#TBS Small, used for T, symbol key sheetI/O machineoperator’s A02B–0236–C141#TBR Small, used for T, English key sheetpanel
A02B–0236–C141#MBS Small, used for M, symbol key sheet
A02B–0236–C141#MBR Small, used for M, English key sheet
DistributionI/O machine
A02B–0236–C140#TBS Standard–size, used for T, symbol key sheet
operator’spanel A02B–0236–C140#TBR Standard–size, used for T,
English key sheet
A02B–0236–C140#MBS Standard–size, used for M, symbol key sheet
A02B–0236–C140#MBR Standard–size, used for M, English key shee
Fuse(accessory)
A03B–0815–K001 1A
9.12.13Specifications
Setting environment
Ordering information
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
350
Item Specifications Remarks
Number of general–purpose DI points
24 points 24 V input
Number of general–purpose DO points
Small machine operator’s panel: 8 pointsStandard–size machine operator’s panel: 5 points
24 V output
Key switch Small machine operator’s panel: 42 keys (for T)
46 keys (for M)Standad–size machine operator’s panel: 53 keys (common to T and M)
Sheet key type.Matrix DI.
LED Red Attached to all key switches.Matrix DO.
Override rotary switch 5 bits Gray code output
Emergency stop switch 1 bit
Program protect key 1 bit
MPG interface 3 units maximum Usable only with i seriesCNCs
Interface with CNC FANUC I/O Link connection Up to 16 units as CNC slaves. Expandable upto 1024/1024 points.
Manual pulse generator
1 unit Standard–size machineoperator’s panel only
Power supply voltage Power supply capacity Remarks
24 VDC 10% is fed from the powerconnector CPD1; 10% includes momentary variations and ripples.
0.4A All DI signal consumptionis included.
Machine operator’spanel specifications
Power supply capacity
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
351
Contact capacity 30 VDC. 16 mA or more
Leakage current between contacts when opened
1 mA or less (26.4 V)
Voltage decrease betweencontacts when closed
2 V or less (including voltage drop in the cable)
Delay The receiver delay is 2 ms (maximum). In addition,[I/O Link transfer time between CNC and machineoperator’s panel (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scanperiod (depending on CNC)] must be considered.
Maximum load current when ON
200 mA or less including momentary variations
Saturation voltage when ON
1 V (maximum) when the load current is 200 mA
Withstand voltage 24 V +20% or less including momentary variations
Leakage current when OFF 20 µA or less
Delay time The driver delay is 50 s (maximum). In addition,[I/O Link transfer time between CNC and I/Omodule (2 ms maximum)] + [ladder scan period(depending on CNC)] needs to be considered.
NOTEThe maximum current for each of the DOCOM power supplypins for the DO signals must not exceed 0.7 A.
General–purpose DIsignal specifications
General–purpose DOsignal specifications
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
352
The keyboard of the machine operator’s panel employs a matrixconfiguration. If three or more keys are simultaneously entered in thematrix DI configuration, a DI signal is erroneously entered due to anabnormal current flow. A countermeasure for this malfunction can beimplemented using a ladder program.
(Protection against malfunction)
If three or more keys are entered in the matrix DI configuration, all keyinputs after the first two are invalidated. If there are no additional keyinputs after three or more invalidated key inputs, and if the total numberof inputs is two or less, all key inputs that have been performed up to thattime are valid.
Common line 1 (Xm+4)
Common line 2 (Xm+5)
Common line 3 (Xm+6)
Common line 4 (Xm+7)
Common line 5 (Xm+8)
Common line 6 (Xm+9)
Common line 7 (Xm+10)
Common line 8 (Xm+11)
Dat
a lin
e 7
(bit
7)
Dat
a lin
e 6
(bit
6)
Dat
a lin
e 5
(bit
5)
Dat
a lin
e 4
(bit
4)
Dat
a lin
e 3
(bit
3)
Dat
a lin
e 2
(bit
2)
Dat
a lin
e 1
(bit
1)
Dat
a lin
e 0
(bit
0)
State (a)
Common line 1 (Xm+4)
Common line 2 (Xm+5)
Common line 3 (Xm+6)
Common line 4 (Xm+7)
Common line 5 (Xm+8)
Common line 6 (Xm+9)
Common line 7 (Xm+10)
Common line 8 (Xm+11)
Dat
a lin
e 7
(bit
7)
Dat
a lin
e 6
(bit
6)
Dat
a lin
e 5
(bit
5)
Dat
a lin
e 4
(bit
4)
Dat
a lin
e 3
(bit
3)
Dat
a lin
e 2
(bit
2)
Dat
a lin
e 1
(bit
1)
Dat
a lin
e 0
(bit
0)
State (b)
Common line 1 (Xm+4)
Common line 2 (Xm+5)
Common line 3 (Xm+6)
Common line 4 (Xm+7)
Common line 5 (Xm+8)
Common line 6 (Xm+9)
Common line 7 (Xm+10)
Common line 8 (Xm+11)
Dat
a lin
e 7
(bit
7)
Dat
a lin
e 6
(bit
6)
Dat
a lin
e 5
(bit
5)
Dat
a lin
e 4
(bit
4)
Dat
a lin
e 3
(bit
3)
Dat
a lin
e 2
(bit
2)
Dat
a lin
e 1
(bit
1)
Dat
a lin
e 0
(bit
0)
State (c)
Common line 1 (Xm+4)
Common line 2 (Xm+5)
Common line 3 (Xm+6)
Common line 4 (Xm+7)
Common line 5 (Xm+8)
Common line 6 (Xm+9)
Common line 7 (Xm+10)
Common line 8 (Xm+11)
Dat
a lin
e 7
(bit
7)
Dat
a lin
e 6
(bit
6)
Dat
a lin
e 5
(bit
5)
Dat
a lin
e 4
(bit
4)
Dat
a lin
e 3
(bit
3)
Dat
a lin
e 2
(bit
2)
Dat
a lin
e 1
(bit
1)
Dat
a lin
e 0
(bit
0)
State (d)
Common line 1 (Xm+4)
Common line 2 (Xm+5)
Common line 3 (Xm+6)
Common line 4 (Xm+7)
Common line 5 (Xm+8)
Common line 6 (Xm+9)
Common line 7 (Xm+10)
Common line 8 (Xm+11)
Dat
a lin
e 7
(bit
7)
Dat
a lin
e 6
(bit
6)
Dat
a lin
e 5
(bit
5)
Dat
a lin
e 4
(bit
4)
Dat
a lin
e 3
(bit
3)
Dat
a lin
e 2
(bit
2)
Dat
a lin
e 1
(bit
1)
Dat
a lin
e 0
(bit
0)
State (e)
Common line 1 (Xm+4)
Common line 2 (Xm+5)
Common line 3 (Xm+6)
Common line 4 (Xm+7)
Common line 5 (Xm+8)
Common line 6 (Xm+9)
Common line 7 (Xm+10)
Common line 8 (Xm+11)
Dat
a lin
e 7
(bit
7)
Dat
a lin
e 6
(bit
6)
Dat
a lin
e 5
(bit
5)
Dat
a lin
e 4
(bit
4)
Dat
a lin
e 3
(bit
3)
Dat
a lin
e 2
(bit
2)
Dat
a lin
e 1
(bit
1)
Dat
a lin
e 0
(bit
0)
State (f)
Key switch off (“0”) Key switch on (“1”)
9.12.14Other Notes
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
353
(Ladder operation)The following provides examples of ladder operation based on the DImatrix of 8 (bits) 8 (common), indicated on the next page.
(1)The number of data lines where keys are entered is checked.The OR (R1) of the data of all the addresses is found. Among the eightbits of the R1 data, the number of bits set to 1 represents the numberof data lines where keys are entered.
1 The R1 data is compared with 00h. If a match is found, the numberof R1 data bits set to 1 is 0.
Example) State (a): R1 = (00000000) The number of data lines where keys are entered is 0.
2 The R1 data is compared with the data tables below. If the R1 datamatches the data in data table 1, the number of R1 data bits set to1 is 1. Similarly, if the R1 data matches the data in data table 2, thenumber of R1 data bits set to 1 is 2.
Example) State (b) or (c): R1 = (00000100) The number of data lines where keys are entered is 1.
Example) State (d) or (e): R1 = (00010100) The number of lines where keys are entered is 2.
3 If the R1 data is not 00h, and does not match the data of either datatable, the number of R1 data bits set to 1 is 3 or more.
Example) State (f): R1 = (00110100) The number of lines where keys are entered is 3.
00000001 00000010
00000100 00001000
00010000 00100000
01000000 10000000
00000011 00000110 00001100 00011000
00110000 01100000 11000000 10000001
00000101 00001010 00010100 00101000
01010000 10100000 01000001 10000010
00001001 00010010 00100100 01001000
10010000 00100001 01000010 10000100
Data table 1 Data table 2
(2)Decision 1
1 When there is no line where keys are entered No key switch is pressed.
Example) State (a)
2 When there are two or less lines where keys are entered Go to (3)
3 When there are three or more lines where keys are entered Three or more keys are entered. This case is invalid.
Example) State (f)
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
354
(3)When there are two or less data lines where keys are entered, whethermultiple keys are entered on a data line is checked.The data of all addresses are subtracted from the OR (R1) to obtainresult R2. When R2 = 00h, there is no data line where multiple keysare entered.
Example) When there is one data line where a key is enteredState (b): R2 = FChState (c): R2 = F8h
When there are two data lines where keys are enteredState (d): R2 = 00hState (e): R2 = FCh
(4)Decision 2
1 When R2 = 00h
There are two or less data lines where keys are entered, and nomultiple keys are entered on a data line. In this case, the totalnumber of keys entered is 1 or 2, thus representing valid keyinput. Example) State (d)
2 When R2 00h
There are two or less data lines where keys are entered, andmultiple keys are entered on a data line. Go to (5).
(5)Decision 3
1 When there is one data line where keys are entered Go to (6).
2 When there are two data lines where keys are entered
Three or more keys are entered, thus representing invalid keyinput. Example) State (e)
(6)The result of subtraction (R2) is added to the OR (R1). When the resultof addition is 00h, the total number of keys entered is 2.
Example) State (b): R1 + R2 = 04h + FCh = 00hState (c): R1 + R2 = 04h + F8h = FCh
(7)Decision 4
1 When R1 + R2 = 00h
There is one data line where keys are entered, and two keys areentered on the data line. This means that the total number ofkeys entered is 2, representing valid key input.Example) State (b)
2 R1 + R2 00h
Three or more keys are entered on a data line, thus representinginvalid key input.Example) State (c)
(8)Only when valid key input is confirmed by decisions 1 through 4, allDI data (Xm+4 to Xm+11) is used by the ladder program.
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
355
Program protect key
Override rotary switch Emergency stop switch
Key switches(sheet keys)The circle on eachkey switch repre-sents an LED (red).
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossed
Fig. 9.12.15 (a) Front view of machine operator’s panel for small unit (T series)
9.12.15Operator’s Panel
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
356
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossed
Fig. 9.12.15 (b) Front view of machine operator’s panel for small unit (M series)
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
357
Override rotary switch
Program protect key
Emergency stop button
Manual pulsegenerator
Key switches(sheet keys)The circle on eachkey switch repre-sents an LED (red).
(Coo
rdin
ate)
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossed
Fig. 9.12.15 (c) Front view of machine operator’s panel for standard unit (T series)
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
358
(Coo
rdin
ate)
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossed
Fig. 9.12.15 (d) Front view of machine operator’s panel for standard unit (M series)
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
359
(1)M series, full keypad
(2)M series, small keypad
Symbol indication onmachine operator’spanelFront view of the keysheets
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
360
(3)T series, full keypad
(4)T series, small keypad
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
361
English indication
Symbol indication
Meaning of key
AUTO AUTO mode selection signal: Sets automaticoperation mode.
EDIT EDIT mode selection signal: Sets program editmode.
MDI MDI mode selection: Sets MDI mode.
JOG JOG feed mode selection: Sets jog feed mode.
INCJOG
Step feed mode selection: Sets step feed mode.
MPG Manual handle feed mode selection: Setsmanual handle feed mode.
MPGX1
First handle selection in manual handle feedmode: Sets manual handle feed mode, thenenables the first handle.
MPGX2
Second handle selection in manual handle feedmode: Sets manual handle feed mode, thenenables the second handle.
HOME Reference position return mode selection: Setsreference position return mode.
TEACH Teach–in jog (teach–in handle) mode selectionsignal: Sets teach–in jog (teach–in handle)mode.
OFSETMESUR
Offset write mode selection signal: Sets tooloffset value setting mode.
?NC
NC alarm signal (output only): Turns on the LEDlamp on the button when an alarm is issued onthe NC.
?MC
Machine alarm signal (output only): Turns on theLED on the button when an alarm is issued onthe machine.
SINGLBLOCK
Single block signal: Executes programs one byone. This key is used to check a program.
BLOCKDELET
Block delete (optional block skip): Skips theexecution of the blocks starting with the firstblock prefixed with / and ending with the end ofblock (;) when this button is pressed duringautomatic operation.
Meanings of keys
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
362
English indication
Meaning of keySymbol indication
PRGSTOP
Program stop (output only): Turns on the LED onthe button when automatic operation is stoppedby M00 specified in the program.
OPTSTOP
Optional stop: Stops automatic operation afterexecution of the block of a program where M01is specified, when this button is pressed.
DRYRUN
Dry run: Sets the axis feedrate to the jog feedrateinstead of a programmed feedrate whenautomatic operation is performed by setting thisbutton to on. This function is used to check onlythe movement of the tool when no workpiece ismounted.
PRGTEST
Machine lock: Updates only position display onthe screen without making any axis movement,when automatic operation is performed bysetting this button to on. This function is used tocheck a program.
MPGX
Manual handle feed X–axis selection: Performsmovement along the X–axis when this button isset to on in manual handle feed mode. (Thesame operation is performed for the Y–axis,Z–axis, C–axis, and four axes).
WORKLIGHT
Workpiece light: Illuminates the workpiece.
MPGINTRT
Manual handle interrupt: Adds the amount oftravel made by turning the manual handle to theamount of travel specified in the program, whenthis button is set to on in manual operation.
AXISINHBT
Axis movement inhibition: Inhibits movement ona particular axis or all axes.
LOWX1
Upper) Jog feed (step feed) override: Overridesjog feed (or step feed).Five–step indication
MEDLX10
Lower) Manual handle feed magnification:Magnification for manual handle feed.Magnified by 1, 10, 100, 1000.
MEDX100
etc.
+X Manual feed axis direction selection: Performsmovement along the selected axis in theselected direction by jog feed (or step feed) whenthis button is set to on in the jog feed mode (orstep feed mode). (The same operation isperformed for –X, +Y, –Y, +Z, and so forth.)
TRVRS Traverse: Performs jog feed at rapid traverserate when this button is set to on.
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
363
English indication
Meaning of keySymbol indication
CYCLESTART
Cycle start: Starts automatic operation.
CYCLESTOP
Cycle stop: Stops automatic operation.
CLNTON
Coolant on: Start the supply of coolant.
CLNTOFF
Coolant off: Stops the supply of coolant.
CLNTAUTO
Coolant automatic: Starts and stops the supplyof coolant automatically.
SPDL100%
Spindle override 100%: Sets an override of100% for the spindle motor speed.
SPDLDEC
Spindle deceleration: Decelerates the spindlemotor rotation.
SPDLINC
Spindle acceleration: Accelerates the spindlemotor rotation.
SPDLCW
Positive spindle rotation direction: Rotates thespindle motor in the positive direction.
SPDLCCW
Negative spindle rotation direction: Rotates thespindle motor in the negative direction.
SPDLSTOP
Spindle stop: Stops the spindle motor rotation.
SPDLJOG
Manual spindle feed: Rotates the spindle motormanually.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
364
Machine operator’s panel is connected with i series CNC by I/O Link,which is composed by some following operator’s panels.
Main panel A/A1
This operator’s panel incorporated with MDI with full alphabet keys.And that has 55 keys. All key tops are detachable. MTB can customizekeys and make his original key layout easily.
Main panel B/B1
The part of keyboard of machine operation in Main panel A.
Sub panel A
This operator’s panel has power ON/OFF, emergency stop, programprotect, and two rotary switches.
Sub panel B
This operator’s panel has emergency stop, program protect, and rotaryswitch.
Sub panel C
This operator’s panel has power ON/OFF, emergency stop, programprotect, rotary switch, and MPG.
Sub panel B1
This operator’s panel has emergency stop, program protect, two rotaryswitches.
Sub panel C1
This operator’s panel has emergency stop, program protect, two rotaryswitches, and MPG.
9.13CONNECTION TOMACHINEOPERATOR’S PANEL
9.13.1Overview
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
365
290
10.4” LCD
Main panel A
Sub panel A
Main panel B Sub panel B
Main panel B Sub panel C
Unit=mm
220
600
300
80
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
366
+24V Power
General–purpose DI/DO
Next I/O unit
CNC
MDI(CA55)
I/O Link(JD1A)(JD44A)
+24V Power
Main panel A/B/A1/B1
CM68
CM69
JA3
MDI
CNK1
Keyboard
JD1B
JD1A
MPG
MPG
MPG
Pendant type MPGJA58
CM65
CM66
CM67CA65Power magnetic cabinet
CA64(IN)
CA64(OUT)
MDI Unit
CNK1
CNK2
CNK2
Soft key cable
Sub panel A, B, B1, C, or C1
NOTE1 i series CNC is only possible to use the MPG interface on this operator’s panel. If i series CNC
uses some I/O unit having MPG interface (ex. Dispersion type I/O module for panel) and thisoperator ’s panel, the MPG interface nearest the CNC is only available on the I/O Linkconnection.
2 MPG cannot be connected with either of JA3 and JA58.3 Connect FANUC standard MDI unit in case of Main panel B/B1.
9.13.2Total ConnectionDiagram
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
367
3 2 0V 1 +24V
6 5 0V 4 +24V
CA64 (Power source)
Recommended connector for cable:Housing : AMP 1–178288–3 (3 pins type)Contact : AMP 1–175218–5
CM67 (ON/OFF, Program protect, ESP)
Recommended connector for cable:Housing : AMP 178289–5Contact : AMP 1–175218–5
CM65 (General–purpose DI)
Recommended connector for cable:Hirose electric : HIF3BA–10D–2.54R
Recommended connector for cable:Housing : AMP 178289–8Contact : AMP 1–175218–5
A01 EON B01 EOFF
A02 COM1 B02 COM2
A03 Xm+1.4 B03 KEYCOM
A04 *ESP B04 ESPCM1
A05 TR1 B05 TR2
A01 B01
A02 B02 Xm+0.5
A03 Xm+0.1 B03 Xm+0.3
A04 +24V B04 Xm+0.4
A05 Xm+0.2 B05 Xm+0.0
A01 +24V B01 Xm+1.5
A02 Xm+1.6 B02 Xm+1.7
A03 Xm+2.0 B03 Xm+2.1
A04 Xm+2.2 B04 Xm+2.3
A05 Xm+2.4 B05 Xm+2.5
A06 TR3 B06 TR4
A07 TR5 B07 TR6
A08 Yn+5.3 B08 Yn+5.7
A09 Yn+6.3 B09 Yn+6.7
A10 DOCOM B10 0V
CM66 (General–purpose DI)
Recommended connector for cable:Hirose electric : HIF3BA–10D–2.54R
CM69 (General–purpose DI/DO)
Recommended connector for cable:Housing : AMP 178289–8Contact : AMP 1–175218–5
A01 B01
A02 B02 Xm+1.3
A03 Xm+0.7 B03 Xm+1.1
A04 +24V B04 Xm+1.2
A05 Xm+1.0 B05 Xm+0.6
A01 +24V B01 Xm+2.6
A02 Xm+2.7 B02 Xm+3.0
A03 Xm+3.1 B03 Xm+3.2
A04 Xm+3.3 B04 Xm+3.4
A05 Xm+3.5 B05 Xm+3.6
A06 Xm+3.7 B06 DICOM
A07 TR7 B07 TR8
A08 Yn+7.3 B08 Yn+7.4
A09 Yn+7.5 B09 Yn+7.6
A10 DOCOM B10 0V
CA65 (Power magnetic cabinet)
Recommended connector for cable:Hirose electric : HIF3BA–20D–2.54R
A01 EON B01 EOFF
A02 COM1 B02 COM2
A03 *ESP B03 ESPCM1
A04 TR1 B04 TR2
A05 TR3 B05 TR4
A06 TR5 B06 TR6
A07 TR7 B07 TR8
A08 B08
A09 B09
A10 B10
CM68 (General–purpose DI/DO)
9.13.3Each Connections
9.13.3.1Pin assignment
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
368
NOTEInput/output Pins shaded by are in pairs. Only one in each pair is usable.Pins shaded by are those for forwarding signals. Pins with the same name are connecteddirectly to one another.
JA3 (Manual pulse generator)
1 HA1 11
2 HB1 12 0V
3 HA2 13
4 HB2 14 0V
5 HA3 15
6 HB3 16 0V
7 17
8 18 +5V
9 +5V 19
10 20 +5V
JA58 (Pendant type manual pulse generator)
1 HA1 11 Xm+1.5
2 HB1 12 0V
3 Xm+2.2 13 Xm+1.6
4 Xm+2.3 14 0V
5 Xm+2.4 15 Xm+1.7
6 Xm+2.5 16 0V
7 Yn+5.3 17 Xm+2.0
8 Xm+2.1 18 +5V
9 +5V 19 +24V
10 +24V 20 +5V
Recommended connector for cable of JA3 and JA58When the depth of the operator’s panel is 60mm min.
Recommended connector for cable:Hirose electric : FI30–20S (Connector)
FI–20–CV7 (Case)When the depth of the operator’s panel is 80mm min.
Recommended connector for cable of JA3:Hirose electric : FI40B–2015S (Connector)
FI–20–CV (Case)Recommended connector for cable of JA58:Honda : PCR–E20FA (Connector)
PCR–V20LA (Case)Hirose electric : FI30–20S (Connector)
FI–20–CV2 (Case)Fujitsu : FCN–247J020–G/E (Connector)
FCN–240C020–Y/S (Case)Molex : 52622–2011 (Connector)
52624–2015 (Case)
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
369
CA64 (IN)
CA64 (OUT)
+24V0V
+24V0V+24V power
+24V power
010203
010203
NOTE1 Both connectors CA64(IN) and CA64(OUT) are same
specification. And there is not indication of (IN) and (OUT)on the PCB.
2 Power supply for the operator’s panel must not turn off atoperation. If +24V is turned off at operation, CNC happento get system alarm(Communication alarm between CNCand operator’s panel). +24V for operator’s panel must besupplied before or same time CNC power on.
9.13.3.2Power supplyconnection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
370
*KEY00 *KEY02*KEY01 *KEY03*KEY04 *KEY06*KEY05 *KEY07*COM00 *COM02*COM01 *COM03*COM04 *COM06*COM05 *COM07*COM08 *COM10*COM09 *COM11
1 *KEY00 11 *KEY0122 *KEY02 12 *KEY0333 *KEY04 13 *KEY0544 *KEY06 14 *KEY0755 *COM00 15 *COM0166 *COM02 16 *COM0377 *COM04 17 *COM0588 *COM06 18 *COM0799 *COM08 19 *COM09
1010 *COM10 20 *COM11
CNK1(PCR E20MDK–SL–A)
Recommended connector for cable of CA55:Japan Aviation ElectronicsLY10–DC20 (Housing)LY10–C2–3 (Contact)A02B–0236–K303
Recommended connector for cable of CNK1:HIROSE ElectricFI30–20S (Connector)FI–20–CV7 (Case)
Recommended cable specification:A02B–0236–K812 (25 cm)A02B–0236–K813 (45 cm)Recommended wire specification:A66L–0001–0284#10P (#AWG2810 pairs)
*KEY00*KEY02*KEY01*KEY03*KEY04*KEY06*KEY05*KEY07
*COM00*COM02*COM01*COM03*COM04*COM06*COM05*COM07*COM08*COM10*COM09*COM11
CNK1
SHIELDGROUNDING PLATE
*KEY00*KEY02*KEY01*KEY03*KEY04*KEY06*KEY05*KEY07*COM00*COM02*COM01*COM03*COM04*COM06*COM05*COM07*COM08*COM10*COM09*COM11
A1B1A2B2A3B3A4B4B5A5A6B6A7B7A8B8A9B9A10B10
12
1112
34
1314
56
1516
78
1718
9101920
CA55(JAE LY20–20P–DTI–P)
112233445566778899
1010
1A BP
CNK2
CNC Main panel A/A1
Soft key cable
CA55
NOTEFor MDI cable connector mating on the CA55 side, a simple lock mechanism is employed.Ensure that a load greater than 1kg is not applied to the connectors. Moreover, clamp the cableso that excessive force is not applied due to vibration. However, shielding and clamping are notrequired for a cable of up to 50 cm.
9.13.3.3MDI connection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
371
Control unit preceding slave unit Main panel A/B/A1/B1
Next slaveunit
When the depth of the operator’s panel is 60mm min.Recommended connector for cable:Hirose electric : FI30–20S (Connector)
FI–20–CV7 (Case)When the depth of the operator’s panel is 80mm min.
Recommended connector for cable:Honda : PCR–E20FA (Connector)
PCR–V20LA (Case)Hirose electric : FI30–20S (Connector)
FI–20–CV2 (Case)Fujitsu : FCN–247J020–G/E (Connector)
FCN–240C020–Y/S (Case)Molex : 52622–2011 (Connector)
52624–2015 (Case)
1 SIN 11 0V2 *SIN 12 0V3 SOUT 13 0V4 *SOUT 14 0V5 156 167 178 18 (+5V)9 (+5V) 1910 20 (+5V)
1 SIN 11 0V2 *SIN 12 0V3 SOUT 13 0V4 *SOUT 14 0V5 156 167 178 18 (+5V)9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V)
JD1A(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)
JD1B(PCR–E20MDK–SL–A)JD1B JD1A
JD1A
SHIELD
GROUNDING PLATE
SIN*SIN
SOUT*SOUT
0V0V0V0V
123411121314
SOUT*SOUTSIN*SIN0V0V0V0V
341211121314
+5V terminals are for an optical I/O Link adapter. They are not necessary when connecting witha metal cable.A line for the +5V terminal is not required when the Optical I/O Link Adapter is not used.
Recommended wire material:A66L–0001–0284#10P (AWG2810 pairs)
Recommended connector for cable of JD1A and JD1B on Main panel A/B/A1/B1
JD1B
9.13.3.4I/O link connection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
372
A signal generated by the emergency stop switch on the machineoperator’s panel can be sent to the power magnetic cabinet. (This signalcannot be sent to the FANUC I/O Link.)When MTB uses the Sub panel A/B/B1/C/C1, wiring to the emergencystop switch is contained in the Sub panel A/B/B1/C/C1.
Machine operator’s panel
Sub panel A/B/B1/C/C1Emergency stopSwitch (SB1)
*ESP
ESPCM1
Main panel A/B/A1/B1
P.C.BCM67 CA65
A04 A03
B04 B03
*ESP
&$
*ESP
+24V
(2a2b)
Power magnetic cabnet
Signal generated by the power ON/OFF control switches on the machineoperator’s panel can be sent to the power magnetic cabinet. (This signalcannot be sent to the FANUC I/O Link.)When MTB uses the Sub panel A/C/C1, wiring to the ON/OFF controlswitches are contained in the Sub panel A/C/C1.
Machine operator’s panel
Sub panel A/C/C1
ON switch (SB2)
OFF switch (SB3)
EON
COM1
EOFF
COM2
Main panel A/B/A1/B1
P.C.B.CM67 CA65
A01
A02
B01
B02
A02
B01
B02
A01 EON
COM
EOFF
Power magnetic cabnet
9.13.3.5Emergency stop signalconnection
9.13.3.6Power ON/OFF controlsignal connection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
373
+24VCM68(A1),CM69(A1),JA58(10),JA58(19)
Pin number
Xm+0.0
Xm+0.1
Xm+0.2
Xm+0.3
Xm+0.4
Xm+0.5
Xm+0.6
Xm+0.7
Xm+1.0
Xm+1.1
Xm+1.2
Xm+1.3
Xm+1.4
Xm+1.5
Xm+1.6
Xm+1.7
Address number
BitSub panel A
Memory protect
(SA3)
RV
RV
+24V
CM65(A04)
CM65(B05)
CM65(A03)
CM65(A05)
CM65(B03)
CM65(B04)
CM65(B02)
CM66(A04)
CM66(B05)
CM66(A03)
CM66(A05)
CM66(B03)
CM66(B04)
CM66(B02)
CM67(B03)
CM67(A03)
JA58(11)
CM68(B01)
JA58(13)
CM68(A02)
JA58(15)
CM68(B02)
D
A
F
B
E
C
G
Rotary switch(SA1)
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
D
A
F
B
E
C
G
Rotary switch(SA2)
9.13.3.7DI (input signal)connection
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
374
NOTEConnection of Xm+0.0 to Xm+0.7, Xm+1.0 to Xm+1.4 shows when the Sub panel A is used.
RV
JA58(17)CM68(A03)
0V
Pin numberAddress number
Bit
JA58(8)CM68(B03)JA58(3)CM68(A04)
JA58(4)CM68(B04)
JA58(5)CM68(A05)
JA58(6)CM68(B05)
CM69(B01)
CM69(A02)
CM69(B02)
CM69(A03)
CM69(B03)
CM69(A04)
CM69(B04)
CM69(A05)
CM69(B05)
CM69(A06)
CM69(B06)
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
RV
Xm+2.0
Xm+2.1
Xm+2.2
Xm+2.3
Xm+2.4
Xm+2.5
Xm+2.6
Xm+2.7
Xm+3.0
Xm+3.1
Xm+3.2
Xm+3.3
Xm+3.4
Xm+3.5
Xm+3.6
Xm+3.7
DICOM
+24V
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
375
NOTE1 Xm+3.0 to 3.7 have a common line that is possible to select the source/sink type. If DICOM
(CM69–B06pin) is connected to +24V, the DI signal logic is negative. But in this connection,if the DI signal wires happen to drop the ground level, the status of the DI signal is same as theDI signal is ”ON”. From the safety viewpoint, DICOM should be connected 0V.
2 From the safety viewpoint, Emergency Stop signal must be assigned on the address Xm+0.0to 0.7 or Xm+1.0 to 1.7 or Xm+2.0 to 2.7. As refer to the 5. DI/DO mapping, assign theEmergency stop DI.
3 Xm+0.0 to 0.7, Xm+1.0 to 1.7 and Xm+2.0 to 0.7 common lines are fixed. So, if these DI pinsin this address open, the status of these one stay ”0”. And in case of Xm+3.0 to 3.7 which havea selectable common line, if the DICOM (CM69–B06pin) is connected to 0V and these DI pinsopen, the status of these one stay ”0”. And if the DICOM are connected to +24V and these DIpins open, the status of these one stay ”1”. And if the DICOM is not connected to 0V or +24Vand these DI pins open, the status of these one don’t care.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
376
Address No.
Bit
Yn+5.3
DVRelay
DOCOM
JA58(7)
CM68(A08)
CM68(A10), CM69(A10)
+24V 0V
+24V Power
Pin number
Yn+5.7
Yn+6.3
Yn+6.7
Yn+7.3
Yn+7.4
Yn+7.5
Yn+7.6
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
DV
CM68(B08)
CM68(A09)
CM68(B09)
CM69(A08)
CM69(B08)
CM69(A09)
CM69(B09)
CM68(B10), CM69(B10)
(1)When only the manual pulse generator.Example of the 3 Manual pulse Generator connection is as follows. iseries CNC is only possible to use the MPG interface. If i series CNCuses some I/O unit having MPG interface (ex. Dispersion type I/Omodule for panel) and this operator’s panel, the MPG interface nearestthe CNC is only available on the I/O Link connection.
9.13.3.8DO (output signal)connection
9.13.3.9Manual pulse generatorconnection
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
377
Main panel A/B/A1/B1
Cable Terminal Manual pulse generator
1 HA1 112 HB1 12 0V3 HA2 134 HB2 14 0V5 HA3 156 HB3 16 0V7 178 18 +5V9 +5V 1910 20 +5V
3 4 5 6+5V 0V HA1 HB1
3 4 5 6+5V 0V HA1 HB1
3 4 5 6+5V 0V HA1 HB1
JA3
HA1HB1+5V0V
HA2HB2+5V0V
HA3HB3+5V0V
12912
341814
562016
7BK7WH5RD5BK
8RD8BK4RD3BK
9BK9WH6RD1BK
#1
#2
#3
GrounCable
HA1HB1+5V0V
HA2HB2+5V0V
HA3HB3+5V0V
Wiring
5634
5634
5634
HA1HB1+5V0V
HA2HB2+5V0V
HA3HB3+5V0V
When the depth of the operator’s panel is 80mm min.Recommended wire material : A66L–0001–0286(#20AWGx6+#24AWGx3pairs)Recommended connector : A02B–0120–K303(Including below connector and case)
(Connector : HIROSE FI40B–2015S Soldering type)(Case : HIROSE FI–20–CV)
Recommended cable : A02B–0120–K841(7m) (MPG 3 units)A02B–0120–K848(7m) (MPG 2 units)A02B–0120–K847(7m) (MPG 1 unit)(These cables don’t include the wiring part in the figure.)
When the depth of the operator’s panel is 60mm min.Recommended wire material : A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWGx10pairs)Recommended connector : A02B–0236–K302(Including below connector and case)
(Connector : HIROSE FI30–20S Stand wire press–mount type)(Case : HIROSE FI–20–CV7)
Manual pulse generator # 1(M3 Screw)
Manual pulse generator # 2(M3 Screw)
Manual pulse generator # 3(M3 Screw)
NOTECalculate the MPG cable max. Length as refer to thefollowing calculation.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
378
MPG needs a DC5V power supply and the voltage must be less than0.2V dropping. (the 0.2V dropping includes the resistance in thecable.)
0.1 : MPG power supply current 0.1A
R : Resistance per wire length (Ω/m)
m : Wire Number (Both 0V and 5V)
L Cable length (m)
Because
0.2 0.1 R 2L
m
L mR
Example: In case of cable A66L–0001–0286It has 3 pairs signal wires and 6 power line wires(20/0.18, 0.0394 /m).If the cable is used and each 3 wires are used for 0V and 5V power line,then max. cable length is as follows.
L 3
0.0394 76.75(m)
The answer is 76.75m, if MPG unit is 1.(But FANUC decide any cable must be less than 50m.)The answer is 38.37m, if MPG units are 2.The answer is 25.58m, if MPG units are 3.
And In case of cable A66L–0001–0284#10PThe answer is 12.88m, if MPG units are 1.The answer is 6.44m, if MPG units are 2.The answer is 4.29m, if MPG units are 3.
If the customer will use a some other vender’s MPG ,not FANUC’s MPG,the electrical condition must be as follows.
HAn, HBn signals form MPG and CNC internal pulse are as follows. Acycle of the HA/HB pulse T1 must be more than 200 sec and 4/T1 mustbe more than 50 sec.
HAn
HBn
in the direction of +
in the direction of –Normal wheel Reverse wheel
Reverse wheelClickPoint
T1
4
T1
4
T1
4
T1
T1
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
379
And the receiver circuit is as follows.
Connector
Filter
Internalreceivercircuit0V 0V
C
R10K
+5V
+
–
Manual pulse generator
VIH,VIL level at Connector pinIf Vin low to high, VIH must be higher than 3.7V.If Vin high to low, VIL must be lower than 1.5V.
(2)When a pendant–type manual pulse generator
When a pendant–type manual pulse generator with including axisselection and multiplier setting functions is connected.
HA1 Xm+1.5HB1 0V
Xm+2.2 Xm+1.6Xm+2.3 0VXm+2.4 Xm+1.7Xm+2.5 0VYn+5.3 Xm+2.0Xm+2.1 +5V
+5V +24V+24V +5V
AxisSelection
Main panel A/B/A1/B1 Pendant–type manualpulse generator
JA58
Multipliersetting
1 112 123 134 145 156 167 178 189 1910 20
NOTE1 When Xm+1.5 to Xm+2.5 of connector JA58 are allocated
as the Dis used for the axis selection and multiplier setting,Xm+1.5 to Xm+2.5 of connector CM68 cannot be used.
2 One DO is available for the manual pulse generator side atthe user’s direction. When this is used, Yn+5.3 of CM68cannot be used, as in the case for DIs above.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
380
Connector Maker Specification Order specification
JD1A, JD1B,JA3, JA58(Operators panel depth=60mm min.)
Stand wire press–mount type
HiroseFI30–20S (Connector)FI–20–CV7 (Case)
A02B–0236–K302
JD1A, JD1B,JA58(Operators panel
Soldering type HondaPCR–E20FS (Connector)PCR–V20LA (Case)
A02B–0120–K301
depth=80mm min.)HiroseFI40B–20S (Connector)FI–20–CV2 (Case)
Stand wire press– mount type
HondaPCR–E20FA (Connector)PCR–V20LA (Case)
A02B–0120–K302
HiroseFI30–20S (Connector)FI–20–CV2 (Case)
JA3(Operators panel depth=80mm min.)
Soldering type HiroseFI40B–2015S (Connector)FI–20–CV (Case)
A02B–0120–K303
CA64 (IN),CA64 (OUT)
AMP1–178288–3 (Housing)1–175218–5 (Contact)
A02B–0120–K324
CM67 AMP178289–5 (Housing)1–175218–5 (Contact)
A02B–0236–K312
CM68,CM69
AMP178289–8 (Housing)1–175218–5 (Contact)
A02B–0236–K313
CM65,CM66
HiroseHIF3BA–10D–2.54R
A02B–0236–K314
CA65 HiroseHIF3BA–20D–2.54R
A02B–0120–K343
CA55 JAVLY10–DC10 (Housing)LY10–C2–3 (Contact)
A02B–0236–K303
9.13.3.10Connector (on the cableside) specifications.
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
381
DI/DO address of Keyswitches and LED on the keyboard of Main panelA/B/A1/B1 are as follows.
BITKey/LED
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Xm+4/Yn+0 B4 B3 B2 B1 A4 A3 A2 A1
Xm+5/Yn+1 D4 D3 D2 D1 D4 C3 C2 C1
Xm+6/Yn+2 A8 A7 A6 A5 E4 E3 E2 E1
Xm+7/Yn+3 C8 C7 C6 C5 B8 B7 B6 B5
Xm+8/Yn+4 E8 E7 E6 E5 D8 D7 D6 D5
Xm+9/Yn+5 B11 B10 B9 A11 A10 A9
Xm+10/Yn+6 D11 D10 D9 C11 C10 C9
Xm+11/Yn+7 E11 E10 E9
A
Address
Keyswitches/LED position
B
C
D
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
9.13.4DI/DO Address
9.13.4.1Keyboard of main panel
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
382
Table of gray code output is as follows when the Sub panel A/B/B1/C/C1is used
Rotary switch (SA1)
% 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 95 100 105 110 120
Xm+0.0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
Xm+0.1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
Xm+0.2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Xm+0.3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Xm+0.4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1
Xm+0.5 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
NOTEXm+0.5 is a parity bit.
Rotary switch (SA2)
% 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Xm+0.6 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
Xm+0.7 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
Xm+1.0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
Xm+1.1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Xm+1.2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Xm+1.3 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
NOTE1 Xm+1.3 is a parity bit.2 There is no Rotary switch(SA2) of Sub panel B/C.
9.13.4.2Override signals
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
383
I/O address map is as follows.
DI map DO map
Xm+0 Yn+0
Xm+1 General–purposeDI/DO
Yn+1
Xm+2 Yn+2
Xm+3 Yn+3
Xm+4 Yn+4
Xm+5 Yn+5
Xm+6 Yn+6
Xm+7 Yn+7
Xm+8
Xm+9
Xm+10
Xm+11
Xm+12 (1st MPG)
Xm+13 (2nd MPG) MPG
Xm+14 (3rd MPG)
Xm+15 Reserve
Keyboard of Main panel
(Keyswitches)
Keyboard (LED)
Include general–Purpose DO
DI mapping should be assigned 1 group = 16 byte mapping and DOmapping should be assigned 1 group = 8 byte mapping. The reason is asfollows.
MPG interface(the counter for MPG) uses Xm+12 to Xm+14 area and itis fixed. And if MPG interface will be used, Xm+12 to Xm+14 area mustbe assigned. therefore, in case of i series and using MPG interface, DImapping must be assigned 16 byte mapping. MPG counter area aredirectly processed by CNC software. So you must not use this area bycustomer ladder.
It is possible to assign any address for this operators panel. But in DIaddress, each CNC have some fixed address that is directly processed byCNC software. So, as refer to the following mention,assign the DImapping.
9.13.5DI/DO Mapping
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
384
Directly processed address by CNC (in case of FS16I, 18i, 21i)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SKIP#1 ESKIP –MIT2#1 +MIT2#1 –MIT1#1 +MIT1#1 ZAE#1 XAE#1
SKIP6#1 SKIP5#1 SKIP4#1 SKIP3#1 SKIP2#1 SKIP8#1 SKIP7#1X0004
SKIP#1 ESKIP SKIP5#1 SKIP4#1 SKIP3#1 ZAE#1 YAE#1 XAE#1
SKIP6#1 SKIP2#1 SKIP8#1 SKIP7#1
X0005
X0006
X0007 *DEC7#2 *DEC6#2 *DEC5#2 *DEC4#2 *DEC3#2 *DEC2#2 *DEC1#2
X0008 *ESP
X0009 *DEC7#1 *DEC6#1 *DEC5#1 *DEC4#1 *DEC3#1 *DEC2#1 *DEC1#1
X0010
X0011
X0012
SKIP#2 SKIP6#2 –MIT2#2 +MIT2#2 –MIT1#2 +MIT1#2 ZAE#2 XAE#2
SKIP5#2 SKIP4#2 SKIP3#2 SKIP2#2 SKIP8#2 SKIP7#2X0013
SKIP#2 SKIP6#2 SKIP5#2 SKIP4#2 SKIP3#2 ZAE#2 YAE#2 XAE#2
SKIP2#2 SKIP8#2 SKIP7#2
#1 means the signales in 1st path. #2 means the signals in 2nd path. And up column means the T series signals and downcolumn means the M series signals.
Ex. In case of 16 byte mapping start from X006 for DI area.
X0006X0007
General–purposeX0008X0009X0010X0011X0012X0013 Keyboard of
Main panel (Keyswitches)
X0014X0015X0016X0017X0018 (1st MPG)X0019 (2nd MPG) MPGX0020 (3rd MPG)X0021 Reserve
*DECn#2 Fixed signals
*ESP Fixed signal
In case of mapping start from X0006, *DECn#1 and*DECn#2 singals which are address fixed signals canbe used any time. And *ESP signal can be placed at+24V common fixed address.But SKIP signals can not be used.Don’t map the *ESP signal matrix DI area.
*DECn#1 Fixed signal
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
385
284
290
17.6
300
290
55
Note) When a low screw–fixing housing ”HIROSE FI–20–CV7” is used, the depth is 60mm.When a usual housing is used, the depth is 80mm.
5290
140 1405
6–φ4
660(80)*
270
140 140
274
6–M3
Panel cut drawing
9.13.6Outline
9.13.6.1Outline of main panel A
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
386
(1)Outline of Main panel A/A1 (with back up unit)
* When a low screw–fixing housing ”HIROSE FI–20–CV7” is used, the dimension is 60mm. When a usual housing is used, the dimension is 80mm.
Back up unit
Adapter plate B
Unit=mm
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
387
Unit=mm
Note) When a low screw–fixing housing ”HIROSE FI–20–CV7” is used, the depth is 60mm.When a usual housing is used, the depth is 80mm.
Panel cut drawing
9.13.6.2Outline of main panel B
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
388
6670
70
6080 705
5
Earth stud(M4)
Panel cut drawing
Unit=mm
55 280290
6–φ4
270
140 140
274
6–M3
9.13.6.3Outline of sub panel A
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
389
Earth stud(M4)
Panel cut drawing
Unit=mm
9.13.6.4Outline of sub panel B
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
390
Earth stud(M4)
Panel cut drawing
Unit=mm
9.13.6.5Outline of sub panel C
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
391
CNK1 CNK2
Earth stud(M4)
Earth terminal(M3 Screw)
Fuse (1A) Unit=mm 3 7
9.13.6.6Connector locations ofmain panel A/A1
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
392
Earth stud(M4)
Earth terminal(M3 Screw)
Fuse (1A) Unit=mm
View from rear side
9.13.6.7Connector locations ofmain panel B/B1
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
393
Earth stud(M4)
Panel cut drawing
Unit=mm
9.13.6.8Outline of sub panel B1
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
394
284
290
17.6
290
55
Panel cut drawing Unit=mm
5290
140 1405
6–φ4
660 (80)*
270
140 140
274
6–M3
Note) When a low screw–fixing housing ”HIROSE FI–20–CV7” is used, the depth is 60mm.When a usual housing is used, the depth is 80mm.
300
9.13.6.9Outline of main panel A1
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
395
Panel cut drawing
Unit=mm
Note) When a low screw–fixing housing”HIROSE FI–20–CV7” is used, the depth is 60mm.When a usual housing is used, the depth is 80mm.
9.13.6.10Outline of main panel B1
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
396
M4 stud for Earth(Rear side)
Panel cut drawing
Unit=mm
9.13.6.11Outline of sub panel C1
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
397
Temperature Around a unit
At operation 0C to 55CStoring or transporting –20C to 60C
Temperature variance
Max. 1.1C/min
Humidity Normally 75% or less (Relative humidity)Short time(Within one month) 95% or less (Relative humidity)
Vibration Operating 0.5G or less
Atmosphere Normal FA atmosphere(Consult us when using the system under environments with higher degree of dust, coolant, ororganic solution.)
Name Specification Note
Machine operators panel Main panel A A02B–0236–C230 Symbol key
Machine operators panel Main panel B A02B–0236–C231 Symbol key
Machine operators panel Main panel A1 A02B–0236–C240 English key
Machine operators panel Main panel B1 A02B–0236–C241 English key
Machine operators panel Sub panel A A02B–0236–C232
Machine operators panel Sub panel B A02B–0236–C233
Machine operators panel Sub panel C A02B–0236–C234
Machine operators panel Sub panel B1 A02B–0236–C235
Machine operators panel Sub panel C1 A02B–0236–C236
Adapter plate B (Note) A02B–0236–J411 Backup unit(A02B–0269–H051)
Set of transparent key tops A02B–0236–K170 55 key tops
Set of blank key tops A02B–0236–K171 55 key tops
Set of symbolic key tops A02B–0236–K172 With laser marking (34 symbol key tops + 21 blank key tops)
Fuse(Spare part) A03B–0815–K001 1A
NOTEAdapter plate B is unnecessary when Main panel B or B1 are used,
9.13.7Specifications
9.13.7.1Environmentalrequirement
9.13.7.2Order specification
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
398
Item Specification Note
General–purpose DI points 32 points 24VDC type input
General–purpose DO points 8 points 24VDC type output
Keyswitches of MDI 65 keys Full alphabet key (Main panel A/A1)
Keyswitches of Machine operators panel 55 keys Matrix DI
LED Color : Green Attached to all keyswitches, Matrix DO
MPG interface Max. 3 units Only available for i series.
Interface to CNC FANUC I/O Linkconnection
Max. 16 modules or total points max. 1024/1024 will be available.
Specification of Sub panelItem
A B B1 C C1Note
Override rotary switch 2 1 2 1 2 5 bit Gray code output (with a parity bit)
Emergency stop switch 1 1 1 1 1 Number of Contact : 4 (NO2, NC2) M3.5 Screw
Program protect key 1 1 1 1 1
ON/OFF switch ON/OFF – – ON/OFF ON/OFF
MPG – – – 1 1
Voltage Capacity Note
DC24V10% (from Power connector CA64,including momentary values)
0.4A Including all DI consumption
Capacity 30VDC, 16mA or more
Interconnect leakage current in closed circuit 1mA or less(at 26.4V)
Interconnect voltage drop in closed circuit 2V or less(including the voltage drop in the cables)
Delay time Receiver delay : Max. 2msNeed to consider about the serial communication (I/O Link) delay between CNC andoperators panel 2ms(MAX)+Scan cycle of ladder (Scan cycle is different each CNCs).
9.13.7.3Main panel A/B/A1/B1specification
9.13.7.4Sub panel A/B/B1/C/C1specification
9.13.7.5Power supplyspecification
9.13.7.6General–purpose DIsignal definition
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
399
Maximum load current in ON state 200mA or less
Saturation voltage in ON state Max. 1V (When load current is 200mA)
Withstand voltage 24V20% or less(including momentary values)
Leakage current in OFF state 20µA or less
Delay time Driver delay : Max. 50µs
Need to consider about the serial communication (I/O Link) delay between CNC andoperator’s panel 2ms (MAX)+Scan cycle of ladder (Scan cycle is different each CNCs).
9.13.7.7General–purpose DOsignal definition
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
400
Symbol English Meaning of key
AUTO AUTO mode selection signal; Setsautomatic operation mode.
EDIT EDIT mode selection signal; Sets programedit operation mode.
MDI MDI mode selection; Sets MDI mode.
REMOTE DNC operation mode; Sets DNC operationmode.
REF
RETURN
Reference position return mode selection;Sets reference position return mode.
JOG JOG feed mode selection; Sets jogfeed mode.
JOG
INC
Step feed mode selection; Sets step feed mode.
HANDLE Manual handle feed mode selection; Setsmanual handle feed mode.
TEACH Teach–in jog (reach–in handle) modeselection signal; Sets teach–in jog(teach–in handle) mode.
SINGLE
BLOCK
Single block signal; Executes program oneby one. This key is used to check aprogram.
BLOCK
DELETE
Block delete (optional block skip); Skips theexecution of the blocks starting with the firstblock prefixed with / and ending with theend of block (;) when this button is pressedduring automatic operation.
PRG
STOP
Program stop(output only); Turns on theLED on the button when automaticoperation is stopped by M00 specified inthe program.
OPT
STOP
Optional stop; Stops automatic operationafter execution of the block of a programwhere M01 is specified in the program.
9.13.8Key Symbol Indicationon Machine OperatorsPanel
9.13.8.1Meaning of key symbols
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
401
Symbol Meaning of keyEnglish
RESTART Program restart; A program may be restartat a block by specifying the sequencenumber of the block, after automaticoperation is stopped because of a brokentool or for holidays.
DRY
RUN
Dryrun; Sets the axis feedrate to the jogfeedrate instead of a programmed feedratewhen automatic operation is performed bysetting this button to on. This function isused to check only the movement of thetool when no workpiece is mounted.
MC
LOCK
Machine lock; Updates only positiondisplay on the screen without making anyaxis movement, when automatic operationis performed by setting this button to on.This function is used to check a program.
CYCLE
START
Cycle start; Start automatic operation.
CYCLE
STOP
Cycle stop; Stops automatic operation.
Manual handle feed magnification:Magnification for manual handle feed.
Magnified by 1, 10, 100, 1000.
Manual feed axis selection; Axes areselected, when these buttons are set to onin the jog feed mode or step feed mode.
Manual feed operation; Performsmovement along selected axes whenthese buttons are set on in the jog feedmode or step feed mode.
TRVRS Traverse; Performs jog feed at rapidtraverse rate when this button is set to on.
SPDL
CW
Positive spindle rotation direction; Rotatesthe spindle motor in the positive direction.
SPDL
CCW
Negative spindle rotation direction;Rotates the spindle motor in the negativedirection.
SPDL
STOP
Spindle stop; Stops the spindle motorrotation.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
402
Keyboard of machine operator’s panel has 55 keys. All key tops aredetachable. MTB can customize keys and make his original key layouteasily. And using transparent key top (optional), a film sheet with markingis inserted into the key.
Symbolic key top or Blank key top
Transparent key top
Film sheet*(12.5mm12.5mm, T=0.1mm Max.)
NOTEUse the oil–proof sheet in the environment which oil is usedfor.
9.13.8.2Detachable key top
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
403
The keyboard of this operator’s panel is a matrix composition. When threeor more keys are pushed, the bypass current cause unrelated key to beavailable. This malfunction can be prevented with ladder program. Oneexample is shown as follows.
(Elimination rule of malfunction)When three keyinputs or more is input, all the keyinput since the third ismade invalid. However, when the number of all keyinput becomes two or less becausekeyinput was lost, all keyinputs are made effective.
(Operation of ladder program) The example of the operation of ladder program is shown about matrixDI composed of 8bits 8commons as follows.
!1 *
!1 )
!1 #
!1
!1 (
!1
!1
!1
!1 *
!1 )
!1 #
!1
!1 (
!1
!1
!1
!1 *
!1 )
!1 #
!1
!1 (
!1
!1
!1
!1 *
!1 )
!1 #
!1
!1 (
!1
!1
!1
7819778197#781(97)78197*781#97+781)97,781*97781+97
7819778197#781(97)78197*781#97+781)97,781*97781+97
7819778197#781(97)78197*781#97+781)97,781*97781+97
7819778197#781(97)78197*781#97+781)97,781*97781+97
7819778197#781(97)78197*781#97+781)97,781*97781+97
7819778197#781(97)78197*781#97+781)97,781*97781+97
State (a) State (b) State (c)
State (d) State (e) State (f)
: Keyswitch OFF (“0”) : Keyswitch ON (“1”)
!1 *
!1 )
!1 #
!1
!1 (
!1
!1
!1
!1 *
!1 )
!1 #
!1
!1 (
!1
!1
!1
9.13.9Others
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
404
(Ladder operation)
The following is an example ladder operation for the matrix DIconsisting of 8 (bits) ( 8 (common) shown on the previous page.
[1]The number of datalines where the keyinput exists is examined. Logical add R1 of the data of all addresses is calculated. The numberof bits which are ”1” in the 8bits data of R1 corresponds to the numberof datalines where the keyinput exists.
(1)When the data of R1 is corresponding to 00h, there is no bit whichis ”1” in the data of R1.Ex. State (a) : R1=(00000000) ? There is no dataline where inputexists.
(2)when the data of R1 is corresponding to the data in undermentioneddatatable1., the number of bits which are ”1” in the data of R1 isone. Similarly, when the data of R1 is corresponding to the data indatatable2., the number of bits which are ”1” in the data of R1 istwo.
Ex. State (b) or (c) : R1 = (00000100) There is one dataline where input exists.
Ex. State (d) or (e) : R1 = (00010100) There are two datalines where input exists.
(3) If the data of R1 is not corresponding to 00h and the both datatables,the number of bits which are ”1” in the data of R1 is three or more.
Ex. State (f) : R1 = (00110100) There are three datalines where input exists.
00000001 00000010
00000100 00001000
00010000 00100000
01000000 10000000
00000011 00000110 00001100 00011000
00110000 01100000 11000000 10000001
00000101 00001010 00010100 00101000
01010000 10100000 01000001 10000010
00001001 00010010 00100100 01001000
10010000 00100001 01000010 10000100
Data table 1. Data table 2.
[2] Judgment 1
(1) If there is no dataline where the keyinput exists.
Any key switch is not pushed. : Ex. State (a)
(2)When the keyinput exists in two datalines or less.
To [3]
(3)When the keyinput exists in three data lines or more.
There are three keyinputs or more. It is invalid keyinput. : Ex. State (f)
B–63523EN/03 9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link
405
[3] When the keyinput exists in two datalines or less, it is examinedwhether two or more keyinput exists on the same dataline. The data of all addresses is subtracted from logical add R1 andsubtraction result R2 is obtained. There are no two or more keyinputon the same dataline if it is R2=00h.
Ex. When there is one dataline where input exists.
State (b) : R2 = FCh
State (c) : R2 = F8h
When there are two datalines where input exists.
State (d) : R2 = 00h
State (e) : R2 = FCh[4] Judgment 2
(1) In case of R2 = 00h There are two or less datalines where inputexists, and there are no two or more keyinputs on the same dataline.In this case, the numbers of all keyinputs are one or two. It iseffective keyinput.
: Ex. State (d)
(2) In case of R2 ? 00h There are two or less datalines where inputexists, and two or more keyinputs exists on the same dataline.To [5].
[5] Judgment 3 When there is one dataline where input exists To [6].When there are two datalines where input exists There are threekeyinputs or more. It is invalid keyinput. : Ex. State (e)
[6]Subtraction result R2 is added to logical add R1. If this addition resultis 00h, the number of all keyinputs is two.
Ex. State (b) : R1 + R2 = 04h + FCh = 00h State (c) : R1 + R2 = 04h + F8h = FCh
[7] Judgment 4
In case of R1 + R2 = 00h There is one dataline where input exists,and there are two keyinputs on this dataline.That is, because the numbers ofall input are two keys, it is effective input. : Ex. State (b)
In case of R1+R2 ? 00h There are three keyinputs or more on thesame dataline. It is invalid keyinput. : Ex. State (c)
[8]Only when the keyinput becomes effective because of judgment 1–4,all DI data (Xm+4–Xm+11) is used by the ladder program.
9. CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O Link B–63523EN/03
406
Exhaustion parts
Name Ordering code Remarks
Fuse For Main panel A/B/A1/B1 A60L–0001–0290#LM10 Rated at 1A
Repair parts
Name Ordering code Remarks
I/O board For Main panel A/B/A1/B1 A20B–8002–0020
Main panel A A02B–0236–C230
Main panel B A02B–0236–C231
Main panel A1 A02B–0236–C240
Main panel B1 A02B–0236–C241
Sub panel A A02B–0236–C232
Sub panel B A02B–0236–C233
Sub panel C A02B–0236–C234
Sub panel B1 A02B–0236–C235
Sub panel C1 A02B–0236–C236
Adapter plate A A250–0892–T004
Adapter plate B A250–0892–T005
9.13.10Maintenance Parts
B–63523EN/03 10. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
407
10 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
Using the emergency stop signal effectively enables the design of safemachine tools. See ”Cautions for configuring emergency stop circuit incompliance with safety standards.”The emergency stop signal is provided to bring a machine tool to anemergency stop. It is input to the CNC controller, servo amplifier, andspindle amplifier. An emergency stop signal is usually generated byclosing the B contact of a pushbutton switch.When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNCcontroller enters the emergency stop released state, such that the servo andspindle motors can be controlled and operated.When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact opens, the CNCcontroller is reset and enters the emergency stop state, and the servo andspindle motors are decelerated to a stop.Shutting off the servo amplifier power causes a dynamic brake to beapplied to the servo motor. Even when a dynamic brake is applied,however, a servo motor attached to a vertical axis can move under theforce of gravity. To overcome this problem, use a servo motor with abrake.While the spindle motor is running, shutting off the motor–driving powerto the spindle amplifier allows the spindle motor to continue runningunder its own inertia, which is quite dangerous. When the emergency stopsignal (*ESP) contact opens, it is necessary to confirm that the spindlemotor has been decelerated to a stop, before the spindle motor power isshut off.The FANUC servo amplifier αi series products are designed to satisfy theabove requirements. The emergency stop signal should be input to thepower supply module (called the PSM). The PSM outputs a motor powerMCC control signal, which can be used to switch the power applied to thepower supply module on and off.The CNC controller is designed to detect overtravel by using a softwarelimit function. Normally, no hardware limit switch is required to detectovertravel. If the machine goes beyond a software limit because of a servofeedback failure, however, it is necessary to provide a stroke end limitswitch, connected so that the emergency stop signal can be used to stopthe machine.Fig. 10 shows an example showing how to use the emergency stop signalwith this CNC controller and αi series servo amplifier.
WARNING
10. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL B–63523EN/03
408
+X –X +Y –Y +Z –Z +4 –4
Stroke end limit switch Emergencystop button
Relaypower
Release switch
Spark killer
SK
Spark killer
SK
RelayEMG
emg1
emg2
CNC control unit
+24
*ESP
+24
*ESP
MCCOFF3
MCCOFF4
αi series servo amplifier(PSM)
SVMSPM
L1 L2
L3
External power source
L1
L2
3φ200VAC
Circuit breaker 1 MCC AC reactor
Coil
L3
Fig. 10
WARNINGTo use a spindle motor and amplifier produced by a manufacturer other than FANUC, refer tothe corresponding documentation as well as this manual. Design the emergency stopsequence such that, if the emergency stop signal contact opens while the spindle motor isrotating, the spindle motor is decelerated until it stops.
B–63523EN/03 10. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
409
To configure an emergency stop circuit in compliance with JIS safetystandards(*), observe the following cautions. Compliance with these JISsafety standards is a prerequisite for complying with the EC MachineInstructions.
The method for shutting off the motor power section in the amplifier isbased on an IGBT (transistor) rather than an electromechanical scheme.When configuring an emergency stop circuit, therefore, install a linecontactor on the power input line for motor power in the power supplymodule in order to ensure electromechanical shut–off, and apply voltageto the control coil of the contactor via the contactor control output of thepower supply module.
A failure in the amplifier may disable the output relay of the power supplymodule from going off, thus preventing the line contactor from shuttingoff the power, even when the emergency stop command input (*ESP) ofthe amplifier becomes low.
To secure motor power shut–off, design the emergency stop circuit in aredundancy configuration. To be specific, the emergency stop circuitmust have a direct line contactor shut–off route based on an emergencystop switch that is independent of the shut–off function of the amplifier.
If a spindle amplifier module is used, shutting off the motor power lineduring spindle rotation disables the spindle from stopping quicklybecause the power regenerative function does not work, allowing thespindle to coast. So, provide the redundancy circuit mentioned abovewith a delay function based on an off–delay timer that allows a usual stoptime.
Refer to the following material for detailed descriptions about cautionsrelated to safety circuits.
A–71429–S13J: About Requirements for Safety Circuits andConfiguration Samples
To get a copy of this material, contact your FANUC sales representative.
NOTEExamples of important safety standards. Enclosed inparentheses are corresponding European standards.
JIS/TR B 008 and 009 (EN292–1/2)General matter related to machine safety
JIS B 9960–1 (EN60204–1) Stop categoriesJIS B 9705–1:2000 (EN954–1) Safety categoriesJIS B 9703:2000 (EN418) Emergency stop
Cautions for config-uring an emergencystop circuit in com-pliance with safetystandards
11. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2) B–63523EN/03
410
11REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
B–63523EN/0311. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
411
When the remote buffer is connected to the host computer or input/outputdevice via serial interface, a great amount of data can be sent to CNCconsecutively at a high speed.
RESETFILEPROTECT
Use either the RS–232–C or RS–422 interface.(Case of Remote Buffer)
RS–232–C interface
FILEPROTECTPOWER READY ALARM
RS–422 interface
This figure is connectionexample for LCD–mounted type CNC.
The remote buffer enables the following operations:
When connected to the host computer online, it performs DNCoperation with high reliability and at a high speed.
The CNC program and parameters can be down–loaded from the hostcomputer.
When connected to an input/output device, it enables DNC operation,and various data can be down–loaded. The following input/outputdevices can be connected. FANUC PPR
FANUC FA Card
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate
FANUC Handy File
11.1GENERAL
11. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2) B–63523EN/03
412
Electrical interfaceThe following two types of interface are prepared as standardspecifications.RS–232–C InterfaceRS–422 Interface
RS–233C RS–422
InterfaceSerial voltage interface (start–stop)
Balanced transmission serial interface (start–stop)
Baud rate 50 to 19,200 BPS 50 to 86,400 BPS (*)
Cablelength
100m (4800BPS or less)50m (9600BPS)Varies according to I/O device.
Approx. 800 m (9600 BPS or less)50m (19,200 BPS or more)
Software interfaceThe following three protocols are prepared as the communicationprotocols between the remote buffer and host computer. The protocolcan be selected by a parameter according to the specifications of thedevice to be connected.
Protocol Features Interface Maximumtransfer rate
Protocol A Handshake method. Sending and RS–232–C 19200 BPSreceiving are repeated between two stations. RS–422 86400 BPS
Extendedprotocol A
Similar to protocol A. Enables high–speed transfer of the NC programto meet high–speed DNC operation.
RS–422 86400 BPS
Protocol B Controls communication with control RS–232–C 19200 BPScodes output from the remote buffer.
RS–422 86400 BPS
NOTE(*) The average data transfer rate is lower than the maximum
transfer rate.
FANUC DNC2 is a communication protocol that provides an RS–232–Cinterface between the CNC and a personal computer (PC). This interfaceenables the CNC and PC to exchange data with each other. The hardwareused to connect the CNC and PC is the same as that used for remote bufferconnection.
For information about the specifications and other details of FANUCDNC2, refer to “FANUC DNC2 Description (B–61992E).”
FANUC DNC1, developed by FANUC, is a high–speed networksupporting cell–based communication.
The hardware connection and other specifications of the DNC1 functionare explained. When using DNC1, refer to the following document.
Title Number
FANUC DNC1 Descriptions B–61782E
Explanations
Interface between theremote buffer and hostcomputer
B–63523EN/0311. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
413
CNC OPTION board
Conceptional diagram of signal connection
SD
RD
SD
RD
RS
CS
RS
ER
DR
CD
SG
1 RD
2 0V
3 DR
4 0V
11 SD
12 0V
13 ER
14 0V
5 CS
6 0V
7 CD
8 0V
15 RS
16 0V
17
18
9 19 (+24V)
JD28A [JD5L]
(PCR–EV20LMDETZ–SL)
10 (+24V) 20
1 FG
2 SD
3 RD
4 RS
5 CS
6 DR
7 SG
8 CD
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 ER
21
22
23
24
25
Host computer (example)
DBM–25S
CNC side Host side
FG0V
CS
ER
DR
CD
SG
FG
Input
Output
The connector namein brackets [ ] is forwhen the separatetype series is used.
NOTE1 24V power supply of the equipment made by FANUC
RS–232–C is not prepared in CNC side connector JD28Aor JD5L. Set up the power supply by the machine toolbuilder if it is necessary. No.10 and No.19 (+24V) cannot beused. Do not connect to these pins.
2 Do not connect to any pins not marked with a signal name.
11.2REMOTE BUFFERINTERFACE(RS–232–C)
11. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2) B–63523EN/03
414
Cable wiring
1
2
2RD
0V
SD
3
4
20DR
0V
ER
5
6
4CS
0V
RS
7
8
8CD
0V
CD
9
10+24V
11
12
3SD
0V
RD
Shield
13
14
6ER
0V
DR
15
16
5
7RS
0V
CS
SG17
18
19
20
1+24V FG
Connect CS to RS if CS is not used. However, when protocol A orexpanded protocol A is used, connect as shown above because CS is usedfor busy control. Connect DR to ER when DR is not used. Be sure toconnect CD to ER.
B–63523EN/0311. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
415
CNC OPTION board
1 RD
2 *RD
3 RT
4 *RT
11 SD
12 *SD
13 TT
14 *TT
5 CS
6 *CS
7 DM
8 0V
15 RS
16 *RS
17 TR
18 *TR
9 *DM 19 (+24V)
JD6A [JD6L]
(PCR–EV20LMDETZ–SL)
10 (+24V) 20
1 FG
2
3
4 SD
5
6 RD
7 RS
8 RT
9 CS
10
11 DM
12 TR
13
14
15
16
17 TT
18
19 SG
20
21
22 *SD
23
24 *RD
25 *RS
Host computer (Example)
26 *RT
27 *CS
28
29 *DM
30 *TR
31
32
33
34
35 *TT
36
37
(+24V) is not used.
The figure below shows a signal connection between CNC and a hostcomputer. Since signals other than FG and SG perform differential signaltransmission, two wires of signal lines are used for those signals.
SD
RD
SD
RD
RS
CS
RS
TR
DM
RT
SG
CNC sideOutput
Host side
FG0V
CS
TR
DM
RT
SG
FG
TT TT
Conceptional diagram of signal connection
Input
11.3REMOTE BUFFERINTERFACE (RS–422)
Conceptional diagram ofsignal connection
11. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2) B–63523EN/03
416
Cable wiring
1
2
4
22RD
*RD
SD
*SD3
4
17
35RT
*RT
TT
*TT5
6
7
25CS
*CS
RS
*RS7
9
12
30DM
*DM
TR
*TR8
10
190V
+24V
SG
11
12
6
24SD
*SD
RD
*RD
Shield
13
14
8
26TT
*TT
RT
*RT15
16
9
27RS
*RS
CS
*CS17
18
11
29TR
*TR
DM
*DM19
20
1+24V FG
FRAME
NOTE1 Be sure to use twisted pair cable.2 Note that the pin position of the *DM signal on the CNC side
is positioned irregularly relative to the other signals. This isto reduce the risk of damage to the circuit when thisconnector is erroneously connected to the connector on theother side.
Actual example ofRS–422 signal wiring
B–63523EN/0311. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
417
SD
RD
SD
RD
RS
CS
RS
ER
DR
CD
SG
1 RD2 0V3 DR4 0V
11 SD12 0V13 ER14 0V
5 CS6 0V7 CD8 0V
15 RS16 0V17
18
9 19
JD28A
(PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL)
10 20
1 FG2 SD3 RD4 RS5 CS6 DR7 SG8 CD9
10
1112
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20 ER21
22
23
24
25
DBM–25S
FG
CS
ER
DR
CD
SG
FG
CNC OPTION board Host computer (Example)
Conceptional diagram of signal connection
CNC side
OutputInput
Host side
0V
FRAME
Connect CS to RS when CS is not used.
Connect DR to ER when DR is not used.
Always connect CD to ER.
NOTEWhen an IBM PC/AT is used, the RS signal goes low in thereception phase. In this case, connect CS on the host sideto ER on the same side.
11.4DNC2 INTERFACE(RS–232–C)
11. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2) B–63523EN/03
418
JD6A(PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL)
1 TRD1(+)
2 TRD1(–)
3
4
11
12
13
14
5
6
7
8 SG
15
16
17
18
9 19
10 20
CNC OPTION board
Cable wiring
Tap
1
2TDR1(+)
TDR1(–)
TRD1(+)
TRD1(–)11
12TDR2(+)
TDR2(–)
TRD2(+)
TRD2(–)8
SG SG
10
11
1
2
7
MR Connector (MR20 Female)
TRD2(+)
TRD2(–)
1 TRD2(+)
2 TRD2(–)
3
4
5
6
7
8
TRD1(+)
9
TRD1(–)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20SG
PCR Connector
(MR–20RMD) Male
11.5DNC1 INTERFACE
11.5.1Multipoint Connection
B–63523EN/0311. REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE
(INCLUDING FANUC DNC1 AND DNC2)
419
JD6A(PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL)
1 RD
2 RD
3
4
11
12
13
14
5
6
7
8 SG
15
16
17
18
9 19
10 20
CNC OPTION board Tap
SD
SD
1 SD
2 SD
3
4
5
6
7
8
RD
9
RD
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20SG
Cable wiring
11
12
1
2SD
SD
SD
SD1
2
10
11RD
RD
RD
RD13
14
8
9TT
TT
TT
TT3
4
18
19RT
RT
RT
RT15
16
5RS RS
RS5
6
14
15CS
CS
CS
CS7
9
12
13DM
DM
DM
DM17
18
3
4TR
TR
TR
TR8 7
SG SG
RS 6
Shielded twisted cable of 0.3 mm2 or more MR20 (female)
(Honda Tsushin)
RT
RT
CS
CS
DM
DM
TT
TT
RS
RS
TR
TR
TR
TR
RS
RS
TT
TT
DM
DM
CS
CS
RT
RT
(MR–20RMD) Male
11.5.2Point–to–pointConnection
12. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) B–63523EN/03
420
12 HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
B–63523EN/03 12. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
421
The high–speed serial bus (HSSB) enables the high–speed transfer oflarge amounts of data between a commercially available IBM PC orcompatible personal computer and a CNC, by connecting them via ahigh–speed optical fiber.On the CNC, the HSSB interface board is installed in an option slot. Onthe personal computer, an appropriate interface board is installed.You can use the FANUC PANEL i instead of a commercial PC. TheFANUC PANEL i comes standard with the HSSB interface.
The use of the HSSB requires an IBM PC/AT compatible computer orFANUC intelligent terminal. The machine tool builder or end user isrequired to procure and maintain the personal computer.To enable the use of the HSSB, Windows 2000 must have been installedon the personal computer.FANUC owns the copyright for the HSSB device driver.The software mentioned above and the contents of the related manualsmay not be used or reproduced in part or whole without the prior writtenpermission of FANUC.
NOTE1 IBM is a registered trademark of IBM Corp. of the US.2 Windows 2000 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corp.
of the US.3 The company and product names mentioned in this manual
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respectivecompanies.
12.1OVERVIEW
12.2CAUTIONS
12. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) B–63523EN/03
422
PC/AT compatible personal computer
Personal computer interface board(Installed in an ISA or PCI slot)
High–speedserial bus
HSSB interface board on the CNC
Optical fiber cable
This figure is an example of connecting the I/O Link toan i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted type panel.
The PC interface boards include an ISA bus interface board and a PCI businterface board.
12.3CONNECTIONDIAGRAM
B–63523EN/03 12. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
423
CAUTION1 The machine tool builder or end user is required to procure
and maintain the personal computer.2 FANUC is not liable for any problems resulting from the
operation of users’ personal computers, regardless ofwhether the operations are normal or abnormal.
This interface board for the personal computer is based on the ISAspecifications and it can be used into IBM–PC/AT or full compatiblecomputer. (CPU of the computer must be more than 486.)
The HSSB interface board uses 16 bytes of I/O space defined withrotary switch as mentioned in ”MAINTENANCE – Setting ofSwitched”. The other ISA extension boards that use the same resourcewith HSSB board can not be used.
Driver installation is required for using HSSB interface board. Thedriver for the HSSB interface board is included in ”Open CNC DriverLibraries Disk (order specification is A02B–0207–K730).
Please examine the connection test including the communicationbetween the personal computer and CNC controller sufficiently.
Following shows the required power of the interface board for ISAtype.
1ch version DC +5V, 1A
2ch version DC +5V, 1.5A
This interface board for the personal computer is based on the PCIspecifications and it can be used into a computer with PCI slot (5V,ISA slot type).
Driver installation is required for using HSSB interface board. The driverfor the HSSB interface board is included in ”Open CNC Driver LibrariesDisk (order specification is A02B–0207–K730). The revision of thedriver must be Edition 1.6 or later for the board of PCI type.
Please examine the connection test including the communicationbetween the personal computer and CNC controller sufficiently.
Following shows the required power of the interface board for PCI type.
1ch version DC +5V, 0.8A
2ch version DC +5V, 1.0A
12.4PERSONALCOMPUTERSPECIFICATION
12.4.1Specification ofPersonal Computer inCase that the InterfaceBoard of ISA Type areUsed
12.4.2Specification ofPersonal Computer inCase that the InterfaceBoard of PCI Type areUsed
12. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) B–63523EN/03
424
(1)HSSB Interface Board For Personal Computer
Ambient Temperature
Operating : 0 to 55C
Non–operating : –20 to 60C
HumidityUsual : : 10 to 75% (non–condensing)
Short–term (within one month) : 10 to 95% (non–condensing)
If the environmental requirement of the using personal computer isdifferent from the above, please keep the environmental requirementto be satisfied by the both equipments.
(2)HSSB Interface Board For CNC
Please strictly keep environmental requirement about each CNCcontroller in which the interface boards are installed.
12.5INSTALLATIONENVIRONMENT
B–63523EN/03 12. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
425
WARNINGBefore starting to mount or remove a personal computerinterface board, switch off the personal computer and itsperipheral devices, and disconnect their power supplycables. Otherwise, there is a serious danger of electricshock.
(1)Remove the covering plate of ISA extension slot on the personalcomputer.
(2)Set the I/O base address of the interface board (in only case of ISAtype).
Before mounting the interface board of ISA type, set the I/O address notto conflict with the I/O address areas that are used by the personalcomputer and other ISA extension boards. Set the I/O address not toconflict with each other in case that two or more interface boards for thepersonal computer are used (HSSB multi–connection).
The interface board of PCI type is setting free.
(3) Insert the interface board for the personal computer to the ISAconnector tightly.
(4)Screw the plate of interface board to the computer.
(5)Confirm connection (in only case of HSSB multi–connection)
Confirm following items for installing drivers of HSSB interfaceboard in case of HSSB multi–connection.
In case of ISA type
I/O port address set to HSSB channel
Correspondence between HSSB channel and CNC
In case of PCI type
PCI slot number which HSSB board is mounted (slot numberis marked to PCB normally).
Correspondence between HSSB channel and CNC
(6)Restore the covering plate.
NOTEDo not touch the leads running to the card edge of theinterface board (that match with connectors).
12.6PROCEDURE FORINSTALLINGPERSONALCOMPUTERINTERFACE BOARDS
12. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) B–63523EN/03
426
A20B–8001–0583
A20B–8001–0582
L M N
Personal computerinterface boardsNew type 2
(When viewed fromthe top of the board)
Channel A
Channel A
Channel B
The I/O base address of the interface board is LMN0h(*1). The factory settings are as follows:
A20B–8001–0583L, M, N = 0, 2, 8 for channel A (COP7A)
A20B–8001–0582L, M, N = 0, 2, 8 for channel A (COP7A)L, M, N = 0, 2, 9 for channel B (COP7B)
*1 When the base address is LMN0h, LMN0h to LMNFh are used.
Fig. 12.6 I/O base address setting (for personal computer interface board of new type 2 (A20–B–8100–0582, –0583))
B–63523EN/03 12. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB)
427
(1)Personal computer interface board
(A) Electrostatic interferenceThe personal computer interface board is shipped in an anti–staticbag. To store or transport the interface board, always place it inthe anti–static bag. Before removing the interface board from theanti–static bag, ground your body.
(B) Protection of card edge terminalsWhen handling the personal computer interface board, do NOTtouch its card edge terminals (the gold–plated contacts whichengage with a mating connector). If you accidentally touch anycard edge terminal, wipe it gently with clean or ethylalcohol–dipped tissue paper or absorbent cotton. Do not use anyorganic solvent other than ethyl alcohol.
(2)Optical connector and fiber cableSee Appendix D.
12.7HANDLINGPRECAUTIONS
12. HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS (HSSB) B–63523EN/03
428
CNC interface cardOptical fiber cable
Personal computerinterface card
COP7 COP7
Compatible cables (optical fiber cables, used for interconnections)A66L–6001–0026#L_
See descriptions about standard cable lengths in Appendix D forexplanations about how to specify the length of the underscored portionand the related cautions.
NOTEAn optical fiber cable of up to 100 m can be used only whenthe NC side interface board A02B–0281–J202 (printedcircuit board drawing number: A20B–8001–0641) is usedwith the personal computer interface board (A20B–8001–0582, –0583 –960 or –0961).
12.8RECOMMENDEDCABLES
B–63523EN/03 13. CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS
429
13 CONNECTION TO OTHER NETWORKS
The i Series CNC can be connected to the following networks. For anexplanation of how to make the connection, refer to the manuals listedbelow:
Manual title Manual code
FANUC I/O Link–II Connection Manual B–62714EN
FANUC Data Server Operator’s Manual B–62694EN
FANUC Ethernet Board Operator’s Manual B–63354EN
FANUC Profibus–DP Board Operator’s Manual B–62924EN
FANUC DeviceNet Board Operator’s Manual B–63404EN
14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is B–63523EN/03
430
14 CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
B–63523EN/03 14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
431
160is/180is/210iscontrol unit
24V–IN (CP1)
SPDL&POS (JA41)
I/O LINK (JD44A)
A–OUT&HDI (JA40)
R232–1 (JD36A)
R232–2 (JD36B)
SV–CHK (CA69)
MDI (CA55)
Ethernet(CD38A)
The functions and connection methods of these connectorsare the same as those in the Series 16i/18i/21i. See Chapters1 to 13 for explanations about the connection methods.
PC side R232 ⋅USB (JD48)
PC side Ethernet (CD38S)
BACKUP POWER–IN (CA75)
RS–232–C I/O devicePC
USB printerUSB keyboard
HUB
Backup unit
Ethernet backbone cable
14.1TOTAL CONNECTIONDIAGRAMS
14.1.1LCD–Mounted TypeSeries 160is/180is/210is Control Unit
14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is B–63523EN/03
432
CNC control unit
Power Supply
HSSB I/F BOARD HSSB(COP7)
Main board
MDI
MDI unit
(CK1)
Soft key (CK2)
CNC display unit for Windows
CK2(Soft Key)
HSSB (COP7)
+24V (CP1)
Serial Port (JD48)
Ethernet (CD38S)
Backup Power–In (CA75) Backup unit
HUB
+24VDC power supply
RS–232–C I/O devicePC
USB keyboardUSB printer
Ethernet backbone cable
This cable is connected only for an MDI unitwith soft keys. (The cable is supplied togetherwith a display unit for the is Series CNC.)
The connections method other than those explained above are the sameas those in the Series 16i/18i/21i. See Chapters 1 to 13 for explanationsabout the connection methods.
14.1.2CNC Display Unit forWindows (Stand–AloneType)
B–63523EN/03 14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
433
CNC control (Backside)(The control unit shown above has no option slot.)
COP10A–1/2
Power supplymodule
JD38S JD38A CA75
CP
1
JA41
JD44
A
JA40
JD36
B
JD36
A
CA
69
CA
55
JD48
14.2INSTALLATION
14.2.1Connector Names andConnector Layout
14.2.1.1LCD–mounted Series160is/180is/210is
14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is B–63523EN/03
434
CP1 Connector for power supply
JA41 Connector for serial spindle or position coder
JD44A Connector for I/O Link
JA40 Connector for analog spindle or high–speed skip
JD36A/B Connector for I/O device interface (A : left side, B : right side)
JD38A Connector for Ethernet (CNC control)
CA69 Connector for servo check board
CA55 Connector for MDI
COP10A–1/2 Connector for servo unit (1 : left side, 2 : right side)
CA75 Connector for backup unit (Windows CE control)
JD48Connector for PC or FA full–keyboard / USB device connection(Windows CE control)
CD38S Connector for Ethernet (Windows CE control)
B–63523EN/03 14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
435
COP
7
Fan Fan
Back plane diagram
CP1 CA75 CK2 JD48 COP7
(FUSE)Soft key cable
CD38S
(for unit with soft keys)
CP1 Connector for power supply
COP7 Connector for HSSB
CK2Connector for Soft key cable (for a unit with soft keys, a cable isalso supplied)
CA75 Connector for backup unit (Windows CE control)
JD48Connector for PC or FA full–keyboard / USB device connection(Windows CE control)
CD38S Connector for Ethernet (Windows CE control)
14.2.1.2CNC display unit forWindows
14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is B–63523EN/03
436
Mounting hole diagram(Install the unit from the outsideof the cabinet.)
At the rear of the metal panel, the area within8 mm of the outside edge is left unpainted.
External dimensions of unit
Number ofoptional slot
Depth D(mm)
None 60
2 110
3 125
4 170
— 60
LCD–mountedtype
CNC display unitfor Windows
See Appendix A, ”External Dimensions of Each Unit,” for explanationsabout units such as the MDI.
14.2.2External Dimensions ofthe Units
B–63523EN/03 14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
437
The control units and peripheral units offered by FANUC are designed onthe assumption that they will be enclosed in a tightly closed cabinet. Thecabinet can be:
One that is created by the machine tool builder to house a control unitor peripheral unit,
Operator’s pendant box created by the machine tool builder to housea control unit or operator’s panel, or
The likeThe following table lists the environmental conditions for control unitshoused in a cabinet listed above.
Condition Series 160is/180is/210is–MODEL B
Ambient temperature Operating 0°C to 58°C
Storage, Transport –20°C to 60°C
Humidity Normal 10% to 75%RH, no condensation
Short period (less than 1 month) 10% to 90%RH, no condensation
Vibration Operating 0.5G or less
Non–operating 1.0G or less
Meters above sea level Operating Up to 1000m
Non–operating Up to 12000m
Environment Normal machine shop environment(The environment must be considered if the cabinets are in a location where the density of
dust, coolant, and/or organic solvent is relatively high.)
Using the 160is/180is/210is requires a 24 VDC 10% power input thatsatisfies the requirements listed below. The tolerance 10% includesinstantaneous changes and ripples.
Number ofoption slot
Power supplycapacity (A)
Heat output (W)
None 3.4A 45W
LCD–mounted 2 3.5A 48WLCD–mountedtype 3 3.7A 53W
4 3.8A 54W
CNC display unitfor Windows
— 2.7A 29W
*1:When the power is turned on, 1.5 A is consumed for one minute or soto charge the backup unit. The power requirements listed aboveinclude this current.
*2:The current used in the LCD and MDI unit is included. No current foreach option board is included. See Section 3.2, ”Power SupplyCapacity,” for information about the power requirements of optionboards.
*3:If power is supplied to a FANUC device, such as Handy File, from theRS–232–C port, 1 A is needed additionally.
14.2.3EnvironmentalConditions for ControlUnits
14.2.4Power Supply Capacity
14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is B–63523EN/03
438
LCD–mounted Type CNC andCNC display unit for Windows
CP1
+24V
0V
1
2
3
+24VDC input
AMP
Housing Contact
LCD–mounted type 1–178288–3 1–175218–5
CNC display unit for 2–178288–3 1–175218–5Windows
Separate housings are used for the LCD–mountedType and the display unit for the is Series CNC.
(i) Cable wiring
CP1
+24V
0V
1
2
+24V
0V
NOTE1 Keep the power supply cable away from other cables
connected to the Series 160is/180is/210is.2 Turn on/off the power to the display unit for the is Series
CNC within 100 ms after the power to the stand–alonetype control unit is turned on/off.
WARNINGIt is impossible to turn on/off the display unit for the is SeriesCNC and the CNC control unit separately.
14.3CONNECTION TOCNC PERIPHERALS
14.3.1Main Power Input
B–63523EN/03 14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
439
After the power to the CNC is turned off, the backup unit enables power tobe supplied to the internal circuits of the CNC for a certain period of timeto execute a power turn–off sequence (for allowing important data to beautomatically saved from main memory to a compact flash card). Unlessthere is a backup unit, no power turn–off sequence will be executed.
A B1 +24V +24V2 BU1 BU23 BU3 BU44 BU5 BU65 BU7 BU86 BU9 BU107 BU11 BU128 GND VCC9 GND VCC10 GND VCC
LCD–mounted Type CNC andCNC display unit for Windows
CA75JAELY20–20P–DTI–P
A B1 +24V +24V2 BU1 BU23 BU3 BU44 BU5 BU65 BU7 BU86 BU9 BU107 BU11 BU128 GND VCC9 GND VCC10 GND VCC
CN9JAE LY20–20P–DTI–P
Japan Aviation ElectronicsLY10–DC20 (housing)LY10–C2–3–10000 (contact)A02B–0236–K303
Backup unit
(i) Cable wiring
CA75
+24V
+24V
BU1
BU2
BU3
BU4
BU5
BU6
BU7
BU8
BU9
BU10
BU11
BU12
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
+24V
+24V
BU1
BU2
BU3
BU4
BU5
BU6
BU7
BU8
BU9
BU10
BU11
BU12
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
A1
B1
A2
B2
A3
B3
A4
B4
A5
B5
A6
B6
A7
B7
A8
B8
A9
B9
A10
B10
Shield
Grounding plate
Recommended cable : A02B–0281–K801 (50cm)
Recommended wire :A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWGX10–pair)
NOTEKeep the cable length within 50 cm.
CN9
14.3.2Backup Unit
14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is B–63523EN/03
440
(ii) External dimensions of Backup unit
A02B–0281– A02B–0281–H160 H161
A 198 150B 104 104C 188 139D 7 12E 76.5 64F 23.5 28G 58 58
Hole M3 M4diameter
External dimensions [Unit : mm]
Mounting hole diagram
C
E
ConnectorA
B
C
D
E
F
G
1
B–63523EN/03 14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
441
(iii) Mounting backup unitInstall the backup unit on the rear of the MDI unit or in the pendantbox where the CNC main unit is housed.Because the backup unit contains parts with limited service life, itshould be installed in a place where parts can be replaced easilyduring maintenance work.
Example of mounting the backup unit on the rear of the MDI unit
Conector
Clamp
160is/180is/210is
MODEL B
Note 2
Metal fittings for clamp
Bachup unit
NOTE1 The connector of the backup unit cable is of an easy lock
type. Clamp the cable near the connector so that theconnector will not be pulled with the weight of the cable.
2 Connect the shielding terminal of the backup unit to agrounded cabinet or the grounding stud on theLCD–mounted type unit or the CNC display unit for the isSeries CNC mounted on a grounded cabinet.
14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is B–63523EN/03
442
CAUTIONBefore attaching or removing cables, power off the CNCmain unit, and confirm that the power is off.Ask the respective manufacturers for explanations abouthow to build a network and about conditions for using units(such as a media converter, hub, transceiver, and cable)other than the CNC unit. When installing network cables,exercise sufficient caution so that the network will not beaffected by any noise source. Electrically separate thenetwork wiring sufficiently from noise sources like motorsand their power lines. Also, ground each unit as required.If the grounding impedance is high, it may cause trouble incommunication. Once the equipment is installed, conductcommunication tests to verify normal operation beforestarting actual use of the equipment.FANUC is not liable to any damage related to trouble arisingfrom any unit other than the CNC unit.
(1)Connection to the Ethernet InterfaceThe 10BASE–T and 100BASE–TX interfaces are available. A hub(line concentrator) is used to connect the CNC unit to a system. Atypical connection example is shown below.
LCD–mountedtype CNC unitor CNC display
unit forWindows
Twisted–pair cable
HUB (line concentrator)
Max. 100m
Some of the units (hub, transceiver, etc.) required to build a networkare not dust–proof. Using them in an atmosphere with dust or oil mistmay lead to a communication error or failure. They should be enclosedin a dust–proof cabinet.
14.3.3Ethernet Interface(10BASE–T/100BASE–TX)
B–63523EN/03 14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
443
(2)Leading in Ethernet cablesAn Ethernet cable should be fixed with a clamp or the like so thatpulling it will not cause tension to be applied to the connector (RJ–45)at the end of the cable. The clamp not only fixes the cable but alsogrounds the shield of the cable.
Control unit
Ethernet cable
Clamp
Grounding plate
(3)Pin arrangement of the 10BASE–T/100BASE–TX connector(CD38S)CD38S
Pin No. Signal name Description
1 TX+ Transmit +
2 TX– Transmit –
3 RX+ Receive +
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 RX– Receive –
7 Not used
8 Not used
14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is B–63523EN/03
444
(4)Specification of Twisted–Pair Cable(a) Cable connection
The connectors of a cable for connecting between the 10BASE–T/100BASE–TX interface (CD38S) and the hub have the pinarrangement shown below.
CD38S
1 TX+
2 TX–
3 RX+
4
5
6 RX–
7
8
RJ–45 modular jack
Max. 100m
HUB
1 TX+
2 TX–
3 RX+
4
5
6 RX–
7
8
TX+
TX–
RX+
RX–
1
2
3
6
Shield
CD38A
TX+
TX–
RX+
RX–
1
2
3
6
NOTEThe cable can be up to 100 m long (for the FANUC–recommended cable for movable sections, up to 50 m). Donot make the cable longer than necessary.
(b)Cable WiresMany cables without a shield (UTP cables) are commerciallyavailable as twisted pair cables conforming to 10BASE–T or100BASE–TX. To improve noise immunity in factory automationenvironments, however, be sure to use twisted pair cables (STPcables) with a common shield in category 5.
B–63523EN/03 14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
445
Recommended cables (for fixed parts)
Manufacturer Specification Remark
Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. DTS5087C–4P Twisted wires
Nissei Electric Co., Ltd. F–4PFWMF Single–wire cable
NOTEThese recommended cables for fixed parts must not beused for movable sections. Be sure to use the followingrecommended cables for movable sections.
Recommended cable (for movable sections)
Manufacturer Specification Remark
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
AWG26 4P TPMC–C5–F(SB) Dedicated to FANUC products
Cable specification (FANUC original product, with no connector)
Drawing number: A66L–0001–0453
Manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
Specification
– Electrical characteristic: Complying with EIA/TIA 568Acategories 3 and 5The length of the cable to the hub must be kept within 50 mbecause of its attenuation performance.
– Structure: Common–shield braided cable with drain wireThe conductors of the cable are AWG26 annealed–copperstrand wire, with a sheath 0.8 mm thick and an outer diameterof 6.70.3 mm
– Fire resistance: UL1581 VW–1
– Oil resistance: As per FANUC’s internal standard (Equivalentto conventional oil–resistant electrical cable)
– Flex resistance: Million or more bending cycles with a bendingradius of 50 mm (U–shaped bend test)
– UL style No.: AWM20276 (80C/30V/VW–1)
NOTEUse the TM21CP–88P(03) connector made by HiroseElectric Co., Ltd. to this cable.
About cable assemblies
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. can offer a cable assembly that uses theTM21CP–88P(03) connector made by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. Toget this cable assembly, negotiate directly with the manufacturer on itsspecifications (cable length, shipping test, package, etc.).
14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is B–63523EN/03
446
(c) Connector specificationAn 8–pin modular connector called the RJ–45 is used with atwisted–pair cable for Ethernet interfaces. Use the connector listedbelow or equivalent.
Manufacturer Specification Remark
Connector used with cableAWG26 4P TPMC–C5–F(SB) TM21CP–88P(03) Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. (*)
NOTEAbout TM21CP–88P(03)Connector (manufacturer’s standard product)Drawing number: A63L–0001–0823#PManufacturer: Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.Manufacturer ’s model number: TM21CP–88P(03)Complying with EIA/TIA 568A categories 3 and 5Ask Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. for explanations about how toattach the connector to a cable.
(Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. offers the TM21CP–88P(03) WiringProcedure Specification (Engineering Specification No.ATAD–E2367) to explain the related technical information.)
(5)Anti–Noise Measure(a) Separating signal lines
Ethernet cable wires belong to group C. See descriptionselsewhere for explanations about how to separate them from wiresin group A or B.
(b)Cable Clamp and Shield ProcessingIf a cable connected to the CNC requires shielding, clamp the cableas shown below. The clamp both supports and shields the cable.Use this clamp to ensure stable operation of the system.Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clampby the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground platemust be made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :
Ground plate
Cable
Cable clamp
Shield
Cable shield
B–63523EN/03 14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
447
Prepare ground plate like the following figure.
Mount screw hole
Hole for securing metal fitting clamp
Ground terminal(grounded)
For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, whichsurface is plated with nickel.
12mm
20mm
8mmGroundplate
14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is B–63523EN/03
448
(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.
17mm
28mm
6mm
Max. 55mm
Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp A02B–0083–K301 (20 pieces)
(c) Network InstallationEven when the machine satisfies its grounding requirements, noisefrom the machine may get on communication lines depending onthe way the machine is installed and its environment, resulting ina communication error. Separating and isolating the Ethernetbackbone cable and PC from the machine can prevent noise fromgetting on the communication lines.An example of connection is shown below.
B–63523EN/03 14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
449
[Large–scale network]
[Small–scale network]
(*1)
PC and backbone cable side
Power supply for the HUBHUB
Electrical separation byconnection with10BASE–T/100BASE–TX
Machine system side
STP cable STP cable
Machine
(*1) (*1) (*1)
PC
(*1)
STP cable
Power supply for the HUBHUB
Machine Machine
PC and backbone cable side
Electrical separation byconnection with10BASE–T/100BASE–TX
Machine system side
(*1)
Machine
NOTE1 Ground the PC and backbone cable separately from the machine system.
If this is impossible because there is only one grounding point, use separate grounding wiresfor the PC/backbone cable and the machine system up to the grounding point.The grounding resistance must not be higher than 100 Ω (class 3 grounding). The groundingwire must not be thinner than the AC power line conductor, and its cross–sectional area mustnot smaller than 5.5 mm2.
2 In some cases, the aforementioned isolation/separation method based on 10BASE–T/100BASE–TX cannot assure normal communication because of influence by noise. In suchworst environments, use optical fiber media to completely isolate the machine from the PC.
14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is B–63523EN/03
450
This connector (JD48) is used for a serial port and USB port on the PCside.
This port is used for remote debugging of application software.To use the following functions, use an RS–232–C connector (JD36A orJD36B) on the CNC side rather than this connector.
Input/output of parameters and programs performed using the CNC screendisplay function
Ladder uploading, downloading, and monitoring performed by FANUC–LADDER III
DNC operation performed via RS–232–C
External control of I/O devices
LCD–mounted type CNC and CNCdisplay unit for is series CNC
JD48PCR–E20MD
1 RD 11 SD2 0V 12 USB_0V
3 Reserve 13 Reserve
4 0V 14 Reserve
5 CS 15 RS6 USB_+ 16 Reserve
7 Reserve 17 Reserve
8 USB_– 18 Reserve
9 Reserve 19 Reserve
10 Reserve 20 USB_5V
Shield
Relay connector (example 1)D–SUB 25
1 FG2 SD3 RD4 RS5 CS6 DR7 SG8 CD910111213
14151617181920 ER2122 RI232425
Relay connector (example 2)D–SUB 9
1 CD2 RD3 SD4 ER5 SG
6 DR7 RS8 CS9 RI
(i) Connection example (Example 1: Conversion to D–SUB 25–pinconnector)
Relay connectorD–SUB 25 (example 1)JD48
SD
RD
RS
CS
0V
11
01
15
05
02,12
04,14
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
ER
CD
RI
SG
FG
02
03
04
05
06
20
08
22
07
01Shield
Ground plate GND
Recommended wire specification:A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWGX10–pair)
Recommended connector for cable and housing (JD48 side)
Connector Housing Manufacture
PCR–E20FA PCR–V20LA/ Honda Tsushin PCS–E20LA Kogyo
FI30–20S FI–20–CV2/ Hirose ElectricFI–20–CV7
FCN–247J020–G/E FCN–240C020–Y/S Fujitsu
52622–2011 52624–2015 Molex Japan
14.3.4Serial Port/USB Port
14.3.4.1Serial port
B–63523EN/03 14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
451
(ii) Connection example (Example 2: Conversion to D–SUB 9–pinconnector)
Relay connectorD–SUB 9 (example 2)JD48
SD
RD
RS
CS
0V
11
01
15
05
02,12,
04,14
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
ER
CD
RI
SG
3
2
7
8
6
4
1
9
5
Shield
Ground plate
(iii) Connection example (Example 3: Connection with a PC for remotedebugging)
PC serial portD–SUB 9 (example 3)JD48
SD
RD
RS
CS
0V
11
01
15
05
02,12,
04,14
SD
RD
RS
CS
DR
ER
CD
RI
SG
3
2
7
8
6
4
1
9
5
Shield
Ground plate
NOTEFor connection with a PC, create a cable according to theconnector pin arrangement on the PC side.
14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is B–63523EN/03
452
Use this port to connect with the USB keyboard or printer.
LCD–mounted Type CNC andCNC display unit for Windows
JD48
PCR–E20MD
1 RD 11 SD
2 0V 12 USB_0V
3 Reserve 13 Reserve
4 0V 14 Reserve
5 CS 15 RS
6 USB_+ 16 Reserve
7 Reserve 17 Reserve
8 USB_– 18 Reserve
9 Reserve 19 Reserve
10 Reserve 20 USB_5V
Relay connectorUSB
1 5V2 D–3 D+4 0V
(i) Connection (for conversion to the USB connector (type A receptacle))
Recommended connector for cable and housing (JD48 side)
Connector Housing Manufacture
PCR–E20FA PCR–V20LA/ Honda Tsushin PCS–E20LA Kogyo
FI30–20S FI–20–CV2/ Hirose ElectricFI–20–CV7
FCN–247J020–G/E FCN–240C020–Y/S Fujitsu
52622–2011 52624–2015 Molex Japan
JD48 USB connector
USB_+
USB_–
USB_0V
USB_5V
06
08
12
20
D+
D–
0V
5V
03
02
04
01
Shield
Recommended wire specification:Use dedicated wire.
NOTE1 Because not some little incompatibility occurs between
commercial USB devices and USB hosts, FANUC does notguarantee that all commercial USB devices can operate onFANUC products. The machine tool builder should checktheir operability carefully. Also note that no commercialUSB device is usually designed for dust or drip resistance.
2 Generally, USB devices can be connected to a PC with itspower kept on (hot plugging). However, this connector(JD48) does not support hot plugging. Using a USBconnector (type A receptacle) as a junction connectorsupports hot plugging outside the USB junction connector.
3 The USB power supply (5 V) can supply up to 500 mA.4 Ground the USB connector to a grounding plate.
14.3.4.2USB port
B–63523EN/03 14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
453
This is a USB–connectable FA full keyboard that can be used with theSeries 160is/180is/210is.
LCD–mounted type CNC and CNCdisplay unit for is series CNC
1 RD 11 SD
2 0V 12 USB_0V
3 Reserve 13 Reserve
4 0V 14 Reserve
5 CS 15 RS
6 USB_+ 16 Reserve
7 Reserve 17 Reserve
8 USB_– 18 Reserve
9 Reserve 19 Reserve
10 Reserve 20 USB_5V
FA full–keyboard
JD48PCR–E20MD PCR–E20MD
1 Reserve 11 Reserve
2 Reserve 12 USB_0V
3 Reserve 13 Reserve
4 Reserve 14 Reserve
5 Reserve 15 Reserve
6 D+ 16 Reserve
7 Reserve 17 Reserve
8 D– 18 Reserve
9 Reserve 19 Reserve
10 Reserve 20 USB_5V
(i) Wiring
Recommended connector for cable and housing (JD48 side)
Connector Housing Manufacture
PCR–E20FA PCR–V20LA/ Honda Tsushin PCS–E20LA Kogyo
FI30–20S FI–20–CV2/ Hirose ElectricFI–20–CV7
FCN–247J020–G/E FCN–240C020–Y/S Fujitsu
52622–2011 52624–2015 Molex Japan
JD48
USB_+
USB_–
USB_0V
USB_5V
06
08
12
20
D+
D–
0V
5V
06
08
12
20
Shield
Recommended wire specification:Use dedicated wire.
FA full–keyboardPCR–E20MD
NOTEThe following dedicated cable can be used for connectionwith the FA full–keyboard. This cable cannot be used toconnect RS–232–C devices or other USB devices. Neithera controller–side connector nor a keyboard–side connectorcan be inserted or removed with power kept on (hotplugging).
FA full–keyboard: A02B–0281–C130#EDedicated cable: A02B–0281–K802
14.3.5FA Full–Keyboard
14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is B–63523EN/03
454
(ii) External dimensions [Unit : mm]
22
220
290
280 4–M3
204
274
210
Mounting hole diagram
(iii) Current drainThe keyboard is supplied with power from the USB connector(JD48) (bus–powered). It requires 400 mA (maximum)
(iv) OthersNo mouse can be connected.
B–63523EN/03 14. CONNECTION FOR Series 160is/180is/210is
455
HSSB interface board (CNC side)
Optical fiber cable
COP7 COP7
CNC display unit for Windows
1) Recommended cable (optical fiber cable)A66L–6001–0026#L1R003 Cable length=1m. . . . A66L–6001–0026#L3R003 Cable length=3m. . . . A66L–6001–0026#L5R003 Cable length=5m. . . . A66L–6001–0026#L7R003 Cable length=7m. . . . A66L–6001–0026#L10R03 Cable length=10m. . . . A66L–6001–0026#L15R03 Cable length=15m. . . . A66L–6001–0026#L20R03 Cable length=20m. . . . A66L–6001–0026#L30R03 Cable length=30m. . . . A66L–6001–0026#L50R03 Cable length=50m. . . . A66L–6001–0026#L100R3 Cable length=100m. . . .
2) Recommended cable (junction–only low–loss optical fiber cable)A66L–6001–0029#L1R003 Cable length=1m. . . . A66L–6001–0029#L3R003 Cable length=3m. . . . A66L–6001–0029#L5R003 Cable length=5m. . . . A66L–6001–0029#L7R003 Cable length=7m. . . . A66L–6001–0029#L10R03 Cable length=10m. . . . A66L–6001–0029#L15R03 Cable length=15m. . . . A66L–6001–0029#L20R03 Cable length=20m. . . . A66L–6001–0029#L30R03 Cable length=30m. . . . A66L–6001–0029#L40R03 Cable length=40m. . . . A66L–6001–0029#L50R03 Cable length=50m. . . .
3) Low–low optical junction adapterA63L–0020–0004
WARNINGAny cable other than the recommended cable or any adapterother than the low–loss optical junction adapter cannot beused.The machine tool builder cannot cut or bond the optical fibercable. If junction is needed, be sure to use the junction–onlylow–loss optical fiber cable and low–loss optical adapter.See Appendix D, ”Optical Fiber Cable,” for explanationsabout how to handle optical fiber cables.
14.3.6High–Speed Serial Bus(HSSB) (HSSB) [ForStand–Alone Type]
APPENDIX
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
459
A EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
(Outline Drawings of the i Series CNC with a LCD–mounted Type Panel)
Outline drawing title Specification drawing number Figure
Series 16i/18i/21i 7.2″ STN A02B–0281–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H124 Fig.U1control unit monochrome LCD
panel A02B–0283–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H124panel
A02B–0297–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H124
A02B–0285–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H124
8.4″ TFT color A02B–0281–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H123 Fig.U2LCD panel
A02B–0283–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H123
A02B–0297–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H123
A02B–0285–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H123
9.5″ STN A02B–0281–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H122 Fig.U3monochrome LCDpanel A02B–0283–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H122panel
A02B–0297–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H122
A02B–0285–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H122
10.4″ TFT color A02B–0281–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H120,H121 Fig.U4LCD panel
A02B–0283–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H120,H121
A02B–0297–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H120,H121
A02B–0285–B500,B502,B503,B504 A02B–0281–H120,H121
(Outline Drawings of the i Series CNC with a Stand–alone Type Unit)
Series 16i/18i/21i and Series 160i/180i/210i control units A02B–0281–B801, B803,A02B–0283–B801, B803,A02B–0297–B801, B803,A02B–0285–B801, B803
Fig. U6
10.4″/9.5″ LCD unit A02B–0281–C071, C081, C061, C066 Fig. U7
7.2″ LCD/MDI unit (Unit applied to display link) A02B–0166–C261#TR, R, TS, S Fig. U8
7.2″ monochrome LCD unit (Unit applied to display link) A02B–0166–C251 Fig. U9
MDI unit (for 7.2″ LCD) (Unit applied to display link) A02B–0166–C210#TR, TS, R, S Fig. U10
Detachable 7.2″ LCD/MDI unit (Unit applied to display link) A02B–0166–C271#TR, TS, R, S Fig. U11
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
460
(Outline Drawings of CNC display unit with PC functions)
CNC display unitwith PC functionsor PANEL i
10.4” TFT colorLCD panel
A08B–0082–B001 to –B004A08B–0082–B031 to –B038A08B–0193–B031 to –B038
Fig.U12(a)
12.1” TFT colorLCD panel
A08B–0082–B011 to –B014A08B–0082–B041 to –B048A08B–0193–B041 to –B048
Fig.U12(b)
15.0” TFT colorLCD panel
A08B–0082–B021 to –B023A08B–0082–B051 to –B057A08B–0193–B051 to –B057
Fig.U12(c)
(Outline drawings of other units)
Stand–alone type small MDI unit
For 7.2”/8.4” LCDunit
A02B–0281–C120#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS Fig.U13
Stand–alone type standard MDI unit
For 7.2”/8.4” LCDunit
A02B–0281–C121#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS Fig.U14
Stand–alone type standard MDI unit (horizontal type)
For 9.5”/10.4” LCDunit
A02B–0281–C125#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS, TFBR, TFBS Fig.U15
Stand–alone type standard MDI unit (vertical type)
For 9.5”/10.4” LCDunit
A02B–0281–C126#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS, TFBR, TFBS Fig.U16
FA full keyboard For 10.4” LCD unit A02B–0236–C131#EC, JC Fig.U17(a)
FA full keyboard For 12.1” LCD unit A02B–0236–C132#EC, JC Fig.U17(b)
FA full keyboard For 15.0” LCD unit A08B–0082–C150#EC, JC Fig.U17(c)
Full keyboard (for debugging purposes) A86L–0001–0210, 0211 Fig.U18
Mouse (for debugging purposes) A86L–0001–0212 Fig.U19
Floppy disk unit (for debuggingpurposes)
A02B–0207–C008 Fig.U20
HSSB interface board type 2 (1CH) onthe personal computer side (ISA)
A20B–8001–0583 Fig.U21(a)
HSSB interface board type 2 (2CH) onthe personal computer side (ISA)
A20B–8001–0582
HSSB interface board type 2 (1CH) onthe personal computer side (PCI)
A20B–8001–0961 Fig.U21(b)
HSSB interface board type 2 (2CH) onthe personal computer side (PCI)
A20B–8001–0960
Position coder 4000min–1 A86L–0027–0001#102 Fig.U22(a)
6000min–1 A86L–0027–0001#002
α position coder 10000mi–1 A860–0309–T302 Fig.U22(b)
Manual pulse generator A860–0202–T001 Fig.U23
Pendant manual pulse generator A860–0202–T004 to T015 Fig.U24
Separate detector interface unit A02B–0236–C205, C204 Fig.U25
Battery case for separate detector interface unit (ABS)
A06B–6050–K060 Fig.U26
Tap unit for DNC1 A13B–0156–C100 Fig.U27
Terminating resistance unit for DNC1 A13B–0156–C200 Fig.U28
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
461
CNC battery unit for external installation A02B–0236–C281 Fig.U29
Punch panel 1m A02B–0236–C191 Fig.U30(narrow type)
2m A02B–0236–C192
5m A02B–0236–C193
Punch panel 1m A02B–0120–C191 Fig.U31
2m A02B–0120–C192
5m A02B–0120–C193
Distribution I/O small machine operator’spanel
A02B–0236–C141#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS Fig.U32
Distribution I/O standard machine operator’s panel
A02B–0236–C140#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS Fig.U33
61–key MDI unit For 9.5”/10.4” LCD A02B–0261–C161#MCR, MCS Fig.U34(vertical type) unit A02B–0261–C163#MCR, MCS
61–key MDI unit For 9.5”/10.4” LCD A02B–0261–C162#MCR, MCS Fig.U35(horizontal type) unit A02B–0261–C164#MCR, MCS
61–key MDI unit (horizontal type)
For 12.1” LCD unit A02B–0261–C165#MCR, MCS Fig.U36
61–key MDI unit (horizontal type)
For 12.1” LCD unit A02B–0261–C166#MCR, MCS Fig.U37
Blank panel Supplied with the 61–key MDI unit (A02B–0261–C165, C166). Fig.U38
Distribution I/O machine operator’s panel(290mm wide)
A02B–0236–C150#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS Fig.U39
Stand–alone typestandard MDI unit
For 10.4”(vertical type)
A02B–0281–C327#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS Fig.U40(a)
for 160i/180i/210iFor 10.4”(horizontarl type)
A02B–0281–C320#TBR, MBR, TBS, MBS Fig.U40(b)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
462
At the rear of the metalpanel, the area within 8mm of the outside edge isleft unpainted.Install the unit from theoutside of the cabinet.
Mounting hole diagram
With no option slot
With 2 option slots
190
184
244
200
5
Number ofoption slots
Depth(D) (mm)
2
3
4
110
125
170
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossed
Fig. U1 External dimensions of 7.2″ LCD–mounted type CNC control unit
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
463
At the rear of the metalpanel, the area within 8mm of the outside edge isleft unpainted.Install the unit from theoutside of the cabinet.
Mounting hole diagram
With no option slot
With 2 option slots
190
184
244
200
5
Number ofoption slots
Depth(D) (mm)
2
3
4
110
125
170
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossed
Fig. U2 External dimensions of 8.4″ LCD–mounted type CNC control unit
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
464
At the rear of the metalpanel, the area within 8mm of the outside edge isleft unpainted.Install the unit from theoutside of the cabinet.
Mounting hole diagram
With no option slot
With 2 option slots
210
204
274
220
5
Number ofoption slots
Depth(D) (mm)
2
3
4
110
125
170
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossed
Fig. U3 External dimensions of 9.5″ LCD–mounted type CNC control unit
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
465
At the rear of the metalpanel, the area within 8mm of the outside edge isleft unpainted.Install the unit from theoutside of the cabinet.
Mounting hole diagram
With no option slot
With 2 option slots
210
204
274
220
5
Number ofoption slots
Depth(D) (mm)
2
3
4
110
125
170
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossed
Fig. U4 External dimensions of 10.4″ LCD–mounted type CNC control unit
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
466
172 (for 3–slot type)
60 (for 1–slot type)
Weight : For 1–slot type, 0.7 kgFor 3–slot type, 1.9 kg
For both types, the stated weightdoes not include printed–circuitboards inserted in the slots.
Memory card
Slot 1
Slot 3 Slot 2
Fig. U6 Stand–alone Type i Series Control Unit
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
467
4–M3
4–4290
2805 5
220
521
05
Mounting hole layout diagram(The unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.)Painting shall be masked 8 mm from the edges of the panel sheet metalon the rear surface.
Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium gloss
Fig. U7 10.4″/9.5″ LCD Unit
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
468
Groundingstud (M4)
Groundingstud (M4)
Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium gloss
The unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.
Weight: 3.9 kg
(Mou
ntin
g ho
le la
yout
dia
gram
)
Fig. U8 7.2″ LCD/MDI Unit Outline Drawing (Unit applied to display link)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
469
The unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.
Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium glossWeight: 1.6 kg
Mou
ntin
g ho
le la
yout
dia
gram
Pan
el c
ut p
atte
rn la
yout
dra
win
g
Gro
undi
ng s
tud
(M4)
Sof
t-ke
y co
nnec
tor
Fig. U9 7.2″ Monochrome LCD Unit Outline Drawing (Unit applied to display link)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
470
Grounding stud (M4) (Mounting holelayout diagram)
Grounding stud (M4)
Paint color: Munsell code N3, medium glossThe unit shall be fastened to the cabinet from the outside.
Weight: 1.3 kg
Fig. U10 Stand–alone type MDI Unit (for 7.2″ Stand–alone type LCD) (Unit applied to display link)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
471
Paint color: For case, Munsell code 5GY3.5/0.5, medium glossFor panel, Munsell code N3, medium gloss
Weight: 7 kg
Fig. U11 Detachable 7.2″ LCD/MDI Unit (Unit applied to display link)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
472
204
210
55
220
27 (From
the outside of the plate)
125(With PCI Extension Board Fitting Plate)
60(Without PCI Extension Board Fitting Plate)
Paint Masking(Mounting side of this plate is unpainted in 8mm width from the edge )
Maximum PCI card defined at Connecting 4.
(Basic Unit is mounted from outsideof the panel)
Weight: 3.3kg
Unit : mm
Upper View
Side View
Panel Cutting
Front View
290
225
2805 5
4–φ4
280
274
4–M3
(HOLE)
20
210
Fig. U12 (a) External dimensions of CNC display unit with PC functions or PANEL i with 10.4″ TFT color LCD
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
473
57
270
280
125(With PCI Extension Board Fitting Plate)
60(Without PCI Extension Board Fitting Plate)
Paint Masking(Mounting side of this plate is unpainted in 8mm width from the edge )
Unit : mm
Upper View
Side View
Panel Cutting
Front View
6–4
(Basic Unit is mounted from outsideof the panel)
Weight: 4.5kg
340
2 2530
165
324
165
165 165
6–M3
5
(HOLE)
5
5
270
264
Fig. U12 (b) External dimensions of CNC display unit with PC functions or PANEL i with 12.1″ TFT color LCD
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
474
125(With PCI Extension Board Fitting Plate)
60(Without PCI Extension Board Fitting Plate)
Paint Masking(Mounting side of this plate is unpainted in 8mm width from the edge )
Unit : mm
Upper View
Side ViewFront View
8–4
(Basic Unit is mounted from outsideof the panel)
400
2 30
(HOLE)
5
35
5
Panel Cutting
384
195 195
8–M3 195 195
Weight: 6.0kg
77
Fig. U12 (c) External dimensions of CNC display unit with PC functions or PANEL i with 15.0″ TFT color LCD
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
475
Mounting hole diagram
At the rear of the metal panel, the area within 8 mm ofthe outside edge is left unpainted.Install the unit from the outside of the cabinet.
5
5
190
4–4
11
69
48
30
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossed
Fig. U13 External dimensions of stand–alone type small–size MDI unit
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
476
Mounting hole diagram
At the rear of the metalpanel, the area within8 mm of the outsideedge is left unpainted.Install the unit from theoutside of the cabinet.
33
62
42
17
11
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossed
Fig. U14 External dimensions of stand–alone type standard MDI unit
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
477
At the rear of the metalpanel, the area within8 mm of the outsideedge is left unpainted.Install the unit from theoutside of the cabinet.
Mounting hole diagram
33
72
52
1811
16
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossed
Fig. U15 External dimensions of stand–alone type standard MDI unit (horizontal type)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
478
At the rear of the metalpanel, the area within8 mm of the outsideedge is left unpainted.Install the unit from theoutside of the cabinet.
Mounting hole diagram
33
72
52
35
11
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossed
Fig. U16 External dimensions of stand–alone type standard MDI unit (vertical type)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
479
40
32
305
220
4–φ5
155040 25040
290
2
20 60.6
610
5
20
5660
a
a
a
a
b
a: M510mm b: M510mm (Frame GND)
Weight : 3.5 kg(Unit :mm)
Fig. U17 (a) FA Full Keyboard 10.4″ LCD Type (Specification: A02B–0236–C131#JC,A02B–0236–C131#EC)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
480
6–φ5
155040 25040
340
2
20 60.6
610
5
20
ab
a
a
a
110
54
a: M510mm b: M510mm
(Frame GND)
Weight : 3.7 kg(Unit :mm)
Fig. U17 (b) FA Full Keyboard 12.1″ LCD Type (Specification: A02B–0236–C132#JC,A02B–0236–C132#EC)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
481
155040 25040
2
2060.6
6–φ5
400
140
b
80
86
34
5 35
2–φ5Unpaint rear side(φ10)
b: M510mm (Frame GND)
Weight :3.9 kg(Unit :mm)
Blank Panel
Hole of ConnectorPanel27
Fig. U17 (c) FA Full Keyboard 15.0″ LCD Type (Specification: A08B–0082–C150#JC, A08B–0082–C150#EC)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
482
204
204204
210
210210
!»# $ %&’ («
!»# $ %&’ («
!»# $ %&’ («
)* + +, , #, +,- .+ /, , «‘0 ‘1
HOLE
HOLE
HOLE
280
274
330
324
162
384
192
390
4–M3
6–M3
6–M3
Fig. U17 (d) Panel Cutting
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
483
Full Keyboard 101 key (A86L–0001–0210) (Unit : mm)
(Unit : mm)Full Keyboard 106key (A86L–0001–0211)
Note:These units can be used only during application development and maintenance ,and this is not dust proof. .Ambient temperature during operation is 0C–40C.
Fig. U18 Full Keyboard 101/106key
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
484
1800190
Note:This unit can be used only during application development and maintenance ,and this is not dust proof. .Ambient temperature during operation is 0C–40C.
(Unit : mm)
Cap Ball
Name Plate of Unit
Fig. U19 Mouse (Specification: A86L–0001–0212)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
485
104
134
140
514
0
150
5
4–M3
64
(HOLE)
70
FDD
ACRYLICWINDOW
70
80
55
4–φ3.6
145
(Unit : mm)
J2
J1
Mounting directionWhen using the floppy disk unit attached to the machine, mount the floppy disk unit in one of the following directions:
Side View
Panel Cutting
Fornt View
Fig. U20 Floppy disk unitSpecification No.: A20B–0207–C008
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
486
–0582 –0583
Weight: 0.2 kg
Fig. U21 (a) High–speed serial bus interface board type 2 (PC) (ISA bus version)Specification No.: A20B–8001–0583 (1 CH)
A20B–8001–0582 (2 CH)
09600961
Fig. U21 (b) Interface Board for Personal Computer (PCI bus version)Specification No.: A20B–8001–0960 (2 CH)
A20B–8001–0961 (1 CH)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
487
Note: Mechanical specifications of the position coder are as follows:(1) Input axis inertia
1.0 × 10–3 kg⋅cm⋅sec2 or less(2) Input axis starting torque
1000 g⋅cm or less(3) Allowable input axis load
Driving the timing belt with a pulley directly attached to the position coder shaft may produce an axis load greater than the allowed maximum.
(4) Weight: Approx. 1 kg (without the flange)
Radial load Thrust load
+0.05–0
+00
12–0
4 5.4
3
56
68
98
2
MS3102A20–29P
2 1.15+0.14–0
20
30 3 5
31 +0.15
5
Key position
72
52
68
50–0
.009
–0.0
25
15 14.3
16
–0.0
06–0
.017
+0
–0.1
1
Operating 10 kg or less 5 kg or less
Idle 20 kg or less 10 kg or less
Fig. U22 (a) External dimensions of position coderSpecification No.: A86L–0027–0001#102 (Max. 4000 min–1)
A86L–0027–0001#002 (Max. 6000 min–1)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
488
MC connector: MS3102A–20–29P
Fig. U22 (b) α position coderSpecification No.: A860–0309–T302 (10000 min–1 maximum)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
489
3–M4On the 72 circumference
Fig. U23 External dimensions of manual pulse generatorSpecification No.: A860–0203–T001
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
490
A860–0203–T010 to T015
Fig. U24 External dimensions of pendant–type manual pulse generator Specification No.: A860–0203–T010 to T015
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
491
CP
11
JF10
1(JF
105)
JF10
2(JF
106)
JF10
3(JF
107)
JF10
4(JF
108)
JA4A
CO
P10
BC
OP
10A
The connector names in parentheses are foran expansion unit. The expansion unit doesnot have connectors CP11, JA4A, COP10A,and COP10B.
Fig. U25 External dimensions of separate detector interface unit
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
492
103
FANUC
40
A
78 78
4–M4 counter sinking
Negative polarity indication
Positive polarity indication
Plus terminalwith 3–M3screw holes
Minus terminal with 3–M3 screw holes
4–4.3 mounting hole
Arrow view A
Note) The battery is not included.
103
14.1
Fig. U26 External dimensions of ABS battery case for separate detectorSpecification No.: A06B–6050–K060
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
493
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁ
Á
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
65
5
5
25 25
50
5
32.5
35100
120
1 2 3
Fig. U27 External dimensions of tap
ÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔÔ
16.039.347
.0
Fig. U28 External dimensions of terminal resistance unit
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
494
103
5
13.5 47
115
70
81 93
145
The battery unit is fitted with a 14–m battery cable.
Mounting hole (countersink)
Mounting panel hole drilling
M4 tap × 4
Main unitCover
Fig. U29 External dimensions of external CNC battery unit
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
495
Mounting hole diagram
At the rear of the metalpanel, the area within 8mm of the outside edge isleft unpainted.
Fig. U30 External dimensions of punch panel (narrow type)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
496
Painting shall be masked 8 mm from the edges of the panelsheet metal on the rear surface.
The following is the panel cut layout drawing of this punch panel.
20
2–M3
100
115
Fig. U31 Punch Panel (Narrow Type)Specification No.: A02B–0120–C191 (cable length 1 m)
A02B–0120–C192 (cable length 2 m)A02B–0120–C193 (cable length 5 m)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
497
Pan
el c
uttin
g dr
awin
g
Thi
s m
etal
pla
te c
an b
e re
mov
ed.
Pro
tect
ion
grou
ndin
g st
ud (
M4,
bac
k si
de)
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossedWeight: 2.3kg
At the rear of the metalpanel, the area within 8mm of the outside edge isleft unpainted.Install the unit from theoutside of the cabinet.
Fig. U32 Distribution I/O small machine operator’s panel
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
498
Pan
el c
uttin
g dr
awin
g
Thi
s m
etal
pla
te c
an b
e re
mov
ed.
Pro
tect
ion
grou
ndin
g st
ud (
M4,
bac
k si
de)
Color : Munsell N3, semi–glossedWeight: 2.8kg
At the rear of the metalpanel, the area within 8mm of the outside edge isleft unpainted.Install the unit from theoutside of the cabinet.
Fig. U33 Distribution I/O standard machine operator’s panel
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
499
The
bac
k of
the
met
al p
late
is m
aske
d, 8
mm
wid
e al
ong
the
outs
ide
edge
, to
prev
ent p
aint
ing.
Mou
ntin
g ho
le d
iagr
am
Up
Protective grounding stud (M4)
Weight: 2.0kg
Fig. U34 61–key MDI unit (vertical type)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
500
Mou
ntin
g ho
le d
iagr
am
Up
Protective grounding stud (M4)
Weight: 1.7kg
The
bac
k of
the
met
al p
late
is m
aske
d, 8
mm
wid
e al
ong
the
outs
ide
edge
, to
prev
ent p
aint
ing.
Fig. U35 61–key MDI unit (horizontal type)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
501
Up
Protective grounding stud (M4)
Weight: 2.0kg
The
bac
k of
the
met
al p
late
is m
aske
d, 8
mm
wid
e al
ong
the
outs
ide
edge
, to
prev
ent p
aint
ing.
Con
nect
or p
anel
Bla
nk p
anel
A
n ou
tline
dra
win
g of
the
blan
k pa
nel i
s gi
ven
in F
ig. U
38.
Fig. U36 61–key MDI unit (vertical type)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
502
Up
Protective grounding stud (M4)
Weight: 2.0kg
The
bac
k of
the
met
al p
late
is m
aske
d, 8
mm
wid
e al
ong
the
outs
ide
edge
, to
prev
ent p
aint
ing.
Con
nect
or p
anel
Bla
nk p
anel
A
n ou
tline
dra
win
g of
the
blan
k pa
nel i
s gi
ven
in F
ig. U
38.
Fig. U37 61–key MDI unit (horizontal type)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
503
The
hat
ched
por
tion
is a
n op
enin
g of
the
conn
ecto
r pa
nel.
The
bac
k of
the
blan
k pa
nel i
s m
aske
d,w
ith a
dia
met
er o
f 10.
Fig. U38 Blank panel
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
504
Mou
ntin
g ho
le d
iagr
am
Weight: 2.0kg
Not
e) O
n th
e ba
ck o
f the
pla
te a
ttach
ed to
the
pane
l, co
atin
g is
mas
ked
ar
ound
the
perip
hera
l are
a w
ith a
wid
th o
f 8 m
m.
In
stal
l the
uni
t fro
m th
e ou
tsid
e of
the
cabi
net.
Thi
s pl
ate
is r
emov
able
.
Col
or: M
unse
ll N
3, s
emi–
glos
sed
Pro
tect
ive
grou
ndin
g st
ud (
M4)
(B
ack
side
)
Fig. U39 Distributed I/O machine operator’s panel (290 mm wide)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
505
Refer to Fig.U34 about panel cutting.
b: M5 10mm (Frame GND)
2
10.7
290
220
50.5
43.5
40
14.5
9 42.4
70max.
24.545.5
5
5
9
51.8
87.6
83.1
54
69 79
177 35
34b
63
65
* The depth dimension assumes thatthe HDD unit is installed.
Fig. U40(a) Stand–alone type standard MDI unit for 160i/180i/210i (10.4” LCD, vertical type)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
506
Refer to Fig.U35 about panel cutting.
b: M5 10mm (Frame GND)
2
10.7
230
220
4–4
50.5
43.5
40
14.5
9 42.4
24.545.5
70max.95
5
21.8
57.6
53.1
24
39 79
17718
16
35
63
b
* The depth dimension assumes thatthe HDD unit is installed.
Fig. U40(b) Stand–alone type standard MDI unit for 160i/180i/210i (10.4” LCD, horizontal type)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
507
Fig. title Specification No. Fig. No.
PCR connector (soldering type) PCR–E20FS Fig.C1 (a)
FI40 connector FI40–2015S Fig.C1 (b)
Connector case (HONDA PCR type) PCR–V20LA/PCR–V20LB Fig.C2 (a)
Connector case (HIROSE FI type) FI–20–CV Fig.C2 (b)
Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type) FCN–240C20–Y/S Fig.C2 (c)
Connector case (HIROSE PCR type) FI–20–CV7 Fig.C2 (d)
AMP connector (1) for servo side AMP1–178128–3 Fig.C3 (a)
AMP connector (2) for servo side AMP2–178128–3 Fig.C3 (b)
AMP connector (3) for +24 V power supply AMP1–178288–3 Fig.C3 (c)
AMP connector (4) for +24 V power supply AMP2–178288–3 Fig.C3 (d)
Contact for AMP connector AMP1–175218–2/5AMP1–175196–2/5
Fig.C3 (e)
HONDA connector (case) Fig.C4 (a)
HONDA connector (angled case) Fig.C4 (b)
HONDA connector (male) Fig.C4 (c)
HONDA connector (female) Fig.C4 (d)
HONDA connector (terminal layout) Fig.C4 (e)
Connector (Burndy Japan)(3 pins/brown) SMS3PN–5 Fig.C5
Connector for HIROSE flat cable HIF3BB–50D–2.54RHIT3BB–34D–2.54R
Fig.C6
Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI) LY10–DC20 Fig.C7 (a)
Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI) LY10–C2–3 Fig.C7 (b)
Punch panel connector for reader/punch interface Fig.C8 (a)
Locking plate for reader/punch interface connector Fig.C8 (b)
Honda connector (for distribution I/O connection printed circuit board) MRH–50FD Fig. C9
AMP connector (for loader I/O board) AMP178214–1 Fig. C10
Faston terminal A02B–0166–K330 Fig. C11
Connectors
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
508
HONDA
1.27
A
1
7.3
n n2 1
7
15.1
B1.27
Display
n2
TYPE : HONDA PCR–E20FS (SOLDERING TYPE)
USAGE : GENERAL
MATING
HOUSING : HONDA PCR–V20LA (PLASTIC)
PCR–E20FS
A
21.65
B
11.43
Fig. C1 (a) PCR connector (soldering type)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
509
16.2511.43
1.27
13.3519.2
15
5.5
2.2
1.7
9.2
12345678910
11121314151617181920
S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1214161820Section AA
1.8
3
5
8.5
4.3
7
A A2.4 2.4
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
NoteThis connector does nothave contacts for positions11,13,15,17, and 19.
Tab forshieldconnection
TYPE : HIROSE FI40–2015S
USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MPG INTERFACE
MATING/HOUSING : HIROSE FI–20–CV
(Standard 1/10)
See from the back (soldering side)
Fig. C1 (b) FI40 connector
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
510
9.5
HONDA
21
30
37
11.4
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) (2) Case(3) Cable clamp(4) Lock bracket(5) Lock lever(6) Set screw for cable clamp
TYPE : HONDA PCR–V20LA (for 6 dia. cable)
USAGE : GENERAL
Fig. C2 (a) Connector case (HONDA PCR type)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
511
(1)(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
21±0.311.5±0.3
TYPE : HIROSE FI–20–CV
USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE
(1) (2) Case(3) Lock bracket(4) Lock lever(5) Cable clamp(6) Set screw for cable clamp
9.5±0.2
30±0.3
37
0.5
17.5
0.3
Fig. C2 (b) Connector case (HIROSE FI type)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
512
21
30
37
11.4
(2)
FC020–02
9.5
Cable clampScrew
Lock lever
TYPE : FUJITSU FCN–240C20–Y/S (for 5.8 dia. cable)
USAGE : GENERAL
Fig. C2 (c) Connector case (FUJITSU FCN type)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
513
Fig. C2 (d) Connector case (PCR type (Hirose Electric))
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
514
3 12
AMP
19.24
16.3 22
.8X
10.165.08
4.05
3.1
123
Circuit No.
0.6
6.55
7.15
Circuit No.
TYPE : AMP1–178128–3
(25.5)
D–3
DIMENSION
Fig. C3 (a) AMP connector (1)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
515
TYPE : AMP2–178128–3
DIMENSION
3 12
AMP
(29.7)
(19.24)
16.3 22
.8
Y
10.165.08
4.05
3.1
123
Cricuit No.
0.6
6.55
7.15
Circuit No.
0.
3
0.
3
D–3
0.
3
0.
3
0.
3
Fig. C3 (b) AMP connector (2)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
516
3 12AMP
(22.96)
16.7
16.3 22
.8X
7.623.81
4.05
3.1
123
Circuit No.
0.6
6.55
7.15
Circuit No.
TYPE : AMP1–178288–3
USAGE : POWER SUPPLY UNIT CP1A
+24V INPUT
3
2
1
0V
+24V
D–3
DIMENSION
Fig. C3 (c) AMPconnector (3)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
517
123
Circuit No.
0.6
6.55
7.15
Circuit No.
TYPE : AMP2–178288–3
USAGE : POWER CP1B
+24V OUTPUT
3
2
1
0V
+24V
DIMENSION
Fig. C3 (d) AMP connector (4)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
518
SEPARATE : AMP1–175218–2(Gold coated)AMP1–175218–5(Tin coated)
REEL : AMP1–175196–2(Gold coated)AMP1–175196–5(Tin coated)
WIRE : AWG 16, 18, 20(21.8)
3
1In case of reel
A–A2.9
2.9
4.2
5.5
B–B17.8
(9.3) (2.5)
A B
AB
(2.6)
–AMP
2.9
(1.7) 2.5
3.4
PLATING 1D–MARK
PRESSER 1D–MARK
±0.2
±0.5
±0.4
±0.4
0.
2
0.
5
0.
2
0.
5
Fig. C3 (e) Contact for AMP connector
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
519
(2)
(1)
(3)
(4)
(5)
A(B)
(D)
MR–20LMH (Plug)
MR–20LFH (Jack)
MR–50LMH (Plug)
MR–50LFH (Jack)
SpecificationSymbol
A (B) C (D)Number ofterminals
39.3 44.9 39.8 17 20
67.9 73.5 44.8 18 50
Symbol1
2
3
4
5
NameConnector cover
Cable clamp
Screw for cable clamp
Plug (MR–20, 50MH)
Jack (MR–20, 50FH)
Outer diameter of the cableMR–20L dia.10mm maxMR–50L dia.16mm max
Stopper
C
Fig. C4 (a) HONDA connector (case)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
520
External dimensions of 50–pin connector
Fig. C4 (b) Honda connector (angled–type case)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
521
(2)
(1)
(3)
2–M2
A
B
13
18.1
8.5
6
2.4
HO
ND
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
MR–20RMH
MR–50RHF
A B
32.8 27.8 20
61.4 56.4 50
Symbol1
2
3
NameCable clamp
Screw 2.6dia.×8
Connector (MR–20,–50MH)
Number ofterminals
Fig. C4 (c) HONDA connector (male)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
522
(2)
(1)
(3)
2–M2
A
B
13
19.9
10.9 8.
4
HO
ND
A
8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Symbol1
2
3
NameCable clamp
Screw 2.6dia.×8
Connector ( MR–20,– 50FH)
MR–20RMH
MR–50RMH
A B
32.8 27.8 20
61.4 56.4 50
Number ofterminals
2.4
Fig. C4 (d) HONDA connector (female)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
523
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 181
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HONDA
MR–50MH(50–core,plug)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 181
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HONDA
MR–50FH(50–core, jack)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDAMR–20MH(20–core,plug)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDAMR–20FH(20–core, jack)
Fig. C4 (e) HONDA connector (terminal layout)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
524
32 m
ax.
19.0
6
30
7.7
6
5.08
12
3
Specification(Connector maker
number)
Connector housing for cable
Contact(Crimp type)
(Solder type)
Name Remarks
SMS3PNS–5
RC16M–23T3
RC16M–SCT3
BrownFor details on tools required for crimpterminals,contact themanufacturer.
Manufacturer : Burndy Japan Corp.
Cables : Cross sectional area : 0.75mm2(30/0.18)
Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm
±0.2
0.
2
Fig. C5 Connector made by Burndy Japan (3 pins,black)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
525
HIF3BB–50D–2.54R 68.07 60.96 62.23 63.650
Section B–B’
1.271.27
1.27
1.09
15.6
14.4
C
3.8
2.7
7.0
1
A
A A’ B
B’2.54
3.811.27
2.54
6.0
A
6.0
D
3.5
10.5
7.0
0.3
0.95
1.05
3.5
4.5
2.3
A
D
3.6
6.0
2.33.5
8.5
MAIN BODY PROTECTOR CRAMP
ASS’Y DIAGRAMSection A–A’
HIF3BB–34D–2.54R
Description A B C D
47.75 40.64 41.91 43.23
No.ofcontact
34
Dimensions
Specification HIROSE ELEC. CO.
HIF3BB–50D–2. 54R (50contacts)
HIF3BB
CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE (HIROSE ELEC. CO.)
0102
0304
0506
0708
0910
ROW A
ROW B
20PINS
A01 MARK (SIDE)
POLARITY GUIDANCE
0102
0304
0506
0708
0910
1112
1314
1516
1718
1920
2122
2324
25
50PINS
ROW A
ROW B
OUTVIEW FROM CONNECTOR SIDE.
OUTVIEW FROM CONNECTOR SIDE.
B
2
3
5.1
Fig. C6 Connector for HIROSE Flat cable
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
526
+0.218
±0.1513
20.50
–0.3
21.6+0.3
0
2 (pitch)
Fig. C7 (a) Connector (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
527
Product name
Detailed contact diagram
Excluding the crimp terminal
Contact position
Section A–A
Fig. C7 (b) Contact (Japan Aviation Electronics)(for MDI)
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
528
A
BC
F
G
10
HJ
6.1
A 53.0 D 7.8 G 10.7B 38.3 E 12.6 H 1.2C 47.0 F 41.3 J 0.8
A
A
E
102–3.05
D
10
10.8
A–A cross section
Fig. C8 (a) Punch panel connector for reader/puncher interface
Interlock screwM2.6P0.45 screwSmall round head screw
1.2groove
Spring washer
6.1
1.26.2
12.7
Fig. C8 (b) Locking plate plate for reader/puncher interface connector
B–63523EN/03 A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
529
Honda MR type, 50 pins, male, connection printed circuit board soldering type connector
Type No. Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.MRH–50FD
Pin configuration of Honda MR connector, 50 pins, male
Viewed from the connector side
19
Fig. C9 Honda connector
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT B–63523EN/03
530
Type: AMP 178214–1
Application: Used for the loader I/O board
Dimensions:
Fig. C10 AMP connector
Type: Faston terminal
Use: Frame grounding
Applicable housing: 170604–1 manufactured by AMP Japan, Ltd. or FVDDF2–250 TYPE I (blue) manufactured by Japan Solderless terminal MFG. co.Ltd.
Dimensions:
7.62
7.75
21.59
Applicable wire1.25 to 2.27 mm2
Fig. C11 Faston Terminal
B–63523EN/03 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
531
B 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63523EN/03
532
This section provides supplementary information about therecommended (FANUC–approved) 20–pin interface connectors usedwith the following target model.
FANUC i series
Models: PCR–EV20MDT (Honda Tsushin)52618–2011 (Molex Japan)
These board–mounted connectors have been specially developed toachieve the high packing density required for FANUC products. Asexplained in the following subsection, Honda PCR series connectors canbe used as cable connectors because the mating mechanism of the newlydeveloped connectors is compatible with that of the Honda PCR seriesconnectors. To support this specification extensively, many connectormanufacturers are now developing custom–tailored cable connectors.(Note that these cables cannot be used with screw–fixing cable connectorhousings.)
Models: PCR–E20MDK–SL–A (Honda Tsushin)(straight connector)PCR–E20LMDETZ–SL (Honda Tsushin)(right–angled connector)
These connectors are used for the main and option boards of the i series.As cable connectors, they are compatible with screw–fixing connectorhousings as well as the spring locking connector housings.
B.1OVERVIEW
B.2ADDITIONALTARGET MODEL
B.3BOARD–MOUNTEDCONNECTORS
B.3.1Vertical–typeConnectors
B.3.2Straight andRight–angledConnectors (for Springand Screw–fixingConnector Housings)
B–63523EN/03 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
533
Cable connectors consist of a connector main body and housing. Themodels listed below are available. Those connectors not marked with anasterisk are currently being mass–produced as manufacturer’s standardmodels. Those marked with an asterisk are produced according to customspecifications by FANUC.
Strand wirepress–mount type
HondaStrand wirepress–mounttype
Cableconnector
Generaluse(MDI,IOLINK,AMP,SPDL,etc.)
PCR–E20FA PCR–V20LA* 6mm (5.7 to 6.5)
Use Type Manufacturer Connectormodel
Housingmodel
Applicable cableoutside diameter
Hirose FI30–20S* FI–20–CV2* 6.2mm (5.5 to 6.5)
Fujitsu FCN–247J020 –G/E
FCN–240C020 –Y/S*
5.8mm (5.5 to 6.5)
Molex 52622–2011* 52624–2015* 6.2mm (5.9 to 6.5)
Hirose FI30–20S* FI–20–CV7*(Low screw–fixing housing)
6.2mm (5.5 to 6.5)
Hirose FI40–20S* FI–20–CV2* 6.2mm (5.5 to 6.5)
FI40B–20S*(FI40A–20S*)
FI–20–CV5* 9.2mm (8.9 to 9.5)
FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV6* 10.25mm (9.5 to 11.0)
HiroseSolderingtype
For pulse coder,coaxialcable, linear scale,manual pulsegenerator,etc.
FI40B–2015S*(FI40–2015S*)
FI–20–CV* 8.5mm (8.0 to 9.0)
FI40B–20S*(FI40A–20S*)
FI–20–CV5* 9.2mm (8.9 to 9.5)
FI40B–20S* FI–20–CV6* 10.25mm (9.5 to 11.0)
Honda PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA* 6mm (5.7 to 6.5)
Solderingtype
Honda PCR–E20FS PCR–V20LA* 6mm (5.7 to 6.5)
Fig. B.4 Cable connectors
B.4CABLECONNECTORS
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63523EN/03
534
Strand wire press–mount connector :With this connector, #28AWG wires arepress–connected to each pin at the same time.The cost of producing a cable/connectorassembly with this connector model is muchlower than with connectors designed forcrimping or soldering. Also, the following connector housing hasbeen newly developed for use with the iseries.
Connector model (manufacturer) Supplementary description
FI–20–CV7 (Hirose) Low connector housing, more compact than conventional models. The housingcan be fastened to a board–mounted connector by means of a screw lock. It isintended mainly for connecting the board–mounted connectors used on the mainand option boards of the LCD–mounted type i series (see Section B.3.2). Note thatthis connector housing cannot be used for conventional board–mountedconnectors.
Soldering type connector : Details of soldering type connectors and theirhousings are summarized below.
Table B.4 Details of soldering type connectors and housings
Connectors
Connector model (manufacturer) Supplementary description
PCR–E20FS (Honda) Soldering type connector for general signals. This is suitable for producing cableassemblies in small quantities, as well as on–site.
FI40–20S (Hirose) Equivalent to Honda PCR–E20FS
FI40B–20S (Hirose)(formerly, FI40A–20S)
Has the same number of pins as the FI40–20S, but features a wider soldering pitch,facilitating soldering and enabling the use of thicker wires. Its reinforced pins allowwires as thick as #17AWG to be soldered to the FI40B–20S (wires no thicker than#20AWG can be used with the FI40A–20S). Note, however, that a thick wire, suchas #17AWG, should be used with a more robust housing like the FI–20–CV6.
FI40B–2015S (Hirose)(formerly, FI40–2015S)
Features a wider soldering pitch, attained by using the space provided by thinningout some pins. Also features tougher pins, compared with its predecessor, theFI40–2015S. These pins can be soldered to wires as thick as #17AWG, providedthat the cable diameter does not exceed 8.5 mm.
Housings
Housing model (manufacturer) Supplementary description
FI–20–CV5 (Hirose) Should be used with the FI40B–20S. This is a plastic housing designed for use witha cable that is 9.2 mm in diameter.
FI–20–CV6 (Hirose) Should be used with the FI40B–20S. This housing, however, can be used with athicker cable (such as 10.25 mm) than is possible with the FI–20–CV5. Itscomponents are die cast.
In addition to the combinations shown in Fig. B.4, Hirose soldering–typeconnectors can be combined with the housings listed below. Ensure thatthe diameter of the cable used with each housing satisfies therequirements of that housing.
Cable Connectors
B–63523EN/03 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
535
Connector model
FI40B–2015S (formerly FI40–2015S)
FI40–20S
FI40B–20S (formerly FI40A–20S)
Housing model (applicable cable diameter)
FI–20–CV (8.5 mm in diameter) only
FI–20–CV2 (6.2mm)
FI–20–CV5 (9.2mm)
FI–20–CV6 (10.25mm)
Those listedon the leftcan beused.
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63523EN/03
536
Table B.5 Recommended connectors, applicable housings, and cables
Connector namereferenced in the
ConnectionManual
FANUC–approvedconnector
(manufacturer)
FANUC–approvedhousing
(manufacturer)
Compatible cable (cable diameter)FANUC development
FANUC specification number
Remark
PCR–E20FAStrand
PCR–E20FA(Honda Tsushin)
PCR–V20LA(Honda Tsushin)
A66L–0001–0284#10P(6.2 mm in diameter)
Plastic housing
press–mount typeFI30–20S(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV2(Hirose Electric)
Metal housing
FCN–247J020–G/E(Fujitsu Takamizawa)
FCN–240C020–Y/S(Fujitsu Takamizawa)
Plastic housing
52622–2011(Molex)
52624–2015(Molex)
Plastic housing
PCR–E20FAStrand wirepress–mount type
FI30–20S(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV7(Hirose Electric)
Plastic housing
PCR–E20FSSoldering type
PCR–E20FS(Honda Tsushin)
PCR–V20LA(Honda Tsushin)
Plastic housing
FI40–20S(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV2(Hirose Electric)
Plastic housing
FI40B–2015S(formerlyFI40–2015S)15–pin solderingtype
FI40B–2015S(formerlyFI40–2015S)(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV(Hirose Electric)
A66L–0001–0286 (Note)A66L–0001–0402 (Note)(8.5 mm in diameter)
Plastic housing
FI40B–20S(formerlyFI40A–2015S)
FI40B–20S(formerly FI40A–205)(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV5(Hirose Electric)
A66L–0001–0367A66L–0001–0368(9.2 mm in diameter)
Plastic housing
soldering typeFI40B–20S(Hirose Electric)
FI–20–CV6(Hirose Electric)
A66L–0001–0403 (Note)(9.8 mm in diameter)
Metal housing
NOTE*1 Cable A66L–0001–0286 has been recommended for use as a pulse coder cable. It can be
up to 20 m long. Two cables, A66L–0001–0402 and A66L–0001–0403, have recently beendeveloped. A66L–0001–0402 and A66L–0001–0403 can be as long as 30 m and 50 m,respectively. (See Fig. 4 for detailed specifications.)Both cables have the same level of oil and bending resistance (cable, 100 mm in diameter,capable of withstanding at least 10 million bending cycles) as conventional cables, and areUL– and CSA–certified.
B.5RECOMMENDEDCONNECTORS,APPLICABLEHOUSINGS, ANDCABLES
B–63523EN/03 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
537
Connector model referenced in the
Connection Manual
FANUC–approved connector
(manufacturer)
Wire forming tool Press–mountingtool
Remark
PCR–E20FA PCR–E20FA PCS–K2A FHPT–918A Low cost(Honda Tsushin)
JGPS–015–1/1–20JGPS–014
MFC–K1PCS–K1
(Note 1)
FHAT–918A
FI30–20S FI30–20CAT FI30–20/ID Low cost(Hirose Electric)
FI30–20CAT1 HHP–502FI30–20GP
FCN–247J020–G/S FCN–237T–T043/H FCN–237T–T109/H(Fujitsu)
FCN–237T–T044/HFCN–247T–T066/H
FCN–237T–T062/H
52622–2011 57829–5000 57830–5000 Low cost(Molex)
57823–5000 57824–5000
NOTE1 Those tools indicated by shading are available from FANUC (specification number
A02B–0120–K391).2 The tools available from each manufacturer are specifically designed for use with the
connectors manufactured by that manufacturer.
Press–mount typeconnector assemblytools and jigs
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63523EN/03
538
Machine tool builders are required to manufacture or procure thematerials for the cable assemblies to be used with their products. FANUCrecommends the following materials as being suitable for interfaceconnectors. Individual machine tool builders are encouraged to contacteach cable manufacturer for themselves, as required.
Material Use FANUC specification
number
Manufacturer Remark
10–pair cable General use 0.08mm2
10–pairA66L–0001–0284#10P
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
12–conductorcomposite cable
Pulse coder, linear scale, manual pulsegenerator
0.5mm2
6–conductor0.18mm2
3–pair
A66L–0001–0286 Hitachi Cable, Ltd.Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
20 m or less
0.75mm2
6–conductor0.18mm2
3–pair
A66L–0001–0402 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 30 m or lessUsable on movable parts
1.25mm2
6–conductor0.18mm2
3–pair
A66L–0001–0403 Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. 50 m or lessUsable on movable parts
5–core coaxialcable
CRT interface 5–conductorcoaxial
A66L–0001–0371 Hitachi Cable, Ltd. 50 m or less
Materials for cableassemblies
B–63523EN/03 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
539
(a) Specifications
Item Unit Specifications
Product No. – A66L–0001–0284#10P
Manufacturer Hitachi Cable,Ltd.Oki Electric Cable, Co.,Ltd.
Rating – 60°C 30V:UL278980°C 30V:UL80276
Material Conductor – Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper (ASTM B–286)
Insulator – Cross–linked vinyl
Shield braid – Tinned annealed copper wire
Sheath – Heat–resistant oilproof vinyl
Number of pairs Pairs 10
Conductor Size AWG 28
Structure Conductors/mm
7/0.127
Outside diameter mm 0.38
Insulator Thickness mm 0.1Thinnest portion : 0.8 (3.1mm)
Outside diameter (approx.) mm 0.58
Core style (rating) mm UL15157(80°C, 30V)
Twisted pair Outside diameter (approx.) mm 1.16
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay – Collect the required number of twisted pairs into a cable, thenwrap binding tape around the cable. To make the cable round,apply a cable separator as required.
Lay diameter (approx.) mm 3.5
Drain wire Conductors/mm
Hitachi Cable : Not availableOki Electric Cable : Available,10/0.12
Shield braid Element wire diameter mm 0.12
Braid density % 85 or more
Sheath Color – Black
Thickness mm 1.0
Outside diameter (approx.) mm 6.2
Standard length m 200
Packing method – Bundle
Electrical Electric resistance (at 20°C) Ω/km 233 or lessperformance
Insulation resistance (at 20°C) MΩ–km 10 or less
Dielectricstrength (AC) V/min. 300
Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards.
10–pair cable
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63523EN/03
540
(b) Cable structure
Bindingtape
Shieldbraid
Sheath
Twistedpair wire
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Wire identification table (Hitachi)
Wire No.
Insulator color
First wire
Secondwire
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
Blue
Yellow
Green
Red
Purple
Blue
Yellow
Green
Red
Purple
White
Brown
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
White
White
White
White
Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown
Fig. B.5 (a) Cable made by Hitachi Cable
Twisted–pairwireBinding tape
Shield braid
Sheath
Wire identification table (Oki)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
Orange
Gray
white
Yellow
Pink
Orange
Gray
White
Yellow
Pink
Red
Firstwire
Secondwire
Dot markcolor
Black–
–
–
–
–
– –
– –
– –
– –
– –
Drain wire
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Pair N
o.
Insulator color
Dot m
ark(1 pitch)
Fig. B.5 (b) Cable made by Oki Electric Cable
B–63523EN/03 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
541
(a) Specifications
Item Unit Specifications
Product No. – A66L–0001–0286
Manufacturer – Oki Cable, Ltd.Hitachi Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
Rating – 80°C, 30V
Material Conductor,braid–shieldedwire,drain wire
– Strand wire of tinned annealed copper (JIS C3152)
Insulator – Heat–resistant flame–retardant vinyl
Sheath – Oilproof, heat–resistant, flame–retardant vinyl
Number of wires (wire ons.) Cores 6 (1 to 6) 6 (three pairs) (7 to 9)
Conductor Size mm2 0.5 0.18
Structure Conductors/mm
20/0.18 7/0.18
Outside diameter mm 0.94 0.54
Insulator Standard thickness (Theminimum thickness is at least80% of the standard thickness.)
mm 0.25 0.2
Outside diameter mm 1.50 0.94
Twisted pair Outside diameter mm 1.88
Direction of lay – Left
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay – Twist the wires at an appropriate pitch so the outermost layeris right–twisted, and wrap tape around the outermost layer. Apply a cable separator as required.
Lay diameter mm 5.7
Drain wire Size mm2 0.3
Structure Wires/mm 12/0.18
Outside diameter mm 0.72
Shield braid Element wire diameter mm 0.12
Thickness mm 0.3
Braid density % 70
Outside diameter mm 6.3
Composite 12–corecable
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63523EN/03
542
Item SpecificationsUnit
Sheath Color – Black
Standard thickness (Theminimum thickness is at least85% of the standard thickness.)
mm 1.1
Outside diameter mm 8.5Max. 9.0(1)
Standard length m 100
Packing method – Bundle
Electricalperformance
Electric resistance (at 20°C)(wire nos.)
Ω/km 39.4(1 to 6) 113(7 to 9)
Insulation resistance (at 20°C) MΩ–km 15
Dielectric strength (AC) V/min. 500
Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards,
NOTEThe maximum outside diameter applies to portions otherthan the drain wire.
(b)Cable structureThe cable structure is shown below.
The colors in the figure indicate the colors of insulators.
Drain wire
0.18–mm2 twisted pair wire
0.5–mm2 insulated wire
Binding tape
Shield braid
Sheath
Red
White
Black
1Black
2black
3black
4Red
5Red
6Red
7
8
9
Red
Black
White
B–63523EN/03 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
543
(c) Specifications
Item Specification
FANUC specification number A66L–0001–0402 A66L–0001–0403
Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
A–conductor B–conductor A–conductor B–conductor
Conductor Constitution Number of conductors/mm
16/0.12(0.18mm2)
3/22/0.12(0.75mm2)
16/0.12(0.18mm2)
7/16/0.12(1.25mm2)
Typical outside diameter(mm)
0.55 1.20 0.55 1.70
Insulation Color White, red, black Red, black White, red, black Red, black(polyester)
Typical thickness (mm) 0.16 0.23 0.16 0.25
Typical outside diameter(mm)
0.87 1.66 0.87 2.20
Pair twisting Constitution White–red, white–black, andblack–red
White–red, white–black, andblack–red
Direction of twisting LeftTypical pitch: 20 mm
LeftTypical pitch: 20 mm
Assembling by twisting
Number of strands or conductors
3 6 3 6
Direction of twisting Left Left
Taping Twisting is wrapped with washi, or Japanese paper, tape.
Twisting is wrapped with washi, or Japanese paper, tape.
Typical outside diameter(mm)
5.7 6.9
Braided shielding
Typical strand diameter(mm)
0.14
Typical density (mm) 80
Drain A 12/0.18 mm wire is roughly wrapped under braided shielding.
Typical outside diameter(mm)
6.4 7.6
Sheath Color Black (matted)(polyurethane)
Typical thickness (mm) 1.05 1.1
Vertical taping Vertically taped with washi under sheathing.
Outside diameter (mm) 8.50.3 9.80.3
Finished Typical length (m) 100assembly
Short size Basically not approved.
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63523EN/03
544
Item Specification
FANUC specification number A66L–0001–0403A66L–0001–0402
Manufacturer Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
B–conductorA–conductorB–conductorA–conductor
Finished Rating 80C 30Vassembly performance Standard Shall comply with UL STYLE 20236 and CSA LL43109 AWM I/II A 80°C 30V
FT–1.
Flame resistance Shall comply with VW–1 and FT–1.
Electrical Conductor resistance 103 or lower 25.5 or lower 103 or lower 15.0 or lowerperformance Ω/km (20°C)
Insulation resistanceMΩ/km (20°C)
1 or higher
Dielectric strengthV–min
A. C 500
Insulation performance
Tensile strengthN/mm2
9.8 or higher
Elongation % 100 or higher
Tensile strength after aging%
At least 70% of that before aging
Elongation after aging % At least 65% of that before aging
Aging condition For 168 hours at 113°C
Sheathing performance
Tensile strength N/mm2
9.8 or higher
Elongation % 100 or higher
Tensile strength after aging%
At least 70% of that before aging
Elongation after aging % At least 65% of that before aging
Aging condition For 168 hours at 113°C
Cable cross section
ÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅÅ
RedRed
White
Red
Black
BlackBlack
BlackRed
White
Black
Red
Tape Braided shielding
Twisted pair A
Solid wire B
Sheath
Drain
B–63523EN/03 B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
545
Item Unit Description
Specification – A66L–0001–0371
Manufacture – HITACHI CABLE CO., LTD.
Number of Conductors Core 5
Inside Con- Size mm2 0.14ductor
Components Conduc-tors
(PCS)/mm
7/0.16
Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire
Diameter mm 0.48
Insulator Material (Color) – Polyethylene (White)
Thickness mm 0.71
Diameter mm 1.90
Outside Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire (Rolled)Conductor
Diameter of Com-ponent–Wire
mm 0.08
Density % 95 or more
Diameter mm 0.2
Jacket Material – Vinyl
Color – Black. White. Red. Green. Blue
Thickness mm 0.15
Diameter mm 2.6
Twisted Assembly Diameter mm 7.1
Thickness of Paper Tape mm 0.05
Shieldbraid
Wire dia. Material mm 0.12 Tin–coaded soft copper wire
Density % 80 or more
Thickness mm 0.3
Diameter mm 7.8
Sheath Material, Color – Oil Tight Vinyl Black
Thickness mm 0.7 (Min. thickness: 0.56)
Finish Diameter mm 9.2 0.3
Conductor Resistance (20°C) /km 143 or less
Withstand Voltage (A.C.) V/min. 1000
Insulation Resistance (20°C) M–km 1000 or more
Impedance (10MHz) 75±5
Standard Capacitance (1MHz) nF/km 56
Standard Attention (10MHz) dB/km 53
Weight kg/km 105
Standard Length m 200
Package form – Bundle
5–core coaxial cable
B. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES B–63523EN/03
546
Black
Black
WhiteWhite
Blue
Red
Red
Green
Green
Blue
An example of circuit testing 20–pin interface cable
ΩResistor
Checkevery pin
PCB connector
Cable (20–pin interface connector)
PCR–E20LMD–SL (Honda)
.
.
.
.
.
.
B–63523EN/03 C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
547
C CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
Maximum allowable cable length between units
Cable type Use and conditionMaximum
cable length(m)
MDI cable Control unit–to–MDI unit 50 m
I/O Link cable Electrical cable 10 m Note 2
Electrical–to–optical conversionadapter
2 m
Optical cable 200 m
Serial spindle cable Electrical cable (controlunit–to–spindle servo unit)
20 m
Electrical–to–optical conversionadapter
2 m
Optical cable 200 m
Position coder cable Control unit position coder 50 m
MPG cable Connector panel I/O operator’s panelI/O module–to–manual pulsegenerator
50 m
FSSB cable See APPENDIX D.
HSSB cable See APPENDIX D.
RS–232C 4800 baud or less 100 mcommunication cable
9600 baud or less 50 m
RS–422 9600 baud or less 800 mcommunication cable
19.2 kbaud 50 m
NOTE1 The maximum cable lengths listed above apply only when
the respective recommended cables stated in the text areused. If a non–recommended cable is used, the maximumcable length may not be guaranteed. Cables other thanthose listed above are used between units in the i seriesCNC. See the respective descriptions in this manual fordetails of these cables.
2 This cable can be extended to up to 15 m if it is used withinthe cabinet.
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) B–63523EN/03
548
Purpose Description Specification Length
Spindle signalcable
(when 3 or 4 serialspindles areconnected)
Electrical–to–electrical
PCR–E20FA
FI–20–CV7
A02B–0236–K845
5 m
Spindle signalcable
(when 3 or 4 serialspindles areconnected)
For serialconnectionbetween thesecond and thirdspindles
PCR–E20FA
PCR–E20FA
A02B–0236–K846
5 m
Spindle signalcable
(when 3 or 4 serialspindles areconnected)
When an electrical-to-opticalconversion adapteris used
PCR–E20FA
FI–20–CV7
A02B–0236–K847
1 m
Power supplycable for I/O unit
Control unit(CP1B)
I/O Unit(CP31)
AMP2–178288–3
SMS3PNS–5
A02B–0236–K843
5 m
MDI signal cable
Integrated controlunit or stand–alonetype LCD unit
FI–20–CV7 A02B–0236–K812
25 m
(CA55)
MDI unit (CK1)
LY10–DC20
A02B–0236–K813
45 m
Power supplycable forstand–alone typeLCD unit
stand–alone typeMDI (CPD2)
Stand–alone typeLCD (CP5)
AMP2–178288–3
AMP1–178288–3
A02B–0166–K880
55 m
B–63523EN/03 C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US)
549
Purpose LengthSpecificationDescription
Manual pulsegenerator cable(for one unit)
Control unit (JA3)
Manual pulsegenerator terminalboard
FI40–2015S
M3 crimp style terminal
A02B–0120–K847
7 m
Manual pulsegenerator cable(for two units)
Control unit (JA3)
Manual pulsegenerator terminalboard
FI40–2015S
M3 crimp style terminal
A02B–0120–K848
7 m
Manual pulsegenerator cable(for three units)
Control unit (JA3)
Manual pulsegenerator terminalboard
FI40–2015S
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
M3 crimp style terminal
A02B–0120–K841
7 m
I/O Link cable
Control unit (JD1A)
I/O unit (JD1B) PCR–E20FA
A02B–0120–K842
5 m
Control unit powersupply cable
Stabilized powersupply (24 VDC)
Control unit(CP1A) AMP1–178288–3
M3 crimp style terminal
A02B–0124–K830
5 m
C. CONNECTION CABLE (SUPPLIED FROM US) B–63523EN/03
550
Purpose LengthSpecificationDescription
Serial spindlesignal cable
Control unit (JA41)
Electric/opticalconverter
PCR–E20FA
A02B–0236–K844
1 m
Serial spindlesignal cable
Control unit (JA41)
series amplifier(JA7B)
PCR–E20FA
A02B–0236–K810
5 m
B–63523EN/03 D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
551
D OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
The i Series CNC uses optical fiber cables for the following interfaces.This table lists the usable combinations.
Interface Recommended optical cable
Maximum allowabletransmission distance
Applicable junc-tion adapter
Remark
Serial spindle interface A66L–6001–0026#L~ 200 m A63L–0020–0002
I/O Link interface A66L–6001–0026#L~ 200 m A63L–0020–0002
High–speed serial bus A66L–6001–0026#L~ 100 m None(HSSB) interface (Note)
A66L–6001–0029#L~ 55 m A63L–0020–0002 For junction only
Serial servo bus (FSSB) A66L–6001–0023#L~ 10 m Noneinterface
A66L–6001–0026#L~ 100 m None
Between stand–alonecontrol unit and LCD
A66L–6001–0026#L~ 100 m None
NOTEFor printed–circuit boards with the following former orderinginformation, the maximum allowable transmission distancewith –0026#L~ is lowered to 50 m, and connection withA63L–0020–0004 is impossible.
·A20B–8001–0580 ·A20B–8001–0581·A20B–8001–0640 ·A20B–8100–0100
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE B–63523EN/03
552
(1)Supported optical fiber cables
(a) Internal cord type cable: A66L–6001–0023#LR
Cable length: 0.15 to 10 mCode diameter: 2.2 mm × 2 cordsTensile strength:
Optical fiber cord 7 kg per cordBetween optical fiber cord and connector 2 kg
Minimum bending radius of optical fiber cord: 25 mmOperating temperature: –20 to 70°C
7
6.7 14 max. 100 typ.
21
Unit: mm
Two cords are bound together.
Code
Fig. D.1 External dimensions of internal cord type cable
(b)External type cable: A66L–6001–0026#LR
Cable length: 1 to 50 mOptical fiber cord diameter: 2.2 mm × 2 cordsDiameter of cable with reinforced cover: 7.6 mmTensile strength: Cable with reinforced cover – 75 kg
Optical fiber cord 7 kg per cordBetween optical fiber cord and connector 2 kg
Minimum bending radius of optical fiber cord: 25 mmMinimum bending radius of cable with reinforced cover: 50 mmBending resistance (cable with reinforced cover): 1
0 million bending cycles at room temperature (when the bending radius is 100 mm)
Flame resistance: Equivalent to UL VW–1Operating temperature: –20 to 70°C
8.2
6.7 19 max. 150 typ. 35 typ.
21
Unit: mm
Code Bush Reinforced cover
Fig. D.2 External dimensions of external cable
B–63523EN/03 D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
553
Table D.1 Standard cable length
Internal cord type cable External cable
A66L–6001–0023# A66L–6001–0026#
Specification Length Specification Length
L150R0 0.15 m L1R003 1.0 m
L300R0 0.3 m L2R003 2.0 m
L500R0 0.5 m L3R003 3.0 m
L1R003 1.0 m L5R003 5.0 m
L2R003 2.0 m L7R003 7.0 m
L3R003 3.0 m L10R03 10.0 m
L5R003 5.0 m L15R03 15.0 m
L7R003 7.0 m L20R03 20.0 m
L10R03 10.0 m L30R03 30.0 m
L50R03 50.0 m
L100R03 100.0 m
L200R03 200.0 m
2. Cable selection Always use an external cable (A66L–6001–0026#) when the cable
is to be laid outside the power magnetics cabinet or main unitcabinet, where it may be pulled, rubbed, or stepped on.
Use an external cable when part of the cabling is to be subject tomovement. For example, when connecting a portable operationpendant box to the power magnetics cabinet, the use of an externalcable is desirable because the cable is likely to be bent, pulled, ortwisted repeatedly even though frequent system operation is notexpected. However, the force likely to be applied when the cableis installed or moved for maintenance purposes does not need to betaken into consideration.
Use an external cable in locations where sparks or flame are adanger. Although the internal cord type cable(A66L–6001–0023#) is covered by nonflammable resin, the cover,if exposed to frame for a long time, may melt, allowing the fibercable inside to burn.
Use an external cable when the cable is expected to be pulled withconsiderable force during installation (the force applied to the cablemust be within the specified tensile strength limit at all times). Forexample, even though installing a cable in a cable duct can beregarded as internal cabling, a cable of the appropriate type mustbe selected according to the tensile force to be applied to the cableduring installation.
Both the internal cord type and external cables have the same oiland heat resistance properties.
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE B–63523EN/03
554
3. Procuring the cableAll the optical fiber cables mentioned above are special cable productswith optical connectors, which are designed, produced, and tested toensure the required system performance and reliability. It istechnically impossible for users to produce these cables or process (cutand reconnect) them after purchase. Users are requested to purchasecables of the necessary length from an appropriate supplier. Cables areavailable from either FANUC or any of the FANUC–approvedmanufacturers listed in Table D.2.
Table D.2 FANUC–approved cable manufacturers and cable modelnumbers (retail)
(1) Internal cord type cable A66L–6001–0023#LR
Manufacturer Model number Remarks
Japan AMP, Co., Ltd. –353373–
Japan Aviation ElectronicsIndustry, Ltd.
PF–2HB209–M–F–1 indicates thecable length (m).
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. H07–P22–F2VCFA– indicates thecable length (m).
(2)External Cable A66L–6001–0026#LR
Manufacturer Model number Remarks
Japan AMP, Co., Ltd. –353199–
Japan Aviation ElectronicsIndustry, Ltd.
CF–2HB208–M–F–1 indicates thecable length (m).
Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. H07–P22–F2NCFA– indicates thecable length (m).
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. OPC201HPXF–MB indicates thecable length (m).
4. Handling precautions
(1)Protection during storageWhen the electrical/optical conversion module mounted on theprinted circuit board and the optical fiber cable are not in use, theirmating surfaces must be protected with the lid and caps with whichthey are supplied. If left uncovered, the mating surfaces are likelyto become dirty, possibly resulting in a poor cable connection.
B–63523EN/03 D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
555
Electrical/optical conversion module Lid
Optical fiber cable
Optical fiber cable caps
Fig. D.3 Protection of electrical/optical conversion module and optical fiber cable (when not in use)
(2)Optical fiber cable• Make sure that the bending radius and tensile strength of the cable
are always within their ranges described in the specifications (seethe first item), regardless of whether the cable is stored or routedand whether operation is in progress or not.
• Although the reinforcing cover of the external cable has sufficientmechanical strength, be careful not to drop heavy objects on thecable.
• Grasp the optical connector firmly when connecting ordisconnecting the cable. Do not pull on the optical fiber cord itself.(The maximum tensile strength between the fiber cord andconnector is 2 kg. Applying greater force to the cord is likely tocause the connector to come off, making the cable unusable.)
• Once connected, the optical connector is automatically locked bythe lock levers on its top. To remove the connector, release the locklevers and pull the connector.
• Although optical connectors cannot be connected in other than thecorrect orientation, always take note of the connector’s orientationbefore making the connection.
• Before installing an external cable, fix either a wire with a hook ora tension member to the reinforcing cover of the optical connectorand pull the wire or tension member, as shown in Fig. D.4. Thisis done to prevent a tensile force from being applied between thefiber cord and connector. If no tensile force is applied between thefiber cord and connector when installing the cable, you can hold thereinforcing cover of the connector directly and pull it. In the caseof an internal cord, which does not have a reinforcing cover, applythe same protective measures, as instructed in Fig. D.4, for thatportion of the cable where the two cords are bound together, inorder to prevent a tensile force from being applied between the fibercord and connector. In the same way as for an external cable, if notensile force is applied between the fiber cord and connector duringinstallation, you can hold the shielded part of the cable directly and
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE B–63523EN/03
556
pull it. Because the combined tensile strength of the two cords isonly 14 kg, however, avoid applying too great a force to the cableduring installation, regardless of whether you have taken theprotective measures.
Optical connector
Reinforcing cover Wire with a hook
Tension member
Optical connectorReinforcing cover
Tape Tape
2 cords combined
Fig. D.4 Prior to installing a cable
Take care to keep both parts of the optical connector (cable side andPCB side) clean. If they become dirty, wipe them with tissue paper orabsorbent cotton to remove dirt. The tissue paper or absorbent cottonmay be moistened with ethyl alcohol. Do not use any organic solventother than ethyl alcohol.
Fix the reinforcing cover of the external cable or the cord bindingportion of the internal cord type cable by using a cable clamp, asshown in Fig. D.5, to prevent the weight of the optical fiber cablefrom being applied directly to the connecting part of the opticalconnector.
(Recommended cable clamp): Recommended cable clamps are listed below. Use a clampthat grasps the optical cable lightly; the clamp should notapply excessive pressure to the cable.
For an external cable: CKN–13SP (with sponge)(Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
For an internal cord type cable: MN–1 (Kitagawa Industry Co., Ltd.)
B–63523EN/03 D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
557
Optical connector Optical fiber cordReinforcing cover of externalcable or cord binding portion ofinternal cord type cable
Bending radius of 25 mm or more(Make the bending radius as large aspossible.)
Cable clampBending radius of 50 mm or more (for reinforcing cover)Bending radius of 25 mm or more (for cord binding portion)(Make the bending radius as large as possible.)
Fig. D.5 Fixing the cable with a clamp
Any superfluous portion of the cable may be wound into a loops.Should this prove necessary, make sure the diameter of each loopis at least 150 mm (for an external cable) or at least 100 mm (foran internal cord type cable). Winding the cable into smaller loopsmay produce sharp curves that exceed the specified bending radiuslimit without the user being aware. Such bending can result in agreater transmission loss, ultimately leading to a communicationfailure.
When using a nylon band (cable tie) as a cable clamp, follow theinstructions given below. Also, take care not to apply a bendingforce to one particular part of the cable when fixing it with a clamp.Failing to clamp the cable correctly may cut or damage it.External cable:Do not clamp the uncovered portion of the cable with a nylon band.When clamping the cable by the reinforcing cover, the clampingforce is not an important factor to consider. However, ensure thatthe clamping force is as small as possible to ensure that thereinforcing cover is not deformed by the clamping. If possible, theclamping force should be 5 kg or less.Internal cord type cable:Lightly clamp the optical cable with a nylon band so that the cableshield is not deformed. If possible, the clamping force should be1 or 2 kg (make sure that no force is applied to the cable). Due careis required when clamping the internal cord type cable because itscable shield is weaker than the reinforcing cover of the externalcable.
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE B–63523EN/03
558
5. Optical fiber cable relayWhen used for the FANUC I/O Link application, optical fiber cablescan be connected by using an optical fiber adapter, as follows.
(a) External view of an optical fiber adapter
420.5
210.5
3.2
10.16
320.3
R1.6
18.2
0.5
2.2
6.6
8.2
(b)Example of the use of an optical fiber adapter
Optical fiber cable
Optical fiber adapter (A63L–0020–0002)
Optical fiber cable
Mounting board
NOTEUp to one relay points are permitte.
B–63523EN/03 D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
559
6. Optical fiber cable relay of FANUC high–speed serial busWith the FANUC high–speed serial bus, special low–loss opticalcables can be connected by using a special low–loss optical relayadapter as an optical fiber relay adapter.
(a) External view of the low–loss optical relay adapter
421.0
210.3
3.2
10.16
320.5
R1.6
18.1
2.2
6.6
8.2
(b)Example of use of the optical fiber relay adapter
Low–loss optical fiber cable
Low–loss optical relay adapter (A63L–0020–0004)
Mounting board
Low–loss optical fiber cable
NOTEOnly one relay point is permitted.
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE B–63523EN/03
560
7. Precautions for connection with low–loss optical junction adapter
Features of and handling precautions for low–loss optical junctionadapter (A63L–0020–0004)When optical connectors for a conventional optical junctionadapter (A63L–0020–0002) are jointed, the facing ferrules(Note 1)are located about 60 um from each other. This is because the opticalfiber of conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cables(A66L–6001–0008, –0009, –0026) may protrude from the tip ofthe ferrules (by up to about several um), resulting in the fiberprotrusion being damaged when the ferrules are butted against eachother.In the low–loss optical junction adapter, the ferrules are buttedagainst each other, thus greatly reducing the reduction in repeaterloss. Therefore, the two optical cables used with the low–lossoptical junction adapters must be dedicated to the adapters.If a conventional PCF (plastic clad silica fiber) cable(A66L–6001–0008, –0009, –0026) is used as even one of the twooptical fiber cables for joining the low–loss optical junctionadapter, both cables may be damaged, resulting in deterioratedcharacteristics.
NOTEFerrule: Movable metal at the tip of an optical connector; thefiber is bonded to the ferrule.
Ferrule
Protective cover
Optical cableOptical connector
Features of low–loss optical cable (A66L–6001–0029)A low–loss optical cable is selected from conventional PCF opticalcables (A66L–6601–0026). The selected cable offers low loss, andits connector section is given special treatment; the fiber ends areprovided with a depression so that the ferrules can be butted againsteach other. The two optical cables used with the low-loss opticaljunction adapter must be of low–loss type.
Appearance of the low–loss optical junction adapter and cable(how to distinguish them from conventional types)The body of the conventional optical junction adapter is black, butthat of the low–loss optical junction adapter is blue. In addition,the protective cover(Note 1) of the conventional PCF optical cableis black, but that of the low–loss optical cable is blue.
B–63523EN/03 D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE
561
8. Installing the optical fiber junction adapterThe optical fiber junction adapter should be installed within a cabinet,as a rule. If it is impossible to avoid installing it within a cabinet,protect the adapter and the optical cable portions (such as connectorsand cords) not covered with reinforcement coating from the outside airby, for example, covering them with packing.
9. Environmental resistance of the optical fiber junction adapter
The optical fiber junction adapter is not waterproof. Even whenoptical cables are attached to both ends of the adapter, there are verysmall gaps in the linked portions, so water resistance can not beexpected.
When optical cables are attached to both ends of the junctionadapter installed in a normal environment (such as within acabinet), it is unlikely that dust will penetrate between the adapterand optical fiber to the degree that it may hamper normal opticallinkage. If one or both ends of the adapter are left open, dust anddirt may accumulate even when the adapter is in a normalenvironment (such as within a cabinet). The dust and dirt on theadapter ends is likely to hamper normal optical linkage when theoptical cables are attached. In such a case, clean the junctionadapter and the optical connector using the optical fiber junctionadapter cleaning method described below.
Do not allow cutting fluid to splash over the adapter or those opticalcable portions (such as connectors and cords) that are not coveredwith reinforcement coating. If the inside of the adapter and fiberend surfaces are contaminated with cutting fluid, a malfunctionmay occur.
10.CleaningIf the optical fiber junction adapter, optical–to–electrical conversionmodule, or optical cable are soiled, clean them according to thefollowing procedures.
Cleaning the optical fiber junction adapter and optical-to-electricalconversion moduleFirst, clean the entire housing by wiping it with a cloth moistenedwith, or by washing it in, ethyl alcohol or HCFC141B (alternativeCFC; High Shower spray can DS–2168, manufactured by SunHayato). Similarly, wash the two sleeves in the adapter or wipethem with a cotton swab or the like.
D. OPTICAL FIBER CABLE B–63523EN/03
562
Cleaning optical cablesFor the optical cables, it is important to clean the connectors at theirends. Any soiling on the optical fiber end surfaces will hamperoptical transmission, resulting in a malfunction. Wipe the opticalfiber end surfaces (that is, the ferrule end surfaces) thoroughly witha soft, clean cloth (like gauze) moistened with ethyl alcohol orHCFC141B, in the same way as described above. The use of cottonswabs may prove convenient. The fiber end surfaces of low–lossoptical cables are lower than the ferrules. To remove any soilingfrom the fiber end surfaces completely, push the cotton swab orgauze into the depressions all the way through while rotating theferrule. If the ferrules and optical connectors are contaminatedwith oily substances, and they may extend over a cleaned fiber endsurface when it is attached to the optical-to-electrical conversionmodule, it is a good idea to wash them before wiping the opticalfiber end surfaces, using the procedure stated above.
B–63523EN/03 E. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
563
E LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
When the ambient temperature is low, the brightness of the LCDdecreases. (The LCD screen is dark particularly immediately after thepower is turned on.) This phenomenon is not a failure but is a propertyspecific to the LCD. When the ambient temperature increases, the LCDscreen becomes brighter. The monochrome LCD has a brightness controlfunction. For the method of adjustment, see Section 1.17.
The touch panel is operated by directly touching the LCD screen. For thisoperation, be sure to use a FANUC–supplied pen (A02B–0236–K111)dedicated to the touch panel. If a sharp–pointed pen is used, for example,to touch the LCD screen, the LCD surface may be flawed or damaged.Moreover, do not touch the LCD screen directly with a finger. Otherwise,the operability of the LCD may deteriorate, and the LCD screen may getdirty.
A protection sheet is attached the face of an LCD with a touch panel toprotect the thin film of the touch panel and LCD. If the protection sheetis damaged, it can be replaced. (The protection sheet is a consumablepart.)
1) Protection sheet A02B–0236–K110
2) Neutral detergent (detergent that can clean oily dirt off = detergentfor kitchen can be used)
3) Soft cloth (such as towel)
1) Before replacement
<1> Turn off the power to the machine.
<2> Peel off the old protection sheet from the surface of the touchpanel.
<3> Wipe off adhesive residue if any on the screen surface withalcohol.
<4> Use the detergent to remove oil or dirt stuck to the surface of thetouch panel.
<5> With a soft, damp cloth, wipe off detergent completely.
If the touch panel surface becomes cloudy, oil is still left onthe surface. Remove oil completely.
If oil or detergent is left on the surface of the touch panel, theprotection sheet cannot adhere to the panel completely andwill sometimes peel off easily.
Brightness of themonochrome LCD
LCD with a touch panel
Protection sheet for thetouch panel
Replacing the protectionsheet Materials used
Replacement procedure
E. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) B–63523EN/03
564
<6> With a dry soft cloth, wipe off moisture completely.
2) Applying the protection sheet
2–1) For A02B–0236–K110
<1> Fold the tab over the front side (the side opposite to thebacking sheet).
Fold
<2> Peel off the backing sheet.
<3> Position the sheet, then attach the upper and lower sidesof the sheet first. Check that the sides of the protectionsheet do not touch the escutcheon.
NGOK
<4> Attach the right and left sides of the protection sheetwhile pushing out air between the touch panel andprotection sheet.
With part of the protection sheet kept stuck to thetouch panel, do not attempt to correct the position ofthe protection sheet by pulling the sheet.
<5> Press the adhesive parts of the four sides, and attach theentire sheet completely.
Check that the four corners and four sides of theprotection sheet do not float.
3) Checks after replacement
<1> Check that there is no wrinkle on the surface of the protectionsheet.
<2> After power–on, check that there is no touch panel portion keptpressed.
<3> Press the touch panel, and check that correct operation takesplace.
B–63523EN/03 E. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
565
2–2) For A02B–0236–K130
Peel off the white film attached on the back (facing the LCD)of the new protection sheet.
Attach the protection sheet so that it is to the lower–left ofthe replacement tab. At this time, align the overhang edgeat bottom of the escutcheon with the corresponding part ofthe protection sheet. In addition, prevent dust from enteringbetween the LCD and protection sheet.
Guide position
Attach the four sides while pushing out air between the touchpanel and protection sheet.Do not pull the protection sheet to correct its position withthe part of the sheet kept stuck to the touch panel.
¯ Press the adhesive parts of the four sides, and attach the sheetcompletely.Check that the four corners and four sides of the protectionsheet do not float.
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
566
F MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
Using the memory card interface located on the left side of the LCD,input/output of data inside the CNC and remote diagnosis using a modemcard can be performed. This appendix describes the memory cardinterface for data input/output. For an explanation of remote diagnosisusing a modem card, see the related document.
SRAM card
JEIDA (4.0 or later) Type 1 and Type 2
PCMCIA (2.0 or later) Type 1 and Type 2
PC Card Standard
SRAM cards operating only on a power supply voltage of 3.3 V cannotbe inserted physically. Such SRAM cards cannot be used.SRAM card can not be used with the is series.The operation of the following FANUC–recommended SRAM cards hasbeen confirmed by FANUC:
256KB SRAM card Fujitsu MB98A90823–20
512KB SRAM card Fujitsu MB98A90923–20
1MB SRAM card Fujitsu MB98A91023–20
2MB SRAM card Fujitsu MB98A91123–20
Flash memory cardWith the CNC display unit with PC functions and is series CNC, no flashmemory card can be used. With the Series 21i, Intel series 2 flash memorycards (or equivalent) can be used. However, flash memory cardsoperating only on a power supply voltage of 3.3 V cannot be insertedphysically. Such flash memory cards cannot be used.Basically, flash memory cards with non–Intel on–chip flash memoriescannot be used. However, such flash memory cards, if formatted orwritten by a personal computer, may be read with the i Series. Theoperation of the following FANUC–recommended flash memory card hasbeen confirmed by FANUC:
4MB flash memory card Intel IMC004FLSA
Overview
Compatible andincompatible cards
B–63523EN/03 F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
567
The capacity of a memory card usually indicates an unformatted capacity.After formatting, the usable capacity decreases slightly. So, a memorycard with a capacity larger than the size of data and programs actuallystored needs to be prepared.
Example:When the size of data to be stored is 512KBA memory card with a capacity of 1MB or more is required.
When a flash memory card is used, the last 128KB of the memory cardis used as a buffer area, so that the usable space decreases additionally by128KB.
The BOOT SYSTEM formats a memory card using method called theFAT file system. The formatting method called the flash file system isalso supported. However, the FAT file system and flash file system arenot compatible with each other, and the read and list functions cannot beused.
Flash memory cards do not allow individual files to be deleted; all the fileson a flash memory card need to be deleted at the same time. Accordingly,the following operations cannot be performed: Deletion of an existing file Renaming of a file Overwriting of a file
CardPro uses the flash file system as standard to format a flash memorycard. When using CardPro to format a flash memory card used with theboot system, use the following command to format the card.
A:CPFORMAT drive–name:/F:FLASHFAT/NOCIS
Ramzo CardPro
Reading of files
Addition of files No file addition functionis available.
Listing of files
Ramzo CardPro
Reading of files
Addition of files
Listing of files
NOTE1 Ramzo is a memory card reader/writer manufactured by
Adtech System Science.2 CardPro is a memory card reader/writer manufactured by
Data IO.
Memory card capacity
Memory card formatting
File operation with aflash memory card
Notes on formatting aflash memory card withCardPro
Using a flash memorycard formatted with theBOOT SYSTEM on othersystems
Using a flash memorycard formatted withother systems on theBOOT SYSTEM
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
568
Writeprotectswitch
Batterycase
Name Function
1 Write protectswitch
Writing to the memory card can be disabled by setting thewrite protect switch.
Writing is enabled. Writing is disabled.
2 Battery case A battery for data backup is housed within an SRAMmemory card. Flash memory cards do not have a battery case.
A memory card has an insertion guide to protect against reverse insertion.Pay attention to the orientation of the memory card. The front of thememory card must face the LCD of the i Series.
The batteries used with FANUC–supplied SRAM memory cards were ofthe CR2325 and BR2325 types.These batteries were difficult to obtain, so the CR2025 battery wasintroduced to replace these batteries in May, 1997.By replacing the battery holder, the user can use SRAM memory cardsthat used the previous batteries (CR2325 and BR2325) with the newbattery (CR2025).
SRAM memory cards1) A87L–0001–0150#
Manufacturer’s model: MB98A933–20
Battery type1) Before the change: CR2325 or BR2325
Indication on the side of the memory card: 933–20 S000
2) After the change: CR2025 or equivalent (common battery intended for use in electronic calculators)
Indication on the side of the memory card: 933–20 9157
Names and functions ofcomponents
Inserting a memory card
Battery
B–63523EN/03 F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
569
Battery holder replacement1) By replacing the battery holder, the user can use SRAM memory cards
that used the previous batteries (CR2325 and BR2325) with the newbattery (CR2025).
2) The battery holder set for CR2025 is available from shops handlingFujitsu electronic devices.
Ordering code: MB98XXX–holder set–09146
Contents of the set: Battery holder (1), battery (CR2025) (1),manual (1)
(1)While pressing down the fixing claw, pull out the battery case.
(2)Replace the battery with a new one. Match the + mark of the battery with the + mark on the battery case.
Battery case
(3)Return the battery case to its original position, then check that thebattery operates normally.
Battery replacement
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
570
1. Overview
Flash ATA card (5 V version) can also be used for data input/output.Because the flash ATA card incorporates a storage device andcontroller, it enables data input/output for a personal computerequipped with a PCMCIA interface without using any special PC cardwriter.
If the boot software is not supported (60M3/Edition 08)
2. Flash ATA card specification
The Flash ATA card must comply with the following standards andmust be of one of the following types. However, it is not guaranteedthat all ATA cards that comply with these standards will operatenormally in the CNC. See Section 5 for those ATA cards whosenormal operation has been confirmed by FANUC.
2–1 Card standards
The ATA card to be used in the CNC must comply with PCMCIA(Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) PCCard standard Release 2.1 and PCMCIA PC Card ATA Release1.02.
2–2 Card Shapes
PCMCIA Type I and Type II
2–3 Card Operation Mode
PC–ATA specification
2–4 Card Operating Voltage
ATA cards that can operate on 5 V (single voltage power source)and 5 V/3.3 V (automatic switching) can be used in the CNC.
ATA CARD
B–63523EN/03 F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
571
3. Flash ATA cards whose normal operation has been confirmed
The following table shows that the ATA Flash cards which areconfirmed to be worked on the Series 16i/18i/21i–MODEL B(note 1)
by FANUC. (for February, 2001)The marks on the table mean bellow.
Available: The card confirmed to be worked by FANUC
NG: FANUC does not recommend to use it because it mightneed much time to write data to the card.
—: No planning to test
FANUC does not guarantee that any other cards except for the listwork well.
NOTEFollowing series are exact devices that are confirmed to beworkd.[For automatic operation from PCMCIA port]They are used on the CNC side of the LCD–mounted/Stand–alone Type Series 16i/18i/21i–MODEL B andStand–alone Type Series 160i/180i/210i/160is/180is/210is–MODEL B.The PSMCIA interface on the CNC display unit for with PCfunctions or CNC display unit for is series CNC on theLCD–mounted Type Series 160is/180is/ 210is–MODEL B isnot included.[For Data server]All Series 16i/18i/21i–MODEL B, Series 160i/180i/210i–MODEL B and Series 160is/180is/210is–MODEL B areincluded.
F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE B–63523EN/03
572
Purpose
Vendor Specification Capacity For DataInput/Output
For automaticoperation
from PCMCIAport.
For Dataserver
Remarks
HB286008A3 8MB Available Available — No production
HB286015A3 15MB Available Available — No production
HB286030A3 30MB Available Available — No production
HB286045A3 45MB Available Available — No production
HB286075A3 75MB — — Available No production
HB286090A3 90MB — — Available No production
HB286150A3 150MB — — Available No production
HB289016A4 16MB Available Available —
HB289032A4 32MB Available Available —HITACHI
HB289048A4 48MB Available Available —
HB289080A4 80MB NG Available Available
HB289096A4 96MB NG Available
HB289160A4 160MB NG Available Available
HB288096A5 96MB NG Available Available
HB288160A5 160MB NG Available Available
HB288320A5 320MB NG Available Available
HB288640A5 640MB NG Available Available
HB2881000A5 1GB NG Available Available
BN–012AB 12MB Available Available —
MATSUSHITA BN–020AB 20MB Available Available —
BN–040AB 40MB Available Available —
SDP3B–4 4MB Available Available —
SDP3B–8 8MB Available Available —
SDP3B–16 16MB Available Available —
SDP3B–20 20MB Available Available —
SDP3B–32 32MB Available Available —
SanDisk SDP3B–40 40MB Available Available —
SDP3B–64 64MB NG Available —
SDP3B–220 220MB NG Available Available
SDP3B–280 280MB NG Available Available
SDP3B–350 350MB NG Available Available
SDP3B–440 440MB NG Available Available
B–63523EN/03 F. MEMORY CARD INTERFACE
573
NOTE1 If a card other than the above is used, the operation is not
guaranteed.2 The cards for 3.3 V cannot be used.3 The cards for 5 and 3.3 V (automatic switching) can be used
only for the i Series.For a CNC other than the i Series, such a card can beinserted into the memory card slot physically, but thememory card or the control unit of the CNC may electricallybe damaged at power–on. Carefully use the cards for 5 and3.3 V.
4. Miscellaneous
The flash ATA card uses a quick format.If your flash ATA card has not been formatted, do so using apersonal computer.
It is impossible to use ATA cards with the memory card accessfunction of a C executor application.
IndexB–63523EN/03
i–1
[Symbols]+24V Input Power Specifications, 60
[Numbers]20–pin Interface Connectors and Cables, 531
2A DO (Output Signal) Connection, 225
2A Output Connector Pin Allocation, 224
2A Output DO Signal Specifications, 226
61–Key MDI Unit, 82
[A]Action Against Noise, 41
Additional Target Model, 532
Address Assignment by Ladder, 331
Allocation, 347
Analog Input Connector Pin Allocation, 227
Analog Input Signal Connections, 228
Analog Input Signal Specifications, 230
Analog Input Specifications, 231
Analog Spindle Interface, 144
Anti–Noise Measure, 127
[B]Backup Unit, 439
Basic Unit 10.4 LCD Type, 179
Basic Unit 12.1 LCD Type, 180
Basic Unit 15.0 LCD Type, 180
Batteries, 66
Batteries for CNC Display Unit with PC Functions(3VDC), 71
Battery for Absolute Pulse Coder Built into the Motor(6VDC), 73
Battery for Memory Backup (3VDC), 66
Battery for Separate Absolute Pulse Coders (6VDC),72
Board–mounted Connectors, 532
[C]Cable Clamp and Shield Processing, 48
Cable Connectors, 533
Cable for Power Supply to Control Unit, 65
Cable Length for Manual Pulse Generator, 234
Cabling Diagram, 55
Centronics Parallel Port, 191
CNC display unit for Windows, 435
CNC Display Unit for Windows (Stand–Alone Type),432
CNC Display Unit with PC Functions, 168
CNC Display Unit with PC Functions Having a TouchPanel and Soft Key, 175
CNC Display Unit with PC Functions Having a TouchPanel but No Soft Key, 174
CNC Display Unit with PC Functions Having NeitherSoft Keys nor a Touch Panel, 171
CNC Display Unit with PC Functions Having SoftKeys but No Touch Panel, 173
Configuration, 1, 214
Configurations of LCD–mounted Type Control Units,2
Configurations of Stand–alone Type Control Units, 10
Connecting I/O Devices, 106
Connecting One to Four Serial Spindles, 136
Connecting the FANUC Servo Unit Series with I/OLink, 329
Connecting the High–speed Skip (HDI), 119
Connecting the Servo Check Adapter, 166
Connecting the Signal Ground (SG) of the ControlUnit, 45
Connecting to the 7.2 LCD Unit by the Display Link(Multiple Connection), 91
Connection, 170, 202, 326, 330
Connection Between the Basic Unit and ExpansionUnit, 161
Connection Cable (Supplied from Us), 547
Connection Diagram, 215, 422
Connection for Series 160is/180is/210is, 430
Connection of Basic and Extension Modules, 235
Connection of Battery for Separate Absolute Detector,159
Connection of Connector Panel I/O Module, 214
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable,204
Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Fiber Cable,205
Connection of Machine Operator’s Panel InterfaceUnit, 282
Connection of MDI Unit (LCD–mounted Type), 75
Connection of One to Two Serial Spindles, 134
Connection of Operator’s Panel Connection Unit, 305
Index B–63523EN/03
i–2
Connection of Operator’s Panel I/O Module (for Ma-trix Input), 247
Connection of Operator’s Panel I/O Module and Pow-er Magnetics Cabinet I/O Module, 265
Connection of Power Supply, 152
Connection of Source Output Type Connection Unit,312
Connection of the Detachable 7.2 LCD/MDI UnitVia the Display Link, 96
Connection of the Distribution I/O Machine Opera-tor’s Panel, 332
Connection to CNC Peripherals, 74, 438
Connection to FANUC I/O Link, 200
Connection to Machine Operator’s Panel, 364
Connection to other Networks, 429
Connection to the Ethernet Interface, 123
Connection to the High–speed Skip (HDI), 120
Connection to the MDI Unit (LCD–mounted Type),76
Connection to the Servo Amplifiers, 147
Connection when Two Channels of FANUC I/O Linksare Used, 209
Connection with an CNC Display Unit with PC Func-tions, 102
Connection with Input/Output Devices, 104
Connection with the 10.4/9.5 LCD Unit, 84
Connection with the 7.2 LCD Unit Via the DisplayLink, 87
Connection with the Display/MDI Units (for theStand–alone Type i Series CNC), 83
Connection with the Standard MDI Unit, 77
Connector (on the Cable Side) Specifications, 300
Connector (on the cable side) specifications., 380
Connector Layout Diagram, 182
Connector Layout for Operator’s Panel ConnectionUnit, 309
Connector Locations, 162
Connector locations of main panel A/A1, 391
Connector locations of main panel B/B1, 392
Connector Mounting Diagram, 335
Connector Names and Connector Layout, 433
Connector Pin Layout for Source Output Type Con-nection Unit, 318
Control Unit, 53
Control Unit Configuration and Component Names, 2
[D]Design and Installation Conditions of the Machine
Tool Magnetic Cabinet, 33
Detachable key top, 402
DI (General–purpose Input Signal) Connection, 250,269
DI (Input Signal) Connection, 219
DI (input signal) connection, 373
DI (Matrix Input Signal) Connection, 252
DI/DO Address, 381
DI/DO Connector Pin Arrangement, 249, 268
DI/DO Connector Pin Assignment, 218
DI/DO Mapping, 383
DI/DO Signal Specifications, 222
Differences between the FS0 Standard Machine Oper-ator’s Panel and Distribution I/O Machine OperatorPanel, 332
Dimensions of Source Output Type Connection Unit,321
Distribution I/O Setting, 244
DNC1 Interface, 418
DNC2 Interface (RS–232–C), 417
DO (Output Signal) Connection, 221, 253, 273
DO (output signal) connection, 376
Dustproof Measures for Cabinets and Pendant Boxes,55
[E]Each Connections, 367
Emergency Stop Signal, 407
Emergency Stop Signal Connection, 337
Emergency stop signal connection, 372
Environmental Conditions for Control Units, 437
Environmental requirement, 397
Environmental Requirements Outside the Cabinet, 29
Ethernet Interface (10BASE–T/100BASE–TX), 442
External Dimensions of Each Unit, 459
External Dimensions of the Units, 436
External View, 257, 275
External View of Operator’s Panel Connection Unit,311
[F]FA Full–Keyboard, 453
FANUC Handy File Connection, 118
B–63523EN/03 Index
i–3
FANUC I/O Link Connection Unit, 322
Floppy Disk Drive (Signal and Power Supply), 184
Function Overview, 282
Fuse Mounting Position, 304
[G]General Connection Diagrams, 171
General–purpose DI Signal Connection, 338
General–purpose DI signal definition, 398
General–purpose DO Signal Connection, 342
General–purpose DO signal definition, 399
Ground, 43
[H]Handling Precautions, 427
Handling precautions, 186
Hard Disk Unit, 197
Hardware Overview, 17
HDD Unit, 181
Heat Output of Each Unit, 36
High–speed Serial Bus (HSSB), 187, 420
High–Speed Serial Bus (HSSB) (HSSB) [For Stand–Alone Type], 455
[I]I/O link connection, 371
I/O Link interface, 326
Input Signal Regulations for Operator’s Panel Con-nection Unit, 306
Input Signal Requirements, 157
Input Signal Rules for the High–speed Skip (HDI),122
Input Signal Specifications for Source Output TypeConnection Unit, 313
Installation, 28, 163, 433
Installation Environment, 424
Installation Environmental Conditions, 176
Installation Method, 198
Installation of the Control Unit, 53
Installation Space, 179
Installing the Stand–alone Type Control Unit, 54
Interface, 287
Interface to the Servo Amplifiers, 148
Interface to the servo amplifiers, 148
Interfacing with servo amplifiers (for high–speedHRV function), 148
[K]Key Layout of Separate–type MDI, 78
Key Symbol Indication on Machine Operators Panel,400
Keyboard Addresses, 344
Keyboard of main panel, 381
[L]LCD–mounted Series 160is/180is/210is, 433
LCD–Mounted Type Series 160is/180is/210is ControlUnit, 431
Linear Scale Interface, 153
Linking the Embedded Ethernet Interface, 123
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), 563
[M]Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit Dimension
Diagram (Including Connector Locations), 301
Machine Operator’s Panel Interface Unit MountingDimension Diagram, 302
Main panel A/B/A1/B1 specification, 398
Main Power Input, 438
Main Power Supply Input, 183
Maintenance Parts, 406
Major Connection Precautions, 299
Manual Pulse Generator Connection, 233, 256, 275,343
Manual pulse generator connection, 376
Maximum Number of Units that can be Connected,331
MDI connection, 370
Meaning of key symbols, 400
Measures Against Surges due to Lightning, 51
Memory Card Interface, 566
Module Installation, 236
Module Specifications, 216
Mouse, 190
Multipoint Connection, 418
Index B–63523EN/03
i–4
[N]Network Installation, 127
Noise Suppressor, 47
Notes on Installing a Separate Detector Interface Unit,164
[O]Operating environment, 186
Operator’s Panel, 355
Optical Fiber Cable, 551
Order specification, 397
Other Signal Addresses, 346
Outline of main panel A, 385
Outline of main panel A1, 394
Outline of main panel B, 387
Outline of sub panel A, 388
Outline of sub panel B, 389
Outline of sub panel B1, 393
Outline of sub panel C, 390
Outline of sub panel C1, 396
Output Signal Regulations for Operator’s Panel Con-nection Unit, 308
Output Signal Specifications for Source Output TypeConnection Unit, 314
Overall Connection Diagram, 247, 265, 334
Override signals, 382
[P]PCI Expansion Board, 198
PCMCIA Card, 196
Peripheral Equipment and Connection, 182
Personal Computer Specification, 423
Pin assignment, 367
PMC Addresses, 298
Point–to–point Connection, 419
Position Coder Interface, 145
Power Connection, 248, 267
Power ON/OFF control signal connection, 372
Power Supply Capacities of CNC–related Units, 30
Power Supply Capacity, 30, 437
Power Supply Connection, 56, 336
Power supply connection, 369
Power Supply for the Control Unit, 58
Power Supply Specification, 177
Power supply specification, 398
Power–off Sequence, 64
Power–on Sequence, 63
Procedure for Installing Personal Computer InterfaceBoards, 425
[R]Recommended Cables, 428
Recommended Connectors, Applicable Housings, andCables, 536
Relay Terminal Connection, 343
Remote Buffer Interface (Including FANUC DNC1and DNC2), 410
Remote Buffer Interface (RS–232–C), 413
Remote Buffer Interface (RS–422), 415
RS–232–C Interface Specification, 109
RS–232–C Serial Port, 107
[S]Separate Detector Interface, 150
Separate Detector Interface Unit Specification, 152
Separating Signal Lines, 41
Serial port, 450
Serial Port 1, 194
Serial Port 2 + USB, 192
Serial Port/USB Port, 450
Serial Spindle, 134
Servo Interface, 146
Shutdown, 178
Signal Assignment, 285
Soft Keys, 195
Specification, 323
Specification of Personal Computer in Case that theInterface Board of ISA Type are Used, 423
Specification of Personal Computer in Case that theInterface Board of PCI Type are Used, 423
Specification of Twisted–Pair Cable, 125
Specifications, 176, 258, 276, 349, 397
Spindle Connection, 129
Stand–alone Type Pulse Coder Interface, 154
State of the LEDs on the Machine Operator’s PanelInterface Unit, 299
Straight and Right–angled Connectors (for Spring andScrew–fixing Connector Housings), 532
B–63523EN/03 Index
i–5
Sub panel A/B/B1/C/C1 specification, 398
System Configuration, 284
[T]Temperature Rise within the Cabinet, 35
Thermal Design of Operator’s Panel, 39
Thermal Design of the Cabinet, 35
Total Connection Diagram, 366
Total Connection Diagrams, 22, 431
Turning On and Off the Power to the Control Unit, 58
Typewriter–style Keyboard, 188
[U]Units that Can be Connected Using FANUC I/O Link,
213
USB port, 452
[V]Vertical–type Connectors, 532
Rev
isio
n R
eco
rd
FAN
UC
Ser
ies
16i/1
60i/1
60is
/18i
/180
i/180
is/2
1i/2
10i/2
10is
–MO
DE
L B
CO
NN
EC
TIO
N M
AN
UA
L (
HA
RD
WA
RE
) (B
–635
23E
N)
03O
ct.,
2001
A
dditi
on o
f Ser
ies
160i
s/18
0is/
210i
s (C
hapt
er 1
4)
A
dditi
on o
f Ser
ies
18i/1
80i/1
80is
–MB
5
C
orre
ctio
n of
err
ors
02Ju
n., 2
001
A
dditi
on o
f Sta
nd–a
lone
type
i se
ries
CN
C
C
orre
ctio
n of
err
ors
01M
ar.,
2001
Edi
tion
Dat
eC
onte
nts
Edi
tion
Dat
eC
onte
nts
FANUC LTD
Printed in Japan